diff options
Diffstat (limited to '34578.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 34578.txt | 12670 |
1 files changed, 12670 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/34578.txt b/34578.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d67306e --- /dev/null +++ b/34578.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12670 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Life or Legend of Gaudama, by +Right Reverend Paul Ambroise Bigandet + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Life or Legend of Gaudama + The Buddha of the Burmese (Volume I) + +Author: Right Reverend Paul Ambroise Bigandet + +Release Date: December 5, 2010 [EBook #34578] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE LIFE OR LEGEND OF GAUDAMA *** + + + + +Produced by Louise Davies, The Universal Digital Library +(http://www.ulib.org) and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + + + + + + + + + TRUeBNER'S + ORIENTAL SERIES. + + + THE LIFE OR LEGEND + OF + + GAUDAMA + _THE BUDDHA OF THE BURMES_ + + With Annotations. + + THE WAYS TO NEIBBAN, AND NOTICE ON THE + PHONGYIES OR BURMESE MONKS. + + + BY THE + RIGHT REVEREND P. BIGANDET, + BISHOP OF RAMATHA, + VICAR APOSTOLIC OF AVA AND PEGU + + + _IN TWO VOLUMES._ + + + VOL. I. + + Fourth Edition. + + + LONDON: + KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUeBNER & CO. LTD. + DRYDEN HOUSE, GERRARD STREET, W. + 1911. + + + + _The rights of translation and of reproduction are reserved._ + + + Printed by BALLANTYNE, HANSON & CO. + At the Ballantyne Press, Edinburgh + + + + +ADVERTISEMENT TO THIRD EDITION. + + +The origin of the present work dates back to the years 1852, 1853, 1854, +and 1855, when portions of it appeared in the "Journal of the Indian +Archipelago and Eastern Asia," edited by J. R. Logan of Penang (vols. +vi., vii., viii., and ix.). The first complete edition was printed at +Rangoon in Burmah in 1858, and a second, much enlarged, at the same +place in 1866. + +Very few copies of either of these editions reached Europe, and both are +entirely out of print. The present third edition--a faithful reprint of +the second--issued, with Bishop Bigandet's sanction, for the benefit of +European and American scholars and readers, will, therefore, it is +hoped, be gladly received. + +Buddhism and Gautama, the faith and its founder, whose followers are +between four and five hundred millions of the human race, were +comparatively unknown in Europe but a generation ago, and yet this great +faith had continued for four and twenty centuries to spread over the +vast lands of the East, taking deep and enduring root in all, from +Bhotan, Nepaul, and Ceylon, over Further India to China Proper, +Mongolia, Mantchooria, Tibet, and Japan. + +Buddhism, as it is found in Burmah, has a particular claim to the +attention of a diligent and attentive observer. We there have that +religious creed or system as pure from adulteration as it can be after a +lapse of so many centuries. Philosophy never flourished in Burmah, and, +therefore, never modified the religious systems of the country. Hinduism +never exercised any influence on the banks of the Irrawaddy. Chinese and +Burmese have often met on battlefields, but the influence of the Middle +Kingdom has never established itself in Burmah. In other words, Chinese +Buddhism has never been able to penetrate into the customs and manners +of the people, and has not attempted to communicate its own religion to +its southern neighbours. It would seem that the true form of Buddhism is +to be found in Burmah, and that a knowledge of that system can only be +arrived at by the study of the religious books of Burmah, and by +attentively observing the religious practices and ceremonies of the +people. This is what Bishop Bigandet has endeavoured to do throughout +his work. + +Mr. Alabaster, the author of a very popular work on Siamese Buddhism, +testifies to the great value of the Bishop's work, which, he remarks, is +in one sense complete, for whereas the Siamese manuscript concludes with +the attainment of omniscience, the Bishop had materials which enabled +him to continue the story to the death of Nirwana (Neibban in the +Burmese Pali form). He might have added that the work modestly entitled +"Life of Gaudama" is a complete exposition of the great system of +Eastern Asia. The metaphysical part, which is the very essence of the +system, has received a due consideration, and the body of religious has +been fully described. Moreover, the foot-notes help the ordinary reader +in understanding clearly the text of the Legend. + +Professor Albrecht Weber speaks also of the Bishop's work in terms of +high commendation (see "Literarisches Centralblatt," 1870, No. 29, +reprinted in "Indische Streifen," vol. iii.), whilst a still further +testimony is accorded to its importance in the recent appearance of a +French translation by Lieutenant Victor Gauvain. + + LONDON, _December_ 1879. + + + + +PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. + + +Whether Buddhism be viewed in its extent and diffusion, or in the +complex nature of its doctrines, it claims the serious attention of +every inquiring mind. + +In our own days it is, under different forms, the creed prevailing in +Nepaul, Thibet, Mongolia, Corea, China, the Japanese Archipelago, Anam, +Cambodia, Siam, the Shan States, Burmah, Arracan, and Ceylon. Its sway +extends over nearly one-fourth of the human race. + +Though based upon capital and revolting errors, Buddhism teaches a +surprising number of the finest precepts and purest moral truths. From +the abyss of its almost unfathomable darkness it sends forth rays of the +brightest hue. + +To the reflecting mind, the study of this religious system becomes the +study of the history of one of the greatest religious enterprises that +has ever been undertaken to elevate our nature above its low level, by +uprooting the passions of the heart and dispelling the errors of the +mind. A serious observer sees at a glance the dark and humiliating +picture of the sad and barren results of the greatest and mightiest +efforts of human wisdom, in its endeavours to find out the real cause of +all human miseries, and to provide the remedies to cure the moral +distempers to which our nature is subject. The fact of man's wretched +and fallen condition was clearly perceived by the Buddhist philosopher, +but he failed in his attempts to help man out of the difficulties which +encompass him in all directions, and to bring him back to the path of +truth and salvation. The efforts begun on the banks of the Ganges at an +early period, and carried on with the greatest ardour and perseverance, +have proved as abortive as those made at a later period throughout +Greece and Italy by the greatest and brightest geniuses of antiquity. +What a grand and irresistible demonstration both of the absolute +inability of man to rescue from evil and attain good, and of the +indispensable necessity of divine interference to help him in +accomplishing that twofold achievement! + +It may be said in favour of Buddhism, that no philosophico-religious +system has ever upheld, to an equal degree, the notions of a saviour and +deliverer, and of the necessity of his mission for procuring the +salvation, in a Buddhist sense, of man. The _role_ of Buddha, from +beginning to end, is that of a deliverer, who preaches a law designed to +secure to man deliverance from all the miseries under which he is +labouring. But by an inexplicable and deplorable eccentricity, the +pretended saviour, after having taught man the way to deliver himself +from the tyranny of his passions, only leads him, after all, into the +bottomless gulf of total annihilation. + +Buddhism, such as we find it in Burmah, appears to have retained, to a +great extent, its original character and primitive genuineness, +exhibiting, as it does, the most correct forms and features of that +Protean creed. At the epoch the Burmans left the northern valleys and +settled in the country they now inhabit, they were a half-civilised +Mongolian tribe, with no kind of worship, except a sort of geniolatry, +much similar to what we see now existing among the various tribes +bordering on Burmah. They were in the same condition when the first +Buddhist missionaries arrived among them. Deposited in this almost +virginal soil, the seed of Buddhism grew up freely without encountering +any obstacle to check its growth. + +Philosophy, which, in its too often erratic rambles in search of truth, +changes, corrects, improves, destroys, and, in numberless ways, modifies +all that it meets, never flourished in these parts; and, therefore, did +not work on the religious institutions, which accordingly have remained +up to this day nearly the same as they were when first imported into +Burmah. The free discussion of religious and moral subjects, which +constituted the very life of the Indian schools, and begat so many +various, incoherent, and contradictory opinions on the most essential +points of religion and philosophy, is the sign of an advanced state of +civilisation, such as does not appear to have ever existed on the banks +of the Irrawaddy. + +Owing to its geographical position, and perhaps, also, to political +causes, Burmah has ever remained out of the reach of Hindu influence, +which in Nepaul has coloured Buddhism with Hindu myths, and habited it +in gross forms of idolatry. In China, where there already subsisted at +the time of the arrival of the preachers of the new doctrine the worship +of heroes and ancestors, Buddhism, like an immense parasitic plant, +extended itself all over the institutions which it covered rather than +destroyed, allowing the ancient forms to subsist under the disguise it +afforded them. But such was not the state of Burmah when visited by the +first heralds of Buddhism. + +The epoch of the introduction of Buddhism in Burmah has hitherto been a +matter of conjecture. According to Burmese annals, Boudha-gautha, at the +end of the fourth century of our era, brought from Ceylon a copy of the +scriptures, and did for Burmah what Fa-Hian, the Chinese pilgrim, +accomplished a few years afterwards in India and Ceylon for the benefit +of his country. But Burmans maintain that they were followers of Buddha +long before that epoch. If an inference may be drawn from analogy, it +is probable that they are right in their assertion. China is fully as +far from the ancient seat of Buddhism as Burmah. Yet it appears from the +Chinese annals that the doctrines of the Indian philosopher were already +propagated in some parts of that empire in the middle of the first +century of our era, and probably at an earlier date. There is no +improbability in concluding that, at least at the same time, Buddhist +missionaries had penetrated into this country to propagate their tenets. +According to Buddhistic annals, it was after the holding of the 3d +Council, 236 after Gaudama's death, 207 B.C., that two missionaries +carried religion to Thaton, the ruins of which are still to be seen +between the mouths of the Tsitang and Salween rivers, and established +Buddhism in Pegu. Be that as it may, we know, from the magnificent +Buddhist monuments of Pagan, that that religion had reached, in the +eleventh and twelfth centuries, a degree of splendour that has never +since been equalled. + +The Buddhist scriptures are divided into three great parts, the Thoots +or instructions, the Wini or discipline, and the Abidama or metaphysics. +Agreeably to this division, the matter of the following pages is +arranged under three heads. The Life of Buddha, with some portions of +his preaching, will convey notions of his principal teachings and +doctrines. It is accompanied with copious annotations intended to +explain the text, and to convey detailed notices of the system of +Buddhism in general, and particularly as it is found existing in Burmah. +We have added a few small dzats, or accounts of some of the former +existences of Gaudama, and the summary of two large ones. + +In the Notice on the Phongyies will be found the chief points of +discipline fully explained and developed. We have endeavoured to render +as complete as possible the account of the Buddhist Religious, or +Phongyies. It is an exposition and practical illustration of the +highest results that can be obtained under the influence of the +doctrines of the Indian philosopher. + +In the Ways to Neibban an attempt has been made to set forth and unfold +the chief points of metaphysics upon which hinges the whole religious +system. We confess that the summary of metaphysics is rather concise. We +were reluctant to proceed too far in this subject, which, to the +generality of readers, is an uninviting one. + +A suggestion from Captain H. Hopkinson, Commissioner of the Martaban and +Tenasserim Provinces, has induced us to add a few remarks on the names +and situations of the principal towns and countries mentioned in the +Legend, with the view of identifying them with modern sites and places. + +It is hardly necessary to state here that the writer, when he undertook +this work, had no other object in view than that of merely expounding +the religious system of Buddhism as it is, explaining its doctrines and +practices as correctly as it was in his power to do, regardless of their +merits and demerits. His information has been derived from the perusal +of the religious books of the Burmans, and from frequent conversations +on religion, during several years, with the best informed among the +laity and the religious whom he has had the chance of meeting. + +The surest way perhaps of coming to at least an exact and accurate +knowledge of the history and doctrines of Buddhism would be to give a +translation of the Legends of Buddha, such as they are to be met with in +all countries where Buddhism has established its sway, and to accompany +these translations with an exposition of the various doctrinal points, +such as they are held, understood, and believed by these various +nations. This has already been done by eminent Orientalists, on +Thibetan, Sanscrit, Cingalese, and Chinese originals. A similar work, +executed by competent persons among the Shans, Siamese, Cambodians, and +Cochin Chinese, would considerably help the savants in Europe, who have +assumed the difficult task of expounding the Buddhist system in its +complex and multifarious forms, to give a full, general, and +comprehensive view of that great religious creed with all its +variations. + +The best way to undermine the foundations of a false creed and +successfully attack it, is to lay it open to the eyes of all and exhibit +it as it really is. Error never retains its hold over the mind except +under the mask of truth which it contrives to assume. When deprived of +the mask that has covered its emptiness and unreality, it vanishes away +as a phantom and an illusion. + +We are happy in having an opportunity of returning publicly our thanks +to the worthy Commissioner of Pegu, Major A. P. Phayre, for his kind +exertions in furthering the publication of this work. Not only is he an +eminent Oriental scholar, and profoundly versed in all that has +reference to Buddhism, but his great delight is to encourage every +effort that tends to unfold and explain a creed which, despite all that +has been written about it in the several countries where it flourishes, +still contains many mysteries in the parts relating to its history and +doctrines that require clearing up. + +We have, with a deeply-felt distrust of our poor abilities, taken the +best portion out of our limited stock of information concerning the +Buddhist system as it exists in these parts, and, with a willing heart, +presented it to the public. We hope that our example may induce others, +whose stores of knowledge on this subject are fuller and richer than +ours, to act in a similar spirit in aid of the prosecution of a great +object, viz., the acquisition of a correct knowledge of the religion of +nearly 300,000,000 of our fellow-men. + + RANGOON, _October_ 1858. + + + + +PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. + + +The First Edition of the Life of Gaudama being out of print for the last +five or six years, we have, at the request of several highly esteemed +persons, come to the determination of publishing a second and +much-enlarged edition of the same Work. In carrying on the plan of +improvement which we had in contemplation, we have been favoured by a +happy circumstance. We have, after much labour, found and procured, in +the Burmese capital, a very rare palm-leaf manuscript, the contents of +which have supplied us with copies and interesting details respecting +the sayings and doings of Gaudama. + +The book is known under the Pali name of Tatha-gatha-oudana, the meaning +of which is Joyful Utterance, or Praises, of the Tatha-gatha. The latter +expression is one of the many titles given to Gaudama: it means, he who +has come like all his predecessors. In the opinion of Buddhists, the +Buddhas who appear throughout the duration of a world, or in the various +series of succeeding worlds, have all the same mission to accomplish; +they are gifted with the same perfect science, and are filled with +similar feelings of compassion for and benevolence towards all beings. +Hence the denomination which is fitly given to Gaudama, the last of +them. + +In the course of the Work will be found some particulars concerning the +author of the manuscript referred to, and the place where it was +composed. We have only to state here that we have gathered therefrom +much information on the condition of Gaudama, previous to his last +existence, on the origin of the Kapilawot country, where he was born, +and on the kings he has descended from. We have also met with many new +details on the great intellectual working of Gaudama's mind, during the +forty-nine days he spent in meditation around the Bodi-tree, +particularly on the important theory of the twelve Nidanas, or causes +and effects, which, with the four sublime truths, constitutes the very +essence of the system. We have also found many important particulars +concerning the whereabouts of Gaudama during the first twenty years of +his public life, and the conversions he effected whilst engaged in the +work of an itinerant preacher. Here, too, we have gleaned and selected a +few of the instructions he delivered to the people that crowded about +him. The story of Dewadat is narrated at great length. We have carefully +written down what is said of the three Assemblies, or Councils, held at +Radzagio, Wethalie, and Pataliputra, and what is mentioned of the kings +who reigned in Magatha, from Adzatathat to Dammathoka. We have mentioned +the great fact of the spread of Buddhism beyond the boundaries of +Magatha after the holding of the third Council, taking care to relate +what we have found stated concerning its diffusion in Pegu and Burmah. + +Numerous notes have been added to those of the First Edition, for the +purpose of elucidating and explaining, as far as we are able, the +principles of Buddhism and whatever is connected with that religious +system. + + RANGOON, _May_ 1866. + + + + +CONTENTS. + +LEGEND OR LIFE OF THE BURMESE BUDDHA, CALLED GAUDAMA. + + + PAGE +CHAPTER I. + + Invocation of the Burmese translator -- Slow but steady progress + of Phralaong towards the Buddhaship -- Promise made to him by + the Buddha Deipinkara -- Origin and beginning of the Kapilawot + country and of its rulers -- Birth of Thoodaudana -- His + marriage with the Princess Maia -- Rumour of the coming birth of + a Buddha -- Phralaong in the seats of Nats -- Dream of Maia -- + Conception of Phralaong -- Wonders attending that event. 1 + +CHAPTER II. + + Birth of Buddha in a forest -- Rejoicings on that occasion -- + Kaladewila -- Prediction of the Pounhas -- Vain efforts of + Thoodaudana to thwart the effect of the Prediction. 34 + +CHAPTER III. + + A name is given to the child -- Prediction of the Pounhas + respecting the child -- Death of Maia -- Miraculous occurrence + at the child's cradle -- Adolescence of the Phralaong -- He sees + the four signs -- Return from the garden to the royal city. 45 + +CHAPTER IV. + + Phralaong leaves his palace, the royal city, and retires into + solitude amidst the plaudits of the Nats -- He cuts his fine + hair with a stroke of his sword, and puts on the habit of Rahan + -- He begs his food at Radzagio -- His interview with the ruler + of that place -- His studies under two Rathees -- His fast and + penances in the solitude of Oorouwela during six years. 60 + +CHAPTER V. + + Thoodzata's offering to Phralaong -- His five dreams -- He + shapes his course towards the Gniaong tree -- Miraculous + appearance of a throne -- Victory of Phralaong over Manh Nat -- + His meditations during forty-nine days near the Bodi tree -- He + at last obtains the perfect science -- He overcomes the + temptations directed against him by the daughters of Manh -- + Buddha preaches the law to a Pounha and to two merchants. 77 + +CHAPTER VI. + + Buddha hesitates to undertake the task of preaching the law -- + The great Brahma entreats him to preach the law to all beings -- + His assent to the entreaties -- Journey towards Migadawon -- He + meets Ouppaka -- His first preachings -- Conversion of a young + nobleman named Ratha, followed by that of his father and other + relatives -- Conversion of several other noblemen -- + Instructions to the Rahans -- Conversion of the three Kathabas. 111 + +CHAPTER VII. + + Buddha's sermon on the mountain -- Interview of Buddha and King + Pimpathara in the vicinity of the city of Radzagio -- Answer of + Kathaba to Buddha's interrogation -- Instructions delivered to + the king and his attendants -- Solemn entry of Buddha into + Radzagio -- Donation of the Weloowon monastery to Buddha -- + Conversion of Thariputra and Maukalan -- The Rahans are keenly + taunted by the people of Radzagio. 146 + +CHAPTER VIII. + + Thoodaudana, desirous to see his son, sends messengers to him -- + They become converts -- Kaludari, a last messenger, prevails on + Buddha to go to Kapilawot -- His reception -- Conversion of the + king and of Yathaudara -- Nanda and Raoula put on the religious + habit -- Conversion of Ananda and of several of his relatives -- + Temptation of Ananda -- Conversion of Eggidatta -- Story of + Tsampooka. 165 + +CHAPTER IX. + + A rich man of Thawattie, named Anatapein, becomes a convert -- + Story of Dzewaka -- He cures Buddha of a painful distemper -- + The people of Wethalie send a deputation to Buddha -- Digression + on the manner Buddha daily spent his time -- Settling of a + quarrel between the inhabitants of Kaulia and those of Kapilawot + -- New converts are strengthened in their faith -- Thoodaudana's + death in the arms of his son -- Queen Patzapati and many noble + ladies are elevated to the rank of Rahaness -- Conversion of + Kema, the first queen of King Pimpathara -- Heretics near + Thawattie are confounded by the display of miraculous powers -- + Buddha goes to the seat of Tawadeintha, to preach the law to his + mother. 194 + +CHAPTER X. + + Buddha's proceedings in the seat of Tawadeintha -- His + triumphant return to the seat of men, in the city of Thin-ka-tha + -- He is calumniated by the heretics of Thawattie -- Eighth + season spent in the forest of Tesakala -- Subsequent preachings + -- He meets with a bad reception in the Kothambi country -- + Dissension among the disciples -- Reconciliation -- Travels of + Buddha -- Preaching to a Pounha who tilled a field. 223 + +CHAPTER XI. + + Voyage to Tsalia -- Instructions to Meggia -- Raoula is made + a professed religious -- Manahan's questions to Buddha -- + Misbehaviour of Thouppabuda -- Questions proposed by Nats in + the Dzetawon monastery -- Conversion of a Biloo -- Episode of + Thirima at Radzagio -- Attention paid to a poor pounha and to a + weaver's daughter, on account of their faith -- In the twentieth + season, appointment of Ananda to the stewardship -- Conversion + of a famous robber. 241 + +CHAPTER XII. + + Buddha is slandered in Thawattie -- Questions put to him by + a pounha -- Story of Anatapein's daughter -- Conversion of a + pounha whose navel emitted rays of light -- Blank in a great + part of Buddha's life -- Story of Dewadat -- His jealousy + towards Buddha -- His friendship with Prince Adzatathat -- His + ambition -- His attempt to kill Buddha -- His miserable end. 256 + + + + +LEGEND OF THE BURMESE BUDDHA + +CALLED + +GAUDAMA. + + + + +CHAPTER I. + + _Invocation of the Burmese translator -- Slow but steady progress + of Phralaong towards the Buddhaship -- Promise made to him by the + Buddha Deipinkara -- Origin and beginning of the Kapilawot country + and of its Rulers -- Birth of Thoodaudana -- His marriage with the + Princess Maia -- Rumour of the coming birth of a Buddha -- Phralaong + in the seat of Nats -- Dream of Maia -- Conception of + Phralaong -- Wonders attending that event._ + + +I adore[1] Buddha who has gloriously emerged from the bottomless +whirlpool of endless existences, who has extinguished the burning fire +of anger and other passions, who has opened and illuminated the +fathomless abyss of dark ignorance, and who is the greatest and most +excellent of all beings. + +I adore the Law which the most excellent Buddha has published, which is +infinitely high and incomparably profound, exceedingly acceptable, and +most earnestly wished-for by Nats and men, capable to wipe off the +stains of concupiscence, and is immutable. + +I adore the Assembly of the Perfect, of the pure and illustrious Ariahs +in their eight sublime states, who have overcome all the passions that +torment other mortals, by eradicating the very root of concupiscence, +and who are famous above all other beings. + +I undertake to translate from the Pali[2] text the history of our most +excellent Phra, from the period he left Toocita,[3] the fourth abode of +Nats, to the time he entered into the state of Neibban. + +Previous, however, to commencing the work, I will relate succinctly what +is found in our books respecting the great Being who, by a slow but sure +process, was qualifying himself for his great and high destiny. It is +stated that all the following particulars were narrated by Gaudama +himself to the great disciple Thariputra. + +For seven thingies of worlds, he who was to become a Buddha felt, during +that immense number of revolutions of nature, a thought for the +Buddhaship awakening in his soul. This thought was succeeded by a wish, +a desire, and a longing for that extraordinary calling. He began to +understand that the practice of the virtues of the highest order was +requisite to enable him to attain the glorious object of his ardent +wishes, and no less than 125,000 Buddhas appeared during that space of +time. + +When the above period had at last come to an end, the inward workings of +his soul prompted him to ask openly for the Buddhaship. The period of +asking lasted nine thingies of worlds. It was brightened and illustrated +by the successive manifestation of 987,000 Buddhas. In the beginning of +this latter period, the future Gaudama was a prince of the name of +Laukatara, ruler of the Nanda country. At that time there appeared in +the country of Kapilawot a Buddha called Thakiamuni Paurana Gaudama. As +he happened to travel through the Nanda country, with the twofold object +of preaching the law and begging for his food, the ruler Laukatara made +great offerings to him. Meanwhile, with a marked earnestness, he +solicited at the feet of Thakiamuni the favour of becoming, at some +future time, a Buddha like himself. He expressed the wish to be born in +the same country, from the same father and mother, to have for his wife +the very same queen, to ride the same horse, to be attended by the same +companions and the same two great disciples on the right and on the +left. To this request Thakiamuni replied in the affirmative, but he +added that an immense length of time had still to elapse ere the objects +of his petition could be fully granted. A similar application was +repeatedly made to all the other succeeding Buddhas, and a like promise +was held out to him. + +The third period of four thingies of worlds was remarkable for the +complete absence of all that could enlighten or illustrate the various +states of existence. A complete moral and intellectual darkness was +spread over all beings, and kept them wrapped up in utter darkness. No +Buddhas, no Pitzekabuddhas appeared to illuminate by their doctrine and +science the minds of men. No Tsekiawade, or king of the world, made his +appearance to infuse life and energy in the midst of the universal +slumbering. + +But the hundred thousand revolutions of nature that followed were more +fortunate. There flourished no less than twenty-seven Buddhas, from +Tahingara, the first in the series, to Kathaba, the last one immediately +preceding Gaudama. + +During the period when the Buddha named Deipinkara was the teacher of +all beings, our future Gaudama was born in the country of Amarawatti, +from illustrious and rich parents belonging to the caste of Pounhas. + +While still a youth, he lost both his parents and inherited their +property. + +In the midst of pleasure and plenty he one day made this +reflection:--The riches that I now possess were my parents' property, +but they have not been able to save them from the miseries attending +death. They will not, alas! afford to me a better and more secure fate. +When I go into the grave, they will not come along with me. This bodily +frame I am clad in is not worthy to be pitied. Why should I bestow signs +of compassion upon it? Filled with impurities, burdened by rottenness, +it has all the elements of destruction in the compounded parts of its +existence. Towards Neibban I will turn my regards; upon it my eyes shall +be riveted. There is the tank in which all the impurities of passion may +be washed away. Now I will forsake everything, and go forthwith in +search of a teacher that will point out to me the way that leads to the +state Neibban. + +Full of these thoughts, the young man gave away to the needy all that he +possessed, reserving nothing to himself. Freed from the trammels of +riches, he withdrew into a lonely place, where the Nats had prepared +beforehand all that was necessary to minister to his wants. He embraced +the profession or mode of life of a Rahan, or perfect. Attired in the +dress of his new profession, he lived for some time on this spot under +the name of Thoomeda. Displeased, however, with the too easy mode of +life he was leading, he left that spot, and contented himself with +dwelling under the shade of trees. He, however, went forth from time to +time in quest of his food. + +A few years previous to the retirement of Thoomeda into solitude, he who +was to be the Buddha Deipinkara migrated from one of the Nats' seats, +and was incarnated in the womb of the Princess Thoomeda, wife of +Thoodewa, king of the Ramawatti country. Subsequently he was married to +the Princess Padouma, who bore unto him a son, named Oothabakanda. On +the same year in which the child was born, the king left his palace on +an elephant's back, withdrew into some lonely place, practised during +ten months all sorts of self-inflicted penances, and, under the shade of +the tree Gniaong Kiat, became a Buddha. On that occasion the earth +quivered with great violence, but the hermit Thoomeda, being in ecstasy +at that moment, knew nothing of the extraordinary occurrence. + +On a certain day, Deipinkara was travelling through the country for the +twofold purpose of preaching the law and collecting his food. Arrived +near a place where the road was very bad, he stopped for a while until +the road should be made passable. The people hastened from all parts to +come and prepare the road for Deipinkara and his followers. Thoomeda, +gifted with the privilege of travelling through the air, happened to +pass over the spot where crowds of people were busily engaged in +preparing and levelling a road. The hermit alighted on that spot, and +inquired of the people what was the reason of their busy exertions. They +told him that the most excellent Deipinkara was expected with a large +retinue of disciples, and that they strained every nerve to have the +road ready for them. Thoomeda begged to be permitted to bear a part in +the good work, and asked that a certain extent of the road be assigned +to him as his task. His request was granted, and he forthwith set to +work with the greatest diligence. It was all but finished when Buddha +Deipinkara, followed by forty thousand disciples, made his appearance. +Thoomeda, actuated by an ardent desire of testifying his respect to the +holy personage, without a moment's hesitation flung himself into the +hollow that was as yet not filled, and lying on his belly, with his back +upwards, bridged the place, and entreated the Buddha and his followers +to cross the hollow by trampling over his body. Great and abundant shall +be the merits that I, said he within himself, shall gain by this good +work. No doubt I will receive from the mouth of Deipinkara the assurance +that I shall, hereafter, obtain the Buddhaship. The Buddha, standing +over him, admired the humble and fervent devotedness of Thoomeda. With +one glance he perceived all that was going on in the hermit's mind, and +with a loud voice, that could be heard by all his disciples, he assured +him that four thingies and one hundred thousand worlds hence he would +become a Buddha, the fourth that would appear during the world, called +Badda. He went on to describe minutely the principal events that were to +illustrate his future career. No sooner was this revelation made to him +than Thoomeda hastened back to his forest. Sitting at the foot of a +tree, he encouraged himself by fine comparisons to the practice of +those virtues that were best suited to weaken in him the influence of +the passions. + +In the different existences that followed, Thoomeda, at all the periods +of the appearance of some Buddhas, received a confirmation of the +promise he had had from the lips of Deipinkara. + +This present world we live in has been favoured above all others. +Already three Buddhas have appeared, viz., Kaukkasan, Gaunagong, and +Kathaba. These all belonged to the caste of Pounhas, and he who was to +be hereafter our Gaudama, during the many existences he passed through, +at the time of the manifestations of those three Buddhas, was always +born of the same caste. Kathaba is said to have lived and preached +during the ninth andrakap. It was he who, for the last time, assured the +future Gaudama that he would obtain the Buddhaship during the tenth +andrakap. + +We will only mention his last existence in the seat of man, previous to +the one in which he was to obtain the great prize he had laboured for +with so much earnestness during innumerable existences. He became prince +under the name of Wethandra, and practised to an eminent, nay heroic, +degree the virtues of liberality and charity. To such an extent did he +obey the dictates of his liberal heart, that, after having given away +all the royal treasures, his white elephant, &c., he did not shrink from +parting with his own wife, the Princess Madi, and his two children, +Dzali and Gahna. He then died and migrated to the Toocita seat, and +enjoyed the blissfulness and felicity of Nats, under the name of +Saytakaytoo, during fifty-seven koudes of years. + +The origin and beginning of the Kapilawot country, as well as of its +rulers, are to be alluded to as briefly as possible. In the country of +the middle, Mitzimadesa, the kings that ruled from the time of +Mahathamadat to that of Ookakaritz, king of Benares, were 252,556 in +number. The last-named monarch was married to five wives, and had +children by them all. The first queen happening to die, the king became +passionately enamoured of a young woman, whom he married. She soon +presented him with a son, whom the king, pressed by his young wife's +solicitations, declared heir-apparent, to the prejudice of his elder +sons. As might have been expected, the four elder sons loudly complained +of the preference given to their younger brother. To put an end to these +domestic disputes, the king called his four sons and their five sisters, +gave them a large retinue, and bade them go in a northerly direction, in +search of a spot favourable for building a new city. They followed their +father's advice. After long wandering through the forests, they came to +a place where lived the Rathee Kapila, who, becoming acquainted with the +object of their errand, desired them to stay with him and found a city. +He also wished that on the very spot where his hut stood the king's +palace should be erected. He predicted that this city would become +great, powerful, and illustrious; that it would be a city of peace, +since the animals in the forests lived peaceably, without ever +attempting to inflict harm on each other. The proposal was cheerfully +accepted. All the people set to work with great earnestness. When the +work was completed, they offered the new city to Kapila, who was made +their teacher. Hence the name of Kapilawottoo, or Kapilawot. + +The four princes, finding that among their followers there were no +daughters of the royal race whom they could marry, resolved, in order to +keep pure the blood-royal, to marry their four youngest sisters. The +eldest one was raised to the dignity of queen-mother. Ookamukka, the +eldest of the brothers, was the first king of Kapilawot. Whilst these +things were taking place, the king of Benares, having been attacked with +leprosy, had left his throne and retired to a forest north of his +capital. There he found his cure under the shade of the kalau tree. At +the same time the eldest sister, named Peya, who had become +queen-mother, was seized with the same distemper, and went into the +same forest. She met with the king, whom she knew not. By his advice she +sat under the kalau tree, and the beneficent smell of the leaves soon +worked a perfect cure. They were subsequently married, and had a +numerous progeny. They settled on this spot, and built the city of +Kaulya. The small river Rohani flowed between Kaulya and Kapilawot.[A] + + [A] When laying before the reader a short and concise account + of the being who was to become the Buddha called Gaudama, the + writer deems it necessary to make a general observation, which, + he hopes, will greatly help the reader to understand correctly + several passages of the following pages. Gaudama was a Hindu, + brought up by Hindu masters, and initiated in all the knowledge + possessed by the society he lived in. He accepted the fabulous + genealogies of kings such as they were found in the writings + of his days. The same may be said of the erroneous notions + respecting our globe, the size and motions of the sun and the + moon and other heavenly bodies, the explanations of many natural + phenomena, the description of hell, of the seats of reward, &c. + Teacher as he was of moral precepts, based upon metaphysical + principles, Gaudama concerned himself very little about these + things, which, in his eyes, were not worth the consideration + of a sage. But he, or more probably his disciples, availed + themselves of these notions for resting upon them some portions + of their system, and giving them such developments as best + suited their views. These notions, though wedded to the + religious system originated by Gaudama, do not, strictly + speaking, belong to it. They existed before his appearance in + the schools of philosophy; they formed a part of the stock of + knowledge possessed by the society in which he was reared. To + account properly for these particulars and many others belonging + to the disciplinary regulations, recourse must be had to the + study of the ancient religion of the Hindus, Brahminism. + + In the account of the foundation of the Kapilawot city, we find + that the practice of leaving the eldest sister unmarried, and + of the princes marrying their own sisters, is up to this day + observed by the royal family of Burmah. The eldest daughter of + the reigning monarch is to remain unmarried during her parents' + life, and the first queen is often, if not always, the sister or + half-sister of the king. The same unnatural practice prevailed + in the royal family of the ancient Persians. + +From Ookamukka, the first king of Kapilawot, to Prince Wethandra, there +are but seven successive kings. From Dzali, the son of Wethandra, to +Dzeyathana, the great-grandfather of Gaudama, there were 82,002 kings. +Let it be borne in mind, that, during that period of time, our +Phralaong, or future of Gaudama, was in one of the Nats' seats. The +princes of Kapilawot were wont to go and sport on the water of a lake +somewhat distant from the city. They at first erected a temporary place +of residence in the vicinity of that sheet of water, and finally built a +city which received the name of Dewaha. It had likewise its kings of the +same Thagiwi race. Dzeyathana, the king of Kapilawot, had a son named +Thiahanoo, and a daughter named Yathaudara. Aukaka, king of Dewaha, his +contemporary, had also a son and a daughter, Eetzana and Kitzana. +Thiahanoo was married to Kitzana, who bore unto him five sons, +Thoodaudana, Kanwaudana, Thoukkaudana, Thekkaudana, and Amittaudana; and +two daughters, Amita and Pilita. Eetzana, the son of the king of Dewa, +married Yathaudara, daughter of Dzeyathana, king of Kapilawot. From this +marriage were born two sons, Thoopabuddha and Dantapani, and two +daughters, Maia and Patzapati. + +When Eetzana became king of Dewaha, a considerable error had crept into +the calendar. A correction was deemed necessary. There lived a +celebrated hermit, or Rathee, named Deweela, well versed in the science +of calculation. After several consultations held on this important +subject in the presence of the king, it was agreed that the Kaudza era +of 8640 years should be done away with on a Saturday, the first of the +moon of Tabaong, and that the new era should be made to begin on a +Sunday, on the first day of the waxing moon of the month Tagoo. This was +called the Eetzana era. + +On the 10th of the new era, Thoodaudana was born in the city of +Kapilawot; and on the twelfth year, Maia was born at Dewaha. In the days +of the Buddha Wipathi, the future Maia was then the daughter of a +Pounha. Her father, who tenderly loved her, gave her one day a fine +nosegay with a great quantity of the choicest perfumes and essences. The +young girl, delighted with these articles, hastened to the place where +lived Wipathi, and with pious and fervent earnestness laid at his feet +all that she had received from her father. Wipathi, admiring the fervent +liberality of the damsel, assured her that she would hereafter become +the mother of a Buddha, who was to be called Gaudama. + +When Thoodaudana was eighteen years of age, his father, King Thiahanoo, +called eight Pounhas skilled in the science of astrology, and directed +them to go with a large retinue and splendid presents in search of a +royal princess to be married to his son. The eight Pounhas departed. +They visited several countries, but all in vain; they could not find one +princess worthy of their master's son. At last they came to the city of +Dewaha. They had no sooner arrived in sight of it than they saw many +signs which prognosticated that in the city would be found an +accomplished princess, in every respect qualified to become the wife of +the heir to the throne of Kapilawot. At that time the young Maia had +gone to enjoy herself in a garden outside the city. It was situated on a +gently sloping ground, covered with all sorts of the finest and rarest +trees. A small brook, winding its course in various directions, shed on +every hand, from its gently murmuring waters, a delicious freshness. +Thither the royal messengers resorted. They found the princess in the +midst of her companions, outshining them all in beauty, like the moon +among the stars. Admitted into her presence, the head of the deputation +attempted to speak and explain the object of his visit; but he was so +much overwhelmed by the beauty and the graceful and dignified appearance +of the princess, that his voice failed him, and he fainted three times +in succession. As each fit came on him several damsels ran to his +assistance with pitchers of fresh water, and brought him back to his +senses. Having recovered his spirits, the chief Pounha felt encouraged +by some graceful and kind words from the lips of the princess. He +explained to her, in the choicest expressions, the object of his +mission; and with a faltering and timid tone of voice stated to her that +he had come to entreat her to accept presents from, and the hand of, +Prince Thoodaudana. Meanwhile he poured at her feet the brightest jewels +and rarest articles. The princess, with a sweet voice, modestly replied +that she was under the protection and care of her beloved parents, whose +will she never resisted; that it was to them that this affair should be +referred. For her own part, she had but one thing to do--to abide by her +parents' wishes. + +Satisfied with the answer, the Pounhas retired, and hastened to the +palace of King Eetzana, to whom they related all that had just happened. +The king graciously agreed to the proposal, and, in proof of his perfect +satisfaction, sent in return a deputation with many presents to Prince +Thoodaudana and his father. As might be expected, the royal messengers +were well received at Kapilawot. Thiahanoo and his son set out with a +countless retinue for the city of Dewaha. In a grove of mango-trees an +immense building was erected, out of the city, for their reception and +accommodation; and in the middle of that building a spacious hall was +arranged with infinite art for the marriage ceremony. When all the +preparations were completed, the bridegroom, attended by his father, +King Thiahanoo and the chief of Brahmas, went out to meet the bride, who +was coming from the garden, accompanied by her mother and the wife of +the great Thagia. Both advanced towards the centre of the hall, near a +stand raised for the occasion. Thoodaudana first stretched forth his +hand and laid it over that place. Maia gracefully did the same. They +then took each other's hands, in token of the mutual consent. At that +auspicious moment all the musical instruments resounded, and proclaimed +in gladdening airs the happy event. The Pounhas, holding the sacred +shell in their hands, poured the blessed water over their heads, +uttering all sorts of blessings. The parents and relatives joined in +invoking upon the young couple the choicest benedictions. The king, +princes, Pounhas, and nobles vied with each other in making presents, +and wishing them all sorts of happiness. + +When the festival was over, Thiahanoo desired to go back to his country +with his son and daughter-in-law. This was done with the utmost pomp +and solemnity. On his return, he continued to govern his people with +great prudence and wisdom, and at last died and migrated to one of the +Nats' seats. He was succeeded by his son Thoodaudana, who, with his +amiable wife, religiously observed the five precepts and the ten rules +of kings. By his beneficence and liberality to all, he won the sincere +affection of his people. It was on the twenty-eighth year of the new era +that he was married. Soon after, he took for his second wife, Patzapati, +the youngest sister of Maia. Thoodaudana's sister, Amitau, was married +to Thouppabuddha, the son of king Eetzana. + +About four thingies,[4] an hundred thousand worlds ago,[5] the most +excellent Buddha, who is infinitely wise and far superior to the three +orders of beings, the Brahmas, the Nats,[6] and men, received at the +feet of the Phra Deipinkara the assurance that he would afterwards +become himself a Buddha. At this time he was a Rathee,[7] under the +name of Thoomeda. During that immense space of time, he practised in the +highest degree the ten great virtues, the five renouncings, and the +three mighty works of perfection.[8] Having become a great prince[9] +under the name of Wethandra, he reached the acme of self-abnegation and +renouncement to all the things of this world. After his death, he +migrated to Toocita, the fourth abode of Nats. During his sojourn in +that happy place, enjoying the fulness of pleasure allotted to the +fortunate inhabitants of those blissful regions, a sudden and uncommon +rumour, accompanied with an extraordinary commotion proclaimed the +gladdening tidings that a Phra was soon to make his appearance in this +world.[B] + + [B] _Remark of the Burmese translator._--There are three solemn + occasions on which this great rumour is noised abroad. The + first, when the Nats, guardians of this world, knowing that + 100,000 years hence the end of this world is to come, show + themselves amongst men with their heads hanging down, a + sorrowful countenance, and tears streaming down their faces. + They are clad in a red dress, and proclaim aloud to all mortals + the destruction of this planet 100,000 years hence. They + earnestly call upon men to devote themselves to the observance + of the law, to the practice of virtue, the support of parents, + and the respect due to virtuous personages. The second occasion + is, when the same Nats proclaim to men that a thousand years + hence a Buddha or Phra will appear amongst them; and the third + is, when they come and announce to men that within a hundred + years there will be in this world a mighty prince, whose + unlimited sway shall extend over the four great islands. + +On hearing that a Phra was soon to make his appearance amongst men, all +the Nats, the peaceful inhabitants of the fortunate abode of Toocita, +assembled in all haste and crowded around Phralaong,[10] eagerly +inquiring of him, who was the fortunate Nat to whom was reserved the +signal honour of attaining the incomparable dignity of Buddha. The +reason which directed their steps towards Phralaong, and suggested their +inquiry, was, that in him were already to be observed unmistakable +signs, foreshadowing his future greatness. + +No sooner did it become known that this incomparable destination was to +be his happy lot, than Nats from all parts of the world resorted to the +abode of Toocita, to meet Phralaong and to congratulate him upon this +happy occasion. "Most glorious Nat," did they say to him, "you have +practised most perfectly the ten great virtues;[11] the time is now +come for you to obtain the sublime nature of Buddha. During former +existences, you most rigidly attended to the observance of the greatest +precepts, and walked steadily in the path of the highest virtues; you +then sighed after and longed for the happiness of Nats and Brahmas; but +now you have most gloriously achieved the mightiest work, and reached +the acme of perfection. It remains with you only to aspire at the full +possession of the supreme intelligence, which will enable you to open to +all Brahmas, Nats, and men the way to the deliverance from those endless +series of countless existences[12] through which they are doomed to +pass. Now the light of the law is extinguished, a universal darkness has +overspread all minds. Men are more than ever slaves to their passions; +there is a total lack of love among them; they hate each other, keep up +quarrels, strifes and contentions, and mercilessly destroy each other. +You alone can free them from the vicissitudes and miseries essentially +connected with the present state of all beings. The time is at last +come, when you are to become a Buddha." + +Unwilling to return at once a positive answer, Phralaong modestly +replied that he wanted some time to inquire particularly into the great +circumstances always attending the coming of a Buddha in this world, +viz., the epoch or time when a Buddha appears, the place which he +chooses for his apparition or manifestation, the race or caste he is to +be born from, and the age and quality of her who is to be his mother. As +regards the first circumstance, Phralaong observed that the apparition +of a Buddha could not have taken place during the previous period[13] of +100,000 years and more that had just elapsed, because during that +period the life of men was on the increase. The instructions on birth +and death, as well as on the miseries of life, which form the true +characteristics of Buddha's law, would not then be received with +sufficient interest and attention. Had any attempt been made at that +time to preach on these three great topics, the men of those days, to +whom those great events would have appeared so distant, could not have +been induced to look upon them with sufficient attention; the four great +truths would have made no impression on their minds; vain and fruitless +would have been the efforts to disentangle them from the ties of +passions, then encompassing all beings, and to make them sigh after the +deliverance from the miseries entailed upon mankind by birth, life, and +death. The period when human life is under a hundred years' duration +cannot at all be the proper period for such an important event, as the +passions of men are then so many and so deeply rooted that Buddha would +in vain attempt to preach his law. As the characters which a man traces +over the smooth surface of unruffled water instantly disappear without +leaving any mark behind, so the law and instructions that one should +attempt to spread on the hardened hearts of men would make no lasting +impression upon them. Hence he concluded that the present period, when +the life of men was of about a hundred years' duration, was the proper +one for the apparition of a Buddha. This first point having been +disposed of, Phralaong examined in what part of the globe a Buddha was +to appear. + +His regards glanced over the four great islands[14] and the 2000 small +ones. He saw that the island of Dzapoudiba, the southern one, had always +been the favourite place selected by all former Buddhas; he fixed upon +it, too, for himself. That island, however, is a most extensive one, +measuring in length 300 youdzanas, in breadth 252, and in circumference +900. He knew that on that island former Buddhas and semi-Buddhas, the +two great Rahandas,[15] or disciples of the right and left, the prince +whose sway is universal, &c., had all of them invariably fixed upon and +selected that island, and, amidst the various countries on the island, +that of Mitzima, the central one, where is to be found the district of +Kapilawot. "Thither," said he, "shall I resort, and become a Buddha." + +Having determined the place which he was to select for his terrestrial +seat, Phralaong examined the race or caste from which he was to be born. +The caste of the people and that of merchants appeared too low, and +much wanting in respectability, and, moreover, no Buddha had ever come +out therefrom. That of the Pounhas was in former times the most +illustrious and respected, but that of princes, in those days, far +surpassed it in power and consideration. He therefore fixed his choice +upon the caste of princes, as most becoming his future high calling. "I +choose," said he, "prince Thoodaudana for my father. As to the princess +who is to become my mother, she must be distinguished by a modest +deportment and chaste manners, and must never have tasted any +intoxicating drink. During the duration of 100,000 worlds she must have +lived in the practice of virtue, performing with a scrupulous exactitude +all the rules and observances prescribed by the law. The great and +glorious Princess Maia is the only person in whom all these conditions +are to be found. Moreover, the period of her life shall be at an end ten +months and seven days hence;[16] she shall be my mother." + +Having thus maturely pondered over these four circumstances, Phralaong, +turning to the Nats that surrounded him, anxiously expecting his answer, +plainly and unreservedly told them that the time for his becoming Buddha +had arrived, and bade them forthwith communicate this great news to all +the Brahmas and Nats. He rose up, and, accompanied by all the Nats of +Toocita, withdrew into the delightful garden of Nandawon. After a short +sojourn in that place, he left the abode of Nats, descended into the +seat of men, and incarnated in the womb of the glorious Maia, who at +once understood that she was pregnant with a boy who would obtain the +Buddhaship. At the same moment also the Princess Yathaudara, who was to +be the wife of the son of Maia, descended from the seats of Nats, and +was conceived in the womb of Amitau, the wife of Prince Thouppabuddha. + +At that time the inhabitants of Kapilawot were busily engaged in +celebrating, in the midst of extraordinary rejoicings, the festival of +the constellation of Outarathan (July-August). But the virtuous Maia, +without mixing amidst the crowds of those devoted to amusements, during +the seven days that preceded the full moon of July, spent her time among +her attendants, making offerings of flowers and perfumes. The day before +the full moon she rose up at an early hour, bathed in perfumed water, +and distributed to the needy four hundred thousand pieces of silver. +Attired in her richest dress, she took her meal, and religiously +performed all the pious observances usual on such occasions. This being +done, she entered into her private apartment, and, lying on her couch, +fell asleep and had the following dream:-- + + * * * * * + +Four princes of Nats, of the abode of Tsadoomarit, took the princess +with her couch, carried it to the Mount Himawonta,[17] and deposited it +on an immense and magnificent rock, sixty youdzanas long, adorned with +various colours, at the spot where a splendid tree, seven youdzanas +high, extends its green and rich foliage. The four queens, wives of the +four princes of Tsadoomarit, approaching the couch where Maia was +reclining, took her to the banks of the lake Anawadat, washed her with +the water of the lake, and spread over the couch flowers brought from +the abode of Nats. Near the lake is a beautiful mountain of a silvery +appearance, the summit whereof is crowned with a magnificent and lofty +palace. On the east of the palace, in the side of the mount, is a +splendid cave. Within the cave, a bed similar to that of the Nats was +prepared. The princess was led to that place and sat on the bed, +enjoying a delicious and refreshing rest. Opposite this mount, and +facing the cave where Maia sat surrounded by her attendants, rose +another mount, where Phralaong, under the shape of a young white +elephant, was roaming over its sides in various directions. He was soon +seen coming down that hill, and, ascending the one where the princess +lay on her bed, directed his course towards the cave. On the extremity +of his trunk, lifted up like a beautiful string of flowers, he carried a +white lily. His voice, occasionally resounding through the air, could be +heard distinctly by the inmates of the grotto, and indicated his +approach. He soon entered the cave, turned three times round the couch +whereupon sat the princess, then, standing for a while, he came nearer, +opened her right side, and appeared to conceal himself in her womb. + +In the morning, having awoke from her sleep, the queen related her dream +to her husband. King Thoodaudana sent without delay for sixty-four +Pounhas.[18] On a ground lined with cow-dung, where parched rice, +flowers, and other offerings were carefully deposited and profusely +spread, an appropriate place was reserved for the Pounhas. Butter, milk, +and honey were served out to them in vases of gold and silver; moreover, +several suits of apparel and five cows were offered to each of them as +presents, as well as many other articles. These preliminaries being +arranged, the prince narrated to them the dream, with a request for its +explanation. + +"Prince," answered the Pounhas, "banish from your mind all anxious +thoughts, and be of a cheerful heart; the child whom the princess bears +in her womb is not a girl but a boy. He will, after growing up, either +live amongst men, and then become a mighty ruler, whose sway all the +human race will acknowledge; or, withdrawing from the tumult of society, +he will resort to some solitary place, and there embrace the profession +of Rahan. In that condition he will disentangle himself from the +miseries attending existence, and at last attain the high dignity of +Buddha." Such was the explanation of the dream. At the moment Phralaong +entered into Maia's womb, a great commotion was felt throughout the four +elements, and thirty-two wonders simultaneously appeared. A light of an +incomparable brightness illuminated suddenly ten thousand worlds. The +blind, desirous, as it were, to contemplate the glorious dignity of +Phralaong, recovered their sight; the deaf heard distinctly every sound; +the dumb spoke with fluency; those whose bodies were bent stood up in an +erect position; the lame walked with ease and swiftness; prisoners saw +their fetters unloosed, and found themselves restored to liberty; the +fires of hell were extinguished; the ravenous cravings of the +Preithas[19] were satiated; animals were exempt from all infirmities; +all rational beings uttered but words of peace and mutual benevolence; +horses exhibited signs of excessive joy; elephants, with a solemn and +deep voice, expressed their contentment; musical instruments resounded +of themselves with the most melodious harmony; gold and silver +ornaments, worn at the arms and feet, without coming in contact, emitted +pleasing sounds; all places became suddenly filled with a resplendent +light; refreshing breezes blew gently all over the earth; abundant rain +poured from the skies during the hot season, and springs of cool water +burst out in every place, carrying through prepared beds their gently +murmuring streams; birds of the air stood still, forgetting their usual +flight; rivers suspended their course, seized with a mighty +astonishment; sea water became fresh; the five sorts of lilies were to +be seen in every direction; every description of flowers burst open, +displaying the richness of their brilliant colours; from the branches of +all trees and the bosom of the hardest rocks, flowers shot forth, +exhibiting all around the most glowing, dazzling, and varied hues; +lilies, seemingly rooted in the canopy of the skies, hung down, +scattering their embalmed fragrance; showers of flowers poured from the +firmament on the surface of the earth; the musical tunes of the Nats +were heard by the rejoiced inhabitants of our globe; hundreds of +thousands of worlds[20] suddenly approached each other, sometimes in the +shape of an elegant nosegay, sometimes in that of a ball of flowers or +of a spheroid; the choicest essences embalmed the whole atmosphere that +encompasses this world. Such are the wonders that took place at the time +Phralaong entered his mother's womb. + +When this great event happened, four chiefs of Nats, from the seat of +Tsadoomarit,[21] armed with swords, kept an uninterrupted watch round +the palace, to avert any accident that might prove hurtful to the mother +or her blessed fruit. From 10,000 worlds, four Nats from the same seat +were actively engaged in driving away all Bilous[22] and other monsters, +and forcing them to flee and hide themselves at the extremity of the +earth. Maia, free from every disordered propensity, spent her time with +her handmaids in the interior of her apartments. Her soul enjoyed, in +a perfect calm, the sweetest happiness; fatigue and weariness never +affected her unimpaired health. In his mother's womb, Phralaong appeared +like the white thread passed through the purest and finest pearls; the +womb itself resembled an elegant Dzedi.[23][C] + + [C] _Remark of the Burmese Translator._--It is to be borne in + mind that mothers of Buddhas having had the singular privilege + of giving birth to a child of so exalted a dignity, it would not + be convenient or becoming that other mortals should receive life + in the same womb; they therefore always die seven days after + their delivery and migrate to the abode of Nats, called Toocita. + It is usual with other mothers to be delivered, lying in an + horizontal position, and sometimes before or after the tenth + month. But with the mother of a Buddha the case is not the same; + the time of her confinement invariably happens at the beginning + of the tenth month, and she is always delivered in an erect and + vertical position. + +With the solicitous care and vigilant attention with which one carries +about a thabeit[24] full of oil, the great Maia watched all her +movements, and during ten months unremittingly laboured for the safe +preservation of the precious fruit of her womb. + + +FOOTNOTES + + [1] All Buddhistic compositions are invariably prefaced with one + of the following formulas of worship, always used by writers on + religious subjects. The one relates to Buddha alone, and the + other to the three most excellent things, ever deserving the + highest veneration. The first, always written in Pali, beginning + with the words _Namau tassa_, may be translated as follows: I + adore thee, or rather adoration to, the blessed, perfect, and + most intelligent. Here are proposed to the faith, admiration, + and veneration of a true Buddhist, the three great + characteristics of the founder of his religion, his goodness and + benevolence, his supreme perfection, and his boundless + knowledge. They form the essential qualifications of a being who + has assumed to himself the task of bringing men out of the abyss + of darkness and ignorance, and leading them to deliverance. + Benevolence prompts him to undertake that great work, perfection + fits him for such a high calling, and supreme science enables + him to follow it up with a complete success. They are always + held out to Buddhists as the three bright attributes and + transcendent qualities inherent in that exalted personage, which + are ever to attract and concentrate upon him the respect, love, + and admiration of all his sincere followers. + + The second formula may be considered as a short act of faith + often repeated by Buddhists. It consists in saying--I take + refuge in Buddha, the Law, and the Assembly. This short + profession of faith is often much enlarged by the religious zeal + of writers and the fervent piety of devotees. From the instance + of this legend we may remark how the compiler, with a soul + warmed by fervour is passing high encomiums upon each of the + three sacred objects of veneration, or the sacred asylums + wherein a Buddhist delights to dwell. There is no doubt that + this formula is a very ancient one, probably coeval with the + first age of Buddhism. The text of this legend bears out the + correctness of this assertion. It appears that the repetition of + this short sentence was the mark that distinguished converts. + Ordinary hearers of the preachings of Buddha and his disciples + evinced their adhesion to all that was delivered to them by + repeating the sacred formula. It was then, and even now it is to + Buddhists, what the celebrated Mahomedan declaration of + faith--there is but one God, and Mahomed is his prophet--is to + the followers of the Arabian Prophet. It is extremely important + to have an accurate idea of the three sacred abodes in which the + believer expects to find a sure shelter against all errors, + doubts, and fears, and a resting-place where his soul may + securely enjoy the undisturbed possession of truth. They + constitute what is emphatically called the three precious + things. + + Phra and Buddha are two expressions which, though not having the + same meaning, are used indiscriminately to designate the almost + divine being, who after having gone, during myriads of + successive existences, through the practice of all sorts of + virtues, particularly self-denial and complete abnegation of all + things, at last reaches to such a height of intellectual + attainment that his mind becomes gifted with a perfect and + universal intelligence or knowledge of all things. He is thus + enabled to see and fathom the misery and wants of all mortal + beings, and to devise means for relieving and filling them up. + The law that he preaches is the wholesome balm designed to cure + all moral distempers. He preaches it with unremitting zeal + during a certain number of years, and commissions his chosen + disciples to carry on the same benevolent and useful + undertaking. Having laid on a firm basis his religious + institution, he arrives at the state of Neibban. Buddha means + wise, intelligent. Phra is an expression conveying the highest + sense of respect, which was applied originally only to the + author of Buddhism, but now, through a servile adulation, it is + applied to the king, his ministers, all great personages, and + often by inferiors to the lowest menials of Government. The word + Phra, coupled with that of Thaking, which means Lord, is used by + Christians in Burmah to express the idea of God, the supreme + being. + + From the foregoing lines the reader may easily infer that the + author of Buddhism is a mere man, superior to all other beings, + not in nature, but in science and perfection. He lays no claim + whatever to any kind of superiority in nature; he exhibits + himself to the eyes of his disciples as one of the children of + men, who has been born and is doomed to die. He carries his + pretensions no farther. The idea of a supreme being is nowhere + mentioned by him. In the course of his religious disputations + with the Brahmins, he combats the notion of a god, coolly + establishing the most crude atheism. No one, it is true, can + deny that in certain Buddhistic countries the notion of an + Adibudha, or supreme being, is to be found in writings as well + as popular opinions, but we know that these writings are of a + comparatively recent date, and contain many doctrines foreign to + genuine Buddhism. This subject will, however, receive hereafter + further developments. + + The Law, the second object of veneration, is the body of + doctrines delivered by Buddha to his disciples during the + forty-five years of his public career. He came to the perfect + knowledge of that law when he attained the Buddhaship under the + shade of the Bodi tree. At that time his mind became + indefinitely expanded; his science embraced all that exists; his + penetrating and searching eye reached the farthest limits of the + past, saw at a glance the present, and fathomed the secrets of + the future. In that position, unclouded truth shone with radiant + effulgence before him, and he knew the nature of all beings + individually, their condition and situation, as well as all the + relations subsisting between them. He understood at once the + miseries and errors attending all rational beings, the hidden + causes that generated them, and the springs they issued from. At + the same time he perceived distinctly the means to be employed + for putting an end to so many misfortunes, and the remedies to + be used for the cure of those numberless and sad moral + distempers. His omniscience pointed out to him the course those + beings had to follow in order to retrace their steps back from + the way of error, and enter the road that would lead to the + coming out from the whirlpool of moral miseries in which they + had hitherto wretchedly moved during countless existences. All + that Gaudama said to the foregoing effect constitutes the law + upon which so many high praises are lavished with such warm and + fervent earnestness. A full and complete knowledge of that law, + in the opinion of Buddhists, dispels at once the clouds of + ignorance, which, like a thick mist, encompass all beings, and + sheds bright rays of pure light which enlighten the + understanding. Man is thus enabled to perceive distinctly the + wretchedness of his position, and to discover the means + wherewith he may extricate himself from the trammels of the + passions and finally arrive at the state of Neibban, which is, + as it shall be hereafter fully explained, exemption from all the + miseries attending existence. The whole law is divided into + three parts; the Abidama or metaphysics, Thouts or moral + instructions, and the Wini or discipline. According to the + opinion of the best informed among Buddhists, the law is + eternal, without a beginning or an author that might have framed + its precepts. No Buddha ever considered himself, or has ever + been looked upon by others, as the inventor and originator of + the law. He who becomes a Buddha is gifted with a boundless + science that enables him to come to a perfect knowledge of all + that constitutes the law: he is the fortunate discoverer of + things already existing, but placed far beyond the reach of the + human mind. In fact, the law is eternal, but has become, since + the days of a former Buddha, obliterated from the minds of men, + until a new one, by his omniscience, is enabled to win it back + and preach it to all beings. + + The third object of veneration is the Thanga, or Assembly. The + meaning of the Pali word Thanga is nearly equivalent to that of + church or congregation. In the time Gaudama lived the Assembly + was composed of all individuals who, becoming converts, embraced + the mode of living of their preacher, and remained with him, or + if they occasionally parted from him for a while, always kept a + close intercourse with him, and spent a portion of their time in + his company. Having left the world, they subjected themselves to + certain disciplinary regulations, afterwards embodied in the + great compilation called Wini. The members of the Assembly were + divided into two classes; the Ariahs or venerables, who by their + age, great proficiency in the knowledge of the law, and + remarkable fervour in the assiduous practice of all its + ordinances, occupied deservedly the first rank amongst the + disciples of Buddha, and ranked foremost in the Assembly. The + second class was composed of the Bickus, or simple mendicant + Religious. It is difficult to assert with any degree of + probability whether the Upasakas, or ordinary hearers, have ever + been regarded as members of the Thanga, and forming a portion + thereof. The Upasakas were believers, but continued to live in + the world, and formed, as it were, the laity of the Buddhistic + church. According to the opinion of Buddhists in these parts, + the laity is not considered as forming or constituting a part of + the Thanga; those only who abandon a secular life, put on the + yellow canonical dress, and endeavour to tread in the footsteps + of their great teacher, are entitled to the dignity of members + of the Assembly, to which a veneration is paid similar to that + offered to Buddha and the law. The Ariahs, or venerables, are + divided into four classes, according to their greater or less + proficiency in knowledge and moral worth. They are called + Thotapan, Thakadagan, Anagam, and Arahat. In the class of + Thotapan are included the individuals who have entered into the + current, or stream, leading to deliverance, or, in other terms, + who have stepped into the way of perfection. The Thotapan is as + yet to be born four times ere he can obtain the deliverance. + Those who belong to the second class glide rapidly down the + stream, following steadily the way leading to perfection, and + are to be born once more in the condition of Nat, and once in + that of man. Those of the third class are to be born once in the + condition of Nats. Finally, those of the fourth class have gone + over the fourth and last way to perfection, reached the summit + of science and spiritual attainments, and are ripe for the state + of Neibban, which they infallibly obtain after their death. The + Ariahs are again subdivided into eight classes, four of which + include those who are following the four ways of perfection; the + four others comprehend those who enjoy the reward of the duties + practised in following the ways of perfection. + + [2] The Burmese translator of the Pali text gives us to + understand that his intention is not to give the history of our + Buddha during the countless existences that have preceded the + last one, when he obtained the supreme intelligence. Buddhists + keep five hundred and ten histories or legends of Buddha + purporting to give an account of as many of his former + existences; and to enhance the value of such records, the + contents are supposed to have been narrated by Buddha himself to + his disciples and hearers. I have read most of them. Two hundred + of these fabulous narrations are very short, and give few + particulars regarding our Phra when he was as yet in the state + of animal, man, and Nat. They are, except the heading and the + conclusion, the very same fables and _contes_ to be met with + amongst all Asiatic nations, which have supplied with + inexhaustible stores all ancient and modern fabulists. The last + ten narratives are really very complete and interesting stories + of ten existences of Buddha preceding the one we are about to + describe, during which he is supposed to have practised the ten + great virtues, the acquisition of which is an indispensable + qualification for obtaining the exalted dignity of Phra. Some of + these legends are really beautiful, interesting, and + well-composed pieces of literature. + + [3] Toocita, or the joyful abode, is one of the seats of the + Nats. But in order to render more intelligible several passages + of this work, it is almost indispensable to have an idea of the + system adopted by Buddhists in assigning to rational beings + their respective seats or abodes. There are thirty-one seats + assigned to all beings, which we may suppose to be disposed on + an immense scale, extending from the bottom of the earth to an + incommensurable height above it. At the foot we find the four + states of punishment, viz., hell, the states of Athourikes, + Preithas, and animals. Next comes the abode of man. Above it are + the six seats of Nats. These eleven seats are called the seats + of passion, or concupiscence, because the beings residing + therein are still subject to the influence of that passion, + though not to an equal degree. Above the abodes of Nats we meet + with the sixteen seats, called Rupa, disposed perpendicularly + one above the other to an incalculable height. The inhabitants + of those fanciful regions are called Brahmas, or perfect. They + have freed themselves from concupiscence and almost all other + passions, but still retain some affection for matter and + material things. Hence the denomination of Rupa, or matter, + given to the seats. The remaining portion of the scale is + occupied by the four seats called Arupa or immaterials, for the + beings inhabiting them are entirely delivered from all passions. + They have, as it were, broken asunder even the smallest ties + that would attach them to this material world. They have reached + the summit of perfection; one step farther, and they enter into + the state Neibban, the consummation, according to Buddhists, of + all perfection. To sum up all the above in a few words: there + are four states of punishment. The seat of man is a place of + probation and trial. The six abodes of Nats are places of + sensual pleasure and enjoyments. In the sixteen seats of Rupa + are to be met those beings whose delights are of a more refined + and almost purely spiritual nature, though retaining as yet some + slight affections for matter. In the four seats of Arupa are + located those beings who are wholly disentangled from material + affections, who delight only in the sublimest contemplation, + soaring, as it were, in the boundless regions of pure + spiritualism. + + [4] Thingie is a number represented by a unit, followed by + sixty-four ciphers; others say, one hundred and forty. + + [5] Buddhists have different ways of classifying the series of + worlds, which they suppose to succeed to each other, after the + completion of a revolution of nature. As regards Buddhas, who + appear at unequal intervals for illuminating and opening the way + to deliverance to the then existing beings, worlds are divided + into those which are favoured with the presence of one or + several Buddhas, and those to which so eminent a benefit is + denied. The present revolution of nature, which includes the + period in which we live, has been privileged above all others. + No less than five Buddhas, like five shining suns, are to shoot + forth rays of incomparable brilliancy, and dispel the mist of + thick darkness that encompasses all beings, according to their + respective laws of demerits. Of these five, four, namely, + Kaukassan, Gaunagong, Kathaba, Gaudama, have already performed + their great task. The fifth, named Aremideia, is as yet to come. + The religion of Gaudama is to last five thousand years, of which + two thousand four hundred and eight are elapsed. The names of + the twenty-eight last Buddhas are religiously preserved by + Buddhists, together with their age, their stature, the names + of the trees under which they have obtained the universal + intelligence, their country, the names of their father and + mother, and those of their two chief disciples. Deinpakara + occupies the fourth place in the series. He is supposed to have + been eighty cubits high, and to have lived one hundred thousand + years. + + It is not without interest to examine whether there have existed + Buddhas previous to the time of Gaudama, and whether the + twenty-eight Buddhas above alluded to are to be considered as + mythological beings who have never existed. It cannot be denied + that mention of former Buddhas is made in the earliest sacred + records, but it seems difficult to infer therefrom that they + are real beings. 1st. The circumstances respecting their + extraordinary longevity, their immense stature, and the myriads + of centuries that are supposed to have elapsed from the times of + the first to those of Gaudama, are apparently conclusive proofs + against the reality of their existence. 2d. The names of those + personages are found mentioned in the preachings of Gaudama, + together with those individuals with whom he is supposed to have + lived and conversed during former existences. Who has ever + thought of giving any credence to those fables? They were used + by Gaudama as so many means to give extension and solidity to + the basis whereupon he intended to found his system. 3d. There + are no historical records or monuments that can give countenance + to the opposite opinion. The historical times begin with + Gaudama, whilst there exist historical proofs of the existence + of the rival creed of Brahminism anterior to the days of the + acknowledged author of Buddhism. + + It cannot be doubted that there existed in the days of Buddha, + in the valley of the Ganges and in the Punjaub, a great number + of philosophers, who led a retired life, devoting their time to + study and the practice of virtue. Some of them occasionally + sallied out of their retreats to go and deliver moral + instructions to the people. The fame that attended those + philosophers attracted round their lonely abodes crowds of + hearers, eager to listen to their lectures and anxious to place + themselves under their direction for learning the practice of + virtue. In the pages of this legend will be found passages + corroborating this assertion. Thence arose those multifarious + schools, where were elaborated the many systems, opinions, &c., + for which India has been celebrated from the remotest antiquity. + The writer has had the patience to read two works full of + disputations between Brahmins and Buddhists, as well as some + books of the ethics of the latter. He has been astonished to + find that in those days the art of arguing, disputing, defining, + &c., had been carried to such a point of nicety as almost to + leave the disciples of Aristotle far behind. It has been said + that the gymnosophists whom Alexander the Great met in India + were Buddhist philosophers. But the particulars mentioned by + Greek writers respecting their manners and doctrines contradict + such a supposition. They are described as living in a state of + complete nakedness, and as refusing to deliver instructions to + the messenger of Alexander, unless he consented to strip himself + of his clothes. On the other hand, we know that Buddha enjoined + a strict modesty on his religious, and in the book of + ordinations the candidate is first asked whether he comes + provided with his canonical dress. The gymnosophists are + represented as practising extraordinary austerities, and holding + self-destruction in great esteem. These and other practices are + quite at variance with all the prescriptions of the Wini, or + book of discipline. It is further mentioned that the Macedonian + hero met with other philosophers living in community; but + whether these were Buddhists or not, it is impossible to decide. + It can scarcely be believed that Buddhism in the days of + Alexander could have already invaded the countries which the + Grecian army conquered. + + [6] Nat in Pali means Lord. Its signification is exactly + equivalent to that of Dewa, Dewata. The Nats are an order of + beings in the Buddhistic system, occupying six seats or abodes + of happiness, placed in rising succession above the abode of + man. They are spirits endowed with a body of so subtle and + ethereal nature as to be able to move with the utmost rapidity + from their seat to that of man, and _vice versa_. They play a + conspicuous part in the affairs of this world, and are supposed + to exercise a considerable degree of influence over man and + other creatures. Fear, superstition, and ignorance have peopled + all places with Nats. Every tree, forest, fountain, village, and + town has its protecting Nat. Some among the Nats having lost + their high station through misconduct, have been banished from + their seats and doomed to drag a wretched existence in some + gloomy recess. Their power for doing evil is supposed to be very + great. Hence the excessive dread of those evil genii entertained + by all Buddhists. A good deal of their commonest superstitious + rites have been devised for propitiating those enemies to all + happiness, and averting the calamitous disasters which they seem + to keep hanging over our heads. + + Though the Nats' worship is universal among the Buddhists of all + nations, it is but fair to state that it is contrary to the + principles of genuine Buddhism and repugnant to its tenets. It + is probable that it already existed among all the nations of + Eastern Asia at the time they were converted to Buddhism. + + The tribes that have not as yet been converted to Buddhism have + no other worship but that of the Nats. To mention only the + principal ones, such as the Karens, the Khyins, and the + Singphos, they may differ in the mode of performing their + religious rites and superstitious ceremonies, but the object is + the same, honouring and propitiating the Nats. This worship is + so deeply rooted in the minds of the wild and half-civilised + tribes of Eastern Asia, that it has been, to a great extent, + retained by the nations that have adopted Buddhism as their + religious creed. The Burmans, for instance, from the king down + to the lowest subject, privately and publicly indulge in the + Nats' worship. As to the tribes that have remained outside the + pale of Buddhism, they may be styled Nats' worshippers. Hence it + may be inferred that previous to the introduction or the + preaching of the tenets of the comparatively new religion in + these parts, the worship of Nats was universal and + predominating. + + [7] Raci or Rathee means an hermit, a personage living by + himself in some lonely and solitary recess, far from the + contagious atmosphere of impure society, devoting his time to + meditation and contemplation. His diet is of the coarsest kind, + supplied to him by the forests he lives in; the skins of some + wild animals afford him a sufficient dress. Most of those + Rathees having reached an uncommon degree of extraordinary + attainment, their bodies become spiritualised to a degree which + enables them to travel from place to place by following an + aerial course. In all Buddhistic legends, comedies, &c., they + are often found interfering in the narrated stories and + episodes. + + There is no doubt but those devotees who, in the days of Buddha, + spent their time in retreat, devoted to study and meditation, + were Brahmins. In support of this assertion we have the highest + possible native authority, the Institutes of Menoo, compiled + probably during the eighth or ninth century before Christ. We + find in that work, minutely described, the mode of life becoming + a true Brahmin. During the third part of his life, a Brahmin + must live as an anchorite in the woods. Clad in the bark of + trees or the skins of animals, with his hair and nails uncut, + having no shelter whatever but that which is afforded him by the + trees of the forest, keeping sometimes a strict silence, living + on herbs and roots, he must train himself up to bearing with + entire unconcern the cold of winter and the heat of summer. Such + is the course of life, according to the Vedas, which the true + Brahmin is bound to follow during the third portion of his + existence. Some Buddhistic zealots have sometimes endeavoured to + emulate the ancient Rathees in their singular mode of life. It + is not quite unfrequent in our days to hear of some fervent + Phongies who, during the three months of Lent, withdraw into + solitude, to be more at liberty to devote their time to study + and meditation. This observance, however, is practised by but + very few individuals, and that, too, with a degree of laxity + that indicates a marked decline of the pristine fervour that + glowed in the soul of primitive Buddhists. + + [8] The three great works are; the assistance afforded to his + parents and relatives, the great offerings he had made, coupled + with a strict observance of the most difficult points of the + law, and benevolent dispositions towards all beings + indiscriminately. + + [9] This extraordinary monarch, called Tsekiawade, never makes + his appearance during the period of time allotted to the + publication and duration of the religious institutions of a + Buddha. + + [10] Here I make use of the expression Phralaong, or more + correctly Phraalaong, to designate Buddha before he obtained the + supreme knowledge, when he was, as it were, slowly and gradually + gravitating towards the centre of matchless perfection. In that + state it is said of him that he is not yet ripe. + + This word involves a meaning which ought to be well understood. + No single expression in our language can convey a correct idea + of its import, and for this reason it has been retained through + these pages. _Alaong_ is a derivative from the verb _laong_, + which means to be in an incipient way, in a way of progression + towards something more perfect. A Buddha is at first a being in + a very imperfect state; but passing through countless + existences, he frees himself, by a slow process, from some of + his imperfections; he acquires merits which enable him to rise + in the scale of progress, science, and perfection. In perusing + the narrative of the five hundred and ten former existences of + Gaudama which have come down to us, we find that, when he was + yet in the state of animal, he styled himself Phralaong. The + Burmese have another expression of similar import to express the + same meaning. They say of a being as yet in an imperfect + condition that he is soft, tender as an unripe thing; and when + he passes to the state of perfection, they say that he is ripe, + that he has blossomed and expanded. They give to understand that + he who is progressing towards the Buddhaship has in himself all + the elements constitutive of a Buddha lying as yet concealed in + himself; but when he reaches that state, then all that had + hitherto remained in a state of unripeness bursts suddenly out + of the bud and comes to full maturity. Similar expressions are + often better calculated to give a clear insight into the true + and real opinions of Buddhists than a lengthened and elaborate + dissertation could do. + + [11] The ten great virtues or duties are, liberality, observance + of the precepts of the law, retreat into lonely places, wisdom, + diligence, benevolence, patience, veracity, fortitude, and + indifference. The five renouncements are, renouncing children, + wife, goods, life, and one's self. + + [12] Metempsychosis is one of the fundamental dogmas of + Buddhism. That continual transition from one existence to + another, from a state of happiness to one of unhappiness, and + _vice versa_, forms a circle encompassing the Buddhist in every + direction. He is doomed to fluctuate incessantly on the + never-settled waters of existence. Hence his ardent wishes to be + delivered from that most pitiable position, and his earnest + longings for the ever-tranquil state of Neibban, the way to + which Buddha alone can teach him by his precepts and his + examples. + + This dogma is common both to Brahmins and Buddhists. The + originator and propagator of the creed of the latter found it + already established; he had but to embody it among his own + conceptions, and make it agree with his new ideas. His first + teachers were Brahmins, and under their tuition he learned that + dogma which may be considered as the basis on which hinge both + systems. In fact, the two rival creeds have a common object in + view, the elevating of the soul from those imperfections forced + upon her by her connection with matter, and the setting of her + free from the sway of passions, which keep her always linked to + this world. According to the votaries of both creeds, + transmigration has for its object the effecting of those several + purposes. There is a curious opinion among Buddhists respecting + the mode of transmigrations, and there is no doubt it is a very + ancient one, belonging to the genuine productions of the + earliest Buddhism. Transmigration, they say, is caused and + entirely controlled by the influence of merits and demerits, but + in such a way that a being who has come to his end transmits + nothing of his entity to the being to be immediately reproduced. + The latter is a being apart, independent of the former, created, + it is true, by the influence of the late being's good or bad + deeds, but having nothing in common with him. They explain this + startling doctrine by the comparison of a tree successively + producing and bearing fruits, of which some are good and some + bad. The fruits, though coming from the same tree, have nothing + in common, either with each other or with those that were + previously grown, or may afterwards grow out of the same plant; + they are distinct and separate. So they say, _kan_, or the + influence of merits and demerits, produces successively beings + totally distinct one from the other. This atheistic or + materialistic doctrine is not generally known by the common + people, who practically hold that transmigration is effected in + the manner professed and taught by Pythagoras and his school. + + If between the adherents of the two creeds there is a perfect + agreement respecting the means to be resorted to for reaching + the point when man becomes free from miseries, ignorance, and + imperfections, they are at variance as to the end to be arrived + to. The Brahmin leads the perfected being to the supreme + essence, in which he is merged as a drop of water in the ocean, + losing his personality, to form a whole with the Divine + substance. This is Pantheism. The Buddhist, ignoring a supreme + being, conducts the individual that has become emancipated from + the thraldom of passions to a state of complete isolation, + called Neibban. This is, strictly speaking, Annihilation. + + [13] The duration of a revolution of nature, or the time + required for the formation of a world, its existence and + destruction, is divided into four periods. The fourth period, or + that which begins with the apparition of man on the earth until + its destruction, is divided into sixty-four parts, called + andrakaps. During one andrakap, the life of man increases + gradually from ten years to an almost innumerable number of + years; and having reached its maximum of duration, it decreases + slowly to its former short duration of ten years. We live at + present in that second part of an andrakap when the life of man + is on the decline and decrease. If my memory serve me right, we + have reached at present the ninth or tenth andrakap of the + fourth period. Should the calculations of Buddhists ever prove + correct, the deluded visionaries who look forward to an + approaching Millennium, have still to wait long ere their + darling wishes be realised. + + Though it be somewhat tiresome and unpleasant to have to write + down the absurd and ridiculous notions Burmans entertain + respecting the organisation of matter, the origin, production, + existence, duration, and end of the world, it appears quite + necessary to give a brief account, and sketch an outline of + their ideas on these subjects. The reader will then have the + means of tracing up to their Hindu origin several of the many + threads that link Buddhism to Brahminism, and better understand + the various details hereafter to be given, and intended for + establishing a great fact, viz., the Brahminical origin of the + greater part of the Buddhistic institutions. He will, moreover, + have the satisfaction of clearly discovering, buried in the + rubbish of fabulous recitals, several important facts recorded + in the Holy Scriptures. + + Matter is eternal, but its organisation and all the changes + attending it are caused and regulated by certain laws co-eternal + with it. Both matter and the laws that act upon it are + self-existing, independent of the action and control of any + being, &c. As soon as a system of worlds is constituted, + Buddhists boldly assert and perseveringly maintain that the law + of merit and demerit is the sole principle that regulates and + controls both the physical and moral world. + + But how is a world brought into existence? Water, or rather + rain, is the chief agent, operating in the reproduction of a + system of nature. During an immense period of time rain pours + down with an unabating violence in the space left by the last + world that has been destroyed. Meanwhile strong winds, blowing + from opposite directions, accumulate the water within definite + and certain limits until it has filled the whole space. At last + appears on the surface of water, floating like a greasy + substance, the sediment deposited by water. In proportion as the + water dries up under the unremitting action of the wind, that + crust increases in size, until, by a slow, gradual, but sure + process, it invariably assumes the shape and proportion of our + planet, in the manner we are to describe. The centre of the + earth, indeed of a world or system of nature, is occupied by a + mountain of enormous size and elevation, called Mienmo. This is + surrounded by seven ranges of mountains, separated from each + other by streams, equalling, in breadth and depth, the height of + the mountain forming its boundaries in the direction of the + central elevation. The range nearest to the Mienmo rises to half + its height. Each successive range is half the height of the + range preceding it. Beyond the last stream are disposed four + great islands, in the direction of the four points of the + compass. Each of those four islands is surrounded by five + hundred smaller ones. Beyond those there is water, reaching to + the farthest limits of the world. The great island we inhabit is + the southern one, called Dzampoudipa, from the Jambu, or Eugenia + tree, growing upon it. + + Our planet rests on a basis of water double the thickness of the + earth; the water itself is lying on a mass of air that has a + thickness double that of water. Below this aerial stratum is + _laha_, or vacuum. + + Let us see now in what manner our planet is peopled, and whence + came its first inhabitants. From the seats of Brahmas which were + beyond the range of destruction when the former world perished, + three celestial beings, or, according to another version, six, + came on the earth, remaining on it in a state of perfect + happiness, occasionally revisiting, when it pleased them, their + former seats of glory. This state of things lasts during a long + period. At that time the two great luminaries of the day and the + stars of night have not as yet made their appearance, but rays + of incomparable brightness, emanating from the pure bodies of + those new inhabitants, illuminate the globe. They feed at long + intervals upon a certain gelatinous substance, of such a + nutritious power that the smallest quantity is sufficient to + support them for a long period. This delicious food is of the + most perfect flavour. But it happens that at last it disappears, + and is successively replaced by two other substances, one of + which resembles the tender sprout of a tree. They are so + nutritious and purified that in our present condition we can + have no adequate idea of their properties. They too disappear, + and are succeeded by a sort of rice called _Tha-le_. The + inhabitants of the earth eat also of that rice. But alas! the + consequences prove as fatal to them as the eating of the + forbidden fruit proved to the happy denizens of Eden. The + brightness that had hitherto encircled their bodies and + illuminated the world vanishes away, and, to their utmost + dismay, they find themselves, for the first time, sunk into an + abyss of unknown darkness. The eating of that coarse food + creates faeces and evacuations which, forcing their way out of + the body, cause the appearance of what marks the distinction of + the sexes. Passions, for the first time, burn and rage in the + bosom of those hitherto passionless beings. They are deprived of + the power to return to their celestial seats. Very soon + jealousy, contentions, &c., follow in the train of the + egotistical distinction of _mine_ and _thine_. Finding + themselves in the gloom of darkness, the unhappy beings sigh for + and long after light, when, on a sudden, the sun, breaking down + the barrier of darkness, bursts out, rolling, as it were, in a + flood of light, which illuminates the whole world; but soon + disappearing in the west below the horizon, darkness seems to + resume its hold. New lamentations and bewailings arise on the + part of men, when in a short time appears majestically the moon, + spreading its silvery and trembling rays of light. At the same + time the planets and stars take their respective stations in the + sky, and begin their regular revolutions. The need of settling + disputes that arise is soon felt by the new inhabitants; they + agree to elect a chief, whom they invest with a sufficient + authority for framing regulations which are to be obligatory on + every member of society, and power for enforcing obedience to + those regulations. Hence the origin of society. + + Men, at first practising virtue, enjoyed a long life, the + duration of which reached to the almost incredible length of a + thingie. But they having much relaxed in the practice of virtue, + it lessened proportionably to their want of fervour in the + observance of the law, until, by their extreme wickedness, it + dwindled to the short period of ten years. The same ascending + and descending scale of human life, successively brought in by + the law of merit and demerit, takes place sixty-four times, and + constitutes an andrakap, or the duration of a world. + + It remains only to mention rapidly some particulars regarding + the end of a revolution of nature. The cause of such an event is + the influence of the demerits, prevailing to such an extent as + to be all-powerful in working out destruction. Two solemn + warnings of the approaching dissolution of our planet are given + by Nats, one nearly 100,000 and the other 100 years before that + event. The bearers of such sad news make their appearance on + earth with marks of deep mourning, as best suited to afford + additional weight to their exhortations. They earnestly call on + men to repent of their sins and amend their lives. These last + summonses are generally heeded by all mankind, so that men, when + the world is destroyed, generally migrate, together with the + victims of hell who have atoned for their past iniquities, to + those seats of Brahmas that escape destruction. There are three + great principles of demerit, concupiscence, anger, and + ignorance. The world also is destroyed by the action of three + different agents, fire, water, and wind. Concupiscence is the + most common, though the less heinous of the three. Next comes + anger, less prevailing, though it is more heinous; but ignorance + is by far the most fatal of all moral distempers. The moral + disorder then prevailing causes destruction by the agency that + it sets in action. Concupiscence has for its agency fire; anger, + water; ignorance, wind; but in the following proportion. Of + sixty-four destructions of this world, fifty-six are caused by + conflagration, seven by water, and one by wind. Their respective + limits of duration stand as follows: conflagration reaches to + the five lowest seats of Brahmas; water extends to the eighth + seat, and the destructive violence of the wind is felt as far as + the ninth seat. + + [14] Our planet or globe is composed, according to Buddhists, + of the mountain Mienmo, being in height 82,000 youdzanas (1 + youdzana is, according to some authorities, equal to little less + than 12 English miles) above the surface of the earth, and in + depth equal to its height. Around this huge and tall elevation + are disposed the four great islands, according to the four + points of the compass; and each of these again is surrounded by + 500 small islands. The countries south of the great chain of the + Himalaya are supposed to form the great island lying at the + south. + + It would be easy to give, at full length, the ridiculous notions + entertained by Buddhists of these parts on geography and + cosmography, &c., &c.; but the knowledge of such puerilities is + scarcely worth the attention of a serious reader, who is anxious + to acquire accurate information respecting a religious system, + which was designed by its inventor to be the vehicle of moral + doctrines, with but very few dogmas. Those speculations upon + this material world have gradually found their place in the + collection of sacred writings, but they are no part of the + religious creed. They are of a Hindu origin, and convey Indian + notions upon those various topics. These notions even do not + belong to the system as expounded in the Vedas, but have been + set forth at a comparatively modern epoch. + + [15] A Rahanda is a being very far advanced in perfection, and + gifted with high spiritual attainments, which impart to his + mortal frame certain distinguished prerogatives, becoming almost + spirits. Concupiscence is totally extinguished in a Rahanda; he + may be said to be fit for the state Neibban. Several classes are + assigned to Rahandas alone, according to their various degrees + of advancement in the way of perfection. + + [16] It is an immutable decree that she on whom has been + conferred the singular honour of giving birth to a mortal who, + during the course of his existence, is to become a Buddha, dies + invariably seven days after her delivery, migrating to one of + the delightful seats of Nats. The Burmese translator observes + that a womb that has been, as it were, consecrated and + sanctified by the presence of a child of so exalted a dignity, + can never become afterwards the hidden abode of less dignified + beings. It must be confessed that the conception of Phralaong in + his mother's womb is wrapped up in a mysterious obscurity, + appearing as it does to exclude the idea of conjugal + intercourse. The Cochin-Chinese in their religious legends + pretend that Buddha was conceived and born from Maia in a + wonderful manner, not resembling at all what takes place + according to the order of nature. + + [17] The Mount Himawonta is famous in all Buddhistic + compositions, as the scene where great and important events have + happened. It is in all probability the Himalaya, as being the + highest range of mountains ever known to Indian Buddhists. + + [18] Pounhas are the Brahmins who, even in those days of remote + antiquity, were considered as the wisest in their generation. + They had already monopolised the lucrative trade of + fortune-tellers, astrologers, &c., and it appears that they have + contrived to retain it up to our own days. During my first stay + in Burmah I became acquainted with a young Pounha, wearing the + white dress, and getting his livelihood by telling the + horoscopes of newly-born infants, and even grown-up people. I + learned from him the mode of finding out by calculation the + state of the heavens at any given hour whatever. This mode of + calculation is entirely based on the Hindu system, and has + evidently been borrowed from that people. + + Though Brahmins in those days, as in our own, worked on popular + ignorance and credulity in the manner abovementioned, we ought + not to lose sight of the great fact, borne out by this legend in + a most distinct and explicit way, that many among them devoted + all their time, energies, and abilities to the acquirement of + wisdom, and the observance of the most arduous practices. Their + austere mode of life was to a great extent copied and imitated + by the first religious of the Buddhist persuasion. Many + ordinances and prescriptions of the Wini agree, in a remarkable + degree, with those enforced by the Vedas. In the beginning, the + resemblance must have been so great as to render the + discrepancies scarcely perceptible, since we read in this very + work of an injunction made to the early converts, to bestow alms + on the Pounhas as well as on the Bickus or mendicant religious, + placing them both on a footing of perfect equality. + + [19] Preitha is a being in a state of punishment and sufferings + on account of sins committed in a former existence. He is doomed + to live in the solitary recesses of uninhabited mountains, + smarting under the pangs of never-satiated hunger. His body, and + particularly his stomach, are of gigantic dimensions, whilst his + mouth is so small that a needle could scarcely be shoved into + it. + + [20] In the Buddhistic system of cosmogony, 100,000 worlds + form one system, subject to the same immutable changes and + revolutions as affect this one which we inhabit. They admit, + indeed, that the number of worlds is unlimited, but they assert + that those forming one system are simultaneously destroyed, + reproduced and perfected, by virtue of certain eternal laws + inherent in matter itself. + + [21] Tsadoomarit is the first of the six abodes of Nats. The + description of the pleasures enjoyed by the inhabitants of that + seat is replete with accounts of the grossest licentiousness. + + [22] A Palou, or rather Bilou, is a monster with a human face, + supposed to feed on human flesh. His eyes are of a deep red hue, + and his body of so subtle a nature as never to project any + shadow. Wonderful tales are told of this monster, which plays + a considerable part in most of the Buddhistic writings. + + [23] A Dzedi is a religious edifice of a conical form, supported + on a square basis, and having its top covered with what the + Burmese call an umbrella, resembling in its shape the musical + instrument vulgarly called _chapeau chinois_ by the French. On + each side of the quadrangular basis are opened four niches, in + the direction of the four cardinal points, destined to receive + statues of Buddha. This monument is of every dimension in size, + from the smallest, a few feet high, to the tallest, of one or + two hundred feet high. It is to be seen in every direction, and + in the neighbourhood of towns every elevation is crowned with + one or several Dzedis. + + The word Dzedi means a sacred depository, that is to say, a + place where relics of Buddha were enshrined. The word has been + extended since to places which have become receptacles of the + scriptures, or of the relics of distinguished religious, who had + acquired eminence by their scientific and moral attainments. In + the beginning, those Dzedis were a kind of _tumuli_, or mounds + of earth or bricks, erected upon the shrine wherein relics were + enclosed. In proportion as the followers of the Buddhistic faith + increased in number, wealth, and influence, they erected Dzedis + on a grander scale, bearing always a great resemblance in shape + and form to the primitive ones. The stupas or topes discovered + in the Punjaub, and in other parts of the Indian Peninsula, were + real Buddhistic tumuli or Dzedis. + + During succeeding ages, when relics could not be procured, the + faithful continued to erect Dzedis, the sight of which was + intended to remind them of the sacred relics, and they paid to + those relics and monuments the same veneration as they would + have offered to those enriched with those priceless objects. + In Burmah, in particular, the zeal, or rather the rage, for + building Dzedis has been carried to a degree scarcely to be + credited by those who have not visited that country. In the + following pages there will be found an attempt to describe the + various forms given to those monuments. + + [24] The thabeit is an open-mouthed pot, of a truncated + spheroidical form, made of earth, iron, or brass, without + ornaments, used by the Buddhist monks when going abroad, in + their morning excursions, to receive the alms bestowed on them + by the admirers of their holy mode of life. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + + _Birth of Buddha in a forest -- Rejoicings on that occasion -- + Kaladewila -- Prediction of the Pounhas -- Vain efforts of + Thoodaudana to thwart the effect of the Prediction._ + + +The time of her approaching confinement being close at hand, the +princess solicited from her husband, King Thoodaudana, leave to go to +the country of Dewah,[1] amongst her friends and relatives. As soon as +her request was made known, the king ordered that the whole extent of +the road between Kapilawot and Dewah should be perfectly levelled, and +lined on both sides with plantain trees, and adorned with the finest +ornaments. Jars, full of the purest water, were to be deposited all +along the road at short intervals. A chair of gold was made ready for +conveying the queen; and a thousand noblemen, attended by an innumerable +retinue, were directed to accompany her during the journey. Between the +two countries an immense forest of lofty Engyin trees extends to a great +distance. As soon as the _cortege_ reached it, five water-lilies shot +forth spontaneously from the stem and the main branches of each tree, +and innumerable birds of all kinds, by their melodious tunes, filled the +air with the most ravishing music. Trees, similar in beauty to those +growing in the seats of Nats, apparently sensible of the presence of the +incarnated Buddha, seemed to share in the universal joy. + +On beholding this wonderful appearance of all the lofty trees of the +forest, the queen felt a desire to approach nearer and enjoy the +marvellous sight offered to her astonished regards. Her noble attendants +led her forthwith a short distance into the forest. Maia, seated on her +couch, along with her sister Patzapati, desired her attendants to have +it moved closer to an Engyin tree (_shorea robusta_), which she pointed +out. Her wishes were immediately complied with. She then rose gently on +her couch; her left hand, clasped round the neck of her sister, +supported her in a standing position. With the right hand she tried to +reach and break a small branch, which she wanted to carry away. On that +very instant, as the slender rattan, heated by fire, bends down its +tender head, all the branches lowered their extremities, offering +themselves, as it were, to the hand of the queen, who unhesitatingly +seized and broke the extremity of one of the young boughs. By virtue of +a certain power inherent in her dignity, on a sudden all the winds blew +gently throughout the forest. The attendants, having desired all the +people to withdraw to a distance, disposed curtains all round the place +the queen was standing on. Whilst she was in that position, admiring +the slender bough she held in her hands, the moment of her confinement +happened, and she was delivered of a son.[D] + + [D] On the same day a son was born to Amitaudana, called Ananda. + The wife of Thouppaboudha of Dewah was delivered of a daughter, + called Yathaudara, who became afterwards the wife of Phralaong. + Anouroudha, the son of Thookaudana, was ushered into existence + on the same solemn occasion. The above-named Ananda was first + cousin to the Buddha, and subsequently became the amiable, + faithful, and devoted disciple who, during twenty-five years, + attended on the person of Buddha, and affectionately ministered + to all his wants. After the death of his mother Maia, Phralaong + was nursed and brought up with the greatest care by his aunt + Patzapati, sometimes called Gautamee. + +Four chief Brahmas[2] received the new-born infant on a golden net-work, +and placed him in the presence of the happy mother, saying, "Give +yourself up, O Queen, to joy and rejoicing; here is the precious and +wonderful fruit of your womb."[E] + + [E] _Remarks of the Burmese Translator._--When children are born + they appear in this world covered all over their bodies with + impure and disgusting substances. But an exception was made in + favour of our infant Phralaong. He was born without the least + stain of offending impurity; he was ushered into this world, + pure and resplendent, like a fine ruby placed on a piece of the + richest cloth of Kathika. He left his mother's womb with his + feet and hands stretched out, exhibiting the dignified + countenance of a Pundit descending from the place where he has + expounded the law. Though both mother and child were exempt from + the humiliating miseries common to all other human beings, there + came down from the skies upon both, by way of a respectful + offering, gentle showers of cold and warm water, succeeding each + other alternately in a regular order. + +From the hands of the four chiefs of Brahmas, four chiefs of Nats +received the blessed child, whom they handed over to men, who placed him +on a beautiful white cloth. But to the astonishment of all, he freed +himself from the hands of those attending upon him, and stood in a firm +and erect position on the ground, when casting a glance towards the +east, more than one thousand worlds appeared like a perfectly levelled +plain. All the Nats inhabiting those worlds made offerings of flowers +and perfumes, exclaiming with exultation, "An exalted personage has made +his appearance;--who can ever be compared to him? who has ever equalled +him? He is indeed the most excellent of all beings." Phralaong looked +again towards the three other directions. Raising his eyes upwards, and +then lowering them down, he saw that there was no being equal to him. +Conscious of his superiority, he jumped over a distance of seven lengths +of a foot, in a northern direction, exclaiming,--"This is my last birth; +there shall be to me no other state of existence; I am the greatest of +all beings."[3] He then began to walk steadily in the same direction. A +chief of Brahmas held over his head the white umbrella.[4] A Nat carried +the golden fan. Other Nats held in their hands the golden sword, the +golden slippers, the cope set with the rarest precious stones, and other +royal insignia.[F] + + [F] _Remarks of the Burmese Translator._--In former existences, + our Phralaong is said to have spoken a few words immediately + after his birth, viz., when he was Mahauthata and Wethandra. In + the first, he came into this world holding in his hands a small + plant, which a Nat had brought and placed in his tender hands at + that very moment. He showed it to his mother, who asked him + what it was. "This is a medicinal plant," replied he, to his + astonished mother. The plant was cast into a large jar full of + water, and the virtualised liquid ever retained the power of + curing every kind of bodily distemper. When he was born, or + rather began the existence in which he was called Wethandra, he + stretched out his hands asking something from his mother which + he might bestow on the needy. The mother put at his disposal one + thousand pieces of silver. + +Thirty-two mighty wonders had proclaimed the incarnation of Phralaong in +his mother's womb, and the same number of wonders announced his birth to +the earth. Moreover, in that same moment were born the beautiful +Yathaudara, Ananda, the son of Amitaudana, the noblemen Tsanda and +Kaludari, and the horse Kantika. The great tree Bodi also sprung from +the ground, in the forest of Oorouwela, about two youdzanas distant from +the city of Radzagio, and in a north-easterly direction from that place, +and the four golden vases suddenly reappeared. + +The inhabitants of Dewah, joining those of Kapilawot, set out for the +latter country with the newly-born infant, to whom they rendered the +greatest honours. The Nats of the seat of Tawadeintha, on hearing that a +son was born to King Thoodaudana, and that under the shade of the tree +Bodi[5] he would become a true Buddha with a perfect knowledge of the +four great truths, gave full vent to their boundless joy, hoisting +unfurled flags and banners in every direction, in token of their +indescribable rejoicings. + +There was a celebrated Rathee, named Kaladewila, who had passed through +the eight degrees of contemplation, and who was in the habit of +resorting daily to the prince's palace for his food. On that very day, +having taken his meal as usual, he ascended to the seat of +Tawadeintha,[6] and found the fortunate inhabitants of that seat giving +themselves up to uncommon rejoicings. He asked them the reason of such +an unusual display of enrapturing transports of exultation. "It is," +replied they to the inquiring Rathee, "because a son is born to King +Thoodaudana, who will soon become a true Buddha. Like all former +Buddhas, he will preach the law and exhibit in his person and throughout +his life the greatest wonders and a most accomplished pattern of the +highest virtues. We will hear the law from his very mouth." + +On hearing the answer of the Nats, Kaladewila immediately left the seat +of Tawadeintha, and directed his aerial course towards the palace of +Thoodaudana. Having entered into the palace and occupied the place +prepared for him, he conveyed to the king the good tidings of a son +having been born unto him. + +A few days after this message, the royal child was brought into the +presence of his rejoicing father. Kaladewila was present on the +occasion. Thoodaudana ordered that the child should be attired with the +finest dress, and placed in the presence of the Rathee, in order to pay +him his respects. But the child rose up and set his two feet on the +curled hair of the venerable personage. The persons present on the +occasion, not knowing that a Buddha in his last existence never bows +down to any being, thought that the head of the imprudent child would be +split into seven parts as a punishment for his unbecoming behaviour. But +Kaladewila, rising up from his seat, and lifting up his hands to his +forehead, bowed respectfully to the infant Phralaong. The king, +astonished at such an unusual condescension from so eminent a personage, +followed his example, and out of respect prostrated himself before his +son. + +By virtue of his great spiritual attainments, Kaladewila could recollect +at once all that had taken place during the forty preceding worlds, and +foresee all that would happen during the same number of future +revolutions of nature. On seeing the high perfections shining forth in +our Phralaong, he considered attentively whether he would become a +Buddha or not. Having ascertained that such a dignity was reserved for +him, he wished to know if the remaining period of his own existence +would permit him to witness the happy moment when he would be a Buddha. +To his deep regret, he foresaw that the end of his life would come +before the occurrence of that great event, and that he would have then +migrated to one of the seats of Arupa, and be, therefore, deprived of +the favour of hearing the law from his mouth. This foresight caused a +profound sadness in his heart, and abundant tears flowed from his eyes. +But when he reflected on the future destiny of the blessed child, he +could not contain within himself the pure joy that overflowed his soul. +The people present on the occasion soon observed the opposite emotions +which alternately affected the soul of Kaladewila. They asked him the +reason of such an unusual occurrence. "I rejoice," said he, "at the +glorious destiny of that child; but I feel sad and disconsolate when I +think that it will not be given to me to see and contemplate him clothed +with the dignity of Buddha. I bewail with tears my great misfortune." + +With a view of assuaging his sorrow, Kaladewila, casting another glance +towards future events, eagerly sought to discover if, among his +relatives, there would not be at least one who would be so fortunate as +to see Phralaong in the nature of Buddha. He saw with inexpressible +delight that his nephew Nalaka would enjoy the blessing denied to +himself. Thereupon he went in all haste to his sister's house, inquiring +about her son. At his request the lad was brought into his presence. +"Beloved nephew," said the venerable Rathee, "thirty-five years +hence,[7] the son of King Thoodaudana will become a Buddha; you will +contemplate him in that sublime and exalted nature. From this day, +therefore, you shall embrace the profession of Rahan." The young man, +who descended from a long succession of wealthy noblemen, said within +himself, "My uncle, indeed, never says anything but under the impulse of +irresistible and cogent motives. I will follow his advice and will +become a recluse." He immediately ordered the purchase of the insignia +of his new profession, a patta, a thingan,[8] and other articles. His +head was shaved, and he put on the yellow garb. Attired in his new +dress, he looked all round, and saw that, amongst all beings, the +Rahans are by far the most excellent. Then turning towards the place +which Phralaong occupied, he prostrated himself five successive times in +that direction, rose up, placed the patta in its bag, threw it over his +shoulder, and directed his steps towards the solitude of Himawonta, +where he devoted himself to all the exercises of his profession. At the +time Phralaong became a Buddha, our hermit went to that great master, +learnt from him the works that lead to the state of perfect stability of +mind, returned back to his solitude, and attained to the perfection of +Rahanda by the practice of the eminent works. Seven months after his +return, the end of his existence arrived, when, disentangled from all +the ties that had hitherto kept him in the world of passions, he reached +the happy state of Neibban. + + +FOOTNOTES + + [1] This country of Dewah is one of the sixteen countries, so + much celebrated in the Buddhistic annals, where the greatest + religious events have taken place. They are placed in the + centre, north, and north-west portions of Hindustan. In this + place was born the celebrated Dewadat, who became brother-in-law + to Buddha himself. But notwithstanding the close ties of + relationship that united him to so saintly a personage, Dewadat + is represented as the incarnation of evil, ever opposed to + Buddha in his benevolent designs in favour of human kind. At + last, in an attempt against his brother-in-law's life, he met + with a condign punishment. The earth burst open under his feet, + and, surrounded by devouring flames, he rolled down to the + bottom of the lowest hell, acknowledging, however, in the + accents of a true but tardy repentance, his errors and the + unconquerable power of Buddha. Three red-hot iron bars transfix + him perpendicularly, hanging him in an erect position, whilst + three other bars pierce him through the shoulders and the side. + For his repentance he is to be delivered hereafter from those + torments, and restored to earth, in order to acquire merits that + may entitle him to a better place in future existences. Some + accounts mention that he is to become a Pietzega Buddha. This + story respecting Dewadat has given rise in Burmah to a very + strange misconception. The Burmese, with their usual + thoughtlessness, on hearing of the particulars respecting the + sufferings and mode of death of our Saviour, concluded that he + must have been no other but Dewadat himself, and that, for + holding opinions opposite to those of Buddha, he suffered such a + punishment. The writer was not a little surprised to find in the + writings of the old Barnabite missionaries a lengthened + confutation of this erroneous supposition. + + [2] According to Buddhistic notions, Buddha labours during his + mortal career for the benefit of all living beings. His + benevolent and compassionate heart, free from all partiality, + feels an ardent desire of opening before them the way that leads + to deliverance from the miseries of every succeeding existence, + and of bringing them finally to the never troubled state of + Neibban. Such a generous and benevolent disposition constitutes + the genuine characteristic of Buddha. The Brahmas, inhabiting + the sixteen seats of Rupa, are all but ripe for obtaining the + crowning point of Buddhistic perfection. They only wait for the + presence of a Buddha to unloose, by his preachings, the slender + ties that keep them still connected with this material world. + The Nats, though far less advanced in merits and perfection, + eagerly look forward for the apparition of that great personage, + who is to point out to them the means of freeing themselves from + the influence of passions, and thereby destroying in them the + principle of demerits. Men, also, in their state of probation + and trial, want the mighty aid of a Buddha, who will enable them + by his transcendent doctrine to advance in merits, so as either + to arrive at once at the ever-quiescent state of Neibban, or + progress gradually on the way. Hence, on his birth, Buddha is + ministered to by those three sorts of intelligent beings, who + are particularly destined to share in the blessings his coming + is designed to shower on them. + + The mission of a Buddha is that of a saviour. His great object, + to make use of a Buddhistic expression, is, during his + existence, to procure the deliverance of all the beings that + will listen to his instructions and observe the precepts of the + law. He is distinguished by feelings of compassion and an ardent + love for all beings, as well as by an earnest desire of + labouring for their welfare. These are the true characteristics + of his heart. In this religious system mention is often made of + Pitzegabuddhas, who have all the science and merits of a Buddha, + but they are deficient in the above-mentioned qualities, which + form, as it were, the essence of a true and genuine Buddha. They + are never therefore honoured with the noble appellation of + Buddha. + + [3] The Chinese, Cochin-Chinese, Cingalese, and Nepaulese + Legends all agree in attributing to Phralaong the use of reason + from the moment he was born, as well as the power of uttering + with a proud accent the following words: "I am the greatest of + all beings; this is my last existence." To his own eyes he must + have appeared in this world without any competitor, since he + knew already that he was destined to release countless beings + from the trammels of existence, and lead them to a state of + perfect rest, screened for ever from the incessant action of + merits and demerits. He alone whose mind is deeply imbued with + Buddhistic notions can boast exultingly that he has at length + arrived at his last existence, and that, within a few years, he + will escape out of the whirlpool of endless existences, wherein + he has been turning and fluctuating from a state of happiness to + one of wretchedness. This perpetual vicissitude is to him the + greatest evil, the opposite of which is, therefore, the greatest + good. No wonder, then, to hear our Phralaong, who was better + acquainted with the miseries attending existence than any one + else, exclaiming with the accents of a complete joy--"This is my + last existence." + + The Burmese translator seems delighted to remark that on two + former occasions Phralaong, then an infant, had spoken distinct + words, which he addressed to his mother. This happened in the + beginning of the two existences during which he practised two of + the ten great virtues. It took place first on the day he was + born to that existence, when, under the name of Mahauthata, he + displayed consummate skill and wisdom. The legend of Mahauthata + is a very amusing performance, written in a very pure language, + and relating stories about as credible as those we read in the + Arabian Tales of a Thousand and One Nights. What surprised the + writer not a little, was to find, in perusing that composition, + a decision given by our Mahauthata, in a case perfectly similar + to that which showed forth, in the presence of all Israel, the + incomparable wisdom of Solomon. When Phralaong practised the + last and most perfect of virtues, liberality, carried to its + farthest limits, ending in perfect abnegation of self, and + renouncing all that he possessed, he entered, too, into this + world with the faculty of speech, and became a prince under the + name of Wethandra. The legend of Wethandra is by far the best of + all. Taking it as a mere romance, it is replete with + circumstantial details well calculated to excite the finest + emotions of the heart. The latter part, in particular, can + scarcely be read without heart-moving feelings of pity and + commiseration, on beholding our Phralaong parting willingly with + all his property, with his wife and his lovely children, and + finally offering his own person, to satisfy the ever-renewed + calls on his unbounded generosity. + + [4] In Burmah the use of the white umbrella is limited to the + king and idols. The former can never move without having some + one to hold over his head this distinguishing mark of royalty. + Any one who has been introduced into the palace of Amerapoora + will not have forgotten how great was his satisfaction on + beholding the white umbrella towering above the sides of + passages, and moving in the direction he was sitting in. He knew + that the time of his expectation was at an end, and that in a + moment he would behold the golden face. + + [5] In glancing over the genealogy of the twenty-eight last + Buddhas, the writer has observed that every Buddha has always + obtained the supreme intelligence under the shadow of some + trees. Our Phralaong, as will be seen hereafter, attained to the + exalted dignity of Buddha under the tree Baudhi (_ficus + religiosa_), which grew up spontaneously at the very moment he + was born. The writer has never been able to discover any + well-grounded reason to account for this remarkable + circumstance, so carefully noted down, relating the particulars + attending the elevation of a being to this high station. For + want of a better one, he will be permitted to hazard the + following conjecture. Our Phralaong, previous to his becoming a + Buddha, withdrew into solitude for the purpose of fitting + himself for his future calling, in imitation of all his + predecessors, leading an ascetic life, and devoting all his + undivided attention and mental energies to meditation and + contemplation, coupled with works of the most rigorous + mortification. The senses, he knew well, were to be submitted to + the uncontrolled sway of reason, by allowing to himself only + what was barely requisite for supporting nature. Regardless of + every comfort, his mind was bent upon acquiring the sublime + knowledge of the principle and origin of all things, on + fathoming the miseries of all beings, and on endeavouring to + discover the most efficacious means of affording them a thorough + relief, by pointing out to them the road they had to follow in + order to disentangle themselves from the trammels of existence, + and arrive at a state of perfect rest. In common with all other + ascetics, our Phralaong had no other shelter against the + inclemency of the seasons but the protecting shadow of trees. It + was under the cooling and refreshing foliage of the trees of the + forests, that he spent his time in the placid and undisturbed + work of meditation, acquiring gradually that matchless knowledge + and consummate wisdom which he needed for carrying on to + perfection the benevolent undertaking he had in contemplation. + + [6] It is a maxim generally received amongst Buddhists, that + he who has far advanced in the way of perfection acquires + extraordinary privileges both in his soul and his body. The + latter obtains a sort of spiritualised nature, or rather matter + becomes so refined and purified that he is enabled to travel + over distances with almost the rapidity of the thought of the + mind. The former, by the help of continual meditation on the + causes and nature of all things, enlarges incessantly its sphere + of knowledge. The remembrance of the past revives in the mind. + From the lofty position such a being is placed in, he calmly + considers and watches the movement of events that will take + place in future times. The more his mind expands, and the sphere + of his knowledge extends, the greater are the perfections and + refinements attending the coarser part of his being. + + [7] According to the prophecy of Kaladewila, Phralaong is to + become Buddha when thirty-five years old. The total duration of + his life being eighty years, it follows that he has lived as + Buddha forty-five years. The advice of the old Rathee to his + nephew Nalaka, to become a Rahan in order to better dispose + himself to welcome the coming of Buddha, and listen with greater + benefit to his preachings, leads me to make a remark and write + down an observation that has been already alluded to. From this + passage and many others which the reader will easily notice + hereafter, as well as from the example of Buddha himself, one + must suppose that at the time Phralaong was born, some + institutions, the most important one at least, viz., that of the + Rahans, recluses, or monks, already existed in a more or less + perfect state. Relying solely on the authority of this Legend, + no attempt at denying this supposition can ever be made. + Kaladewila speaks of the order of Rahans as of a thing well + known. Nalaka sends to the bazaar for the purchase of the dress + and other articles he wanted for his new mode of life. + Phralaong, on his way to his garden, sees a Rahan, whose habits + and manners are described to him by his coachman. Having become + Buddha, he meets with ascetics and recluses living in community, + leading a life much resembling that which he is supposed to have + hereafter instituted, holding but few opinions, which, according + to his own standard, were heretical. From these facts flows the + natural conclusion that Gaudama is not the inventor or + originator of all the Buddhistic disciplinary institutions. He + found among the multifarious sects of Brahminism many practices + and ordinances which he approved of and incorporated or embodied + in his new system. This is another proof, amounting to a + demonstration, that Buddhism is an offshoot of the great Hindu + system. In this respect, Gaudama borrowed largely from what he + found existing in his own days, in the schools he resorted to, + and re-echoed many tenets upheld by the masters under whom he + studied the sciences and the training to morals and virtue. He + enlarged and developed certain favourite theories and principles + which had found favour with him; at the same time, for the + purpose of leading his disciples to perfection, he enforced many + disciplinary regulations, almost similar to those he had been + subjected to during the years of his probation. He was certainly + an ardent promoter of the perfected and improved system he + endeavoured to introduce. + + [8] The Thingan or Tsiwaran is composed of three parts--the + thinbaing, resembling an ample petticoat, bound up to the waist, + with a leathern girdle, and falling down to the heels; the + kowot, which consists of a sort of cloak of a rectangular shape, + covering the shoulders and breast, and reaching somewhat below + the knee; and the dougout, which is a piece of cloth of the same + shape, folded many times, thrown over the left shoulder when + going abroad, and used to sit on when no proper seat has been + prepared. The colour of these three pieces, constituting the + dress of a recluse, is invariably yellow. The jack-tree supplies + the material for dyeing the cloth yellow. In order to maintain a + spirit of perfect poverty among the members of the order of the + recluse, the Wini prescribes that the tsiwaran ought to be made + up with rags picked up here and there, and sewed together. The + rule, in this respect, at least as far as its spirit goes, is + thoroughly disregarded, and has become almost a dead letter. + + The hairs of the head and the beard, being too often objects + which vanity turns to its own purposes, are, to say the least, + mere superfluities. A stern contemner of worldly things must, of + course, do away with things which may prove temptations to him, + or at least afford him unnecessary trouble. Hence no layman can + ever aspire to become a Rahan unless he has previously submitted + to the operation of a complete shaving of the head, including + even the eye-brows. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + + _A Name is given to the child -- Prediction of the Pounhas + respecting the child -- Death of Maia -- Miraculous occurrence + at the child's cradle -- Adolescence of the Phralaong -- He sees + the four signs -- Return from the garden to the royal city._ + + +Five days after the birth of Phralaong, took place the ceremony of +washing the head and giving him a name. In the apartment of the palace +several kinds of perfumed wood and essences, such as sandal-wood, +lignum, aloes, camphor, &c., were strewed profusely, as well as the most +exquisitely scented flowers and parched rice. The nogana (a sort of +beverage made of milk, sugar, and honey) was prepared in great +abundance. One hundred and eighty Pounhas,[1] the most versed in the +science of astrology, were invited to partake of a splendid +entertainment in the palace. The king made to every one of them costly +presents, and desired them to examine carefully all the signs, +prognosticating the future destiny of his son. Amidst that crowd of +soothsayers, eight Pounhas were present, who explained the dream that +Maia had in the beginning of her pregnancy. Seven of them, lifting up +the index[2] of each hand of the child, were amazed at the wonderful +signs their eyes met. "If this child," said they, "remain in the society +of men, he will become a mighty ruler that will bring all nations under +his sway; but if he embrace the profession of recluse, he will certainly +become a Buddha." They began to foretell the incomparable glory and high +honours that would attend his universal reign. The eighth Pounha, named +Kauntagnia, the descendant of the celebrated son of Thoodata, and the +youngest of all, raised up the index of one hand of the child. Struck +with the wonderful and unmistakable signs that forced themselves on his +view, he exclaimed, "No! this child will not remain long in the society +of men; he will free himself from the vicissitudes[3] and miseries +attending the existence of all beings, and will finally become a +Buddha." As the child was to be the instrument for promoting the welfare +and merits of all mortals, they gave him the name of Theiddat. + +Seven days after her confinement Maia died, and by the virtue of her +merits migrated to the seat of Toocita, and became the daughter of a +Nat.[G] Her death was not the result of her delivery, but she departed +this world because the term of her life had come. On their return to +their home, the Pounhas assembled their children and said to them, "We +are already advanced in years. We dare not promise to ourselves that we +will ever see the son of King Thoodaudana become a Buddha; but to you +such a favour is reserved. Listen respectfully to all his instructions, +and endeavour to enter the profession of Rahan without delay, and +withdraw into solitude. Let us also all join you in that holy vocation." +Three Pounhas refused the invitation, and would not enter the +profession. The five others cheerfully gave up everything, and became +distinguished members of the ascetic body. + + [G] Maia was confined in the beginning of the third age. This + expression is rather a very loose and general one, and is far + from indicating, with any approach to accuracy, the period of + Maia's age when she was delivered of her son. The age of man is + divided into three parts. The first extends from birth to the + sixteenth or eighteenth year; the second goes to the forty-fifth + year or thereabout; and the third, from the forty-fifth year to + the end of life. Phralaong was born on the 68th year of the + Eatzana era, on the 6th after the full moon of the month + Katsong. Maia was therefore fifty-six years old. The author of + this work strives hard to prove this the age, apparently + advanced of Maia, was the best fitted for securing the safety + and perfection of the fruit of her womb. + +King Thoodaudana, hearing of the explanation given by the Pounhas, +inquired whether his son was really to become a Rahan. Having been +assured that all the signs predicted the future destiny of his son to +such a calling, he desired to know what those signs were. He was told +that the four following things were the very signs foreshowing the +future career of his son, viz., an old man, a sick man, a dead man, and +a recluse.[4] As soon as his son should successively remark those four +signs, he would immediately come to the conclusion that the state of +Rahan alone is worthy of the warm admiration and eager wishes of a wise +man. + +King Thoodaudana, who ardently wished to see his son become a great +monarch, whose sway would extend over the four great islands and the two +thousand smaller ones, gave the strictest orders that none of the four +omens should ever meet his eyes. Guards were placed in every direction +at distances of a mile, charged with but one care, that of keeping out +of his son's sight the appearance of these fatal omens. + +On that day eighty thousand noblemen, who were present at the great +rejoicings, pledged themselves each one to give one of his male children +to attend on the royal infant. "If he become," said they, "a mighty +monarch, let our sons be ever with him, as a guard of honour to confer +additional lustre on his wonderful reign. If he be ever elevated to the +sublime dignity of Buddha, let our children enter the holy profession of +recluse, and follow him whithersoever he may direct his steps." + +Thoodaudana, with the tender solicitude of a vigilant father, procured +for his beloved offspring nurses exempt from all corporeal defects, and +remarkable for their beautiful and graceful appearance. + +The child grew up, surrounded with a brilliant retinue of numerous +attendants. + +On a certain day happened the joyful feast of the ploughing season. The +whole country, by the magnificence of the ornaments that decorated it, +resembled one of the seats of Nats. The country people without +exception, wearing new dresses, went to the palace. One thousand ploughs +and the same number of pairs of bullocks were prepared for the occasion. +Eight hundred ploughs, less one, were to be handled and guided by +noblemen. The ploughs, as well as the yokes and the horns of the +bullocks, were covered with silver leaves. But the one reserved for the +monarch was covered with leaves of gold. Accompanied by a countless +crowd of his people, King Thoodaudana left the royal city and went into +the middle of extensive fields. The royal infant was brought out by his +nurses on this joyful occasion. A splendid jambu tree (_Eugenia_), +loaded with thick and luxuriant green foliage, offered on that spot a +refreshing place under the shade of its far-spreading branches. Here the +bed of the child was deposited. A gilt canopy was immediately raised +above it, and curtains, embroidered with gold, were disposed round it. +Guardians having been appointed to watch over the infant, the king, +attended by all his courtiers, directed his steps towards the place +where all the ploughs were held in readiness. He instantly put his hands +to his own plough; eight hundred noblemen, less one, and the country +people followed his example. Pressing forward his bullocks, the king +ploughed to and fro through the extent of the fields. All the ploughmen, +emulating their royal lord, drove their ploughs in a uniform direction. +The scene presented a most animated and stirring spectacle on an immense +scale. The applauding multitude filled the air with cries of joy and +exultation. The nurses, who kept watch by the side of the infant's +cradle, excited by the animated scene, forgot the prince's orders, and +ran near to the spot to enjoy the soul-stirring sight displayed before +their admiring eyes. Phralaong, casting a glance all round, and seeing +no one close by him, rose up instantly, and, sitting in a cross-legged +position, remained absorbed as it were in a profound meditation. The +other nurses, busy in preparing the prince's meal, had spent more time +than was at first contemplated. The shadow of the trees had, by the +movement of the sun, turned in an opposite direction. The nurses, +reminded by this sight that the infant had been left alone, and that his +couch was exposed to the rays of the sun, hastened back to the spot they +had so imprudently left. But great was their surprise when they saw that +the shadow of the jambu tree had not changed its position, and that the +child was quietly sitting on his bed. The news of that wonder was +immediately conveyed to King Thoodaudana, who came in all haste to +witness it. He forthwith prostrated himself before his son, saying, +"This is, beloved child, the second time that I bow to you." + +Phralaong[5] having reached his sixteenth year, his father ordered three +palaces to be built for each season of the year. Each palace had nine +stories; and forty thousand maidens, skilful in playing all sorts of +musical instruments, were in continual attendance upon him, and charmed +all his moments by uninterrupted dances and music. Phralaong appeared +among them with the beauty and dignity of a Nat, surrounded with an +immense retinue of daughters of Nats. According to the change of seasons +he passed from one palace into another, moving as it were in a circle of +ever-renewed pleasures and amusements. It was then that Phralaong was +married to the beautiful Yathaudara, his first cousin, and the daughter +of Thouppabudha and of Amitau. It was in the eighty-sixth year of his +grandfather's era that he was married, and also consecrated Prince royal +by the pouring of the blessed water over his head. + +Whilst Phralaong was spending his time in the midst of pleasures, his +relatives complained to the king of the conduct of his son. They +strongly remonstrated against his mode of living, which precluded him +from applying himself to the acquisition of those attainments befitting +his exalted station. Sensible of these reproaches, Thoodaudana sent for +his son, to whom he made known the complaints directed against him by +his relatives. Without showing any emotion, the young prince replied, +"Let it be announced at the sound of the drum throughout the country, +that this day week I will show to my relatives in the presence of the +best masters that I am fully conversant with the eighteen sorts of arts +and sciences." On the appointed day he displayed before them the extent +of his knowledge; they were satisfied, and their doubts and anxieties on +his account were entirely removed. + +On a certain day Phralaong, desiring to go and enjoy some sports in his +garden, ordered his coachman to have his conveyance ready for that +purpose. Four horses, richly caparisoned, were put to a beautiful +carriage, that resembled the dwelling-place of a Nat. Phralaong having +occupied his seat, the coachman drove rapidly towards the garden. The +Nats, who knew that the time was near at hand when Phralaong would +become a Buddha, resolved to place successively before his eyes the four +signs foreshowing his future high dignity. One of them assumed the form +of an old man, the body bending forward, with grey hairs, a shrivelled +skin, and leaning languidly on a heavy staff. In that attire, he +advanced slowly, with trembling steps, towards the prince's conveyance. +He was seen and remarked only by Phralaong and his coachman. "Who is +that man?" said the prince to his driver; "the hairs of his head, +indeed, do not resemble those of other men." "Prince," answered the +coachman, "he is an old man. Every born being is doomed to become like +him; his appearance must undergo the greatest changes, the skin by the +action of time will shrivel, the hairs turn grey, the veins and +arteries, losing their suppleness and elasticity, will become stiff and +hardened, the flesh will gradually sink and almost disappear, leaving +the bare bones covered with dry skin." "What?" said to himself the +terrified prince; "birth is indeed a great evil, ushering all beings +into a wretched condition, which must be inevitably attended with the +disgusting infirmities of old age!" His mind being taken up entirely +with such considerations, he ordered his coachman to drive back to the +palace. Thoodaudana, having inquired from his courtiers what motive had +induced his son to return so soon from the place of amusement, was told +that he had seen an old man, and that he entertained the thought of +becoming a Rahan.[H] "Alas!" said he, "they will succeed in thwarting +the high destiny of my son. But let us try now every means to afford him +some distraction, so that he may forget the evil idea that has just +started up in his mind." He gave orders to bring to his son's palace the +prettiest and most accomplished dancing-girls, that, in the midst of +ever renewed pleasure, he might lose sight of the thought of ever +entering the profession of Rahan. The guard surrounding his palace was +doubled, so as to preclude the possibility of his ever seeing the other +signs. + + [H] In the course of this work the word Rahan is often used. It + is of the greatest importance that the reader should firmly + seize the meaning that it is designed to convey. We find it + employed to designate, in general, the religious belonging + either to the Buddhistic or Brahminical sects. When Buddhists + happen to mention their brethren of the opposite creed, who have + renounced the world and devoted themselves to the practice of + religious duties, they invariably call them Rahans. When they + speak of Pounhas or Brahmins, who are living in the world, + leading an ordinary secular mode of life, they never style them + Rahans. Thence we may safely infer that the individuals to whom + this denomination was applied formed a class of devotees quite + distinct from the laymen. + + That class, it appears, comprised all the individuals who lived + either in community under the superintendence and guidance of a + spiritual superior, or privately in forests under the protecting + shade of trees, and in lonely and solitary places. The latter + religious are, however, generally designated by the appellation + of Ascetics and Rathees. They were the forefathers of those + fanatics who up to our days have appeared through the breadth + and length of the Indian Peninsula, practising penitential deeds + of the most cruel and revolting description. They are described + by Buddhists as wearing curled and twisted hair, clad in the + skins of wild beasts, and not unfrequently quite destitute of + any sort of clothing, and in a state of complete nakedness. + + The former, who lived in community, did not lead the same course + of life. We find some communities, the three, for instance, + under the guidance of the three Kathabas, in the Ouroowela + forest, not far from Radzagio, whose inmates are called either + Rahans or Rathees. This indicates that their mode of life + partook both of the common and hermitical life, resembling, to a + certain extent, that which was observed by the Christian + communities of cenobites established in the desert of Upper + Egypt during the first ages of our era. + + Those communities appear to have been the centres in which + principles were established, opinions discussed, and theories + elaborated. The chiefs enjoyed high reputation for learning. + Persons desirous to acquire proficiency in science resorted to + their abode, and, under their tuition, strove to acquire wisdom. + The following pages of this work will afford several striking + illustrations of the view just sketched out. + +On another day, Phralaong, on his way to his garden, met with the same +Nat under the form of a sick man, who appeared quite sinking under the +weight of the most loathsome disease. Frightened at such a sight, +Phralaong, hearing from the mouth of his faithful driver what this +disgusting object was, returned in all haste to his palace. His father, +more and more disturbed at the news conveyed to him, multiplied the +pleasures and enjoyments destined for his son, and doubled the number of +guards that had to watch over him. On a third occasion, whilst the +prince was taking a walk, the same Nat, assuming the shape of a dead +man, offered to the astonished regards of the prince the shocking sight +of a corpse. Trembling with fear, the young prince came back forthwith +to his residence. Thoodaudana, being soon informed of what had taken +place, resorted to fresh precautions, and extended to the distance of +one youdzana the immense line of countless guards set all round the +palace. + +On a fourth occasion, the prince, driving rapidly towards his garden, +was met on his way by the same Nat under the meek form of a Rahan. The +curiosity of the prince was awakened by the extraordinary sight of that +new personage: he asked his coachman what he was. "Prince," answered the +coachman, "he is a Rahan." At the same time, though little acquainted +with the high dignity and sublime qualifications of a recluse, he was +enabled, by the power of the Nats, to praise and extol in dignified +language the profession and merits of Rahans. The prince felt +instantaneously an almost irresistible inclination to embrace that +attractive mode of life. He quietly went as far as his garden. + +The whole day was spent in all sorts of rural diversions. Having bathed +in a magnificent tank, he went a little before sunset to rest awhile on +a large well-polished stone table, overshaded by the far-spread branches +of beautiful trees hanging above it, waiting for the time to put on his +richest dress. All his attendants were busily engaged in preparing the +finest clothes and most elegant ornaments. When all was ready, they +stood silent round him, waiting for his orders. Perfumes of every +description were disposed in a circular row with the various ornaments +on the table whereon the prince was sitting. + +At that very moment a chief Thagia was quietly enjoying a delicious and +refreshing rest on the famous stone table called Pantoo Kambala. On a +sudden, he felt his seat as it were getting hot. "Lo! what does this +mean?" said the astonished Thagia; "am I doomed to lose my happy state?" +Having recollected himself, and reflected a while on the cause of such a +wonderful occurrence, he soon knew that Phralaong was preparing to put +on for the last time his princely dress. He called to him the son of a +Nat, named Withakioon, and said to him, "On this day, at midnight, +Prince Theiddat is to leave his palace and withdraw into solitude. Now +he is in his garden, preparing to put on his richest attire for the last +time. Go, therefore, without a moment's delay, to the place where he is +sitting, surrounded by his attendants, and perform to him all the +required services." Bowing respectfully to the chief of Thagias, +Withakioon obeyed, and by the power inherent in the nature of Nats, he +was in an instant carried to the presence of Phralaong. He assumed the +figure of his barber, and immediately set to work to arrange the turban +with as much taste as art round his head. Phralaong soon found out that +the skilful hand which disposed the folds of his head-dress was not that +of a man, but of a Nat. One fold of the turban appeared like one +thousand, and ten folds like ten thousand folds, offering the magical +_coup-d'oeil_ of as many different pieces of cloth, arranged with the +most consummate skill. The extremity of the turban, which crossed +vertically the whole breadth of the countless folds, appeared covered +with a profusion of shining rubies. The head of Phralaong was small, but +the folds of the turban seemed numberless. How could that be so? It is a +wonder surpassing our understanding; it would be rashness and temerity +to allow our minds to dwell too much upon it. + +Having completely dressed, Phralaong[6] found himself surrounded by all +sorts of musicians, singers, and dancers, vying with each other in their +endeavours to increase the rejoicing. The Pounhas sang aloud his praise. +"May he conquer and triumph! May his wishes and desires be ever +fulfilled!" The multitude repeated incessantly in his honour stanzas of +praises and blessings. In the midst of universal rejoicings, Phralaong +ascended his carriage. He had scarcely seated himself on it, when a +message, sent by his father, conveyed to him the gladdening tidings that +Yathaudara had been delivered of a son. "That child," replied he with +great coolness, "is a new and strong tie that I will have to break." The +answer having been brought to his father, Thoodaudana could not +understand its meaning. He, however, caused his grandson to be named +Raoula. Phralaong, sitting in his carriage, surrounded by crowds of +people, who rent the air with cries of joy and jubilation, entered into +the city of Kapilawot. At that moment a princess, named Keissa Gautami, +was contemplating from her apartments the triumphant entrance of +Phralaong into the city. She admired the noble and graceful deportment +of Prince Theiddat, and exclaimed with feelings of inexpressible +delight, "Happy the father and mother who have such an incomparable son! +happy the wife who is blest with such an accomplished husband!" On +hearing those words, Phralaong desired to understand their meaning and +know their bearing. "By what means," said he to himself, "can a heart +find peace and happiness?" As his heart was already disentangled from +the thraldom of passions, he readily perceived that real happiness could +be found but in the extinction of concupiscence, pride, ignorance, and +other passions. He resolved henceforth to search ardently for the happy +state of Neibban, by quitting the world that very night, leaving the +society of men, and withdrawing into solitude. Detaching from his neck a +collar of pearls of immense value, he sent it to Keissa Gautami, as a +token of gratitude for the excellent lesson she had given him by the +words which she had uttered in his praise. The young princess received +it as a mark of favour which she imagined Prince Theiddat intended to +pay her. Without further notice of her, he retired into his own +apartment to enjoy some rest. + + +FOOTNOTES + + [1] Which of the two systems, Buddhism or Brahminism, is the + most ancient? This is a question which learned Orientalists have + in former days variously answered. If, however, some credit is + to be given to this Legend, and the hero thereof is to be + regarded as the author of Buddhism, the solution of that + much-controverted question is comparatively easy, and seems to + admit of no doubt. Priority of antiquity is decidedly in favour + of Brahminism. At the time Buddha was born, and in his own + country, we find already subsisting the great politico-religious + fabric of Hinduism. The distinction of caste is already + mentioned in several passages. We find the Pounhas or Brahmins + already monopolising the lucrative trade of soothsaying, and + regarded as the best informed among their countrymen. They are + treated with great respect and consideration even by proud + monarchs, who testify their regard for them by costly presents + and every possible mark of distinction. It is true that their + caste is not always spoken of with great regard by Buddhist + authors; but this is to be attributed to the deadly enmity that + prevailed at a later period between those two great rival sects, + which have so long struggled for supremacy over the Indian + Peninsula. The Brahminical creed is spoken of in very + disparaging terms by Buddhists; and, as a matter of course, they + have been reciprocally handled severely by their opponents. To + those who feel inclined to regard Buddha as but a great reformer + of a religious system already existing, the question will not + appear cleared of all difficulty. But upon them rests the task + of establishing on uncontrovertible grounds their hypothesis, + ere any serious attention can be paid to the conclusion they + would fain infer in favour of the superior antiquity of + Buddhism. As for us, we believe Buddha to be the real author of + the great religious system under examination. But, at the same + time, we readily concede that many elements found existing in + those days were seized upon by Buddha, and skilfully arranged so + as to harmonise well with his plans. + + [2] Superstition and ignorance seem to have been in all ages and + under every climate the prolific source of human follies and + mental delusions. Man has always been and will ever be the same + ridiculously superstitious being, as long as his mind is left to + itself, unenlightened by revelation. With few exceptions, the + greatest men of Italy and Greece were as superstitious as the + _vulgus_, to whom, in every other respect, they were so + superior. The resemblance error bears to truth, when human + passions have some interest at stake, deceives many; under + deceitful appearances it finds its way to the mind, and then + clings to the heart. There is in man an innate desire of tearing + asunder the thick veil that hides from him the knowledge of + future events. Unable to comprehend the perfect economy of an + all-wise Providence in the disposition and management of the + affairs of this world, he has recourse to the most absurd means + for satiating the cravings of his inordinate curiosity. Hence + the prevailing superstition of those days, which induced men to + believe that Brahmins, on inspecting the inner part of the hand, + could discover certain signs, foreshowing the good or bad + destiny of every individual. + + [3] Metempsychosis, or the transmigration of the soul from one + state of existence into another in the same world, is one of the + leading dogmas of Buddhism. Many passages of the present work, + or rather the Buddhistic system as a whole, can never be + understood unless this tenet be always borne in mind. It is by + passing through countless existences that a being is slowly + purified of his imperfections, and gradually advances in the way + of merits and perfection. The sacred writings of Buddhists + mention that our Phralaong had to range, during innumerable + existences, the whole series of the animal kingdom, from the + dove to the elephant, ere he could be born in the state of man, + when, in this condition, he, as stated by himself, went often + into hell to atone for certain trespassings. Pythagoras had + likely borrowed, and received directly or indirectly from the + East, this doctrine, which his school re-echoed throughout + Greece and Italy. The end of metempsychosis is, according to + Buddhists, the state of Neibban. On this point the author of + Buddhism has been at variance with other religious schools, + which in his own days held and professed the dogma of + transmigration. + + [4] The three first allegorical omens or signs which, according + to the foretelling of the Pounhas, were to be seen and observed + hereafter by Phralaong, are designed to mean and express the + compound of all miseries attending human existence, from the + moment man crosses the threshold of life to that of death. The + view of these objects was intended to make him disgusted with a + state necessarily accompanied with such an amount of + wretchedness. He was soon induced by reflection to hold in + contempt the things of this world, and consequently to seek with + ardour some means of estranging himself from all visible and + material objects. The fourth sign, that is to say, the view of a + Rahan, or a contemner of this world, aspiring to perfect + disengagement from the trammels of passion, and shaping his + course towards Neibban, was the very pattern he had to imitate + and follow for arriving to that state of perfection which he + felt a strong, though as yet somewhat confused, desire of + possessing. + + The Nats or Dewatas are the ever-ready ministers for affording + to Phralaong the assistance he requires to reach in safety the + Buddhaship. They rejoice at the news of his approaching + conception in the womb of Maia; they watch over the mother who + is to give birth to so blessed a child; they receive the + newly-born infant, and hand him over to men; they baffle, by + their almost supernatural power, the obstacles which the + worldly-minded Thoodaudana tries to throw in the way of his + son's vocation; in a word, their angelical ministrations are + always at hand to help and protect our Phralaong, and enable him + to reach that state wherein he shall be fully qualified for + announcing to men the law of deliverance. The belief in the + agency of angels between heaven and earth, and their being the + messengers of God for conveying, on solemn occasions, his + mandates to men, is coeval, according to sacred records, with + the appearance of man in this world. Innumerable are the + instances of angelical ministrations mentioned in the holy writ. + We look upon angels as mere spiritual substances, assuming a + human form, when, by the command of God, they have to bring down + to men some divine message. In the system of the Buddhists, Nats + are described as having bodies indeed, but of such a pure + nature, particularly those inhabiting the superior seats, that + they are not only not subjected to the miseries inherent in our + nature, but are moreover gifted with such superior attainments + as almost to enjoy the perfections and qualifications inherent + in the nature of spirits. On this occasion the Nats are + endeavouring to make virtue triumph over vice; but, in the + course of this legend, we will have several opportunities of + remarking a counteraction worked up by evil or wicked Nats for + upholding the reign of passion or of sin. In this system the two + contending elements of good and evil have each its own advocates + and supporters. A Hindu Milton might have found two thousand + years ago a ready theme for writing, in Sanscrit or Pali, a poem + similar to that more recently composed by the immortal English + bard. + + [5] From what has been already mentioned of the life of our + Phralaong, we may see that many particulars regarding his birth + and his childhood have been described with sufficient accuracy; + but little or nothing is said of his adolescence, at least until + the age of sixteen, when he gets united to the famous and + youthful Yathaudara. In common with many other great men, almost + all the years of the private life of this celebrated and + extraordinary personage are wrapped up in a complete obscurity. + We may conclude from his great proficiency in the knowledge of + those sciences and attainments befitting his high situation, he + was not remiss, since he was enabled to set at defiance the + greatest masters of those days. In the midst of pleasures he + knew how to devote the best part of his time to study, unless we + suppose that science was infused into his mind by no exertion of + his own. The Burmese have a regular mania for dividing with a + mathematical precision what at first appears to admit of no such + division. Virtues, vices, sciences, arts, &c., all, in a word, + are subjected to a rigorous division, which, if arbitrary in + itself, has the great advantage of conferring a substantial help + to the memory. + + [6] The triumphant return of Phralaong from his garden to the + city, when he is attired with the richest dress, is commemorated + by Buddhists, at least in Burmah, on the day a young boy is + preparing to enter into a monastery of recluses for the purpose + of putting on the yellow robe, and preparing himself to become + afterwards a member of the order, if he feel an inclination to + enlist in its ranks. Phralaong was bidding a last farewell to + the world, its pomps and vanities. So the youthful candidate is + doing who is led processionally through the streets, riding a + richly-caparisoned horse, or sitting on an elegant palanquin, + carried on the shoulders of men. A description of this ceremony + will be found in the notice on the Buddhistic monks or + Talapoins. + + I am obliged to confess that I have found it somewhat difficult + to discover any connection between the expressions made use of + by Keissa Gautami and the inference drawn therefrom by + Phralaong. The explanation of the difficulty may be, however, + stated as follows:--Gautami bestows the epithet happy or blessed + upon the father and mother as well as on the wife of Prince + Theiddat, because she remarked and observed in him those + qualities and accomplishments befitting a worthy son and a good + husband. The words blessed and happy struck the mind of the + future Buddha, attracted his attention, and drew forth his + exertions to find out their true import. He asks himself, In + what consists true and real happiness? Where is it to be found? + By what means can such an invaluable treasure be procured? Can + it be conferred upon man by the possession of some exterior + object? Can his parents or wife be really happy by the mere + accidental ties that connect them with his person? No, answers + our young philosopher to himself: Happiness can be procured but + by waging war against passions, and carrying it on until their + total destruction. Then the victorious soul, sitting calmly on + the ruins of her deadly opponents, enjoys in the undisturbed + contemplation of truth an indescribable happiness. In this we + clearly perceive the unmistakable bearing of Buddhistic morals. + It is as it were the embryo of the whole system. + + King Thoodaudana, influenced by worldly considerations, eagerly + wished his son to become a great monarch instead of a poor and + humble recluse, even a Buddha. This alone suggests the idea that + in those days the _role_ of a Buddha was not held in so great an + esteem and veneration as it was afterwards. Had it been + otherwise, the most ambitious father might have remained well + satisfied with the certainty of seeing his own son becoming a + personage before whom the proudest monarch would one day lower + to the dust their crowned heads. + + At that time a Buddha, or the personage honoured with that + title, was looked upon as a mere sage, distinguished among his + fellow-men by his great wisdom and eminent proficiency in the + study of philosophy. It is highly probable that this name had + been bestowed upon a great many illustrious individuals who + lived before the days of Gaudama. Hence the fabricated genealogy + of twenty-eight former Buddhas, supposed to have lived myriads + of years and worlds previously, including the three that have + preceded him during the continuance of this system of nature. + Here a superstitious and ill-judged enthusiasm has raised up + heaps of extravagancies, setting up a ridiculous theory, + designed to connect the _role_ of the present Buddha with those + of a fabulous antiquity, and give additional lustre to it. There + is no doubt that the glowing halo of sacredness and glory, + encircling now the name of Buddha, has never adorned that of any + former one. It has been created by the extraordinary progress + his doctrines made at first in the Indian Peninsula, and next + throughout eastern Asia, and kept up by the fervent admiration + of his enthusiastic followers. + + The means resorted to by Thoodaudana to retain his son in the + world of passions, and thereby thwart his vocation, could not, + we hardly need mention, be approved of by any moralist of even + the greatest elasticity of conscience and principles; but they + were eminently fitted to try the soundness of Phralaong's + calling, and the strong and tenacious dispositions of his + energetic mind. They set out in vivid colours the firmness of + purpose and irresistible determination of his soul in following + up his vocation to a holier mode of life; and what is yet more + wonderful, the very objects that were designed to enslave him + became the instruments which helped him in gaining and + ascertaining his liberty. Magnificent, indeed, is the spectacle + offered by a young prince remaining unmoved in the midst of the + most captivating, soul-stirring, and heart-melting attractions; + sitting coolly on his couch, and looking with indifference, nay, + with disgust, on the crowd of sleeping beauties. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + + _Phralaong leaves his palace, the royal city, and retires into + solitude, amidst the plaudits of the Nats -- He cuts his fine + hair with a stroke of his sword, and puts on the habit of Rahan + -- He begs his food at Radzagio -- His interview with the ruler + of that place -- His studies under two Rathees -- His fast and + penances in the solitude of Oorouwela during six years._ + + +Phralaong had scarcely begun to recline on his couch, when a crowd of +young damsels, whose beauty equalled that of the daughters of Nats, +executed all sorts of dances to the sound of the most ravishing +symphony, and displayed in all their movements the graceful forms of +their elegant and well-shaped persons, in order to make some impression +upon his heart. But all was in vain; they were foiled in their repeated +attempts. Phralaong fell into a deep sleep. The damsels, in their +disappointment, ceased their dances, laid aside their musical +instruments, and, soon following the example of Phralaong, quietly +yielded to the soporific influence caused by their useless and harassing +exertions. The lamps, lighted with fragrant oil, continued to pour a +flood of bright light throughout the apartments. Phralaong awoke a +little before midnight, and sat in a cross-legged position on his couch. +Looking all around him, he saw the varied attitudes and uninviting +appearance of the sleeping damsels. Some were snoring, others gnashing +their teeth, others had their mouths wide open; some tossed heavily from +the right to the left side, others stretched one arm upwards and the +other downwards; some, seized as it were with a frantic pang, suddenly +coiled up their legs for a while, and with the same violent motion +again pushed them down. This unexpected exhibition made a strong +impression on Phralaong; his heart was set, if possible, freer from the +ties of concupiscence, or rather he was confirmed in his contempt for +all worldly pleasures. It appeared to him that his magnificent +apartments were filled with the most loathsome and putrid carcasses. The +seats of passions, those of Rupa and those of Arupa, that is to say, the +whole world, seemed, to his eyes, like a house that is a prey to the +devouring flames. "All that," said he to himself, "is most disgusting +and despicable." At the same time his ardent desires for the profession +of Rahan were increasing with an uncontrollable energy. "On this day, at +this very moment," said he with an unshaken firmness, "I will retire +into a solitary place." He rose instantly and went to the arched door of +his apartment. "Who is here watching?" said he to the first person he +met. "Your servant," replied instantly the vigilant nobleman Tsanda. +"Rise up quickly," replied the prince; "now I am ready to retire from +the world and resort to some lonely place. Go to the stable and prepare +the fastest of my horses." Tsanda bowed respectfully to his master, and +executed his orders with the utmost celerity. The horse Kantika, knowing +the intentions of the prince, felt an inexpressible joy at being +selected for such a good errand, and he testified his joy by loud +neighs; but, by the power of the Nats, the sound of his voice was +silenced, so that none heard it. + +While Tsanda, in compliance with the orders he had received, was making +the necessary preparations, Phralaong desired to see his newly born son +Raoula. He opened gently the door of the room where the princess was +sleeping, having one of her hands placed over the head of the infant. +Phralaong, stopping at the threshold, said to himself:--"If I go farther +to contemplate the child, I will have to remove the hand of the mother; +she may be awakened by this movement, and then she will prove a great +obstacle to my departure. I will see the child after I have become a +Buddha." He then instantly shut the door and left the palace. His +charger was waiting for him. "To your swiftness," said Phralaong to +Kantika, "do I trust for executing my great design. I must become a +Buddha, and labour for the deliverance of men and Nats from the miseries +of existence, and lead them safely to the peaceful shores of Neibban." +In a moment he was on the back of his favourite horse. Kantika was a +magnificent animal; his body measured eighteen cubits in length, with +which his height and circumference were in perfect proportion. The hair +was of a beautiful white, resembling a newly cleaned shell; his +swiftness was unrivalled, and his neighings could be heard at a very +great distance; but on this occasion the Nats interfered, no sound of +his voice was heard, and the noise of his steps was completely silenced. +Having reached the gate of the city, Phralaong stopped for a while, +uncertain as regarded the course he was to follow. To open the gate, +which a thousand men could with difficulty cause to turn upon its +hinges, was deemed an impossibility. Whilst he was deliberating with his +faithful attendant Tsanda, the huge gate was silently opened by the +Nats, and a free passage given to him through it. It was in the year 97 +when he left Kapilawot. + +Phralaong had scarcely crossed the threshold of the gate when the +tempter endeavoured to thwart his pious design. Manh[1] Nat resolved to +prevent him from retiring into solitude and becoming a Buddha. Standing +in the air, he cried aloud, "Prince Theiddat, do not attempt to lead the +life of a recluse; seven days hence you will become a Tsekiawaday; your +sway shall extend over the four great islands; return forthwith to your +palace." "Who are you?" replied Phralaong. "I am Manh Nat," cried the +voice. "I know," said Phralaong, "that I can become a Tsekiawaday, but I +feel not the least inclination for earthly dignities; my aim is to +arrive at the nature of Buddha." The tempter, urged onward by his three +wicked propensities, concupiscence, ignorance, and anger, did not part +for a moment from Phralaong; but as the shadow always accompanies the +body, he too, from that day, always followed Phralaong, striving to +throw every obstacle in his way towards the dignity of Buddha. Trampling +down every human and worldly consideration, and despising a power full +of vanity and illusion, Phralaong left the city of Kapilawot, at the +full moon of July under the constellation Oottarathan. A little while +after, he felt a strong desire to turn round his head and cast a last +glance at the magnificent city he was leaving behind him; but he soon +overcame that inordinate desire and denied himself this gratification. +It is said that on the very instant he was combating the rising sense of +curiosity the mighty earth turned with great velocity, like a potter's +wheel, so that the very object he denied himself the satisfaction of +contemplating came of itself under his eyes. Phralaong hesitated a while +as to the direction he was to follow, but he resolved instantly to push +on straight before him. + +His progress through the country resembled a splendid triumphal +ovation. Sixty thousand Nats marched in front of him, an equal number +followed him, and as many surrounded him on his right and on his left. +All of them carried lighted torches, pouring a flood of light in every +direction; others again spread perfumes and flowers brought from their +own seats. All joined in chorus, singing the praises of Phralaong. The +sound of their united voices resembled loud peals of continued thunder, +and the resounding of the mighty waves at the foot of the Mount Oogando. +Flowers, shedding the most fragrant odour, were seen gracefully +undulating in the air, like an immense canopy, extending to the farthest +limits of the horizon. During that night, Phralaong, attended with that +brilliant retinue, travelled a distance of thirty youdzanas, and arrived +on the banks of the river Anauma. Turning his face towards Tsanda, he +asked what was the river's name. "Anauma is its name," replied his +faithful attendant. "I will not," said Phralaong to himself, "show +myself unworthy of the high dignity I aspire to." Spurring his horse, +the fierce animal leaped at once to the opposite bank. Phralaong +alighted on the ground, which was covered with a fine sand resembling +pearls, when the rays of the sun fell upon it in the morning. On that +spot he divested himself of his dress, and calling Tsanda to him, he +directed him to take charge of his ornaments, and carry them back with +the horse Kantika to his palace. For himself, he had made up his mind to +become a Rahan. "Your servant too," replied Tsanda, "will become also a +recluse in your company." "No," said the prince, "the profession of +Rahan does not at present befit you." He reiterated this prohibition +three times. When he was handing over to Tsanda his costly ornaments, he +said to himself, "These long hairs that cover my head, and my beard too, +are superfluities unbecoming the profession of Rahan." Whereupon with +one hand unsheathing his sword, and with the other seizing his comely +hairs, he cut them with a single stroke. What remained of his hairs on +the head measured about one inch and a half in length. In like manner +he disposed of his beard. From that time he never needed shaving; the +hairs of his beard and those of the head never grew longer during the +remainder of his life.[2] Holding his hairs and turban together, he +cried aloud, "If I am destined to become a Buddha, let these hairs and +turban remain suspended in the air; if not, let them drop down on the +ground." Throwing up both to the height of one youdzana, they remained +suspended in the air, until a Nat came with a rich basket, put them +therein, and carried them to the seat of Tawadeintha. He there erected +the Dzedi Dzoulamani, wherein they were religiously deposited. Casting +his regards on his own person, Phralaong saw that his rich and shining +robe did not answer his purpose, nor appear befitting the poor and +humble profession he was about to embrace. While his attention was taken +up with this consideration, a great Brahma, named Gatigara, who in the +days of the Buddha Kathaba had been an intimate friend of our Phralaong, +and who, during the period that elapsed between the manifestation of +that Buddha to the present time, had not grown old, discovered at once +the perplexity of his friend's mind. "Prince Theiddat," said he, "is +preparing to become a Rahan, but he is not supplied with the dress and +other implements essentially required for his future calling. I will +provide him now with the thinbaing, the kowot, the dugout, the patta, +the leathern girdle, the hatchet, the needle, and filter."[3] He took +with him all these articles, and in an instant arrived in the presence +of Phralaong, to whom he presented them. Though unacquainted with the +details of that dress, and untrained in the use of those new implements, +the prince, like a man who had been a recluse during several existences, +put on with a graceful gravity his new dress. He adjusted the thinbaing +round his waist, covered his body with the kowot, threw the dugout over +his shoulders, and suspended to his neck the bag containing the earthen +patta. Assuming the grave, meek, and dignified countenance of a Rahan, +he called Tsanda and bade him go back to his father and relate to him +all that he had seen. Tsanda, complying with his master's request, +prostrated himself three times before him; then, rising up, he wheeled +to the right and departed. The spirited horse, hearing the last words of +Phralaong, could no more control his grief.[4] + +"Alas!" said he, "I will see no more my master in this world." His +sorrow grew so great that his heart split into two parts, and he died on +the spot. + +After his death, he became a Nat in the seat of Tawadeintha. The +affliction of Tsanda at parting with his good master was increased by +the death of Kantika. The tears that streamed down his cheeks resembled +drops of liquid silver. + +Phralaong, having thus begun the life of a recluse, spent seven days +alone in a forest of mango trees, enjoying in that retirement the peace +and happiness of soul which solitude alone can confer. The place, in the +neighbourhood of which he began his religious life, is called Anupyia, +in the country belonging to the Malla princes. He then started for the +country of Radzagio, travelling on foot a distance of thirty youdzanas. +Arrived near the gate of the royal city, Phralaong stopped for a while, +saying within himself, "Peimpathara, the king of this country, will no +doubt hear of my arrival in this place. Knowing that the son of King +Thoodaudana is actually in his own royal city, he will insist upon my +accepting all sorts of presents. But now, in my capacity of Rahan, I +must decline accepting them, and by the rules of my profession I am +bound to go and beg along the streets, from house to house, the food +necessary for my support." He instantly resumed his journey, entered the +city through the eastern gate, the patta hanging on his side, and +followed the first row of houses, receiving the alms which pious hands +offered him. At the moment of his arrival the whole city was shaken by a +mighty commotion, like that which is felt in the seat of Thoora when the +Nat Athoorein makes his apparition in it. The inhabitants, terrified at +such an ominous sign, ran in all haste to the palace. Admitted into the +presence of the monarch, they told him that they knew not what sort of +being had just arrived in the city, walking through the streets and +begging alms. They could not ascertain whether he was a Nat, a man, or a +Galong. The king, looking from his apartments over the city, saw +Phralaong, whose meek deportment removed all anxiety from his mind. He, +however, directed a few of his noblemen to go and watch attentively all +the movements of the stranger. "If he be," said he, "a Bilou, he will +soon leave the city and vanish away; if a Nat, he will raise himself in +the air; if a Naga, he will plunge to the bottom of the earth." +Phralaong, having obtained the quantity of rice, vegetables, &c., he +thought sufficient for his meal, left the city through the same gate by +which he had entered it, sat down at the foot of a small hill, his face +turned towards the east, and tried to make his meal with the things he +had received. He could not swallow the first mouthful, which he threw +out of his mouth in utter disgust. Accustomed to live sumptuously and +feed on the most delicate things, his eyes could not bear even the sight +of that loathsome mixture of the coarsest articles of food collected at +the bottom of his patta. He soon, however, recovered from that shock; +and gathered fresh strength to subdue the opposition of nature, overcome +its repugnance, and conquer its resistance. Reproaching himself for such +an unbecoming weakness:--"Was I not aware," said he, with a feeling of +indignation against himself, "that when I took up the dress of a +mendicant such would be my food? The moment is come to trample upon +nature's appetites." Whereupon he took up his patta, ate cheerfully his +meal, and never afterwards did he ever feel any repugnance at what +things soever he had to eat. + +The king's messengers, having closely watched and attentively observed +all that had happened, returned to their master, to whom they related +all the particulars that they had witnessed. "Let my carriage be ready," +said the king, "and you, follow me to the place where this stranger is +resting." He soon perceived Phralaong at a distance, sitting quietly +after his refection. Peimpathara alighted from his conveyance, +respectfully drew near to Phralaong, and, having occupied a seat in a +becoming place, was overwhelmed with contentment and inexpressible joy +to such an extent, indeed, that he could scarcely find words to give +utterance to his feelings. Having at last recovered from the first +impression, he addressed Phralaong in the following manner:--"Venerable +Rahan, you seem to be young still, and in the prime of your life; in +your person you are gifted with the most attractive and noble qualities, +indicating surely your illustrious and royal extraction. I have under my +control and in my possession a countless crowd of officers, elephants, +horses and chariots, affording every desirable convenience for pleasure +and amusement of every description. Please to accept of a numerous +retinue of attendants, with whom you may enjoy yourself whilst remaining +within my dominions. May I be allowed to ask what country you belong to, +who you are, and from what illustrious lineage and descent you are +come?" Phralaong said to himself:--"It is evident that the king is +unacquainted with both my name and origin; I will, however, satisfy him +on the subject of his inquiry." Pointing out with his hand in the +direction of the place he had come from, he said:--"I arrive from the +country which has been governed by a long succession of the descendants +of Prince Kothala. I have, indeed, been born from royal progenitors, but +I have abandoned all the prerogatives attached to my position, and +embraced the profession of Rahan. From my heart I have rooted up +concupiscence, covetousness, and all affections to the things of this +world." To this the king replied:--"I have heard that Prince Theiddat, +son of King Thoodaudana, had seen four great signs, portending his +future destiny for the profession of Rahan, which would be but a step to +lead him to the exalted dignity of a Buddha. The first part of the +prediction has been already fulfilled. When the second shall have +received its accomplishment, I beg you will show your benevolence to me +and my people. I hope my kingdom will be the first country you will +direct your steps to, after having acquired the supreme science." To +this Phralaong graciously assented. + +Phralaong, having left the king, resumed his journey, and fell in with a +Rathee,[5] or hermit, named Alara, and inquired about the several +Dzans. Alara satisfied him on four kinds of Dzans, but as regards the +fifth, he was obliged to refer him to another Rathee, named Oudaka, who +gave him the necessary explanations. Having nothing more to learn from +these masters, Phralaong said to himself, "The knowledge I have thus +acquired is not sufficient to enable me to obtain the dignity of +Buddha." Whereupon he resolved to devote himself to the Kamatan[6] or +meditation on the instability and nothingness of all that exists. To +effectuate thoroughly his purpose, he repaired to the solitude of +Oorouwela, where he devoted all his time to the deepest meditation. On a +certain day it happened that five Rahans, on their way to a certain +place to get their food, arrived at the spot where Phralaong lived and +had already entered on the course of his penitential deeds. They soon +became impressed with the idea that our hermit was to become a Buddha. +They resolved to stay with him and render him all the needful services, +such as sweeping the place, cooking rice, &c. + +The time for the six years of meditation was nearly over, when Phralaong +undertook a great fast,[7] which was carried to such a degree of +abstemiousness that he scarcely allowed to himself the use of a grain +of rice or sesame a day, and finally denied himself even that feeble +pittance. But the Nats, who observed his excessive mortification, +inserted Nat food through the pores of his skin. Whilst Phralaong was +thus undergoing such a severe fasting, his face, which was of a +beautiful gold colour, became black; the thirty-two marks indicative of +his future dignity disappeared. On a certain day, when he was walking in +a much enfeebled state, on a sudden he felt an extreme weakness, similar +to that caused by a dire starvation. Unable to stand up any longer, he +fainted and fell on the ground. Among the Nats that were present, some +said, "The Rahan Gaudama is dead indeed;" some others replied, "He is +not dead, but has fainted from want of food." Those who believed he was +dead hastened to his father's palace to convey to him the sad message of +his son's death. Thoodaudana inquired if his son died previous to his +becoming a Buddha. Having been answered in the affirmative, he refused +to give credit to the words of the Nats. The reason of his doubting the +accuracy of the report was, that he had witnessed the great wonders +prognosticating his son's future dignity that had taken place, first +when Phralaong, then an infant, was placed in the presence of a famous +Rathee, and secondly, when he slept under the shade of the tree +Tsampoo-thabia. The fainting being over, and Phralaong having recovered +his senses, the same Nats went in all haste to Thoodaudana, to inform +him of his son's happy recovery. "I knew well," said the king, "that my +son could not die ere he had become a Buddha." The fame of Phralaong's +having spent six years in solitude, addicted to meditation and +mortification, spread abroad like the sound of a great bell,[8] hung in +the canopy of the skies. + +Phralaong soon remarked that fasting and mortification were not works of +sufficient value for obtaining the dignity of Buddha; he took up his +patta and went to the neighbouring village to get his food. Having eaten +it, he grew stronger; his beautiful face shone again like gold, and the +thirty-two signs reappeared.[9] The five Rahans that had lived with him +said to each other--"It is in vain that the Rahan Gaudama has, during +six years of mortification and sufferings, sought the dignity of +Buddha; he is now compelled to go out in search of food; assuredly, if +he be obliged to live on such food, when shall he ever become a Buddha? +He goes out in quest of food; verily, he aims at enriching himself. As +the man that wants drops of dew or water to refresh and wash his +forehead, has to look for them, so we have to go somewhere else to learn +the way to, and the merit of, Dzan, which we have not been able to +obtain from him." Whereupon they left Phralaong, took up their pattas +and tsiwarans, went to a distance of eighteen youdzanas, and withdrew +into the forest of Migadawon, near Baranathee. + + +FOOTNOTES + + [1] Phralaong having overcome with uncommon fortitude the + numberless obstacles which he had encountered on the part of + men, will have now to meet another foe, perhaps more formidable, + a wicked Nat, or demon. His name, according to its orthography, + is Mar or Mara, but the Burmese call him Manh, which means + pride. Manh is, therefore, the evil spirit of pride, or rather + personified pride, and the enemy of mankind, ever ready to + oppose the benevolent designs and generous efforts of Buddha in + carrying on his great undertaking, conceived to benefit + humanity, by teaching men the way that leads to deliverance from + all miseries. The first plan concocted by Manh for stopping, at + the very outset, the progress of Phralaong, was to flatter his + ambition by promising him _all the kingdoms of this world and + their glory_. From that day the tempter never lost sight of the + benevolent Buddha, but followed him everywhere, endeavouring to + prevent the immense success that was to attend his future + mission. The evil propensities which constitute, as it were, the + very essence of Manh's nature, are concupiscence, envy, and an + irresistible proneness to do harm. The devil indeed could hardly + be made up of worse materials. + + It is really interesting through the course of this Legend to + read of the uninterrupted efforts made by the personification of + evil to thwart Buddha in all his benevolent designs. The + antagonism begins now, but it will be maintained with an + obstinate and prolonged activity during the whole life of + Buddha. + + [2] This circumstance explains one peculiarity observable in all + the statues representing Buddha. The head is invariably covered + with sharp points, resembling those thorns with which the thick + envelope of the durian fruit is armed. Often I had inquired as + to the motive that induced native sculptors to leave on the head + of all statues that sort of inverted nails, without ever being + able to obtain any satisfactory answer. It was only after having + read this passage of the life of Buddha that I was enabled to + account for this apparently singular custom, which is designed + to remind all Buddhists of the ever-continued wonder whereby the + hairs which remained on Buddha's head never grew longer from the + day he cut them with his sword. + + [3] Every talapoin or recluse must be provided with one needle, + wherewith he is to sew his dress, one hatchet to cut the wood he + may be in need of, either for erecting a shelter for himself or + for other purposes, and one filter to strain the water he + intends to drink, that it might be cleared from all impurities, + but chiefly of insects or any living body that might be in it, + which would expose the drinker thereof to the enormous sin of + causing the death of some animal. + + [4] The various accounts that are given of the horse Kantika, + and the grief he feels at parting with his master, grief which + reaches so far as to cause his death, may appear somewhat + extraordinary, puerile, and ridiculous to every one except to + Buddhists. One great principle of that religious system is that + man does not differ from animals in nature, but only in relative + perfection. In animals there are souls as well as in men, but + these souls, on account of the paucity of their merits and the + multiplicity of their demerits, are yet in a very imperfect + state. When the law of demerits grows weak, and that of merits + gathers strength, the soul, though continuing to inhabit the + body of animals, has the knowledge of good and evil, and can + attain to a certain degree of perfection. Buddhistic writings + supply many instances of this belief. Whilst Buddha was in the + desert, an elephant ministered to all his wants. As a reward for + such a series of services, Buddha preached to him the law, and + led him at once to the deliverance, that is to say, to the state + of Neibban. When one animal has progressed so far in the way of + merits as to be able to discern between good and bad, it is said + that he is ripe, or fit to become man. The horse Kantika seems + to have reached that state of full ripeness, since, after his + death, he passed to the state of Nat. This peculiar tenet of + Buddhistic faith accounts for the first of the five great + commands, which extends the formal injunction of "thou shalt not + kill" to animals. When a candidate is admitted, according to the + prescriptions contained in the sacred Kambawa, into the order of + Rahans, he is expressly and solemnly commanded to refrain from + committing four sins, which would deprive him _de facto_ of the + dignity he has been elevated to. The taking away willingly of + the life of anything animated, is one of these four + trespassings. + + [5] The fact of Buddha placing himself under the tuition of two + masters or teachers, leading an ascetic life, to learn from them + notions of the most abstruse nature, establishes, beyond all + doubt, the high antiquity of the existence in India of a large + number of individuals, who, living in some retired spot, far + from the tumult of society, endeavoured, by constant + application, to dive into the deepest recesses of morals and + metaphysics. The fame of the learning of many among them + attracted to their solitude crowds of disciples, anxious to + study under such eminent masters. Hence we see some of these + Rathees at the head of four or five hundred disciples. There is + no doubt that the most distinguished Rathees became the founders + of many of those philosophico-religious schools for which India + was renowned from the remotest antiquity. Like many others who + thirsted for knowledge, Phralaong resorted to the schools of the + Rathees, as to the then most celebrated seats of learning. + + From this fact we may be allowed to draw another inference, + which may be considered as a consequence of what has been stated + in a foregoing note, regarding the superior antiquity of + Brahminism over Buddhism. Phralaong was brought up in the bosom + of a society regulated and governed by Brahminical institutions. + He must have been imbued from the earliest days of his + elementary education with the notions generally taught, viz.: + the Brahminical ones. When he grew up and began to think for + himself, he was displeased with certain doctrines which did not + tally with his own ideas. Following the example of many that had + preceded him in the way of innovation, he boldly shaped his + course in a new direction, and soon arrived at a final issue on + many points, both with his teachers and some of the doctrines + generally received in the society in which he had been brought + up. We may, therefore, safely conclude that the doctrines + supposed to have been preached by the latest Buddha are but an + off-shoot of Brahminism. This may serve to account for the great + resemblance subsisting between many doctrines of both creeds. + The cardinal points on which these two systems essentially + differ are the beginning and the end of living beings. Between + these two extremes there is a multitude of points on which both + systems so perfectly agree that they appear blended together. + + The Rathees seem, according to the institutes of Menoo, to have + been first in observing two practices, much enforced by the Wini + in subsequent times. They were supported by the alms bestowed on + them by their disciples and the admirers of their singular mode + of life. They were courted and esteemed by the world, in + proportion to the contempt they appeared to hold it in. Denying + to themselves the pleasures which were opposed to their austere + life, they observed, as long as they remained Rathees, the rules + of the strictest celibacy. + + Phralaong, preparing himself for his future high calling, began + to study the science of _Dzan_ under distinguished masters. What + is meant by Dzan? This Pali word means thought, reflection, + meditation. It is often designed by the Burmese to mean a + peculiar state of the soul that has already made great progress + in the way of perfection. Phralaong intended, by placing himself + under the direction of those eminent teachers, to learn the + great art of training his mind for the obtaining, by constant + and well-directed meditations, of high mental attainments. In + the book of Buddhistic metaphysics, I have found the science of + Dzan divided into five parts, or rather five steps, which the + mind has to ascend successively ere it can enjoy a state of + perfect quiescence, the highest point a perfected being can + arrive at before reaching the state of Neibban. In the first + step the soul searches after what is good and perfect, and + having discovered it, turns its attention and the energy of its + faculties towards it. In the second, the soul begins to + contemplate steadily what it has first discovered, and rivets + upon it its attention. In the third stage, the soul fondly + relishes, and is, as it were, entirely taken with it. In the + fourth, the soul calmly enjoys and quietly feasts on the pure + truths it has loved in the former state. In the fifth, the soul, + perfectly satiated with the knowledge of truth, remains in a + state of complete quietude, perfect fixity, unmoved stability, + which nothing can any longer alter or disturb. The Burmese and + all Buddhists, always fond of what is wonderful, attribute + supernatural perfections to those who have so far advanced in + mental attainments. Their bodies become, as it were, + half-spiritualised, so that they can, according to their wishes, + carry themselves through the air from one place to another, + without the least hindrance or difficulty. + + [6] Kamatan means the fixing of the attention on one object, so + as to investigate thoroughly all its constituent parts, its + principle and origin, its existence and its final destruction. + It is that part of metaphysics which treats of the beginning, + nature, and end of beings. To become proficient in that science, + a man must be gifted with a most extensive knowledge and an + analysing mind of no common cast. The process of Kamatan is as + follows. Let it be supposed that man intends to contemplate one + of the four elements, fire, for instance; he abstracts himself + from every object which is not fire, and devotes all his + attention to the contemplation of that object alone; he examines + the nature of fire, and finding it a compound of several + distinct parts, he investigates the cause or causes that keep + those parts together, and soon discovers that they are but + accidental ones, the action whereof may be impeded or destroyed + by the occurrence of any sudden accident. He concludes that fire + has but a fictitious ephemeral existence. The same method is + followed in examining the other elements, and gradually all + other things he may come in contact with, and his final + conclusion is, that all things placed without him are destitute + of real existence, being mere illusions, divested of all + reality. He infers, again, that all things are subjected to the + law of incessant change, without fixity or stability. The wise + man, therefore, can feel no attachment to objects which, in his + own opinion, are but illusions and deception: his mind can + nowhere find rest in the midst of illusions always succeeding to + each other. Having surveyed all that is distinct of self, he + applies himself to the work of investigating the origin and + nature of his body. After a lengthened examination, he arrives, + as a matter of course, at the same conclusion. His body is a + mere illusion without reality, subjected to changes and + destruction. He feels that it is as yet distinct from self. He + despises his body, as he does everything else, and has no + concern for it. He longs for the state of Neibban, as the only + one worthy of the wise man's earnest desire. By such a + preliminary step, the student, having estranged himself from + this world of illusions, advances towards the study of the + excellent works which will pave the way to Neibban. The Burmese + reckon forty Kamatans. They are often repeated over by devotees, + whose weak intellect is utterly incapable of understanding the + meaning they are designed to convey to the mind. + + Notwithstanding his singular aptitude in acquiring knowledge, + Phralaong devoted six whole years, in the solitude of Oorouwela, + busily engaged in mastering the profound science he aimed at + acquiring. It was during that time that he received the visits + of five Rahans, whose chief was named Koondanha. They were very + probably, like so many of their profession, travelling about in + search of knowledge. They placed themselves under the direction + of Phralaong, and in exchange for the lessons they received from + him, they served him as humble and grateful disciples are wont + to attend on a highly esteemed teacher. In this, as well as many + other circumstances, we see that, previous to Gaudama's + preachings, there already existed in India an order of devotees + or enthusiasts, who lived secluded from the world, devoted to + the study of religious doctrines and the practice of virtues of + the highest order. The order of Buddhistic monks or talapoins, + which was subsequently established by the author of Buddhism, is + but a modification of what actually subsisted in full vigour in + his own country and in his own time. + + [7] In a Buddhistic point of view the only reason that may be + assigned for the extraordinary fast of Phralaong is the + satisfaction of showing to the world the display of wonderful + action. Fasting and other works of mortification have always + been much practised by the Indian philosophers of past ages, who + thereby attracted the notice, respect, admiration, and + veneration of the world. Such rigorous exercises, too, were + deemed of great help for enabling the soul to have a more + perfect control over the senses, and subjecting them to the + empire of reason. They are also conducive towards the calm and + undisturbed state in which the soul is better fitted for the + arduous task of constant meditation. The fast of Gaudama, + preparatory to his obtaining the Buddhaship, recalls to mind + that which our Lord underwent ere He began His divine mission. + If the writer, in the course of this work, has made once or + twice a remark of similar import, he has done so, not with the + intention of drawing a parallel as between facts, but to + communicate to the reader the feelings of surprise and + astonishment he experienced when he thought he met with + circumstances respecting the founder of Buddhism which + apparently bore great similarity to some connected with the + mission of our Saviour. + + [8] Bells are common in Burmah, and the people of that country + are well acquainted with the art of casting them. Most of the + bells to be seen in the pagodas are of small dimensions, and + differing in shape somewhat from those used in Europe. The + inferior part is less widened, and there is a large hole in the + centre of the upper part. No tongue is hung in the interior, but + the sound is produced by striking with a horn of deer or elk the + outward surface of the lower part. No belfry is erected for the + bells; they are fixed on a piece of timber, laid horizontally, + and supported at its two extremities by two posts, at such a + height that the inferior part of the bell is raised about five + feet above the ground. + + The largest specimens of Burmese art in casting bells of great + weight are the two bells to be seen, the one in the large pagoda + of Rangoon, called Shway Dagon, and the other at Mingon, about + twelve or fifteen miles north of Amerapoura, on the western bank + of the Irrawaddy. The first, in the town of Rangoon, was cast in + 1842, when King Tharawaddy visited the place, with the intention + of founding a new city, more distant from the river, and nearer + to the mount upon which rises the splendid Shway Dagon. In its + shape and form it exactly resembles the kind of bells above + described. Here are some particulars respecting that large piece + of metal, collected from the inscription to be seen upon it. It + was cast on the fifth day of the full moon of Tabodwai + (February), 1203 of the Burmese era. The weight of metal is + 94,682 lbs.; its height 9-1/2 cubits; its diameter 5 cubits; its + thickness 20 fingers or 15 inches. But during the process of + melting, the well-disposed came forward and threw in copper, + silver, and gold in great quantities. It is supposed, says the + writer of the inscription, that in this way the weight was + increased one-fourth. + + The bell of Mingon was cast in the beginning of this century. In + shape and form it resembles our bells in Europe. It is probable + that some foreigner residing at Ava suggested the idea of giving + such an unusual form to that monumental bell. Its height is 18 + feet, besides 7 feet for hanging apparatus. It has 17 feet in + diameter, and from 10 to 12 inches in thickness. Its weight is + supposed to exceed two hundred thousand English pounds. + + In the interior large yellowish and greyish streaks indicate + that considerable quantities of gold and silver had been thrown + in during the process of melting. No idea can at present be had + of the power of the sound of that bell, as its enormous weight + has caused the pillars that support it partially to give way. To + prevent a fatal disaster, the orifice of the bell has been made + to rest on large short posts, sunk in the ground and rising + about three feet above it. In no respect can these bells bear + any comparison with those of Europe. They are mightily rough and + rude attempts at doing works on a scale far surpassing the + abilities of native workmen, who otherwise succeed tolerably + well in casting the comparatively small bells commonly met with + in the courtyards of pagodas. + + [9] One of the genuine characters of Buddhism is correctly + exhibited in this observation of Phralaong's respecting fasts, + mortifications, and other self-inflicted penances. They are not + looked upon as the immediate way leading to perfection, nor as + _a portion_ or a part of perfection itself. Such deeds are but + means resorted to for weakening passions and increasing the + power of the spiritual principle over the natural one: they are + preparatory to the great work of meditation or the study of + truth, which is the only high-road to perfection. To the sage + that has already begun the laborious task of investigating + truth, such practices are of no use, and are nowhere insisted on + as necessary, or even useful. In the book of discipline, no + mention is made of them. The life of the initiated is one of + self-denial; all superfluities and luxuries are strictly + interdicted; all that is calculated to minister to passions and + pleasure is carefully excluded. But the great austerities and + macerations practised by the religious of the Brahminical sect + are at once rejected by the Buddhist sages as unprofitable and + unnecessary to them. The inmates of the Buddhist monasteries in + our days are never seen indulging in those cruel, disgusting, + and unnatural practices performed from time immemorial by some + of their brethren of the Hindu persuasion. This constitutes one + of the principal differences or discrepancies between the two + systems. With the founder of Buddhism fasts and penitential + deeds are of great concern to him who is as yet in the world, + living under the tyrannical yoke of passions and the influence + of the senses. By him they are viewed as powerful auxiliaries in + the spiritual warfare for obtaining the mastery over passions. + This point once gained, the sage can at once dispense with their + aid as being no longer required. The follower of the Hindu creed + looks upon those practices as _per se_ eminently meritorious and + capable of leading him to perfection; hence the mania for + carrying those observances to a degree revolting to reason, and + even to the plain good sense of the people. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + + _Thoodzata's offering to Phralaong -- His five dreams -- He + shapes his course towards the gniaong tree -- Miraculous + appearance of a throne -- Victory of Phralaong over Manh Nat -- + His meditations during forty-nine days near the Bodi tree -- + He at last obtains the perfect science -- He overcomes the + temptation directed against him by the daughters of Manh -- + Buddha preaches the law to a Pounha and to two merchants._ + + +At that time, in the solitude of Oorouwela, there lived in a village a +rich man, named Thena. He had a daughter named Thoodzata. Having +attained the years of puberty, she repaired to a place where there was a +gniaong tree, and made the following prayer to the Nat guardian of the +place[1]:--"If I marry a husband that will prove a suitable match, and +the first fruit of our union be a male child, I will spend annually in +alms deeds 100,000 pieces of silver, and make an offering at this spot." +Her prayer was heard, and its twofold object granted. When Phralaong +had ended the six years of his fasting and mortification, on the day of +the full moon of the month Katson, Thoodzata was preparing to make her +grateful offering to the Nat of the place. She had been keeping one +thousand cows in a place abounding with sweet vines; the milk of those +thousand was given to five hundred cows; these again fed with their own +milk two hundred and fifty others, and so on, in a diminishing +proportion, until it happened that sixteen cows fed eight others with +their milk. So these eight cows gave a milk, rich, sweet, and flavoured +beyond all description. + +On the day of the full moon of Katson,[2] Thoodzata rose at an early +hour to make ready her offering, and disposed everything that the cows +should be simultaneously milked. When they were to be milked, the young +calves of their own accord kept at a distance; and as soon as the +vessels were brought near, the milk began to flow in streams from the +udders into the vessels. She took the milk and poured it into a large +caldron, set on the fire which she had herself kindled. The milk began +to boil; bubbles formed on the surface of the liquid, turned on the +right and sunk in, not a single drop being spilt out; no smoke arose +from the fireplace. Four kings of Nats watched about while the caldron +was boiling; the great Brahma kept open an umbrella over it; a Thagia +brought fuel and fed the fire. Other Nats, by their supernatural power, +infused honey into the milk, and communicated thereto a flavour, such as +the like is not to be found in the abode of men. On this occasion alone, +and on the day Phralaong entered the state of Neibban, the Nats infused +honey into his food. Wondering at the so many extraordinary signs which +she saw, Thoodzata called her female slave, named Sounama, related to +her all that she had observed, and directed her to go to the gniaong +tree, and clear the place where she intended to make her offering. The +servant, complying with her mistress' direction, soon arrived at the +foot of the tree. + +On that very night Phralaong had had five dreams.[3] 1st, It appeared +to him that the earth was his sleeping place, with the Himawonta for his +pillow. His right hand rested on the western ocean, his left on the +eastern ocean, and his feet on the southern ocean. 2nd, A kind of grass, +named Tyria, appeared to grow out of his navel and reach to the skies. +3rd, Ants of a white appearance ascended from his feet to the knee and +covered his legs. 4th, Birds of varied colour and size appeared to come +from all directions and fall at his feet, when, on a sudden, they all +appeared white. 5th, It seemed to him that he was walking on a mountain +of filth, and that he passed over it without being in the least +contaminated. + +Phralaong, awaking from his sleep, said to himself, after having +reflected for a while on those five dreams,--"Today I shall certainly +become a Buddha." Thereupon he rose instantly, washed his hands and +face, put on his dress, and quietly waited the break of day, to go out +in quest of his food. The moment being arrived to go out, he took up his +patta, and walked in the direction of the gniaong tree. The whole tree +was made shining by the rays which issued from his person; he rested +there for a while. At that very moment arrived Sounama, to clear, +according to her mistress' orders, the place for her offering. As she +approached, she saw Phralaong at the foot of the tree. The rays of light +which beamed out of his person were reflected on the tree, which +exhibited a most splendid and dazzling appearance. On observing this +wonder, Sounama said to herself: "Of course the Nat has come down from +the tree to receive the offering with his own hands." Overcome with an +unutterable joy, she immediately ran to her mistress and related her +adventure. Thoodzata was delighted at this occurrence, and wishing to +give a substantial proof of her gratitude for such good news, she said +to Sounama: "From this moment you are no more my servant; I adopt you +for my elder daughter." She gave her instantly all the ornaments +suitable to her new position. It is customary for all the Phralaongs to +be provided, on the day they are to become Buddha, with a gold cup of +an immense value. Thoodzata ordered a golden vessel to be brought, and +poured therein the nogana or boiled milk. As the water glides from the +leaf of the water-lily without leaving thereon any trace, so the nogana +slided from the pot into the golden cup and filled it up. She covered +this cup with another of the same precious metal, and wrapped up the +whole with a white cloth. She forthwith put on her finest dress, and, +becomingly attired, she carried the golden cup over her head; and with a +decent gravity walked towards the gniaong tree. Overwhelmed with joy at +seeing Phralaong, she reverentially advanced towards him, whom she +mistook for a Nat. When near him, she placed gently the golden vessel on +the ground, and offered him in a gold basin scented water to wash his +hands. At that moment, the earthen patta offered to Phralaong by the +Brahma Gatikara disappeared. Perceiving that his patta had disappeared, +he stretched forth his right hand, and washed it in the scented water; +at the same time Thoodzata presented to him the golden cup containing +the nogana. Having observed that she had caught the eyes of Phralaong, +she said to him: "My Lord Nat, I beg to offer you this food, together +with the vessel that contains it." Having respectfully bowed down to +him, she continued: "May your joy and happiness be as great as mine; may +you always delight in the happiest rest, ever surrounded by a great and +brilliant retinue." Making then the offering of the gold cup, worth +100,000 pieces of silver, with the same disinterestedness as if she had +given over only the dry leaf of a tree, she withdrew and returned to her +home with a heart overflowing with joy. + +Phralaong rising up took with him the golden cup, and having turned to +the left of the gniaong tree, went to the bank of the river Neritzara, +to a place where more than 100,000 Buddhas had bathed, ere they obtained +the supreme intelligence. On the banks of that river is a bathing-place. +Having left on that spot his golden cup, he undressed himself, and +descended into the river. When he had bathed, he came out and put on his +yellow robe, which in shape and form resembled that of his predecessors. +He sat down, his face turned towards the east; his face resembled in +appearance a well-ripe palm-fruit. He divided his exquisite fruit into +forty-nine mouthfuls, which he ate entire, without mixing any water with +it. During forty-nine days he spent round the Bodi tree, Buddha never +bathed, nor took any food, nor experienced the least want. His +appearance and countenance remained unchanged; he spent the whole time +absorbed, as it were, in an uninterrupted meditation. Holding up in his +hands the empty golden vessel, Phralaong made the following prayer: "If +on this day I am to become a Buddha, let this cup float on the water and +ascend the stream." Whereupon he flung it into the stream, when, by the +power and influence of Phralaong's former good works, the vessel, gently +gliding towards the middle of the river, and then beating up the stream, +ascended it with the swiftness of a horse to the distance of eighty +cubits, when it stopped, sunk into a whirlpool, went down to the country +of Naga, and made a noise, on coming in contact with and striking +against the three vessels of the three last Buddhas, viz.: Kaukathan, +Gaunagong, and Kathaba. On hearing this unusual noise, the chief of +Nagas awoke from his sleep, and said: "How is this? yesterday, a Buddha +appeared in the world; today, again, there is another." And in more than +one hundred stanzas he sung praises to Buddha. + + * * * * * + +On the banks of the river Neritzara there is a grove of Sala trees, +whither Phralaong repaired to spend the day under their cooling shade. +In the evening he rose up and walked with the dignified and noble +bearing of a lion, in a road eight oothabas wide, made by the Nats, and +strewed with flowers, towards the gniaong tree. The Nats, Nagas, and +Galongs joined in singing praises to him, playing instruments, and +making offerings of the finest flowers and most exquisite perfumes, +brought from their own seats. The same rejoicings took place in ten +thousand other worlds. Whilst on his way towards the tree, he met with a +young man, just returning with a grass-load he had cut in the fields. +Foreseeing that Phralaong might require some portion of it for his use, +he presented him an offering of eight handfuls of grass, which were +willingly accepted. + +Arrived close to the gniaong tree,[4] Phralaong stopped at the south of +the tree, his face turned towards the north, when, on a sudden, the +southern point of the globe seemed to lower down to the hell Awidzi, the +lowest of all, whilst the northern one appeared to reach the sky. Then +he said, "Verily this is not the place where I shall become a Buddha." +Thence Phralaong went on his right side towards the east of the tree, +and standing up, his face turned towards the west, he said, "This is +indeed the place where all the preceding Buddhas have obtained the +supreme intelligence. Here, too, is the very spot whereupon I shall +become a Buddha, and set up my throne." He took, by one of their +extremities, the eight handfuls of grass and scattered them on the +ground, when, on a sudden, there appeared emerging, as it were, from the +bottom of the earth, a throne fourteen cubits high, adorned with the +choicest sculptures and paintings, superior in perfection to all that +art could produce. Phralaong, then facing the east, uttered the +following imprecation: "If I am not destined to become a Buddha, may my +bones, veins, and skin remain on this throne, and my blood and flesh be +dried up." He then ascended the throne, with his back turned against the +tree, and his face towards the east. He sat down in a cross-legged +position, firmly resolved never to vacate the throne, ere he had become +a Buddha. Such firmness of purpose, which the combined elements could +not shake for a moment, no one ought to think of ever becoming possessed +of. + +Whilst Phralaong was sitting on the throne in that cross-legged +position, Manh Nat said to himself, "I will not suffer Prince Theiddat +to overstep the boundaries of my empire." He summoned all his warriors +and shouted to them. On hearing their chief's voice, the warriors +gathered thick round his person. His countless followers in front, on +his right and on his left, reached to the distance of eighteen +youdzanas, and above him to that of nine only. Behind him, they extended +to the very limits of the world. The cries of that immense multitude +were re-echoed at a distance of ten thousand youdzanas, and resembled +the roaring of the mighty sea. Manh Nat rode the elephant Girimegala, +measuring in length five youdzanas. Supplied with one thousand right +arms, he wielded all sorts of the most deadly weapons. His countless +warriors, to avoid confusion, were all disposed in ranks, bearing their +respective armour. They appeared like immense clouds, slowly rolling on +and converging towards Phralaong. + +At that time, Nats surrounded Phralaong, singing praises to him; the +chief Thagia was playing on his conch, whereof a single blowing resounds +for four entire months; the chief Naga was uttering stanzas in his +honour; a chief Brahma held over him the white umbrella. On the approach +of Manh Nat's army, they were all seized with an uncontrollable fear, +and fled to their respective places. The Naga dived into the bottom of +the earth, to a depth of five hundred youdzanas, and covering his face +with his two wings, fell into a deep sleep. The Thagia, swinging his +conch upon his shoulders, ran to the extremity of the world. The Brahma, +holding still the umbrella by the extremity of the handle, went up to +his own country. Phralaong was, therefore, left alone. Manh Nat, turning +to his followers, cried to them, "There is, indeed, no one equal to the +Prince Theiddat; let us not attack him in front, but let us assail him +from the north side." + +At that moment, Phralaong, lifting his eyes, looked on his right, left, +and front, for the crowd of Nats, Brahmas, and Thagias that were paying +him their respects. But they had all disappeared. He saw the army of +Manh Nat coming thick upon him from the north, like a mighty storm. +"What!" said he, "is it against me alone that such a countless crowd of +warriors has been assembled? I have no one to help me, no father, no +brothers, no sisters, no friends, and no relatives. But I have with me +the ten great virtues which I have practised; the merits I have acquired +in the practice of these virtues will be my safeguard and protection; +these are my offensive and defensive weapons, and with them I will crush +down the great army of Manh." Whereupon he quietly remained meditating +upon the merits of the ten great virtues. + +Whilst Phralaong was thus absorbed in meditation, Manh Nat began his +attack upon him. He caused a wind to blow with such an extraordinary +violence that it brought down the tops of mountains, though they were +one or two youdzanas thick. The trees of the forests were shattered to +atoms. But the virtue of Phralaong's merits preserved him from the +destructive storm. His tsiwaran itself was not agitated. Perceiving that +his first effort was useless, Manh caused a heavy rain to fall with such +violence that it tore the earth, and opened it to its very bottom. But +not even a single drop touched Phralaong's person. To this succeeded a +shower of rocks, accompanied with smoke and fire; but they were changed +into immense masses of flowers, which dropped at Buddha's feet. There +came afterwards another shower of swords, knives, and all kinds of +cutting weapons, emitting smoke and fire. They all fell powerless at the +feet of Phralaong. A storm of burning ashes and sand soon darkened the +atmosphere, but they fell in front of him like fragrant dust. Clouds of +mud succeeded, which fell like perfumes all round and over Phralaong. +Manh caused a thick darkness to fill the atmosphere, but to Phralaong it +emitted rays of the purest light. The enraged Manh cried to his +followers, "Why do you stand looking on? Rush at once upon him and +compel him to flee before me." Sitting on his huge elephant, and +brandishing his formidable weapons, Manh approached close to Phralaong +and said to him, "Theiddat, this throne is not made for you; vacate it +forthwith; it is my property." Phralaong calmly answered, "You have not +as yet practised the ten great virtues, nor gone through the five acts +of self-denial; you have never devoted your life to help others to +acquire merits; in a word, you have not yet done all the needful to +enable you to attain the supreme dignity of Phra. This throne, +therefore, cannot be yours." Unable to control any longer his passion, +Manh threw his formidable weapons at Phralaong; but they were converted +into garlands of beautiful flowers, that adapted themselves gracefully +round his body. His sword and other weapons, that could cut at once +through the hardest rocks, were employed with no better success. The +soldiers of Manh, hoping that their united efforts would have a better +result, and that they could thrust Phralaong from his throne, made a +sudden and simultaneous rush at him, rolling against him, with an +irresistible force, huge rocks, as large as mountains; but by the virtue +of their opponent's merits, they were converted into fine nosegays, that +gently dropped at his feet. + +At that time the Nats, from their seats, looked down on the scene of the +combat, suspended between hope and fear. Phralaong at that moment said +to Manh: "How do you dare to pretend to the possession of this throne? +Could you ever prove, by indisputable evidence, that you have ever made +offerings enough to be deserving of this throne?" Manh, turning to his +followers, answered: "Here are my witnesses; they will all bear evidence +in my favour." At the same moment they all shouted aloud, to testify +their approval of Mania's words. "As to you, Prince Theiddat, where are +the witnesses that will bear evidence in your favour and prove the +justness of your claim to the possession of this throne?" Phralaong +replied: "My witnesses are not like yours, men or any living beings.[5] +The earth itself will give testimony to me. For, without alluding even +to those offerings I have made during several previous existences, I +will but mention the forty-seven great ones I made whilst I lived as +Prince Wethandra." Stretching out his right hand, which he had kept +hitherto under the folds of his garments, and pointing to the earth, he +said with a firm voice: "Earth, is it not true that at the time I was +Prince Wethandra I made forty great offerings?" The earth replied with a +deep and loud roaring, resounding in the midst of Manh's legions, like +the sound of countless voices, threatening to spread death and +destruction in their ranks. The famous charger of Manh bent his knees, +and paid homage to Phralaong. Manh himself, disheartened and +discomfited, fled to the country of Wathawatti. His followers were so +overpowered by fear that they flung away all that could impede their +retreat, and ran away in every direction. Such was the confusion and +disorder that prevailed that two warriors could not be seen following +the same course in their flight. + +Looking from their seats on the defeat of Manh and the glorious victory +of Phralaong, the Nats[6] rent the air with shouts of exultation. The +Brahmas, Nagas, and Galongs joined the Nats in celebrating his triumph +over his enemies. They all hastened from more than ten thousand worlds +to pay their respects and offer their felicitations, presenting him with +flowers and perfumes, saying: "Victory and glory to Phralaong! Shame and +defeat to the infamous Manh!" + +It was a little while before sunset when Phralaong had achieved his +splendid victory over his proud foe. At that time he was wrapped up, as +it were, in the profoundest meditation. The extremities of the branches +of the Bodi tree[7] fell gently over him, and, by their undulations, +seemed caressing, as it were, his tsiwaran; they resembled so many +beautiful nosegays of red flowers that were offered to him. At the first +watch of the night Phralaong applied all the energies of his powerful +mind to ascertain the laws of the causes and effects, in order to +account for all that is in existence. He argued in the following manner: +"Pain and all sorts of miseries do exist in this world. Why do they +exist? Because there is birth. Why is there birth? Because there is +conception. Now conception does take place, because there is existence, +or that moral state produced by the action or influence of merits and +demerits. Existence is brought in by _Upadan_, or the combining of +affections calculated to cause the coming into existence. The latter has +for its cause the desire. The desire is produced by sensation. The +latter is caused by the contact. The contact takes place because there +are the six senses. The six senses do exist, because there is name and +form, that is to say, the exterior sign of the ideal being and the type +of the real being. Name and form owe their existence to erroneous +knowledge; the latter in its turn is produced by the imagination, which +has for its cause ignorance."[8] + +Having followed in his mind the succession of the twelve causes and +effect, and reached the last link of that chain, Phralaong said to +himself: "Ignorance, or no science, is the first cause which gives rise +to all the phenomena I have successively reviewed. From it springs the +world and all the beings it contains. It is the cause of that universal +illusion in which man and all beings are miserably lulled. By what means +can this ignorance be done away with? Doubtless by knowledge and true +science. By means of the light that science spreads I clearly see the +unreality of all that exists, and I am freed from that illusion which +makes other beings to believe that such thing exists, when, in reality, +it does not exist. The imagination, or the faculty to imagine the +existence of things which do not exist, is done away with. The same fate +is reserved to the false knowledge resulting therefrom to the name and +form, to the six senses, to contact, to sensation, to desire, to +conception, to existence, to birth, and to pain or miseries." + + * * * * * + +Then Phralaong says to himself: "The knowledge of the four great truths +is the true light that can dispel ignorance and procure the real +science, whereby the coming out from the whirlpool of existences, or +from the state of illusion, can be perfectly effected. These four truths +are: 1, The miseries of existence; 2, The cause productive of misery, +which is the desire, ever-renewed, of satisfying oneself without being +able ever to secure that end; 3, The destruction of that desire, or the +estranging oneself from it, is the important affair deserving the most +serious attention; 4, The means of obtaining the individual annihilation +of that desire is supplied solely by the four Meggas, or highways, +leading to perfection. But these Meggas can be followed only by those +who have a right intention, a right will, and who, throughout life, +exert themselves to regulate their action, conduct, language, thought, +and meditations." It was then that the heart of Phralaong acquired an +unshakable firmness, a perfect purity or exemption from all passions, an +unutterable meekness, and a strong feeling of tender compassion towards +all beings. + +When these fundamental truths had been known, felt, and relished,[9] +Phralaong's mind, casting a glance over the past, was able to discover +at once all that had taken place during the countless states of his +former existences. He recollected the name he had borne, those of his +parents, the places he had seen and visited, the caste he had belonged +to, and all the chief events that had marked the course of his progress +through the continual migrations. He likewise saw reflected, as in a +mirror, the former conditions of existence of all other beings. The +immense development and expansion of his mind, which enabled him to +fathom the depth of the past, happened during the first watch of the +night. + +He applied now all the expanded powers of his incomparable mind to take +a correct survey of all the beings now in existence. He glanced over all +those that were in hell, and the other three states of punishment, those +living on earth, and those dwelling in the twenty-six superior seats. He +at once understood distinctly their state, condition, merits, demerits, +and all that appertained to their physical and moral constitutive parts. +This labour occupied his mind up to midnight. + +Urged by the merciful and compassionate dispositions of his soul, +Phralaong often revolved within himself the following: "All is misery +and affliction in this world; all beings are miserably detained in the +vortex of existences; they float over the whirlpool of desire and +concupiscence; they are carried to and fro by the fallacious cravings of +a never-obtained satisfaction. They must be taught to put an end to +concupiscence by freeing themselves from its influence. Their minds must +be imbued with the knowledge of the four great truths. The four ways +that I have discovered shall inevitably lead men and Nats to that most +desirable end. These ways ought to be pointed out to them, that, by +following them, men and Nats may obtain the deliverance." + +Whilst these thoughts thronged through his mind, a little before break +of day, in the 103rd year of the Eatzana era, on the day of the full +moon of Katson, the perfect science broke at once over him: he became +the Buddha. + +When this great wonder took place, ten thousand worlds were shaken +twelve times with such a violence as to make hairs stand on one end. +These words, "Most excellent being," were heard throughout the same +series of worlds. Magnificent ornaments decorated all places. Flagstaffs +appeared in every direction, adorned with splendid streamers. Of such +dimensions were they that the extremities of those in the east reached +the opposite side of the west; and those in the north, the southern +boundary. Some flags, hanging from the seats of Brahmas, reached the +surface of the earth. All the trees of ten thousand worlds shot out +branches, loaded with fruits and flowers. The five sorts of lilies +bloomed spontaneously. From the clefts of rocks beautiful flowers sprang +out. The whole universe appeared like an immense garden, covered with +flowers; a vivid light illuminated those places, the darkness of which +could not be dispersed by the united rays of seven suns. The water, +which fills the immensity of the deep, at a depth of eighty-four +thousand youdzanas, became fresh and offered a most agreeable drink. +Rivers suspended their course; the blind recovered their sight, the deaf +could hear, and the lame were able to walk freely. The captives were +freed from their chains and restored to their liberty. Innumerable other +wonders took place at the moment Phralaong received the supreme +intelligence. He said then to himself, "Previous to my obtaining the +supreme knowledge, I have, during countless generations, moved in the +circle of ever-renewed existences, and borne-up misery. Now I see this +distinctly. Again, I perceive how I can emancipate myself from the +trammels of existence, and extricate myself from all miseries and +wretchedness attending generation; my will is fixed on the most amiable +state of Neibban. I have now arrived to that state of perfection that +excludes all passions." + +It was at the full moon of the month Katson, when these memorable +occurrences took place, and it was daylight when Phralaong at last +obtained the fulness of the Buddhaship. After this glorious and +triumphant achievement, Phralaong, whom from this moment we must call +Phra or Buddha, continued to remain on the throne, in a cross-legged +position, with a mind absorbed in contemplation during seven days. +Mental exertion and labour were at an end. Truth in its effulgent beauty +encompassed his mind and shed over it the purest rays. Placed in that +luminous centre, Phra saw all beings entangled in the web of passions, +tossed over the raging billows of the sea of renewed existences, +whirling in the vortex of endless miseries, tormented incessantly and +wounded to the quick by the sting of concupiscence, sunk into the dark +abyss of ignorance, the wretched victims of an illusory, unsubstantial, +and unreal world. He said then to himself: "In all the worlds there is +no one but me who knows how to break through the web of passions, to +still the waves that waft beings from one state into another, to save +them from the whirlpool of miseries, to put an end to concupiscence and +break its sting, to dispel the mist of ignorance by the light of truth, +to teach all intelligent beings the unreality and nonexistence of this +world, and thereby lead them to the true state of Neibban." Having thus +given vent to the feelings of compassion that pressed on his benevolent +heart, Phra, glancing over future events, delighted in contemplating the +great number of beings who would avail themselves of his preachings, and +labour to free themselves from the slavery of passions. He counted the +multitudes who would enter the ways that lead to the deliverance, and +would obtain the rewards to be enjoyed by those who will follow one of +those ways. The Baranathee country would be favoured first of all with +the preaching of the law of the wheel. He reviewed the countries where +his religion would be firmly established. He saw that Maheinda, the son +of king Asoka, would carry his law to Ceylon, two hundred and thirty-six +years after his Neibban. + +When these and other subjects were fully exhausted, the most excellent +Phra came down from his throne and went to a distance of ten fathoms +from the Bodi tree, in a north-east direction. There he stood, his eyes +fixedly riveted on the throne, without a single wink, during seven +consecutive days, given up to the most intense and undisturbed +meditation. The Nats, observing this extraordinary posture, imagined +that he regretted the throne he had just vacated, and that he wanted to +repossess himself of it. They concluded that, such being the case, +Prince Theiddat had not as yet obtained the Buddhaship. When the period +of seven days was over, Buddha, who knew the innermost thoughts of the +Nats, resolved to put an end to their incredulous thinking respecting +his person. For that purpose, he had recourse to the display of +miraculous powers.[10] He raised himself high up in the air, and, to +their astonished regards, he wrought at once more than a thousand +wonders, which had the immediate effect of silencing all their doubts, +and convincing them that he was indeed the Buddha. + +Having come down to the place which he had started from, for the display +of prodigies, Buddha went to the north of the tree Bodi at a distance of +only two fathoms from it. He spent this time in walking to and fro from +east to west, during seven days, over a road, prepared for that purpose +by the Nats. He was engaged all the while in the work of the sublimest +contemplation. + +He then shaped his course in a north-west direction, at a distance of +thirteen fathoms from the sacred tree. There stood a beautiful house, +shining like gold, resplendent with precious stones. It was a temporary +residence, purposely prepared for him by the Nats. Thither he repaired, +and sat down in a cross-legged position during seven days. He devoted +all his time to meditating on the Abidamma, or the most excellent +science. This science is divided into seven books. Phra had already gone +over the six first and fully mastered their contents, but the six +glories had not as yet shot forth from his person. + +It was only after having mastered the contents of the last division, +named Pathan, divided into twenty-four parts, that the six glories +appeared. Like the great fishes that delight to sport only in the great +ocean, the mind of Buddha expanded itself with indescribable eagerness, +and delighted to run unrestrained through the unbounded field opened +before him by the contents of that volume. Brown rays issued from his +hairs, beard, and eyelids. Gold-like rays shot forth from his eyes and +skin; from his flesh and blood dashed out purple beams, and from his +teeth and bones escaped rays, white like the leaves of the lily; from +his hands and feet emanated rays of a deep-red colour, which, falling on +the surrounding objects, made them appear like so many rubies of the +purest water. His forehead sent forth undulating rays, resembling those +reflected by cut crystal. The objects which received those rays appeared +as mirrors, reflecting the rays of the sun. Those six rays of various +hues caused the earth to resemble a globe of the finest gold. Those +beams at first penetrated through our globe, which is eighty-two +thousand youdzanas thick, and thence illuminated the mass of water which +supports our planet. It resembled a sea of gold. That body of water, +though four hundred and eighty thousand youdzanas thick, could not stop +the elastic projection of those rays, which went forth through a stratum +of air nine hundred and sixty thousand youdzanas thick, and were lost in +the vacuum. Some beams, following a vertical direction, rushed through +the six seats of Nats, the sixteen of Brahmas, and the four superior +ones, and thence were lost in vacuum. Other rays, following a horizontal +direction, penetrated through an infinite series of worlds. The sun, the +moon, the stars appeared like opaque bodies, deprived of light. The +famous garden of Nats, their splendid palace, the ornaments hanging from +the tree Padetha were all cast into the shade and appeared obscure, as +if wrapped up in complete darkness. The body of the chief Brahma, which +sends forth light through one million of systems, emitted then but the +feeble and uncertain light of the glowworm at sunrise. This marvellous +light, emanating from the person of Buddha, was not the result of vowing +or praying; but all the constituent parts of his body became purified to +such an extent by the sublime meditation of the most excellent law that +they shone with a matchless brightness. + +Having thus spent seven days in that place, close to the Bodi tree, he +repaired to the foot of another gniaong tree, called adzapala, or the +shepherds' tree, so called because, under its cooling shade, shepherds +and their flocks of goats rested during the heat of the day. It was +situated at the east of the Bodi, at a distance of thirty fathoms. There +he sat in a cross-legged position, during seven days, enjoying the +sweetness of self-recollection. It was near to that place that the vile +Manh, who, since his great attack on Buddha, had never lost sight of +him, but had always secretly followed him with a wicked spirit, was +compelled to confess that he had not been able to discover in that Rahan +anything blamable, and expressed the fear of seeing him at once pass +over the boundaries of his empire. The tempter stooped in the middle of +the highway, and across it drew successively sixteen lines, as he went +on reflecting on sixteen different subjects. When he had thought over +each of the ten great virtues, he drew, first, ten lines, saying: "The +great Rahan has indeed practised to a high degree those ten virtues. I +cannot presume to compare myself to him." In drawing the eleventh, he +confessed that he had not, like that Rahan, the science that enabled to +know the inclinations and dispositions of all beings. In drawing the +twelfth, he said that he had not as yet acquired the knowledge of all +that concerns the nature of the various beings. Drawing the four +remaining lines, he confessed successively that he did not feel, like +that Rahan, a tender compassion for the beings yet entangled in the +miseries of existence, nor could he perform miracles, nor perceive +everything, nor attain to the perfect and supreme knowledge of the law. +On all these subjects he avowed his decided inferiority to the great +Rahan. + +Whilst Manh was thus engaged with a sad heart in meditating over those +rather humiliating points, he was at last found out by his three +daughters, Tahna,[11] Aratee, and Raga, who had for some time been +looking after him. When they saw their father with a downcast +countenance, they came to him, and inquired about the motive of his deep +affliction. "Beloved daughters," replied Manh, "I see this Rahan +escaping from my dominion, and notwithstanding my searching examination, +I have not been able to detect him in anything reprehensible. This is +the only cause of my inexpressible affliction." "Dear father," replied +they, "banish all sorrows from your mind, and be of a good heart; we +will very soon find out the weak side of the great Rahan, and +triumphantly bring him back within the hitherto unpassed limits of your +empire." "Beware of the man you will have to deal with," replied Manh. +"I believe that no effort, however great, directed against him, will +ever be rewarded with success. He is of a firm mind and unshaken +purpose. I fear you shall never succeed in bringing him back within my +dominions." "Dear father," said they, "we women know how to manage such +affairs; we will catch him like a bird in the net of concupiscence; let +fear and anxiety be for ever dispelled from your heart." Having given +this assurance, forthwith they went to Buddha, and said to him, +"Illustrious Rahan, we approach you respectfully and express the wish of +staying with you, that we may minister to all your wants." Without in +the least heeding their words, or even casting a glance at them, the +most excellent Buddha remained unmoved, enjoying the happiness of +meditation. Knowing that the same appearance, face, and bodily +accomplishments might not be equally pleasing, they assumed, one the +appearance of a heart-winning young girl, another that of a blooming +virgin, and the third that of a fine middle-aged beauty. Having thus +made their arrangements, they approached Buddha, and several times +expressed to him the desire of staying with him and ministering to his +wants. Unmoved by all their allurements, Buddha said to them, "For what +purpose do you come to me? You might have some chance of success with +those that have not as yet extinguished the fire of passion, and rooted +it from their heart; but I, like all the Buddhas, my predecessors, have +destroyed in me concupiscence, passion, and ignorance. No effort, on +your part, will ever be able to bring me back into the world of +passions. I am free from all passions, and have obtained supreme wisdom. +By what possible means could you ever succeed in bringing me back into +the whirlpool of passions?" The three daughters of Manh, covered with +confusion, yet overawed with admiration and astonishment, said to each +other, "Our father forsooth had given us a good and wise warning. This +great Rahan deserves the praises of men and Nats. Everything in him is +perfect; to him it belongs to instruct men in all things they want to +know." Saying this, they, with a downcast countenance, returned to their +father. + +It was in that very same place, at the foot of the adzapala gniaong, +that a heretic Pounha, named Mingalika, proud of his caste, came with +hasty steps, speaking loudly, and with little respect approached the +spot where Buddha was sitting.[12] Having entered into conversation with +him, the Pounha heard from his mouth instructions worthy of being ever +remembered. He said to Buddha, "Lord Gaudama, I have two questions to +put to you. Whence comes the name Pounha? What are the duties to be +performed in order to become a real Pounha?" Buddha, penetrating with +the keen eye of wisdom into the innermost soul of his interlocutor, +answered, "The real and genuine Pounha is he who has renounced all +passions, put an end to concupiscence, and has entered the ways leading +to perfection. But there are others, who are proud of their origin, who +walk hastily, speak with a loud voice, and who have not done what is +needful to destroy the influence of passions. These are called Pounhas +because of their caste and birth. But the true sage avoids everything +that is rash, impetuous or noisy: he has conquered all his passions, and +put an end to the principle of demerits. His heart loves the repetition +of formulas of prayers, and delights in the exercise of meditation. He +has reached the last way to perfection. In him there is no longer +wavering, or doubt, or pride. This man really deserves the name of +Pounha, or pure: he is indeed the true Pounha according to the law." The +instruction being finished, the Pounha rose respectfully from his place, +wheeled to the right and departed. + +Buddha continued the sublime work of contemplating pure truth through +the means of intense reflection. Having remained seven days in that +position, Buddha arose in an ecstasy and went to the south-eastern side +of the Bodi tree, to a distance of an oothaba (1 oothaba=to 20 tas, 1 +ta=to 7 cubits), on the sixth day after the full moon of Nayon. On that +spot there was a tank called Hidza-lee-dana. On the bank of that tank, +he sat under the shade of the Kiin tree, in a cross-legged position +during seven days, enjoying the delight of meditation. During those +seven days rain fell in abundance, and it was very cold. A Naga, chief +of that tank, would have made a building to protect Buddha against the +inclemency of the weather, but he preferred, in order to gain greater +merits, to coil himself up sevenfold round his person, and to place his +head above him, with his large hood extended. When the seven days were +over and the rain had ceased, the Naga quitted his position; then +assuming the appearance of a young man, he prostrated himself before +Buddha and worshipped him. Buddha said: "He who aims at obtaining the +state of Neibban ought to possess the knowledge of the four roads +leading thereto, as well as that of the four great truths and of all +laws. He ought to bear no anger towards other men, nor harm them in any +way soever. Happy he who receives such instructions." + +Buddha moved from that place, and went to the south of the Bodi tree, to +a distance of forty fathoms. At the foot of the linloon tree he sat in a +cross-legged position, having his mind deeply engaged in the exercise of +the sublimest contemplation. In that position he spent seven entire +days, which completed the forty-nine days which were to be devoted to +reflection and meditation around the Bodi tree. When this period of days +was over, at daybreak, on the fifth day after the full moon of Watso, he +felt the want of food. This was quickly perceived by a Thagia, who +hastened from his seat to the spot where Buddha was staying, and offered +him some Thit khia fruits, others say Kia-dzoo fruits, to prepare his +system to receive more substantial food. After he had eaten them, the +same celestial attendant brought him some water to rinse his mouth, and +to wash his face and hands. Buddha continued to remain in the same +position under the cooling and protecting shade of the linloon tree. + +To consecrate, as it were, and perpetuate the remembrance of the seven +spots occupied by Buddha during the forty-nine days that he spent round +the tree Bodi, a Dzedy was erected on each of those seven places. King +Pathenadi Kosala surrounded them with a double wall, and subsequently +King Dammathoka added two others. There were only three openings, or +gates, to penetrate into the enclosed ground, one on the north, another +on the east, and the third on the south. The river Neritzara rolls its +deep blue waters in a south-eastern direction from the Bodi tree, to a +distance of eight oothabas from it. On the eastern bank of that stream +another Dzedy has been erected on the spot where, previous to his +becoming a Buddha, he had eaten the forty-nine mouthfuls of the +delicious Nogana offered to him by the pious Thoodzata. + +Whilst Buddha was sitting in a cross-legged position under the linloon +tree, two brothers named Tapoosa and Palekat, merchants by profession, +arrived with five hundred carts in the Oorouwela forest, at the very +place where Buddha was staying. They had sailed from their native town, +called[13] Oukkalaba, which lies in a south-eastern direction from the +Mitzima country, bound for the port of Adzeitta. After landing, they +hired five hundred carts to carry their goods to a place called Soowama. +They were on their way to their destination when they arrived in the +Oorouwela forest. Great was their surprise when they saw on a sudden all +their carts unable to move, and arrested by some invisible power. + +A Nat who had been formerly their relative stopped by his power the +wheels of the carriages. Surprised at such a wonder, the merchants +prayed to the Nat who was guardian of that place. The Nat, assuming a +visible shape, appeared before them and said to them: "The illustrious +Buddha who by the knowledge of the four great truths has arrived to the +nature of Phra, is now sitting at the foot of the linloon tree. Go now +to that place, and offer him some sweet bread and honey; you shall +derive therefrom great merits for many days and nights to come." The two +brothers, joyfully complying with the Nat's request, prepared the sweet +bread and honey, and hastened in the direction that had been indicated +to them. Having placed themselves in a suitable position and prostrated +themselves before Buddha, they said: "Most glorious Phra, please to +accept these offerings; great merits doubtless will be our reward for +many days to come." Buddha had no patta to put those offerings in, for +the one he had received from the Brahma Gatigara had disappeared when +Thoodzata made him her great offerings. Whilst he was thinking on what +he had to do, four Nats came and presented him each with one patta, made +of nila or sapphire stone. Phra accepted the four pattas, not from +motives of covetousness, but to let each Nat have an equal share in such +meritorious work. He put the four pattas one in the other, and by the +power of his will they on a sudden became but one patta, so that each +Nat lost nothing of the merit of his offerings. Buddha received the +offerings of the two merchants in that patta, and satisfied his +appetite. The two brothers said to Buddha: "We have on this day +approached you, worshipped you, and respectfully listened to your +instructions; please to consider us as your devoted followers for the +remainder of our lives."[14] They obtained the position of Upathaka. +They continued addressing Buddha, and said: "What shall we henceforth +worship?" Buddha, rubbing his hand over his head, gave them a few of the +hairs that had adhered to his fingers, bidding them to keep carefully +those relics. The two brothers, overjoyed at such a valuable present, +most respectfully received it, prostrated themselves before Buddha, and +departed. + + +FOOTNOTES + + [1] The Nats or Dewatas play a conspicuous part in the affairs + of this world. Their seats are in the six lower heavens, + forming, with the abode of man and the four states of + punishment, the eleven seats of passions. But they often quit + their respective places, and interfere with the chief events + that take place among men. Hence we see them ever attentive in + ministering to all the wants of the future Buddha. Besides, they + are made to watch over trees, forests, villages, towns, cities, + fountains, rivers, &c. These are the good and benevolent Nats. + This world is also supposed to be peopled with wicked Nats, + whose nature is ever prone to the evil. A good deal of the + worship of Buddhists consists in superstitious ceremonies and + offerings made for propitiating the wicked Nats, and obtaining + favours and temporal advantages from the good ones. Such a + worship is universal, and fully countenanced by the talapoins, + though in opposition to the real doctrines of genuine Buddhism. + All kinds of misfortunes are attributed to the malignant + interference of the evil Nats. In cases of severe illness that + have resisted the skill of native medical art, the physician + gravely tells the patient and his relatives that it is useless + to have recourse any longer to medicines, but a conjuror must be + sent for to drive out the malignant spirit, who is the author of + the complaint. Meanwhile directions are given for the erection + of a shed, where offerings intended for the inimical Nat are + deposited. A female relative of the patient begins dancing to + the sound of musical instruments. The dance goes on, at first in + rather a quiet manner, but it gradually grows more animated + until it reaches the acme of animal frenzy. At that moment the + bodily strength of the dancing lady becomes exhausted; she drops + on the ground in a state of apparent faintness. She is then + approached by the conjuror, who asks her if the invisible foe + has relinquished his hold over the diseased. Being answered in + the affirmative, he bids the physician give medicines to the + patient, assuring him that his remedies will now act + beneficially for restoring the health of the sick, since their + action will meet no further opposition from the wicked Nat. + + Ignorance brings everywhere superstition in its train. When man + is unacquainted with the natural cause that has produced a + result, or an effect, which attracts powerfully his mind's + attention and affects him to a great degree, he is induced by + his own weakness to believe in the agency of some unknown being, + to account for the effect that he perceives. He devises the most + ridiculous means for expressing his gratitude to his invisible + benefactor, if the result be a favourable one; and has recourse + to the most extravagant measures to counteract the evil + influence of his supposed enemy, if the result be fatal to him. + Having once entered into the dark way of superstition, man is + hurried on in countless false directions by fear, hope, and + other passions, in the midst of the daily occurrence of + multifarious and unforeseen events and circumstances. Hence the + expression or manifestation of his superstition assumes a + variety of forms, and undergoes changes to an extent that + baffles every attempt at either counting their numberless kinds + or following them up through their ever-changing course. In + addition to the stores of superstitions bequeathed by the + generation that has preceded him, man has those of his own + creation; and the latter, if the thought of his mind and the + desires of his heart could be analysed, would be found far + exceeding the former in number. Having spent many years in a + country where Buddhism has prevailed from time immemorial, and + observed the effects of superstition over the people in their + daily doings, the writer has come to the conclusion that there + is scarcely an action done without the influence of some + superstitious motive or consideration. But the most prolific + source of superstition is the belief in the existence of + countless good and evil Nats, with whom the imagination of + Buddhists has peopled this world. + + It can scarcely be understood how the followers of an + atheistical creed can make, consistently with their opinions, an + attempt at prayer. Such an act of devotion implies the belief in + a being superior to men, who has a controlling power over them, + and in whose hands their destinies are placed. With a believer + in God, prayer is a sacred, nay, a natural duty. But such cannot + be the case with atheists. Despite the withering and despairing + influence of atheism, nothing can possibly obliterate from the + conscience and heart of man that inward faith in a supreme + being. The pious Thoodzata has in view the attainment of two + objects: she prays, without knowing to whom, that by the agency + of some one she might obtain the objects of her petition; she is + anxious to show her gratitude when she sees that her prayer has + been heard. Her faith in the _quasi_ omnipotence of the genii + makes her address thanks to them. The Nat is not the person to + whom her prayer appears directed, but he is rather a witness of + her petition. The Burmese, in general, under difficult + circumstances, unforeseen difficulties, and sudden calamities, + use always the cry, _Phra kaiba_--God assist me--to obtain from + above assistance and protection. Yet that Phra cannot be their + Buddha, though he be in their opinion the Phra _par excellence_, + since they openly declare that he in no way interferes in the + management of this world's affairs. Whence that involuntary cry + for assistance, but from the innate consciousness that above man + there is some one ruling over his destinies? An atheistical + system may be elaborated in a school of metaphysics, and forced + upon ignorant and unreflecting masses, but practice will ever + belie theory. Man, in spite of his errors and follies, is + naturally a believing being; his own weakness and multiplied + wants ever compel him to have recourse to some great being that + can help and assist him, and supply, to a certain extent, the + deficiency which, in spite of himself, he is compelled to + acknowledge existing in him as a stern and humiliating reality. + + [2] The Burmese, like all trans-Gangetic nations, divide the + year into twelve lunar months of twenty-nine and thirty days + alternately. Every third year they add one month, or as they + say, double the month of Watso (July). The year begins on, or + about, the 12th of April. The days of worship are the days of + the four quarters of the moon; but the days of the new and full + moon seem to have preference over those of the two other + quarters, which latter are scarcely noticed or distinguished + from common days. It was on the day of the full moon of April + that Thoodzata made her grand offering. + + [3] The Burmese translator, not having given in his remarks the + explanation or interpretation of Phralaong's five dreams, it + seems rather presumptuous to attempt doing a thing, the neglect + of which, on the part of the author, may be attributed either to + voluntary omission or to incapacity and inability. Let us try to + make up, in part, for the deficiency. The first dream + prognosticated the future greatness of Phralaong, whose sway, by + the diffusion of his doctrines throughout the world, was to be + universal, extending from one sea to the other sea. The grass + growing out of his navel and reaching to the sky was indicative + of the spreading of his law, not only amongst the beings + inhabiting the seat of men, but also amidst those dwelling in + the abodes of Nats and Brahmas. The ants covering his legs offer + an enigma, the explanation of which is reserved to some future + Oedipus. As to the birds of various colours, gathering round + him, from the four points of the compass, and on a sudden + becoming all white, by their contact with him, they represent + the innumerable beings that will come to hear the preaching of + the future Buddha with divers dispositions, and different + progress in the way of merits, and will all be perfected by + their following the true way to merit, that he will point out to + them. The fifth dream in which Phralaong thought he was walking + on a mountain of filth, without being in the least contaminated + by it, foreshowed the incomparable perfection and purity of + Buddha, who, though remaining in the world of passions, was no + more to be affected by their influence. + + [4] We have now reached the most interesting episode of + Phralaong's life. He is to become a perfected Buddha under the + shade of the gniaong or banyan tree (_ficus indica_, _ficus + religiosa_). There are two circumstances attending that great + event, deserving peculiar notice. The first is the preference + given to the east over the three other points of the compass, + and the second, the mighty combat that takes place between + Phralaong and the wicked Nat Manh, or Mar. I notice the first + circumstance because it agrees with the tradition prevailing + amongst most nations previous to or about the coming of our + Lord, that from the east there was to come an extraordinary + personage, who would confer on the human race the greatest + benefits, and cause the return of happy times, like the golden + age so much celebrated by poets. The Roman historian Suetonius + bears testimony to the existence of that tradition as being + universally known in his own days. It is not impossible that the + same notion, not unknown in the far east, might have induced + Phralaong to look towards the east at the supreme moment when + perfect intelligence was to become his happy lot. It may be said + in opposition to this supposition, that the splendour and + magnificence of the sun, emerging from the bosom of night, and + dispelling darkness by pouring a flood of light on the face of + the earth, restoring nature to life and action, was a sufficient + inducement to Phralaong for giving preference to the east. But + to an ascetic like him, who is convinced that this world is a + mere illusion, such a consideration would weigh very little on + his mind, and would not be a sufficient motive to induce him to + give so marked a preference to the east. + + The second circumstance remarkable for the time it occurred, is + the great combat between Phralaong and Manh. The first is the + personification of goodness and benevolence towards all beings; + the second is the personification of consummate wickedness. The + contest is to take place between the good principle on the one + hand, and the evil one on the other. Phralaong, on his becoming + Buddha, will preach a law designed to dispel mental darkness, to + check vicious passions, to show the right way to perfection, to + unloose the ties that keep beings in the wretched state of + existence, and enable them to reach safely the peaceful shores + of Neibban. Manh, the devil himself, the father of darkness, of + lies and deceit, delights in seeing all beings plunged into the + abyss of vices, carried out of the right way by the impetuous + and irresistible torrent of their passions, and doomed to turn + for ever in the whirlpool of endless existences. He looks upon + himself as the king of this world, and proudly exults in + contemplating all beings bending their neck under his tyrannical + yoke, and acknowledging his undisputed power. Now the moment + approaches when a mighty antagonist will contend with him for + the empire of the world. His mission will be to labour + incessantly for the delivery of all beings from the grasp of + their mortal enemy, and set them free from the tyranny of + passions. Manh is enraged at the audacious pretensions of + Phralaong. Hence the gigantic efforts he makes to maintain his + rights, and retain possession of his empire. At the time + Phralaong left the world to become a Rahan, Manh endeavoured to + dissuade him from attempting such a design. But on this + occasion, the tempter summons all his forces to avert, by an + irresistible attack, the deadly blow soon to be levelled at him. + It is needless to add that the reader, in perusing the detailed + account of the attack of Manh against Phralaong, ought to bear + in mind that it exhibits throughout but an allegory of the + opposition of evil to good. The victory of Phralaong over Manh + exemplifies the final triumph of truth over error. + + When the contest was nearly over, Phralaong objected to the + claims of Manh to the possession of his throne, on the ground + that he never had practised the ten great virtues, nor performed + works of kindness, charity, and benevolence, which alone can + entitle a being to obtain the Buddhaship. It is to be borne in + mind that these qualifications form the real characteristics of + a Buddha, together with the possession of the supreme + intelligence. In this system, they admit that there exist + certain beings called Pitzega-Buddhas, who possess all the + knowledge and science of a genuine Buddha, but as they are + divested of those benevolent feelings which induce the former to + labour earnestly for the benefit and salvation of all beings, + they cannot be assimilated to the real Buddhas. The cross-legged + position which our Buddha has always taken in preference to any + other, whilst he spent forty-nine days at the foot of and in + various places round the Bodi tree, is, as every one knows, + peculiar to and a favourite with all Asiatics. But with him, it + is the fittest position for meditation and contemplation. Hence + most of the statues or images of Gaudama exhibit or represent + him in the cross-legged position which he occupied when he + attained the Buddhaship. As this event is by far the most + important of his life, it is but natural that this great + occurrence should ever be forced upon the attention and memory + of his followers, by objects representing him on that most + important stage of his last existence. It is not unusual to meet + with statues of Gaudama, sometimes of colossal dimensions, + representing him in a reclining position. This is the peculiar + situation he occupied when he died. Hence those two most common + images of Gaudama are designed to remind his followers of the + two greatest circumstances of his life, viz., his becoming + Buddha, and his entering the state of Neibban. + + Here again one is forcibly compelled to reflect on the singular + _role_ attributed to those Pitzega-Buddhas. They possess all the + science of a Buddha, but are deficient in that kindness, + benevolence, and zeal which prompt the real Buddhas to labour so + strenuously for the deliverance of all beings. They appear only + in those ages of darkness and ignorance which are not to be + brightened and enlightened by the presence of a Buddha. They are + like smaller luminaries, shedding a pale light among men to + prevent their sinking into an unfathomable abyss of ignorance; + they maintain on earth some sparks of the knowledge of + fundamental truths, which otherwise would be completely + obliterated from the memory of men. Not unlike the prophets of + old, they prepare men in an indirect manner for the coming of + the future deliverer. Their mission being at an end, when a + Buddha is to come among men, they disappear, and none of them is + to be seen either in the days of Buddha or during all the time + his religion is to last. + + [5] The witness whom Phralaong summoned in support of his claim + to the undisturbed possession of the throne was the earth + itself. It maybe from the example that was set on this occasion + that Buddhists have borrowed the habit of calling the earth as a + witness of the good works they have done or are doing. I will + briefly relate what is done and said on such occasions. During + my former residence in Burmah I observed on a certain occasion, + when taking my evening walk, about ten or twelve persons of both + sexes assembled on a rather retired spot in the vicinity of a + pagoda. As they appeared all quite attentive, I came near to + them to see what was the cause that had brought them thither, + and what occurrence seemed to rivet their attention. As I was + known to some of them, they were not frightened by my sudden + apparition. On my asking them the motive of their assembling + here at a late hour, they said that, having buried yesterday a + child two years old, they came to make some offerings of boiled + rice, plantains, and other fruits, to propitiate the Nat of the + place. Having asked them to repeat the formula they had uttered + on the occasion, they kindly complied with my request. Here is + the substance of that formula. "Believing in the three precious + things, Buddha, the Law, and the Assembly of the perfect, I make + this offering, that I may be delivered from all present and + future miseries. May all beings existing in the four states of + punishment reach the fortunate seats of Nats. I wish all my + relatives and all men inhabiting this and other worlds to have a + share in this meritorious work. O earth and you Nats, guardians + of this place, be witness to the offering I am making." On + uttering these last words, the offerer of the present, or a + talapoin, sent for this purpose, pours down some water on the + ground. + + [6] As the Nats and all other beings are to be benefited by the + preachings of Buddha, it is but natural that they all join in + singing his praises and exalting his glorious achievements. The + Nagas and Galongs are fabulous animals, which are often + mentioned in the course of this Legend. It has been observed in + a former note that, according to the Buddhistic notions, animals + are beings in a state of punishment, differing from man, not in + nature, but in merits. Some of them, having nearly exhausted the + sum of their demerits, begin to feel the influence of former + merits. They are supposed to have, to a certain extent, the use + of reason. No wonder if they rejoice at seeing the triumph of + him who is to help them in advancing towards a condition better + than their present one. + + [7] The banyan tree, at the foot of which Phralaong obtains + perfect intelligence, is occasionally called throughout this + narrative the Bodi tree. The word Bodi means wisdom, science, or + knowledge. The Burmese, in their sacred writings, always mention + the tree by that name, because, under its shade, perfect science + was communicated to Phralaong. It is supposed to occupy the very + centre of the island of Dzampudiba. During all the while Phra or + Buddha (let us call him now by that name) remained under that + tree his mind was engaged in the most profound meditation, which + the gigantic efforts of his enemy could scarcely interrupt. It + is not to be inferred from the narrative in the text that + supreme intelligence was communicated suddenly or by miraculous + process to our Buddha. He was already prepared, by former mental + labours, for that grand result; he had previously capacitated + himself, by studies and reflection, for the reception of that + more than human science; he required but a last and mighty + effort of his intelligence to arrive finally at the acme of + knowledge, and thereby to become a perfect Buddha. That last + effort was made on this occasion, and crowned with the most + complete success. He gained the science of the past, present, + and future. + + It would be somewhat curious to investigate the motives that + have determined Buddhists to give to that sacred tree the name + of Bodi. At first sight one will infer that such a name was + given to the tree because, under its refreshing and cooling + shade the Bodi, or Supreme intelligence, was communicated to + Phralaong. The occurrence, however extraordinary it be, is + scarcely sufficient to account for such an appellation. Bearing + in mind the numerous and striking instances of certain revealed + facts and truths, offered to the attention of the reader of this + Legend, in a deformed but yet recognisable shape, it would not + be quite out of the limits of probability to suppose that this + is also a remnant of the tradition of the tree of knowledge that + occupied the centre of the garden of Eden. + + [8] The theory of the twelve causes and effects is, in itself, + very abstruse, and almost above the comprehension of those + uninitiated in the metaphysics of Buddhists. I will attempt to + analyse it in as simple and clear a way as possible. This theory + is very ancient, probably coeval with the first ages of + Buddhism. It forms this basis of its ontology and metaphysics in + the same manner as the four great and transcendent truths are + the foundation whereupon rests the system of morals. It is + probable that Gaudama, in his preachings, which were very + simple, and within the reach of ordinary minds, never formulated + his doctrine on this essential point in such a dry and concise + manner. But the seed was sown, and the germ deposited here and + there in his instructions. His immediate disciples, in + endeavouring to give a distant shape to their master's + doctrines, gradually framed the formula or theory just stated. + It, in fact, presents the very characteristics of a system + elaborated in a philosophical school. + + In taking our departure from the first cause, which is _Awidza_, + or ignorance, or the wanting in science, or no knowledge, we + have to follow the different stages and conditions of a being + until it reaches decrepitude, old age, and death. When we speak + of ignorance, or no science, we must not suppose the material + existence of a being that ignores. But we must take ignorance in + an abstract sense, deprived of forms, and subsisting in a manner + very different from what we are wont to consider ordinary + beings. A European has a great difficulty in finding his way + through a process of reasoning so extraordinary, and so + different from that positivism which he is used to. But with the + Buddhist the case is widely different. He can pass from the + abstract to the concrete, from the ideal to the real, with the + greatest ease. But let us follow the scale of the causes and + effects, upon which there are twelve steps. + + From ignorance comes _Sangkara_, that is to say, conception or + imagination, which mistakes for reality what is unreal, which + looks on this world as something substantial, whilst it is, + indeed, nothing but shadow and emptiness, assuming forms which + pass away as quick as the representations of theatrical + exhibitions. Sangkara, in its turn, begets _Wignian_, or + knowledge, attended with a notion of sentiment, implying that of + soul and life, in an abstract sense. From Wignian proceeds + _Namrup_, the name and form, because knowledge can have for its + object but name and form, &c., or, to speak in the language of + Buddhists, things that are external and internal. But let it be + borne in mind that what is herein meant is but the individuality + of an ideal being. + + The name and form give birth to the _Chayatana_, six senses, or + seats of the sensible qualities. To our division of the five + ordinary senses Buddhists add the sixth sense of Mano, or the + heart, the internal sense. Through the senses we are put in + communication or contact with all objects; hence the six senses + give rise to the sixth cause _Pasa_, which means, properly + speaking, contact. From this cause flows the seventh one, called + _Wedana_, or sensation, or, more generally still, sensibility. + In fact, there can be no contact from which there will not + result some sensation, either pleasant or unpleasant, _Wedana_ + gives infallibly rise to _Tahna_, or passion, or desire, or + inclination. From this point the series of causes and effects is + comparatively easy, because it presents conditions essentially + connected with a material object. By Tahna we ought not to + understand only the mere inclination that the sexes have one for + the other, but the general propensity created in a being by any + contact whatever, or perhaps, as usual with Buddhists, the + desire taken in an abstract sense. + + The immediate result from Tahna is _Upadan_, the attachment, or + the conception. It is that state in which the desire adheres to + something, assumes a shape. It is, in fact, the being conceived. + From the state of conception the being passes into that of + _Bawa_, or existence, or that condition which is created and + made by the influence of former good or bad deeds preceding + birth, which is but the apparition of the being into this world. + _Dzati_, or birth, is the eleventh cause. It is the ushering of + a being into the world. There are six ways by which a being + comes into this world, viz., those of Nat, Man, Assura, Preitta, + animal, and the inhabitant of hell. Birth is accomplished in + four different manners, by humidity, an egg, a matrice, and + metamorphosis. + + The twelfth and last step in the ladder of the causes and + effects is decrepitude and death. In fact, every being that is + born must grow old, decay, and finally die. + + Such is the process followed by Buddhists in attempting to + account for all that exists. What effect could such a reasoning + have over the mind of the generality of hearers it is difficult + to say. But we may rest assured that, though these principles + existed, as an embryo, in the discourses of the author of + Buddhism, they were never laid before the generality of hearers + in that crude scholastic form. Such abstruse ideas, when + analysed and commented upon by Buddhist doctors, gave rise to + the most opposite conclusions. The materialist school based its + revolting doctrines upon that theory; we may add that the + opinions of that school are generally held in Burmah, and by the + great mass of Buddhists. Some other doctors reasoned in the + following manner: Ignorance supposes two things, a being + ignoring and a thing ignored, that is to say, man and the world. + They admitted the eternity of a soul which had to pass through + the series above enumerated. With them metempsychosis was a + process exactly similar to that imagined by the Brahmins. As to + the world, it was, to them, an unreality. Knowledge enabled them + to come to the position of understanding and believing that + there is no such thing as what we by mistake call world. The + latter opinion, which seems to admit of a principle existing + distinct from matter, is opposed to the former and general one, + which supposes that spirit is but a modification of matter. We + deliberately make use of the doubt, implying expression, at the + head of the preceding sentence, respecting the real opinions of + the latter school, because, in their way of arguing, it is + impossible not to come to the painful conclusion that they + ignore, or do not admit, a distinction between spirit and + matter. + + [9] In a work different from that which has been translated is + found a more developed exposition of the four great and sublime + truths. We think that the reader will like to see in what manner + Buddhists themselves understand this important subject, which + is, with them, the foundation of their doctrine on morals. + + There are four great truths: pain, the production of pain, the + destruction of pain, and the way leading to that destruction. + What is pain, which is the first of the great truths? It is + birth, old age, sickness, death, the coming in contact with what + we dislike, the separation from what we feel an attachment for, + the illusion which begets false knowledge. All that is pain. + What is the production of pain, the second sublime truth? It is + the desire which incessantly longs for an illusory satisfaction, + which can never be obtained. That desire is a perpetually + renewed craving, coveting objects here and there, and never + satiated. Such is the cause productive of pain; such is the + prolific source of all miseries. What is the destruction of + pain, which is the third great truth? It is the doing away with + that desire which always shows itself, searches after this or + that object, is always attended with feelings of pleasure, or + some other sensations. It is the perfect and entire stifling of + that craving which always covets, and is never satiated. The + estranging oneself from that desire and that craving, the + complete destruction of both, constitutes the third great truth. + What is the way leading to the destruction of that desire, which + is the fourth great truth? The way which one has to follow, in + order to obtain that most desirable result, is that which the + wise man invariably follows, when he is with an intention, will, + diligence, action, life, language, thought, and meditation, + always pure and correct. + + The four truths are exceedingly praised by Buddhists. They + constitute what is emphatically called the law of the wheel, + incessantly revolving upon itself, and always presenting + successively those four points to the attentive consideration + and affectionate piety of the faithful. They are the offensive + weapons wherewith passions are attacked and destroyed: they are + the sword that cuts asunder the link that retains a being in the + circle of existences. The revelation, or manifestation of those + truths, is the great work that a Buddha has to perform. When it + is made, all beings in their respective seats rejoice in an + extraordinary manner. Inanimate nature even partakes in the + universal joy. The earth shakes with a great violence, and the + greatest prodigies proclaim aloud the fortunate manifestation of + a law which opens to all beings the way leading to deliverance. + The preaching of that doctrine took place for the first time in + the forest of Migadawon, not far from Baranathee, in the + presence and for the benefit of the five Rahans, who had + attended on Buddha, during the six years of mortification which + he spent to prepare and qualify himself for the Buddhaship. + + [10] Buddhists allow to their Buddha the power of working + wonders and miracles. How is this power conferred upon him? This + is a difficulty they cannot explain satisfactorily. The science + of Buddha makes him acquainted with all the laws regulating + nature, that is to say, the _ensemble_ of the animate and + inanimate beings constituting a world; but one is at a loss to + find the origin of that power which enables him, as often as he + likes, to suspend the course of those laws. Be that as it may, + certain it is that Buddha resorted always, during the course of + his preachings, to miracles, in order to convince those who + seemed to listen with rather an incredulous ear to his + doctrines. Miracles were used successfully, as powerful and + irresistible weapons, against certain heretics, the Brahmins, in + particular, who taught doctrines opposed to his own. They often + accompanied his preachings, for increasing faith in the heart of + his hearers. + + [11] The great tempter had been foiled in all his attempts to + conquer Buddha. In the sadness of his heart he was compelled to + acknowledge the superiority of his opponent and confess his + defeat. His three daughters came to console him, promising that + they would, by their united efforts, overcome the firmness of + the great Rahan, by awakening in his heart the fire of + concupiscence. The names of those three daughters of Manh denote + concupiscence. These new enemies of Buddha, therefore, are mere + personifications of the passion of lust. Pride, personified in + Manh, had proved powerless against the virtue of Buddha; he is + now assailed from a different quarter; the attack is to be + directed against the weakest side of human nature. But it is as + successless as the former one: it affords to Buddha another + occasion for a fresh triumph. + + [12] In Burmah the originator of the great Buddhistic system is + called Gaudama, and this appellation, according to many, appears + to be his family name. When he is called Rahan Gaudama, it means + the ascetic belonging to the family of Gaudama. In Nepaul, the + same personage is known under the name of Thakiamuni, that is to + say, the ascetic of the Thakia family. Those who refused to + believe in Buddha and his doctrines, those who held tenets + disagreeing with his own, and professed what, in the opinion of + their adversaries, was termed a heretical creed, invariably + called Buddha by his family name, placing him on the same level + with so many of his contemporaries who led the same mode of + life. The Siamese give the appellation of Sammana Khodom to + their Buddha, that is to say, Thramana Gaudama, or Gautama. The + Sanscrit word Thramana means an ascetic who has conquered his + passions and lives on alms. Gaudama belonged to the Kchatria + caste. Kings and all royal families in those days came out of + the same caste. Hence his father Thoodaudana was king of the + country of Kapilawot, anciently a small state, north of + Goruckpore. + + The young Pounha, not unlike the young man mentioned in the + gospel, had, by the preachings of Gaudama, become acquainted + with all the laws and practices relating to the general duties + and obligations incumbent on men in general. He might have + perhaps added that he had observed all those precepts from his + youth, or, at least, that he was sure now, with the additional + light he had received from his eminent teacher, to observe + faithfully all the injunctions mentioned in the course of the + lecture: but he was not satisfied with an ordinary proficiency + in virtue and observances; he aimed at superior attainments; he + wished to obtain the greatest perfection, that is to say, that + of Brahmas. In what does such a perfection consist? The book of + metaphysics informs us that the five states of Dzan, or + contemplations, are enjoyed by the beings located in the sixteen + seats of Brahmas, in the following order. The first state, or + that of consideration, is shared by all the beings inhabiting + the three first seats of Brahmas. Their occupation is to + consider the various subjects the mind has to dwell on. The + second Dzan, or reflection, is reserved for the beings occupying + the next three seats. Those beings have no more to look out for + subjects of meditation. Their sole occupation is to dive into + truth and fathom its depth and various bearings. The third state + of Dzan procures the pleasure which is derived from the + contemplation of truth, and belongs to the beings of the three + seats, superior to those just alluded to; in the fourth Dzan is + enjoyed a placid happiness, which is the result of the + possession of truth; it is reserved for the beings of the three + next seats. The fifth Dzan, or perfect stability, is the happy + lot of the beings living in the five last seats. Those fortunate + inmates are so entirely rooted in truth, and so perfectly exempt + from all that causes mutability, that they arrive at a state of + complete fixity, the whole of their soul being riveted on truth. + + Apology is certainly due to the reader, who is but slightly + initiated in such abstruse subjects, for laying before him + particulars with which he is so unfamiliar; but this trouble + must be borne up by him who desires to obtain access into the + gloomy sanctuary of Buddhism. + + [13] The episode of these two merchants is well known to the + inhabitants of the Irrawaddy valley. In three different + manuscripts which the writer has had in his hands, he has found + it related with almost the same particulars. Oukkalaba, the + place the two young men started from, was situated probably on + the spot now occupied by the village of Twaintay, or not far + from it. How far that place was from the sea in those remote + times it is not possible to ascertain with precision. Certain it + is, that it was a port from which vessels sailed across the Bay + of Bengal. The port of Eedzeitha has not as yet been identified + with any known locality. It was situated in all probability + between the mouth of the Krichna and that of the Hoogly. One of + the manuscripts mentions that when Gaudama handed over to the + two merchants eight hairs of his head, he bade them, on their + arrival in their country, deposit the hairs on a small hill + called Seingouttara, where the relics of the three former + Buddhas of our period had been enshrined. They were twenty-seven + days in reaching Maudin or Cape Negrais, rather a long voyage. + Having come to their own place, they related to the governor all + the particulars of their interesting journey. The latter, + without loss of time, assembled the people and set out in search + of the Seingouttara mount. All the eminences were cleared of + their brushwood, but the mount could not be discovered. Not + knowing what to do, they consulted the Nats on that affair. At + last, through their assistance, the mount was found out. But + when they inquired about the place of the relics of the three + former Buddhas, the Nats of Yesapan, Inandra, and Gauveinda + confessed that they knew nothing on the subject, but referred + the inquirers to other Nats older than they, viz.: those of + Deckina, Yauhani, Maubee, Ameisa, and Tsoolay, who at once + pointed out the spot which they were so eagerly searching after. + This spot is no other than the one over which stands and towers + the lofty and massive Shoay Dagon. They erected a Dzedy, in + which they enshrined the relics they had brought with them, the + eight hairs of Buddha. This story is doubtless the foundation on + which rests the popular belief that those very hairs are to this + day in the interior of that monument, and the true source from + which has originated the profound veneration which, in our own + days, Buddhists, from all parts of Burmah, Siam, and the Shan + states, pay by their pilgrimages and offerings to the Dagon + Pagoda. + + [14] Upasaka is a Pali word which is designed to mean those + persons who, having heard the instructions of Buddha, and + professed a faith or belief in him and his doctrines, did not + enter the profession of Rahans. Hence they are quite distinct + from the Bikus or mendicants, who formed the first class of the + hearers of Buddha, and renounced the world in imitation of their + great master. The Upasakas were therefore people adhering to the + doctrines of Buddha, but as yet remaining engaged in the + ordinary pursuits of life. The two brothers became disciples of + Buddha, but not of the first class, since they did not embrace + the more perfect mode of life of the ascetics. + + This is the first instance in this legend of an allusion being + made to relics, that is to say, to objects supposed to be + surrounded with a certain amount of sacredness, and esteemed on + that account to be worthy of receiving from devotees respect and + veneration. The two young converts, not as yet confirmed in the + new faith they had embraced, thought they wanted some exterior + object to which they might hereafter direct their homage and + offer their respects. They were as yet far from being acquainted + with the sublime science of their eminent teacher, who, + disregarding matter and all its modifications, could not but + feel quite indifferent respecting the pretended value of relics + of even the most sacred character. How is it that the stern + moralist, the contemner of this illusory world, could think of + giving a few hairs of his head to two new young converts, that + they might use them as objects of worship? Buddha doubtless knew + exactly and appreciated admirably the wants and necessities of + human nature as it is, and will very likely ever be to the end + of ages. Men are led, actuated, impressioned, and influenced by + the senses; in fact, it is through their senses that the + knowledge of things is conveyed to their minds. He gave to his + imperfectly instructed disciples a thing that would serve to + vivify and reanimate in their memory the remembrance of Buddha, + and of the instructions they had heard from him. Those + grossly-minded hearers asked for an object they might carry + about with them and worship. Buddha, out of deference for their + weak intellect, gave them a few hairs of his head, the sight of + which was designed to maintain in their souls a tender affection + for the person of him these things had belonged to. This subject + will receive hereafter the further treatment it deserves when we + come to examine the nature of the worship paid by Buddhists to + the images of Gaudama, and to the relics and Dzedis. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + + _Buddha hesitates to undertake the task of preaching the law -- + The great Brahma entreats him to preach the law to all beings -- + His assent to the entreaties -- Journey towards Migadawon -- + He meets Ouppaka -- His first preachings -- Conversion of a + young nobleman named Ratha, followed by that of his father and + other relatives -- Conversion of several other noblemen -- + Instructions to the Rahans -- Conversion of the three Kathabas._ + + +Having come to the end of his great meditations,[1] Buddha left this +spot and returned to the place called Adzapala, where he revolved the +following subject in his mind:--"The knowledge," said he, "of the law +and of the four great truths, which I alone possess, is very hard to be +had. The law is deep; it is difficult to know and understand it; it is +very sublime, and can be comprehended only by the means of earnest +meditation. It is sweet, filling the soul with joy, and accessible only +to the wise. Now all beings are sunk very low by the influence of the +five great passions; they cannot free themselves from their baneful +operation, which is the source of all mutability. But the law of +mutability is the opposite of the law of Neibban or rest. This law is +hard to be understood. If I ever preach that law, beings will not be +able to understand me, and from my preaching there will result but a +useless fatigue and unprofitable weariness," Buddha thus remained almost +disinclined to undertake the great duty of preaching the law. The great +Brahma, observing what was taking place in Buddha's soul, cried out: +"Alas! all mankind are doomed to be lost. He who deserves to be +worshipped by all beings now feels no disposition to announce the law to +them." He instantly left his seat, and having repaired to the presence +of Phra, his cloak over his shoulders with one extremity hanging +backward, he bent his knee, lifted up his joined hands to the forehead +before the sage, and said to him: "Most illustrious Buddha, who art +adorned with the six glories, do condescend to preach the most excellent +law; the number of those buried under the weight and filth of passions +is comparatively small; if they do not listen to the law there will be +no great loss. But there is an immense number of beings who will +understand the law. In this world there are beings who are moderately +given up to the gratification of sensual appetites; and there are also a +great many who are following heretical opinions to whom the knowledge of +truth is necessary, and who will easily come to it. Lay now open the way +that leads to the perfection of Ariahs; those perfections are the gates +to Neibban." Thus he entreated Buddha. This Brahma had been in the time +of Buddha Kathaba a Rahan, under the name of Thabaka, and was +transferred to the first seat of Brahma for the duration of a world. + +On hearing the supplications of that Brahma, Buddha began to feel a +tender compassion for all beings. With the keen eyes of a Buddha he +glanced over the whole world. He discovered distinctly those beings who +were as yet completely sunk in the filth of passions, those who were but +partly under the control of passions, and those whose dispositions +seemed to be more promising. He then made to the chief of Brahmas the +solemn promise that he would preach his law to all beings. Satisfied +with the answer he had received, the chief rose up, withdrew +respectfully at a proper distance, and turning on the right, left the +presence of Buddha and returned to his own seat. + +Another thought preoccupied the mind of Buddha. "To whom," said he, +"shall I announce the law?" Having pondered a while over this subject, +he added: "The Rathee Alara of the Kalama race is gifted with wisdom and +an uncommonly penetrating mind; passions have scarcely any influence +over him. I will first preach to him the most excellent law." A Nat then +said to Phra that Alara had died seven days ago. Buddha, to whom the +past is known, had already seen that Alara was dead. He said: "Great +indeed is the loss Alara has met with; he would have doubtless been able +to understand right well the law I intended to preach to him. To whom +shall I go now?" Having paused a while, he added: "The Rathee Oodaka, +son of Prince Rama, has a quick perception; he will easily understand my +doctrine; to him I will announce the law." But the same Nat told him +that Oodaka had died the night before last, at midnight. "O! great is +the loss that has come upon Oodaka; he would have easily acquired the +knowledge of the perfect law." Buddha considered a third time, and said +to himself: "To whom shall I go to preach the law?" After a moment's +delay he added: "Many are the services I received in the wilderness from +the five Rahans who lived with me.[2] I will repay their good offices to +me, by preaching to them the law, but where are they now?" His +penetrating regards soon discovered them in the solitude of Migadawon. +Having enjoyed himself in the place Adzapala, Buddha went on towards the +country of Baranathee. All the former Buddhas travelled through the air, +but our Buddha, who had merciful designs over Upaka, went on foot. On +his way to the village of Gaya, at a distance of three gawots from the +Bodi tree, Buddha went to rest, at midday, for a while under the cooling +shade of a tree. There he was seen by the heretic Rahan Upaka, who, +approaching near him, said, "O Rahan, all your exterior bespeaks the +most amiable qualities; your countenance is at once modest and +beautiful. Under what teacher have you become a Rahan? To what law or +doctrine have you given preference in your arduous studies?" Buddha +answered: "Upaka, I have triumphed over all the laws of mutability; I am +acquainted with all the laws that rule this universe, and the beings +existing therein; from concupiscence and other passions I am wholly +disengaged. I have come to preach the most excellent law to all beings, +and teach them the four great truths I alone am acquainted with. I will +beat the great drum of the law. I have no teacher, and among Nats and +men there is none equal to me. Because of my victory, I have been named +Zeena. Now I am proceeding to the country of Baranathee, for the sake of +preaching the law." Upaka replied, "You are certainly the illustrious +Gaudama." He then shook his head, turned away from the road, and went to +the village of Wingaha. The instructions, however, germinated as good +seed in the soul of Upaka, and were the foundation of his subsequent +conversion, which happened as follows:--After this interview with +Gaudama, Upaka dwelt as a hermit in the village of Wingaha, where a shed +was erected for his dwelling. A hunter brought him support. It happened +that the hunter being engaged in a hunting excursion, his daughter went +to the hermit's cell, to carry him his food. Upaka was smitten by the +beauty of the damsel. He stretched himself on his belly and said to +himself, "I will take no food, nor change this position, unless I obtain +the object of my wishes." He stayed for several days in that position +without uttering a word, or making a single movement, or taking any +food. At last the hunter returned, and went forthwith to the hermit's +cell to inquire about the cause of his strange behaviour. He pulled him +by the feet, calling him aloud by the name of hermit; after a while a +sepulchral groan was heard, indicating that he was still alive. The good +hunter affectionately entreated him to mention to him what he wanted; +that he was ready to give him anything that he would ask. The hermit a +second time made a prolonged groan, as a man endeavouring to gather +strength. He then mentioned to the hunter the passion he had for his +daughter, and swore that he would die on the spot if his demand were +rejected. The father having given his consent, Upaka rose up, and was +soon married to Tsawama, who after due time presented him with a son. It +happened that Tsawama soon began to dislike her husband, and poured upon +him on every occasion all sorts of abuse. Unable to bear any longer the +unpleasant behaviour of his wife, Upaka said to himself, "I have here +neither friend nor supporter: I will go to my friend Dzina; he will +receive me with kindness." Hereupon he departed, inquiring everywhere +about his friend Dzina. At last he arrived at the place where Buddha was +staying with his disciples. Some of them, hearing Upaka inquiring with a +loud voice about his friend Dzina, took him into the presence of Buddha, +who, understanding at once the sad and painful state of the old man, +kindly asked what he wanted. Upaka replied that he desired to become a +Samanay under his direction. Buddha, to try his disposition, said to +him, "You are too old, Upaka, to enter upon the course of the severe +life of a Samanay, and conform to the enjoined practices." But the +latter renewing his entreaties, he was admitted among the members of the +assembly. He became an Anagam, died and migrated to one of the seats of +Brahmas. After a short stay up there, he obtained the deliverance. His +son was Thoobadda, who became afterwards an illustrious convert. Buddha +continued his way towards Baranathee, and soon reached the solitude of +Migadawon, a little distant from Baranathee, and went to the place where +lived the five unbelieving Rahans. When they saw him coming at a +distance, they said to each other, "The Rahan Gaudama is in search after +disciples; he has just performed penitential deeds, and he is looking +out for alms and clothes. Let us pay no respect to him in the way of +going out to meet him, of receiving the tsiwaran from his hands, of +presenting him water to wash his feet and preparing a place to sit on; +let him sit wherever he pleases." Such was the plan they concerted among +themselves. But when Buddha drew near, they could adhere no longer to +their resolution. They rose up and went out to welcome his arrival. One +took the tsiwaran from his hands, another the patta, a third one brought +water for the washing of the feet, and a fourth one prepared a becoming +place to rest. Buddha sat in the place that had been prepared for him. +They called him by the name of Gaudama and other appellations, usually +bestowed on ordinary Rahans. Buddha meekly replied to them, "Do not call +me any longer by the name of Gaudama, or any other title bestowed on an +ascetic. I have become a Rahanda; I alone am acquainted with the four +fundamental truths. Now I am come to preach to you the true law. Listen, +O Rahans, to my words; I will lead you to the true state of Neibban. My +law will make you acquainted not only with the truths to be known, but +at the same time point out to you the duties you have to perform, in +order to obtain the state of Arahat. There are four ways leading to +perfection. He who steadily follows them will enjoy the rewards and +merits gained by his exertions. In that position he will see distinctly +his own self; the light of Neibban will break forth upon him. But in +order to obtain the great results I set forth before you, he must +forsake his house and the world, and become a Rahan." + +The unbelieving Rahans persisted in not acknowledging him as a Buddha, +and reproached him with going about in search of disciples and in quest +of alms. The same preaching was repeated by Buddha, and the same answer +was returned by his incredulous hearers. At last Buddha, assuming a +lofty and commanding tone, said to them, "I declare unto you that I am a +Buddha, knowing the four great truths and showing the way to Neibban." +The hitherto unbelieving ascetics humbled themselves, and declared their +belief in him and in all that he had taught. From that moment they +entered on the four ways of perfection. The day was that of the full +moon of Watso. The preaching began at the moment when half the disc of +the sun was visible on the western horizon, and half that of the moon +was above the eastern horizon. When completed, the sun had just +disappeared, and the moon's entire globe was visible on the horizon. The +five first converts were named Kautagnya, Baddiha, Wappa, Mahanan, and +Asadzi. + +The Nats, guardians of the country of Baranathee[3] and Migadawon, +hearing the sublime instructions delivered by Buddha on this occasion, +cried aloud, "The law which the most excellent Buddha preaches is such +as no man, Pounha or Brahma, can teach." Their united voices were heard +in the lowest seat of Nats; the inhabitants of that seat, catching their +words, repeated them, and they were heard by those of the next seat, and +so on, until they reached the seats of Brahmas, and were re-echoed +through 10,000 worlds. A mighty commotion was felt all over these +worlds. + +The five at first unbelieving, but now believing Rahans obtained the +perfection of Thautapati. Buddha often repeated to those that approached +him, "Come to me; I preach a doctrine which leads to the deliverance +from all the miseries attending existence." On that day, being the full +moon of Watso, eighteen koodes (18,000,000,000) of Nats and Brahmas who +had heard his preachings obtained the deliverance. The conversation of +those five Rahans exhibited to the world the splendid and wonderful +sight of six Rahandas assembled in the same place. + +At that time, whilst Buddha was in the Migadawon grove, the memorable +conversion of a young layman took place. There was in the country of +Baranathee the son of a rich man, named Ratha. He was of very gentle and +amiable disposition. His father had built for him three palaces for each +season of the year. A crowd of young damsels, skilful in the art of +playing on all sorts of musical instruments, attended him in each of +those palaces. Ratha spent his time in the midst of pleasure and +amusements. On a certain day, while surrounded with female dancers and +singers, he fell into a deep sleep. The musicians, following his +example, laid aside their instruments, and fell asleep too. The lamps, +filled with oil, continued to pour a flood of light throughout the +apartments. Awaking sooner than usual, Ratha saw the musicians all +asleep round him in various and unseemly situations. Some slept with +wide-opened mouths, some had dishevelled hair, some were snoring aloud, +some had their instruments lying on themselves, and others by their +sides. The whole exhibited a vast scene of the greatest confusion and +disorder. Sitting on his couch in a cross-legged position, the young man +silently gazed with amazement and disgust over the unseemly spectacle +displayed before him; then he said to himself, "The nature and condition +of the body constitute indeed a truly heavy burden; that coarser part of +our being affords a great deal of trouble and affliction." Whereupon he +instantly arose from his couch, put on his gilt slippers, and came down +to the door of his apartment. The Nats, who kept a vigilant watch, lest +any one should oppose him in the execution of his holy purpose, kept +open the door of the house, as well as the gate of the city. Ratha, free +from all impediments, directed his steps towards the solitude of +Migadawon. At that time Buddha, who had left his sleeping place at a +very early hour, was walking in front of the house. He saw at a distance +a young man coming in the direction he was in. He instantly stopped his +pacing, and going into his own apartment, sat as usual on his seat, +awaiting the arrival of the young stranger, who soon made his appearance +and stated modestly the object of his visit. Buddha said to him, "O +Ratha! the law of Neibban is the only true one: alone it is never +attended with misery and affliction. O Ratha! come nearer to me; remain +in this place; to you I will make known the most perfect and valuable +law." On hearing these kind and inviting expressions, Ratha felt his +heart overflow with the purest joy. He instantly put off his slippers, +drew nearer to Buddha, bowed down three times before him, withdrew then +to a becoming distance, and remained in a respectful attitude. Buddha +began to preach the law, unfolding successively the various merits +obtained by alms-giving, by a strict performance of all duties and +practices of the law, and, above all, by renouncing the pleasures of +this world. During all the while the heart of the young visitor expanded +in a wonderful manner: he felt the ties that hitherto had bound him as +it were to the world gradually relaxing and giving way before the +unresisting influence of Buddha's words. The good dispositions of the +young hearer were soon remarked by Buddha, who went on explaining all +that related to the miseries attending existence, the passions +tyrannising over the soul, the means wherewith to become exempt from +those passions, and the great ways leading to perfection. After having +listened to that series of instructions, Ratha, like a white cloth that +easily retains the impressions of various colours printed upon it, felt +himself freed from all passions, and reached at once the state of +Thautapati. + +Ratha's mother, not meeting her son early, went up as usual to his +apartment, and, to her great surprise, found him gone; moreover she +observed unmistakable marks of his sudden and unexpected departure. She +ran forthwith to her husband, and announced to him the sad tidings. On +hearing of such an unlooked-for event, the father sent messengers in the +direction of the four points of the compass, with positive orders to +search incessantly after his son, and leave no means of inquiry untried. +As to himself he resolved to go to the solitude of Migadawon, in the +hope of finding out some track of his son's escape. He had scarcely +travelled a limited distance, when he observed on the ground the marks +of his son's footsteps. He followed them up, and soon came in sight of +Buddha's resting-place. Ratha was at the time listening with deepest +attention to all the words of his great teacher. By the power of Buddha +he remained hidden from the eyes of his father, who came up, and, having +paid his respects to Gaudama, eagerly asked him if he had not seen his +son. Gaudama bade him sit down and rest after the fatigue of his +journey. Meanwhile he assured him that he would soon see his son. +Rejoiced at such an assurance, Ratha's father complied with the +invitation he had received. Buddha announced his law to this +distinguished hearer, and soon led him to the perfection of Thautapati. +Filled with joy and gratitude, the new convert exclaimed, "O illustrious +Phra, your doctrine is a most excellent one; when you preach it, you do +like him who replaces on its basis an upset cup; like him, too, who +brings to light precious things, which had hitherto remained in +darkness; like him who points out the right way to those that have lost +it; who kindles a brilliant light in the middle of darkness; who opens +the mind's eyes that they might see the pure truth. Henceforth I adhere +to you and to your holy law; please to reckon me as one of your +disciples and supporters." This was the first layman that became a +disciple of Gaudama, in the capacity of Upasaka.[4] + +Whilst Buddha was busily engaged in imparting instruction to Ratha's +father, the young man had entered into a deep and solemn meditation over +some of the highest maxims he had heard from his great teacher. He was +calmly surveying, as it were, all the things of this world; the more he +progressed in that great work, the more he felt there was in himself no +affection whatever for anything. He had not yet become a Rahan, nor put +on the Rahan's dress. Phra, who attentively watched all the movements of +his pupil's mind, concluded from his present dispositions that there +could be no fear of his ever returning into the world of passions. He +suddenly caused by his mighty power the son to become visible to his +father's eyes. The father, perceiving on a sudden his son sitting close +by him, said, "Beloved son, your mother is now bathed in tears, and +almost sinking under the weight of affliction caused by your sudden +departure; come now to her, and by your presence restore her to life, +and infuse into her desolated soul some consolation." Ratha, calm and +unmoved, made no reply, but cast a look at his master. Buddha, +addressing Ratha's father, said to him, "What will you have to state in +reply to what I am about to tell you? Your son knows what you know; he +sees what you see; his heart is entirely disentangled from all +attachment to worldly objects; passions are dead in him. Who will now +ever presume to say that he ought to subject himself again to them and +bend his neck under their baneful influence?" "I have spoken rashly," +replied the father; "let my son continue to enjoy the favour of your +society; let him remain with you for ever and become your disciple. The +only favour I request for myself is to have the satisfaction of +receiving you in my house with my son attending you, and there to enjoy +the happiness of supplying you with your food." Buddha by his silence +assented to his request. No sooner had his father departed than Ratha +applied for the dignity of Rahan, which was forthwith conferred upon +him. At that time there were in the world seven Rahandas. + +On the following morning, Gaudama, putting on his yellow tsiwaran, and +carrying the patta under his arm, attended by the Rahan Ratha, sallied +from his house, and went, according to his promise, to the place of +Ratha's father, to receive his food. He had scarce entered the house and +occupied the seat prepared for him, when the mother of the new Rahan and +she who was formerly his wife came both to pay him their respects. +Buddha preached to them the law, explaining in particular the three[5] +principal observances becoming their sex and condition. The effect of +the preaching was immediate and irresistible: they became exempt from +all sins, and attained the state of the perfect, of Thautapati, and +became, among the persons of their sex, the first Upasakas. They desired +to be ranked among his disciples, and devoted themselves to his service. +They were the first persons of their sex who took refuge in the three +precious things, Buddha, his law, and the assembly of the perfect. +Gaudama and his faithful attendant, having eaten the excellent and +savoury food prepared for them, departed from the house and returned to +the monastery. + +Four young men[6] belonging to the most illustrious families of +Baranathee, and formerly connected with Ratha by the ties of intimate +friendship, having heard that their friend had shaved his head and +beard, had put on a yellow dress and become a Rahan, said among +themselves: "Our friend has withdrawn from the society of men, given up +all pleasures, and has entered into the society of Rahans. There can be +no doubt but the law of Wini[7] is most excellent and sublime, and the +profession of Rahan most perfect." Whereupon they came to the place +their friend resided in, prostrated themselves before him, as usual in +such circumstances, and sat down at a respectful and becoming distance. +Ratha took them before Buddha, praying him to deliver to those who had +been his friends in the world the same instructions he had received from +him. Gaudama willingly assented to his request, and forthwith began to +explain to them the nature and abundance of merits derived from +alms-giving. He initiated them into the knowledge of the chief precepts +and observances of the law. These young hearers received with a cheerful +heart his instructions, and felt within themselves an unknown power, +dissolving gradually all the ties that had hitherto retained them in the +world of passions. Delighted at remarking so good dispositions in those +young men, Gaudama explained to them the higher doctrine of the four +great and fundamental truths which lead to perfection.[8] When the +preaching was over, they applied for and obtained the dignity of Rahans. +There were at that time eleven Rahandas in the whole world. + +Fifty other young men of good descent, who had been the companions of +Ratha while in the world, having heard that their friend had left the +world, had put on the yellow garb and become Rahan, said to each other: +"The law which our friend listened to may not be a bad one; the +profession he has entered into may not be as despicable as many people +are wont to assert." They resolved to judge for themselves and to be +eye-witnesses to all that had been said on the subject. They set out for +the monastery Ratha was living in, came into his presence, paid their +respects to him, and stopped at a proper distance in a respectful +posture. Hatha led them to his great teacher, humbly craving for his +former friends the same favour he had done to him. Buddha graciously +assented to the request, and imparted instruction to his young hearers, +with such a happy result that they instantly applied for admittance to +the dignity of Rahans. This favour was granted to them. The total number +of Rahandas was thereby raised to sixty-one. + +On a certain day, Gaudama called his disciples into his presence,[9] and +said to them: "Beloved Rahans, I am exempt from the five great passions +which, like an immense net, encompass men and Nats. You too, owing to +the instructions you have received from me, enjoy the same glorious +privilege. There is now incumbent on us a great duty, that of labouring +effectually in behalf of men and Nats, and procuring to them the +invaluable blessing of the deliverance. To the end of securing more +effectually the success of such an undertaking, let us part with each +other and proceed in various and opposite directions, so that not two of +us should follow up the same way. Go ye now and preach the most +excellent law, expounding every point thereof, and unfolding it with +care and attention in all its bearings and particulars. Explain the +beginning, the middle, and the end of the law to all men, without +exception; let everything respecting it be made publicly known and +brought to the broad daylight. Show now to men and Nats the way leading +to the practice of pure and meritorious works. You will meet, doubtless, +with a great number of mortals, not as yet hopelessly given up to their +passions, and who will avail themselves of your preaching for +reconquering their hitherto forfeited liberty, and freeing themselves +from the thraldom of passions. For my own part, I will direct my course +towards the village of Thena situated in the vicinity of the solitude of +Ooroowela." + +At that time the wicked Nat Manh came into the presence of Buddha, and +tempted him in the following manner: "Men and Nats," said he, "have the +five senses; through those five senses passions act upon them, encompass +their whole being, and finally keep them bound up with the chains of an +unresistible slavery. As to you, Rahan, you are not an exception to that +universal condition, and you have not yet outstepped the boundaries of +my empire." Phra replied: "O vile and wretched Nat! I am well acquainted +with the passions men and Nats are subjected to. But I have freed myself +from them all, and have thereby placed myself without the pale of your +empire; you are at last vanquished and conquered." Manh, yet undismayed, +replied: "O Rahan, you may be possessed of the power of flying through +the air; but even in that condition, those passions which are inherent +in the nature of mortal beings will accompany you, so that you cannot +flatter yourself of living without the boundaries of my empire." Phra +retorted: "O wicked Nat, concupiscence and all other passions I have +stifled to death in me so that you are at last conquered." Manh, the +most wretched among the wretched, was compelled to confess with a broken +heart that Phra had conquered him, and he instantly vanished away. + +Full of fervour in preaching the law, the Rahans saw themselves +surrounded with crowds of converts, who asked for the dignity of Rahan. +They poured in daily from all parts, into the presence of Buddha to +receive at his hands the much-longed-for high dignity.[10] Buddha said +to them, "Beloved Rahans, it is painful and troublesome both to you and +to those who desire to be admitted into our holy brotherhood to come +from such a great distance to me. I now give to you the power of +conferring the dignity of Patzin and Rahan on those whom you may deem +worthy to receive it. This is the summary way you will have to follow on +such occasions. Every candidate shall have his hair and beard shaved, +and shall be provided with the tsiwaran of yellow colour. These +preliminaries being arranged, the candidate, with the extremities of the +kowot thrown over his shoulders, shall place himself in a squatting +position, his joined hands raised to the forehead, repeating three +times, 'I adhere to Buddha, to the law, and to the assembly of the +perfect.'" + +Gaudama, assembling again round him the Rahans, said to them, "Beloved +Rahans, it is owing to my wisdom, aided by constant reflection and +meditation, that I have at last reached the incomparable state of +Arahatapho; endeavour all of you to follow my example, and arrive at +last at the same state of excellence and perfection." + +The vile and wretched Nat Manh appeared again before Buddha, striving to +tempt him in the same manner as before. Buddha, discovering the snares +laid down by the tempter, returned the same reply. Finding himself +discovered, Manh vanished from his presence. + +Having spent his first lent[11] in the solitude of Migadawon, Phra +shaped his course in the direction of the forest of Ooroowela. On his +way to that place he stopped for a while in a jungle, and sat under a +tree, to enjoy some rest under its cool shade. At that time thirty young +noblemen had come to the jungle to indulge in sports and diversions. +Each of them had brought his wife, with the exception of one, who, +having no wife, was accompanied by a harlot. During the night the harlot +rose up unperceived, picked up the best articles belonging to the +parties, and carrying them with her, took to her heels through the dense +forest. In the morning the thirty young noblemen, rising up, soon +perceived the havoc made in the richest articles of their dress, and set +out in search of her who they suspected had done the mischief. They came +by chance to the spot where Gaudama was sitting in a cross-legged +position, and inquired from him whether he had seen a woman passing by. +Buddha said to them, "Which, in your opinion, is the best and most +advantageous thing, either to go in search of yourselves or in search of +a woman?" They replied, "Of course it is preferable to look after +ourselves." "If so," replied Buddha, "stay with me for a while; I will +preach my law to you, and, with its help, you will arrive at the +knowledge of self, and thence at perfection." They cheerfully assented +to his request, listened attentively to his instructions, and obtained +the state of perfect believers, but in various degrees, according to +their respective dispositions. They gave up the habit of drunkenness +they had hitherto indulged in, and persevered in the observance of the +five great precepts. + +[It is to be remarked, adds the Burmese translator, that this happy +result was secured to the fortunate hearers by the influence of good +works made during former existences.[12]] + +Gaudama, having so happily completed the conversion of those young +noblemen, rose up and continued his journey in the direction of the +forest of Ooroowela. At that time there were three distinguished and +far-famed teachers who presided over a vast number of Rathees or +disciples leading an ascetic life. They were named Ooroowela Kathaba, +Nadi Kathaba, and Gaya Kathaba. The first had under him five hundred +disciples, the second three hundred, and the third two hundred. Buddha +went up to the monastery of Ooroowela Kathaba, and said to him, "I carry +but a few articles with me, and need but a small place to rest in; I beg +of you to be allowed to spend the night only in your kitchen." Kathaba +answered: "Since you have so few things with you, I willingly allow you +to accommodate yourself in the best way you can in the cook-room; but I +must inform you that the Naga guardian of the place is an animal of a +very wicked temper, powerfully strong, and having a most deadly venom." +"I fear not the Naga," replied Buddha; "I am well satisfied with your +allowing me a place in the cook-room." Whereupon he entered into the +kitchen, sat down in a cross-legged position, and, keeping his body in +an erect posture, remained absorbed, as it were, in the deepest +contemplation. The Naga soon appeared, and irritated at seeing that a +stranger presumed to remain in a place committed to his care, resolved +to drive out the intruder. He began to vomit a cloud of smoke which he +directed at the face of the stranger. Buddha said to himself, "I will do +no harm to that Naga; I will leave intact his skin, flesh, and bones; +but I will conquer him with the very same weapons he uses against me." +Whereupon he emitted by his own power such a volume of thick smoke as +soon to silence his adversary, and oblige him to have recourse to more +effectual means of attack. He vomited out burning flames. Phra opposed +flames far more active and destructive than those of the Naga. They +shone forth with such an uncommon brightness as to attract a number of +Rathees, who stood motionless, admiring the beautiful countenance of +Buddha, and wondering at his matchless power. The Naga, vanquished, gave +up the contest, and left to Buddha the undisputed possession of the +cook-room during the whole night. In the morning opening his patta, Phra +thrust in the terrified Naga, and brought it to Ooroowela Kathaba, who, +surprised at the power of the stranger, said, "This Rahanda cannot as +yet be compared to me." He desired him to stay in his monastery, +promising to supply him with food as long as he should be with him. Phra +accepted the proffered invitation, and fixed his residence in the midst +of a grove little distant from the cell of Kathaba. Whilst he was there, +four chiefs of Nats of the seat of Tsadoomarit came at midnight to the +spot where rested Phra. They were very handsome, and a bright hue, +encompassing their bodies, filled the grove with a resplendent light. +Kathaba, surprised, came to Buddha, and said to him, "Great Rahan, the +hour of taking your food is at hand; your rice is ready, come and eat +it. How is it that at midnight there was such an uncommon splendour? One +would have thought that the whole forest in the neighbourhood was lined +with immense fires, spreading a blaze of light." Phra answering said, +"This wonder was caused by the presence of four chiefs of Nats that came +to visit me and hear my preachings." Kathaba said to himself, "Great +indeed must be the virtue of this Rahan, since Nats come to see him and +acknowledge him for their teacher. He is not yet, however, my equal." +Buddha ate his rice, and went back to the same place. + +On another occasion, in the middle of the night, the chief of Thagias +came to the grove of Buddha, and by his power caused a flood of light +similar to that produced by a thousand lighted fires to pour its +effulgent rays in every direction. In the morning, Kathaba went to the +great Rahan inviting him to come and eat his rice. Meanwhile he asked +him the reason of the wonderful light that had been kept up about from +midnight until morning, which surpassed in brilliancy that which had +been seen on a former occasion. Phra told him that he had been visited +by the chief of Thagias, who came for the purpose of hearing his +instructions. Kathaba thought within himself: "Great indeed is the glory +and dignity of this Rahan, but he is not as yet a Rahanda." Phra ate his +food, and continued to stay in the same grove. + +On another occasion, at the same late hour, Phra received the visit of +the chief of the Brahmas. The flood of light that was sent forth by his +body surpassed in effulgent splendour all that had been seen. Kathaba +came as usual, in the morning, to invite the great Rahan to come and +take his food, requesting him at the same time to inform him of the +cause of the great wonder that had just taken place. Phra told him that +the chief of Brahmas had waited upon him to listen to his preachings. +Kathaba wondered the more at the dignity of this great Rahan, who +attracted round him so eminent a visitor. But he said within himself: +"This Rahan is not yet a Rahanda that can be compared to me." Phra +partook of his food, and continued his stay in the same grove. + +On a certain day, the people of the country had prepared offerings on a +large scale to be presented to Kathaba. On hearing this welcome news, +the Rathee thought within himself as follows: "The people are disposing +everything to make large offerings to me. It is as well this Rahan +should not be present on the occasion. He might make a display of his +power in the presence of the multitude, who, taken up with admiration +for his person, would make great offerings to him, whilst I should see +my own decrease in a proportion. To-morrow I will contrive in such a way +as to prevent the great Rahan from being present." Buddha discovered at +a glance all that was going on in Kathaba's mind. Unwilling to offer any +annoyance to his host, he conveyed himself to the island of Ootoogara, +where he collected his meal, which he came to eat on the banks of the +lake Anawadat. He spent the whole day there, and by his miraculous power +he was back to his grove at an early hour on the following day. The +Rathee came as usual, to invite him to partake of his meal that was +ready, and inquired from him why he had not made his appearance on the +day previous. Buddha, without the least emotion that could betray an +angry feeling, related to Kathaba all that had passed in his mind, and +informed him of the place he had been to. Kathaba, astonished at what he +heard, said to himself: "The knowledge of this Rahan is transcendent +indeed, since he is even acquainted with the thoughts of my mind; his +power too is wonderfully great; but withal, he is not as yet a Rahanda +comparable to me." Buddha, having eaten his meal, withdrew to his grove. + +On a certain day Buddha wished to wash his dress. A Thagia, knowing the +thought that occupied his mind, dug a small square tank, and approaching +him respectfully, invited him to wash his tsiwaran therein. Buddha then +thought: Where shall I find a stone to rub it upon? The Thagia, having +brought a stone, said to him: "Illustrious Phra, here is a stone to rub +your tsiwaran on." He thought again: Where is a proper place to dry it +upon? The Nat that watched the tree Yekada caused it to bend its +branches, and said: "My lord, here is a fit place to hang up your +tsiwaran." He thought again: Where is a fit spot to extend my clothes +upon? The chief of Thagias brought a large and well-polished stone, and +said: "O illustrious Phra, here is a fit place to lay your tsiwaran +upon." In the morning, Kathaba repaired as usual to his guest's place, +to invite him to take his meal. Surprised at what he perceived, he said +to Buddha: "O Rahan, formerly there were here neither tank nor stone; +how is it that they are here now? How is it, moreover, that the tree +Yekadat is now bending down its branches?" Phra related then to the +Rathee all that had happened, informing him that the chief of Thagias +and one Nat had done all those works for him, and ministered to all his +wants. Kathaba wondered more than before at the great virtue and +surpassing excellency of the great Rahan; but he persisted in his former +opinion, that the great Rahan was not a Rahanda that could equal him. +Buddha, having taken his meal, returned to his grove. + +On another occasion, the Rathee went to Buddha's place, to invite him to +come and partake of his meal. "Very well," said Buddha, "I have a small +business to do now; go beforehand, and I will follow you a few moments +hence." Whereupon Kathaba went back to his cell. As to Phra, he went to +pluck a fruit from the jambu tree, and arrived at the eating place +before Kathaba could reach it. The Rathee, on arriving there, was quite +surprised to find Phra already waiting for him. "How is this?" said he, +with an unfeigned feeling of surprise, "and by what way did you come and +contrive to arrive here before me?" Phra said to him: "After your +departure, I plucked one fruit from a jambu tree, and yet I have reached +this spot sooner than you. Here is the fruit I have brought. It is as +full of flavour as it is beautiful; allow me to present you with it, +that you may eat it." "O! no, great Rahan," replied the Rathee, "it is +not becoming that I should eat it, but rather keep it for yourself." He +thought within himself: "Wonderful is indeed the power and eminent +excellency of that great Rahan; but he is not as yet a Rahan that can be +ranked to me." Phra ate his rice, and returned to his grove. + +On another day, Phra gave a fresh proof of his miraculous power, by +bringing to Kathaba a mango fruit, plucked from a mango tree growing +near the jambu tree, and so went on for several days, bringing fruits +that grew at the extremity of the southern island. On another day, Phra +ascended to the seat of Tawadeintha, and brought therefrom a beautiful +water-lily, and yet arrived at the place where his meal was ready before +Kathaba himself. The latter, quite amazed at seeing a flower from the +Nat country, thought within himself: "Wonderful, indeed, is the power of +that great Rahan, who has brought here, from the seats of Nats, a +beautiful lily in such a short space of time; but he is not as yet equal +to me." + +On a certain day, the Rathees were busy splitting firewood. They got a +large log of wood upon which their united efforts could make no +impression. Kathaba thought within himself: "The great Rahan is gifted +with mighty power; let us try him on this occasion." He desired Gaudama +to split the hard log. Gaudama split it in a moment in five hundred +pieces. The Rathees then tried to light up the fuel, but they could not +succeed. Kathaba requested his guest to come to their assistance. In an +instant, the five hundred pieces were set in a blaze, and presented the +terrifying sight of five hundred large fires. The Rathees begged the +great Rahan to extinguish those fires which threatened a general +conflagration. Their request was instantaneously granted; the five +hundred fires were extinguished. + +During the cold season in the months of January and February, when a +heavy cold dew falls, the Rathees amused themselves with plunging and +swimming in the river Neritzara. Phra caused five hundred fires to blaze +out on the banks of the river. The Rathees, coming out of the stream, +warmed themselves by the side of those fires. They all wondered at the +astonishing power of the great Rahan. But Kathaba persisted in saying +that he was not a Rahanda like him. + +On a certain day, a great rain poured in torrents, so that the water +overflowed all the country, but it did not reach the spot Gaudama stood +upon. He thought within himself: It is good that I should create a +beautiful dry road in the midst of the water. He did so, and walked on +the dry road, and clouds of dust rose in the air. Kathaba, much +concerned regarding the fate of his guest, took a boat, and, with the +assistance of his disciples, pulled in the direction of Buddha's grove; +but what was their surprise, when reaching the spot they found, instead +of water, a firm dry road, and Buddha calmly walking to and fro. "Is it +you, great Rahan," cried Kathaba, "whom we see here?" "Yes," replied +Gaudama, "it is I indeed." He had scarcely returned this answer, when he +rose in the air and stood for a while above the boat. Kathaba thought +again within himself: "Great indeed must be the perfections and +attainments of the great Rahan, since water even cannot harm him, but he +is not yet a Rahanda like me." Phra, who knew what was taking place in +Kathaba's mind, said to himself: Long time has this Rathee kept thinking +within himself: This Rahan is great, but I am still greater than he; it +is time now that I should inspire him with fear and surprise. Addressing +Kathaba, he said: "Rathee, you are not a Rahanda that has arrived to the +perfection of Arahat; you have never performed the meritorious actions +of the four ways to perfection; you are not, therefore, a Rahanda. But I +have, during former existences, carefully attended to those practices +which have enabled me to reach perfection, and finally obtain the +Buddhaship." Astonished at such an unexpected declaration, Kathaba +humbled himself, fell on his knees, and prostrated himself at the feet +of Buddha, saying: "Illustrious Phra, I wish to become Rahan under your +direction." Phra replied: "Kathaba, you have under you five hundred +Rathees, go and inform them of all that has happened." Whereupon Kathaba +went to the place where the Rathees had assembled, and said to them: "I +wish to place myself under the direction of the great Rahan." The five +hundred Rathees told him that they were willing to follow his example, +since he had been hitherto to them such an excellent teacher. They rose +up, and, collecting their utensils, such as the twisted hairs, and +forked staff, the hairy girdle, the honey filtre, &c., flung them into +the river; then they came, and, prostrating themselves at the feet of +Buddha, craved admittance to the dignity of Rahans. + +Nadi Kathaba, seeing the utensils floating on the water and carried down +by the stream, called his followers and said to them: "Some misfortune +must have befallen my elder brother; let us go and see what has +happened." They were no sooner arrived, than Kathaba related to them all +that had just taken place. Nadi Kathaba went forthwith to Buddha's cell, +attended all his disciples. Falling all at the feet of Phra, they +declared their readiness to become his disciples, and applied for the +dignity of Rahan. Gaya Kathaba, who lived a little below the place of +Nadi Kathaba, seeing on the surface of the water the utensils of the +followers of both his brothers floating in the direction of the stream, +hastened, with his two hundred disciples, to the place of Ooroowela +Kathaba. On his being informed of all that had occurred, he and his +followers threw themselves at Gaudama's feet, praying for admittance +into the order of Rahans. They were all admitted. The conversion of +Ooroowela Kathaba was brought about by the display, on the part of +Buddha, of no less than three thousand five hundred and sixty +wonders.[13] + + +FOOTNOTES + + [1] I have, except on one occasion, always made use of the terms + meditation and contemplation to express the inward working of + Buddha's mind during the forty-nine days he spent at the foot of + the banyan tree. But the Burmese translator most commonly + employs a much stronger expression, conveying the idea of trance + and ecstasy. Hence after having remained seven days on the same + spot, deeply engaged in considering some parts of the law he was + soon to preach, it is said of him that he comes out from a state + of perfect ecstasy. This expression implies a state of complete + mental abstraction, when the soul, disentangled from the + trammels of sense, raises itself above this material world, + contemplates pure truth and delights in it. All her faculties + are taken up with the beauty and perfection of truth; she clings + to it with all her might, regardless of all the illusions this + world is filled with. This situation of the soul is much + esteemed by all fervent Buddhists. It is the lot of but a few + privileged Rahans, who have made great progress in perfection, + and obtained an almost entire mastery over their passions and + senses. This great gift is, as one may well imagine, ardently + coveted by many, who, though not possessing it, lay claim to it + on false pretences. This being a sin devotees who relish a + contemplative life are very liable to, which the framer of the + regulations of the Buddhist monks has pronounced as _ipso facto_ + excluding from the society all those who would falsely claim the + possession of uncommon spiritual attainments which they have + not. In the book of ordination used for the admission of + candidates to the order of Rahans or talapoins, this sin is the + last of the four offences which deprive a member of the order of + his dignity, and cause his expulsion from the society. + + [2] The five Rahans alluded to are the very same individuals who + met Phralaong in the solitude at the time he was undergoing a + great fast and performing all sorts of works of self-denial and + corporal austerities in the most rigorous manner. During all the + time he spent in those hard exercises of strict mortification, + to conquer his passions and secure the complete triumph of the + mind over the senses, he was assisted in all his wants by those + five Rahans, who rendered to him the usual services disciples + are wont to perform to their teacher. When they saw Phralaong at + the end of his mighty efforts in that great struggle resuming + the habits of a mendicant, they left him at once, unwilling to + believe that he would ever become a Buddha. Our Phra, not + unmindful of the good services he had received from them, + resolved to impart first to them the blessings of his + preachings. Alara and Oodaka, his two first teachers in the + science of Dzan, were destined to be the first who would have + heard the good news had they not been dead. Gratitude seems to + have been the first and main motive that induced him to select + as the first objects of his mission the very same persons who + had been instrumental in furthering his efforts to acquire the + Buddhaship. + + The unpleasant epithet of heretic is given to those five Rahans, + as well as to another named Upaka, as designed to mean that they + held tenets at variance with those of Buddha, and refused to + acknowledge him as possessed of the perfect intelligence. + Buddhists, in their writings, invariably call their opponents by + the name of holders of false doctrines. The Brahmins or Pounhas + who refused to seek refuge in Buddha, his law, and the assembly + of his disciples, are spoken of as professors of heterodoxical + doctrines. + + From the narrative of this Legend we may conclude, with a + probability amounting almost to certitude, that Buddha in his + preachings addressed himself first to the Brahmins, as being by + their caste the most influential portion of the Hindu community. + Those that are called by the name of Pounhas are the Brahmins + living in the world and following the ordinary pursuits of life. + Those that are mentioned by the names of Rahans and Rathees are + probably Brahmins, or at least belong to some other + distinguished caste like that of the Kchatrias, but are members + of some religious order or ascetics. They were in those days men + whom, in imitation of the ancient Greeks, we may call + philosophers, and who belonged to one or other of the branches + into which the great Indian school was divided. We may + conjecture that at that time India exhibited a scene much + resembling that which Greece subsequently offered to the eyes of + the observer in the days of Socrates and Plato, when schools of + philosophy were to be met with in every direction. The Hindu + philosophers, favoured by climate and their ardent imagination, + carried much further than the Greek wise men, both in theory and + practice, the discussion of dogmas and the fervour of religious + practices. If credit is to be given to our Legend in a + historical point of view, we may safely conclude that such was + the state of India when Buddha began his preachings. His first + hearers were Rahans, Rathees, and Pounhas, that is to say, the + most learned and wisest men in those days. The latter in + particular seemed at first disinclined to offer opposition to + Buddha; they listened to him as to a distinguished philosopher; + his arguments were examined, discussed, and answered by them in + the best way they could. In that polemical warfare, arguments + were at first the only offensive and defensive weapons used and + handled by the combatants on both sides. Buddha's two favourite + doctrines of Atheism and Neibban, which established the two + broad lines of separation between the two systems, begat much + discussion and created some animosity between him and his + adversaries. But what widened the gap between the two parties, + and placed them in a hostile array against each other, was the + broad principle of equality amongst men, latent in the bosom of + Buddha's doctrines, and levelled at the distinction of castes. + Buddha preached to men of all conditions without exception; he + opened before all the ways that lead to Neibban; made no + distinction between man and man, except that which is drawn by + virtue and vice, merits and demerits. He allowed every one to + approach him and take rank among his disciples; faith in his + doctrine entitled any man to be numbered amidst his followers; + the entrance into the order of Rahans or perfect was open to all + those who, by their meritorious actions and renouncing the + world, qualified themselves for this dignity. This principle, + which put on a footing of equality men of all castes and + nations, and recognised no real superiority but that which is + conferred by virtue and merit, could not prove agreeable to the + proud Brahmins. It provoked, by its gradual development, the + animosity of the opponents of Buddha's doctrines. The battle of + arguments, after having raged with various success, was + afterwards converted into one of a bloody character, which ended + in the total extermination or expulsion of the Buddhists from + the Indian peninsula. + + [3] The mission of Buddha is not, as previously observed, + confined to men living on earth, but it extends its beneficial + action over all the beings inhabiting the six seats of Nats and + sixteen of Brahmas. Those beings, the latter in particular, are + much advanced in perfection, but they are not yet ripe for the + sublime state of Neibban. Though freed, at least the Brahmas, + from the influence of passions, they retain as yet some + inclination for matter; they want the help of a Buddha to break + at once the few slender ties that retain them in the state of + existence. + + The first preaching of Buddha was rewarded with the conversion + of five Rahans, and of a countless number of Nats and Brahmas. + Such a plentiful harvest he could scarcely anticipate to reap; + and the beginning of his career, attended with such wonderful + success, amply repaid him for the extraordinary exertions he + made in order to qualify himself for the Buddhaship. The author + of the Legend remarks, with an unfeigned pleasure, that owing to + the conversion of the five Rahans, the worlds witnessed the + beautiful sight of six Rahandas congregated on the same spot. + The Rahanda has attained the summit of perfection; he has + arrived at the last existence; his death will relieve him from + the burden of existence, and open to him the way leading to + perfect rest, to complete abstraction--in a word, to Neibban. + The Rahandas rank first among the disciples and hearers of + Buddha; they constitute the _elite_ of his followers, and form + the most distinguished portion of the assembly or congregation + of the perfect. We have already stated that the members + composing the assembly of the hearers were divided into distinct + sections, and formed different degrees, according to the + difference of their respective progress on the way of + perfection. + + [4] It may be interesting to give an abridgment of an + instruction or sermon delivered by Gaudama to a Nat. It will be + as a fair specimen of other similar performances. The Nat made + his appearance at nightfall, and respectfully entreated Buddha + to deliver certain instructions which would enable men to come + to the understanding of many points of the law on which they had + hitherto fruitlessly meditated. Buddha was then in the monastery + of Dzetawon, in the country of Thawattie. This sermon is + supposed to have been repeated by Ananda, who had heard it from + the mouth of Buddha himself. It is, according to the Burmese, + the most excellent sermon; it contains thirty-eight points. + + "Young Nat," said Buddha, "here are the most excellent things + men and Nats ought to attend to, in order to capacitate + themselves for the state of Neibban: to shun the company of the + foolish; to be always with the wise; to proffer homage to those + that are deserving of it; to remain in a place becoming one's + condition; to have always with one's self the influence of + former good works; steadily to maintain a perfect behaviour; to + be delighted to hear and see much, in order to increase + knowledge; to study all that is not sinful; to apply one's self + to acquire the knowledge of Wini. Let every one's conversation + be regulated by righteous principles; let every one minister to + the wants of his father and mother; provide all the necessaries + for his wife and children; perform no action under the evil + influence of temptation; bestow alms; observe the precepts of + the law; assist one's relatives and friends; perform no actions + but such as are exempt from sin; be ever diligent in such + avoiding, and abstain from intoxicating drink. Let no one be + remiss in the practice of the law of merits. Let every one bear + respect to all men; be ever humble; be easily satisfied and + content; gratefully acknowledge favours; listen to the preaching + of the law in its proper time; be patient; delight in good + conversation; visit the religious from time to time; converse on + religious subjects; cultivate the virtue of mortification; + practise works of virtue; pay attention always to the four great + truths; keep the eyes fixed on Neibban. Finally, let one in the + middle of the eight afflictions of this world be, like the + Rahanda, firm, without disquietude, fearless, with a perfect + composure. O young Nat, whoever observes these perfect laws + shall never be overcome by the enemies of the good: he shall + enjoy the peace of Ariahs." + + Within a narrow compass, Buddha has condensed an abridgment of + almost all moral virtues. The first portion of these precepts + contains injunctions to shun all that may prove an impediment to + the practice of good works. The second part inculcates the + necessity of regulating one's mind and intention for a regular + discharge of the duties incumbent on each man in his separate + station. Then follows a recommendation to bestow assistance on + parents, relatives, and all men in general. Next to that, we + find recommended the virtues of humility, resignation, + gratitude, and patience. After this, the preacher insists on the + necessity of studying the law, visiting religious, conversing on + religious subjects. When this is done, the hearer is commanded + to study with great attention the four great truths, and keep + his mind's eye ever fixed on the happy state of Neibban, which, + though as yet distant, ought never to be lost sight of. Thus + prepared, the hearer must be bent upon acquiring the + qualifications befitting the true sage. Like the one mentioned + by the Latin poet, who would remain firm, fearless, and unmoved, + even in the midst of the ruins of the crumbling universe, the + Buddhist sage must ever remain calm, composed, and unshaken + among all the vicissitudes of life. Here is again clearly + pointed out the final end to be arrived at, viz., that of + perfect mental stability. This state is the foreshadowing of + that of Neibban. + + [5] From the perusal of this Legend, it can be remarked that + Buddha, in the course of his preachings, withheld from no one + the knowledge of his doctrine, but, on the contrary, aimed at + popularising it in every possible way. In this respect he widely + differed from the Brahmins, who enveloped their tenets in a + mysterious obscurity, and even in that state of + semi-incomprehensibility, condescended to offer them to the + consideration of but a few selected adepts. But Buddha followed + quite an opposite course. He preached to all without exception. + On this occasion we see him engaged in explaining to the mother + and wife of Ratha duties truly becoming their sex and position. + He warned them against the danger of speaking too much, or + speaking hastily and with a tone of dissatisfaction. He desired + them to be always cool and moderate in their conversation, and + to take a pleasure in conversing on religious topics, such as + the practice of the ten great duties, the merits of almsgiving, + and on the other precepts of the law. He showed to them the + unbecomingness of inconsistency in speaking, and finally + concluded by exhorting them to allow wisdom to guide them in the + right use of the faculty of speech. Every one will agree in this + that the lecture was a very appropriate one, and would suit + women of our days as well as those of Buddha's times. + + It is not easy to determine whether these two female converts + became Rahanesses by forsaking the world and devoting all their + time to religious observances, or simply believed in Buddha's + doctrines and continued to live in the world. The Burmese + translator makes use of expressions liable to both + interpretations. I feel inclined to adopt the second + supposition. They became female Upasakas, and continued to live + in the world. We shall see, hereafter, that Gaudama's aunt, + Patzapati, was the first, after much entreating, who was allowed + to become a Rahaness. + + The great former of the Buddhistic disciplinary regulations has + also laid down rules for the institution and management of an + order of female devotees, to match, as it were, with that of + talapoins. Hence in almost all countries where Buddhism + flourishes, there are to be met houses and monasteries which are + the abodes of those pious women, who emulate Rahans in the + strict observance of practices of the highest order. Their + dress, except the colour, which is white, is quite similar to + that of talapoins; their head is shaved; they live in strict + continence as long as they continue to wear the dress of their + profession. They have certain formulas of prayer to repeat every + day several times. Their diet is the same as that of talapoins; + they are forbidden to take any food after midday. I am not aware + that they render any service to society in the way of keeping + schools for the benefit of female children. They live on alms + freely bestowed on them by their co-religionists. The Burmese + honour them with the title of Mathi-la-shing, which means ladies + of the religious duties. The order of those female devotees is + now much on the decline; the inmates of houses are but few, + enjoying a very small share of public esteem and respect. They + are generally looked upon with feelings akin to those + entertained towards beggars. + + In the Wini, or book of discipline, the relations that are + allowed to subsist between the two orders of male and female + devotees are minutely described and clearly laid down, so as to + prevent the evils that might result from a familiar and + unnecessary intercourse. Thoroughly acquainted with the weakest + side of human nature, the author of the Wini has legislated on + that subject with the utmost circumspection. He allowed rather + aged Rahans to be the spiritual advisers of the Rahanesses, but + he denies them the leave of ever going to their houses under any + pretext whatever. When the latter want to hear preaching or + receive some advice from the Rahans, they resort in broad + daylight to the monastery, are permitted to stay in a large hall + open to the public, at a considerable distance from him whom + they desire to consult. Having briefly and with becoming + reverence made known the object of their visit, and received + some spiritual instructions, they immediately return to their + own place. + + The same reflection may be applied to the conversion of Ratha's + father. It is said that he was the first convert out of the body + of laymen. He does not appear to have forsaken the world and + become a first-class convert. He became a Thautapati, and at + once entered one of the four ways leading to perfection, but + remained in the world. + + [6] The conversion of Ratha and of his young friends shows to us + distinctly the tendency of Buddha's preachings, and their effect + over those who believed in him. Ratha is represented as a young + worldly-minded man, who, in the midst of riches, has denied + himself to no kind of pleasure. He feels that the enjoyments he + was so fond of can in no manner satisfy the cravings of his + heart: he is disgusted at them, and resolves to withdraw into + solitude, with the intention of placing himself under the + direction of some eminent teacher, and learn from him the way to + happiness. He hopes that the study of philosophy will lead him + to true wisdom and the acquirement of the means that may render + him happy. He luckily falls in with Buddha, who explains to him + that the senses are the instruments through which passions act + upon and tyrannise over the soul, by keeping it in a painful + subjection to matter. He points out to him the necessity of + freeing himself from their control. This principle of Buddhism, + which aims at disengaging the soul from matter, isolating it + from all that proves a burden to it, and delivering it from the + tyrannical yoke of concupiscence, is in itself perfectly + correct, but, carried beyond its legitimate consequences, it + becomes false and absurd. According to Buddhists, the soul, + disentangled from all that exists, finds itself alone without + any object it can adhere to; folding itself up into its own + being, it remains in a state of internal contemplation, + destitute alike of all active feelings of pleasure and pain. + This doctrine was known in the time of Buddha, as far as the + principle is concerned. The Rathees and other sages in those + days upheld it both in theory and practice; but, on the + consequences, the originator of Buddhism was at issue with his + contemporaries, and struck out a new path in the boundless field + of speculative philosophy. + + [7] The Wini is one of the great divisions of Buddhistic sacred + writings. The Pitagat, or collection of all the Scriptures, is + divided into three parts--the Thouts, containing the preachings + of Buddha, the Wini, or book of the discipline, and the Abidama, + or the book of Metaphysics. That compilation is supposed to + embody the doctrines of Buddha in a complete manner. These books + have not been written by Buddha himself, since it is said of him + that he never wrote down anything. The first Buddhistic + compositions were certainly written by the disciples of Phra, or + their immediate successors. But there arose some disputes among + the followers of Buddha, as to the genuineness of the doctrines + contained in the various writings published by the chief + disciples. To settle the controversy, an assembly or council of + the most influential members of the Buddhistic creed, under the + presidency of Kathaba, was held about three months after + Gaudama's demise. The writings regarded as spurious were set + aside, and those purporting to contain the pure doctrines of + Phra were collected into one body, and formed, as it were, the + canon of sacred books. The matter so far was settled for the + time being, but the human mind, when unrestrained by authority, + acted in those days with the same result as it does in our own + times. Various and different were the constructions put on the + same text by the expounders of the Buddhistic law. All parties + admitted the same books, but they dissented from each other in + the interpretation. Some of the books hitherto regarded as + sacred were altered or rejected altogether to make room for the + works of new doctors. Confusion prevailed to such an extent, + that an hundred years later a second council was assembled for + determining the authenticity of the real and genuine writings. A + new compilation was made and approved of by the assembly. The + evil was remedied; but the same causes that had exercised so + baneful an influence previously to the time of the second + council soon worked again and produced a similar result. Two + hundred and thirty-five years after Gaudama's death a third + council was assembled. The books compiled by the second council + were revised and apparently much abridged, and with the sanction + of the assembled fathers a new canon of scriptures was issued. + The Pitagat in its present shape is regarded as the work of this + last assembly. All the books are written in the Pali or Magatha + language. In the beginning of the fifth century of our era, + according to our author's computation, a learned man, named + Boudagautha, went to Ceylon, and brought back to Burmah a copy + of the collection of the Pitagat. Then he introduced into this + country the alphabet now in use, and translated into the + vernacular a portion of the scriptures. This important subject + shall receive hereafter fuller development. + + [8] The four principles or truths so often alluded to in the + course of this work ought to be well understood, in order to get + a clear insight into the system under consideration. These four + truths are as follows:--1. There are afflictions and miseries + attending the existence of all beings. 2. There are passions + and, in particular, concupiscence, which are the causes of all + miseries. 3. There is Neibban, which is the exemption of all + passions, and, consequently, the deliverance from all miseries. + 4. There are the four ways or high roads leading to Neibban. + Here is the summary of the sublime knowledge and transcendent + science possessed by a Buddha: these four fundamental truths + form the four features or characteristics of his law; they + safely guide man in the way to deliverance. The Buddhist sage, + who longs to become perfect, must study with attention the + position of all beings in this world, survey with a patient + regard their diversified conditions, and fathom the depth of the + abyss of miseries in which they are miserably sunk. A vague, + general and superficial knowledge of these miseries is + insufficient to create that perfect acquaintance with human + wretchedness. He ought to examine one after the other those + series of afflictions, until he feels, as it were, their + unbearable weight pressing over his soul. This first step having + been made by the means of reflection, meditation, and + experience, the sage, standing by the side of all miseries that + press upon all beings, as a physician, by the bed of a patient, + inquires into the cause of such an awful moral disorder. He soon + discovers the generating causes of that universal distemper; + they are the passions in general; or rather, to speak more in + accordance with Buddhistic expressions, concupiscence, anger, + and ignorance are the springs all demerits flow from, are the + impure sources wherefrom originate all the miseries and + afflictions this world is filled with. The destruction of those + passions is the main and great object he has in view. He, + therefore, leaves the world and renounces all pleasures and + worldly possessions, in order to extinguish concupiscence; he + practises patience under the most trying circumstances, that + anger may no longer have any power over him; he studies the law, + and meditates on all its points, in order to dispel the dark + atmosphere of ignorance by the bright light of knowledge. + + Having advanced so far, the sage has not yet reached the final + object of his desires; he has not yet attained to the end he + anxiously wishes to come to. He is just prepared and qualified + for going in search of it. Neibban, or the _absolute_ exemption + and _permanent_ deliverance from the four causes productive of + existence, or of a state of being, is the only thing he deems + worthy to be desired and earnestly longed for. The sage, + perceiving such a desirable state, sighs after it with all the + powers of his soul. Neibban is to him what the harbour is to the + storm-beaten mariner, or deliverance to the worn-out inmate of a + dark dungeon. But such a happy state is, as yet, at a great + distance; where is the road leading thereto? This is the last + truth the sage has to investigate. The four roads to perfection + are opened before him. These he must follow with perseverance; + they will conduct him to Neibban. They are a perfect belief, a + perfect reflection, a perfect use of speech, and a perfect + conduct. + + [9] Buddha, having trained up his disciples to the knowledge of + his doctrines as well as to the practice of his ordinances, + elevates them to the dignity of preachers, or, to be more + correct, makes them fellow-labourers in the arduous task of + imparting to mankind the wholesome knowledge of saving truths. + An unbounded field is opened before him; the number of beings + who are designed to partake of the blessings of his doctrines is + incalculably great. His own efforts will not prove adequate to + the difficulties such a mighty undertaking is encompassed with; + he joins to himself fervent disciples that have reached all but + the farthest limit of perfection by the thorough control they + have obtained over their passions; he considers them as + instruments well fitted for carrying into execution his + benevolent designs, and entrusts them with the mission he has + entered upon. By adopting such a step, the wise founder of + Buddhism establishes a regular order of men, whom he commissions + to go and preach to all living creatures the doctrines they have + learnt from him. The commission he imparted to them was + evidently to be handed down to their successors in the same + office. He may now die, but he is sure that the work he has + begun shall be carried on with zeal and devotedness by men who + have renounced the world and given up all sorts of enjoyments, + that they might engage in the great undertaking with a heart + perfectly disentangled from all ties and impediments of every + description. + + In entrusting his disciples with the important duty of teaching + mankind, Buddha, obeying the impulse of his universal charity, + desires them to go all over the world and preach all the truth + to all mortals. He distinctly charges them to announce openly + and unreservedly all that they have heard from him. In these + instructions the plan of Buddha is clearly laid down, and the + features of the mission he assumes distinctly delineated. His + object is to spread his doctrines all over the world and to + bring all beings under his moral sway. He makes no distinction + between man and man, nation and nation. Though belonging by + birth to a high caste, he disregards at once those worldly + barriers whereby men are separated from each other, and + acknowledges no dignity but that which is conferred by virtue. + Bold, indeed, was the step that he took in a country where the + distinction of caste is so deeply rooted in the habits of the + people, that all human efforts have, hitherto, proved abortive + in destroying it. It has already been hinted in a foregoing note + that Gaudama placed himself on a new ground, in opposition to + the Brahminical doctrines. He, doubtless, cautiously avoided to + wound directly the feelings of his antagonists; but, at the same + time, he adroitly sowed the seed of a mighty revolution, that + was to change, if left to grow freely, the face of the Indian + peninsula. His doctrine bore two characteristics, that were to + distinguish it essentially from that of his adversaries; it was + popular and universal, whereas that of his opponents was wrapped + up in a mysterious obscurity, and unfolded completely only to a + privileged caste. Another great difference between the two + systems is this: Buddha paid little attention to the dogmatical + portion of religion, but laid the greatest stress on morals. The + dogmas are few and little insisted on. He aimed at correcting + the vices of the heart, but exerted himself little to redress + the errors of the mind. + + [10] In these new instructions delivered to the Rahans, Buddha + gives them the power of receiving into the ranks of the assembly + those of their converts who should prove foremost in + understanding the law and observing its highest practices. He + empowers them to confer on others the dignity of Rahans, and + admit them to the various steps that lead to that uppermost one. + To observe uniformity in the reception of candidates to the + various orders, Buddha laid down a number of regulations + embodied in the Kambawa, or book used as a sort of ritual on the + days of admission of candidates to the dignity of Patzins and + Rahans. The contents of this small but interesting work may be + seen in the notice on the order of talapoins, or Buddhist monks, + inserted at the end of this volume. That the reader may have now + an idea of the general purpose and object of these regulations, + I will sketch a slight outline of them. The candidate, who seeks + for admission among the members of the order, has to appear + before an assembly of Rahans, presided over by a dignitary. He + must be provided with the dress of the order, and a patta or the + pot of a mendicant. He is presented to the assembly by a Rahan, + upon whom devolves the important duty of instructing him in all + that regards the profession he is about to embrace, and lead him + through the ordeal of the ceremony. He is solemnly interrogated + before the assembly on the several defects and impediments which + incapacitate an individual for admission into the order. On his + declaring that he is free from such impediments, he is, with the + consent of the assembled fathers, promoted to the rank of + Patzin. But before he is allowed to take his place among his + brethren, he is instructed in the four principal duties he will + have to observe, and warned against the four capital sins, the + commission of which would deprive him of his high and holy + character, and cause his expulsion from the society. + + It is supposed that the candidate, previous to his making + application for obtaining the dignity of Rahan, has qualified + himself by study and a good life for admittance among the + perfect. By surrounding the admission of candidates into the + ranks of the order with a display of ceremonies, the shrewd + framer of these regulations intended to encircle the whole body + with a halo of dignity and sacredness, and at the same time to + provide, as far as human wisdom allows, against the reception of + unworthy postulants. + + Hitherto Buddha had reserved to himself alone the power of + elevating hearers or converts to the dignity of Rahans; now he + transfers to his disciples that power and bids them use it as + they had seen him do, in behalf of those whom they deem worthy + applicants. He has established a society, and striven to infuse + into it all the elements necessary for keeping it up hereafter, + and securing its existence and permanency. He sets up a kind of + ecclesiastical hierarchy, which is to be perpetuated during the + ages to come by the same means and power that brought it into + existence. + + Having put such a power into the hands of his disciples, Buddha + very properly exhorts them to emulate him in his efforts to + become perfect. He sets himself as a pattern of perfection, and + bids them all imitate the examples he places before them. He + shows briefly to them by what means he has attained the state of + Arahatapho, and stimulates them to the adopting of similar + means. The word Arahatapho is composed of two words--arahat, + which means perfect, and pho or phola, as the orthography + indicates, which means reward, merit. The state of Arahatapho is + that in which a man enjoys the merits or reward of perfection, + which he has reached by the practice of virtue, and particularly + the acquirement of wisdom or knowledge of the highest points of + the law. It is used often in opposition to the word + Arahatamegata, which signifies the ways or roads leading to + perfection. + + [11] I have translated by _lent_ the Burmese expression Watso, + which is but the Pali term Wasa, Burmanised. The word "lent," + which has been adopted, is designed to express not the real + meaning of Wasa, but to convey to the reader's mind the idea of + a time devoted to religious observances. Wasa means a season, + but it is intended to designate the rainy season, which in those + parts of the Peninsula where Buddha was residing begins in July + and ends in November. During that period the communications + between villages and towns are difficult, if not impossible. The + religious mendicants were allowed in former times, very likely + from the very days of Buddha, to retire into the houses of + friends and supporters, from which they went forth occasionally + begging their food. In the beginning, those who were admitted in + the society did not live in community, as was afterwards done in + those countries where Buddhism has been of a long time in a + flourishing condition. They were allowed to withdraw into + solitude, and lead an ascetic life, or to travel from one place + to another to preach the law and make converts. This work could + not be well done during the rainy season. Hence the disciples, + while as yet few in number, gathered round their master during + that period to hear instructions from him, and practise virtue + under his immediate superintendence. They lived with him during + all the time the rainy season lasted. This was called to spend + the season. In the course of this Legend, the same expression is + often met with. It is said of Buddha that he spent a season in + such a place, another in another place, to indicate that he + stayed in one place during the rainy season, which precluded the + possibility of doing the duties of an itinerant preacher. + + When the religious order became regularly constituted, and the + basis it was to stand on was fairly laid down, the + ever-increasing number of members made them feel the want of + secluded places where they could live in community, and at the + same time quite retired from the world. Houses or monasteries + were erected for receiving the pious Rahans. The inmates of + those dwellings lived under the direction of a superior, + devoting their time to study, meditation, and the observances of + the law. They were allowed to go out in the morning very early, + to beg and collect the food they wanted for the day. Such is the + state the religious are living in up to our own time in Burmah, + Ceylon, Thibet, Siam, and in the other countries where Buddhism + has been firmly established. + + The religious season, or lent, lasts three months. It begins in + the full moon of Watso (July) and ends at the full moon of + Thadinkiout (October). The keeping of the season in Burmah is as + follows:--On the days of the new and full moon crowds of people + resort to the pagodas, carrying offerings of flowers, small + candles, oil, &c. A great many are found to spend the night in + the bungalows erected, chiefly for that purpose, in their + immediate vicinity. Women occupy bungalows separated from those + of men. It must be admitted that there, as in churches, they far + outnumber the men. On such occasions, religion appears to be + rather the pretext than the real object of such assemblies. With + the exception of old men and women, who are heard to converse on + religious topics, and repeat some parts of the law, or recite + some praises in honour of Buddha, the others seem to care very + little for religion. The younger portion of the weaker sex + freely indulge in the pleasure of conversation. It is quite a + treat to them to have such a fine opportunity of giving full + scope to their talkative powers. During that season the pious + faithful are charitably inclined to bestow alms on the Rahans. + All the necessaries of life pour with abundance and profusion + into the monasteries. Besides alms-giving and resorting to the + pagodas, some fervent laymen practise abstinence and fasting to + a certain extent; these, however, are but few. During that + period the Buddhist recluses are often invited to go to certain + places, prepared for the purpose, to preach the law to and + receive alms from crowds of hearers who are gathered thither on + such occasions. Talapoins are generally seated on an elevated + platform, facing the congregation; they keep their large fans + before the face through modesty, to save themselves from the + danger of looking on some tempting object. They repeat in chorus + certain passages of the life of Buddha, enumerate the five great + precepts and other observances of the law. The whole preaching + generally goes on in Pali, that is to say, in a language unknown + to the congregation. When they have done their duty they + withdraw, followed by a great number of their disciples, + carrying back to the monasteries all the offerings made by the + faithful. It happens also, although but seldom in our days, that + some fervent recluses withdraw during the whole or a part of the + lent season into solitary places, living by themselves, and + devoting all their time to reading the books of the law, and + meditating on the most important points and maxims of religion. + + + [12] The remarks of the Burmese translator afford me an + opportunity of explaining one of the leading tenets of the + Buddhistic creed. All beings in this world are subjected to the + double influence of their merits and demerits. The good + influence predominates when the sum of merits surpasses that of + demerits, and it is superseded by the latter when the contrary + takes place. This principle once admitted, Buddhists explain the + good or evil that befalls every individual in every conceivable + state of existence. Is a man dead, he is attended on his way to + another state of being both by his merits and demerits, who, + like two inseparable companions, follow him whithersoever he + goes. Should the sum of demerits prove greater, he is forced + into hell, or into some other state of punishment, to bear + sufferings proportionately to his offences, until he has fully + paid off his debt, or, to speak the language of Buddhists, until + the sum of his demerits be quite exhausted. If, on the contrary, + at the moment of his death the influence of merits be the + strongest, he is directed into a state of happiness, pleasure, + and enjoyment, say in one of the seats of Nats or Brahmas, and + remains there as long as the action of the good influence lasts. + When it is over he comes again into the abode of man, or in a + state of probation, when he has to labour anew for amassing new + and greater merits, that will hereafter entitle him to a higher + reward than the one he had previously enjoyed. From the + foregoing observations it is evident that the idea of a Supreme + Being rewarding the good and punishing the wicked is carefully + excluded, and all foreign interference on this subject entirely + done away with. Another conclusion flowing from the same source + is, that there is no eternity of reward or punishment, but both + last for a longer or shorter period, in proportion to the sum of + merits and demerits, and consequently to the power of each + influence respectively. + + It may be asked what becomes of the sum of demerits and its + consequent evil influence, whilst the superior good influence + prevails? The sum of demerits remains all the while entire and + undiminished; the operation of the evil influence is suspended, + and has no power whatever, its own being checked by a greater + one. But the sum of merits being exhausted, and its inherent + action at an end, the opposite one is set at liberty, and acts + on the individual proportionately to its own strength, and lasts + until it is all exhausted. As man can never be without some + merits or demerits, good or bad deeds, he must be either in a + state of reward or punishment; this is, if I may say so, the + mainspring that moves all beings into the whirlpool of countless + existences, wherein they meet happiness or unhappiness according + to their deserts. The being that tends strongly and + perseveringly through his various existences towards perfection, + weakens gradually, and finally destroys in himself the law of + demerits; he ascends steadily the steps of the ladder of + perfection by the practice of the highest virtues. Having + reached its summit, there is no more reason for his going + through other existences, and he steps at once into the state of + Neibban. + + On the above principle Buddhists account for all the various + phases of human existence. Is a child born from rich, great, and + distinguished parents, does he become a wealthy and powerful + man, does he become a king or a nobleman, &c.--he is indebted + for all that to merits acquired during former existences. Is + another child born in a low, poor, and wretched condition, is he + born with bodily or intellectual defects and imperfections, &c., + &c.--his former demerits are the principle and cause of all his + subsequent misfortunes. + + The doctrine of merits and demerits, and of their concomitant + influences, has been fully illustrated in the person of Buddha + himself during his former existences. He said of himself to his + disciples that he had passed with various fortune through the + range of the animal kingdom, from the dove to the elephant; that + being man he had been often in hell, and in various positions of + riches and poverty, greatness and meanness, until by his mighty + efforts he at last freed himself from all evil influence, and + reached his present state of perfection. He is supposed to have + recounted to his disciples on different occasions five hundred + and ten of his former existences. + + [13] It has been asserted in a former note that the preachings + of Buddha were accompanied with miracles, to impart an + additional weight and an irresistible evidence to his doctrines. + This assertion is fully corroborated by all the particulars + attending the conversion of the three Kathabas and their + disciples. On this occasion Buddha met with the greatest amount + of stubborn resistance on the part of Ooroowela Kathaba. There + is no doubt but our great preacher resorted to every means of + persuasion to carry conviction to the mind of his distinguished + hearer. He had, however, to deal with a man full of his own + merits and excellence, who thought himself far superior to every + one else. His best arguments proved powerless before a + self-conceited individual, who was used to give and not to + receive instruction, and enjoyed a far-famed celebrity. Buddha + was compelled to resort to his unbounded power of working + miracles, and with it overcame at last the obstinate and blind + resistance of the proud Rathee. No conquest had ever been so + dearly bought; but it proved well worth the extraordinary + efforts made to obtain it. Kathaba became one of the most + staunch adherents of Buddha, and one of the most fervent + disciples, who laboured hard for the propagation of Buddhism. He + is the most celebrated of all Buddhistic monks, and to his name + is ever prefixed the distinguished epithet of Maha, which means + great. After Gaudama's demise, he became the patriarch of the + Buddhists. By his care and exertions, a council of five hundred + Rahans was assembled at Radzagio, under the reign of King + Adzatathat, to condemn the unbecoming language used by some + false or imperfectly taught converts, who wished to shake off, + on many points, the authority of Buddha. + + In the episode of the conversion of the three Kathabas, the + attentive reader cannot fail to have observed one particular + that throws some light on the position several heads of + philosophical schools occupied in the days that saw the origin + of Buddhism. Those sages lived in retired places, far from the + bustle and tumult of the world. It is probable that at first + they were alone, or with but a few other individuals who + delighted in the same mode of life. Their time was entirely + taken up with study and meditation. The object of their studies + and reflections was the boundless field of metaphysics and + morals. Their diet was plain, and their abstemiousness carried + to a degree Hindu devotees and fanatics are alone capable of + reaching. The fame of the proficiency of some of those + individuals in science and virtue soon attracted to their + solitude numbers of pupils, eager to place themselves under the + tuition and discipline of masters so eminent in every respect. + The three Kathabas must have been celebrated throughout the + country, since we find them at the head of so many disciples. + Humility has never been the _forte_ of the heathen sages, either + in or out of India. Conceit and self-esteem were fostered in + their souls by the consciousness of their own superiority and + excellence, by the praises lavished on them by their disciples, + and not a little by the seclusion from society to which they + voluntarily resigned themselves. Spiritual pride, like a cunning + foe, occupied in the heart the place vacated by passions of a + coarser nature and less delicate tinge. The conduct of the elder + Kathaba fully bears out the truth and correctness of the above + assertion. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + _Buddha's sermon on the mountain -- Interview of Buddha and King + Pimpathara in the vicinity of the city of Radzagio -- Answer of + Kathaba to Buddha's interrogation -- Instructions delivered to + the king and his attendants -- Solemn entry of Buddha into + Radzagio -- Donation of the Weloowon monastery to Buddha -- + Conversion of Thariputra and Maukalan -- The Rahans are keenly + taunted by the people of Radzagio._ + + +Accompanied by his thousand followers, Phra went to the village of +Gayathitha. This village stands on the bank of the river Gaia. Close to +it, there is a mountain resembling in appearance an elephant's head. On +the top of the mountain stands a large rock, wide enough to accommodate +Buddha and all his attendants. He ascended the mountain with his +disciples, and, having reached its summit, sat down. Summoning all his +disciples, he said to them: "Beloved Bickus, all that is to be met with +in the three abodes of men, Nats, and Brahmas, is like a burning flame. +But why is it so? Because the eyes are a burning flame; the objects +perceived by the eyes, the view of those objects, the feeling created by +that view, are all like a burning flame. The sensations produced by the +eyes cause a succession of pleasant and painful feelings, but these are +likewise a burning flame. What are the causes productive of such a +burning? It is the fire of concupiscence, of anger, of ignorance, of +birth, of death, of old age, and of anxiety. Again, the ear is a burning +flame; the sounds, the perception of the sounds, the sensations caused +by the sounds, are all a burning flame; the pleasure or pain produced by +the sounds are also a burning flame, which is fed by the fire of +concupiscence, anger, ignorance, birth, old age, death, anxiety, tears, +affliction, and trouble. Again, the sense of smelling is a burning +flame; the odours, the perception of odours, the sensations produced by +odours, are all a burning flame; the pleasure and pain resulting +therefrom are but a burning flame, fed by concupiscence, anger, +ignorance, birth, old age, death, disquietude, tears, affliction, and +sorrow. Again, the taste is a burning flame; the objects tasted, the +perception of those objects, the sensations produced by them, are all a +burning flame, kept up by the fire of concupiscence, anger, ignorance, +birth, old age, death, anxiety, tears, affliction, and sorrow. Again, +the sense of feeling, the objects felt, the perception of those objects, +the sensations produced by them, are a burning flame; the pleasure and +pain resulting therefrom are but a burning flame, fostered by +concupiscence, anger, ignorance, birth, old age, death, anxiety, tears, +affliction, and sorrow. Again, the heart is a burning flame, as well as +all the objects perceived by it, and the sensations produced in it; the +pleasure and pain caused by the heart are too a burning flame, kept up +by the fire of concupiscence, anger, ignorance, birth, old age, death, +disquietude, tears, affliction, and sorrow. Beloved Bickus, they who +understand the doctrine I have preached, and see through it, are full of +wisdom and deserve to be called my disciples. They are displeased with +the senses, the objects of the senses, matter, pleasure and pain, as +well as with all the affections of the heart. They become free from +concupiscence, and therefore exempt from passions. They have acquired +the true wisdom that leads to perfection; they are delivered at once +from the miseries of another birth. Having practised the most excellent +works, nothing more remains to be performed by them. They want no more +the guidance of the sixteen laws, for they have reached far beyond +them."[1] + +Having thus spoken, Buddha remained silent. His hearers felt themselves +wholly disentangled from the trammels of passion, and disengaged from +all affections to material objects, and they who had been but Rahans +became Rahandas. + +Whilst the most excellent Phra was enjoying himself in the place of +Gayathitha, he recollected that, at the time when he was but a +Phralaong, being near the mountain Pantawa, he had received from King +Pimpathara an invitation to come to his own country and preach the law. +Accompanied with his thousand Rahandas, he set out for the country of +Radzagio. Having arrived at a small distance from the royal city he went +to the Latti grove, about three gawots from Radzagio, a place planted +with palm trees. The king, having heard of his arrival, said to his +people: "The descendant of a long succession of illustrious princes, the +great Rahan Gaudama, has entered into our country, and is now in the +grove of palm trees, in the garden of Tandiwana." The happy news was +soon re-echoed throughout the country. The people said among themselves: +"The great Gaudama is come indeed. He is perfectly acquainted with all +that relates to the three states of men, Nats, and Brahmas; he preaches +a sublime and lovely law; the morals that he announces are pure, like a +shell newly cleansed." Pimpathara, placing himself at the head of +120,000 warriors, surrounded by crowds of nobles and Pounhas, went to +the garden of Tandiwana, where Phra was seated in the middle of his +disciples. He paid his respects by prostrating himself before him, and +then withdrew to a becoming distance. The countless crowd followed the +example of their monarch, and seated themselves at a becoming distance. +Some of them remained conversing with Buddha, and heard from him words +worthy to be ever remembered; some others, having their hands joined to +the forehead, remained in a respectful attitude; some were praising his +illustrious ancestors; others remained modestly silent. All of them, +perceiving the three Kathabas close to the person of Phra, doubted +whether Gaudama was their disciple, or they, his disciples. Buddha, +seeing at once what thought occupied the mind of the warriors, noblemen, +and Pounhas, addressed the elder Kathaba, called Ooroowela Kathaba, and +said to him: "Kathaba, you who lived formerly in the solitude of of +Ooroowela, answer the question I am now putting to you. You were +formerly a teacher of Rathees, who practised works of great +mortification, to such an extent that their bodies were emaciated by +self-inflicted penances: what has induced you to give up the sacrifices +you were wont to make?" "Blessed Buddha," answered Kathaba, "I have +observed that exterior objects, the sounds, the taste, the gratification +of the senses, are but miserable filth; and, therefore, I take no more +delight in the offering of small and great sacrifices." Buddha replied, +"Kathaba, if you be no longer pleased with what is beautiful to the +eyes, pleasant to the ear, palatable to the taste, and agreeable to the +gratification of the senses, in what do you presently find pleasure and +delight?" Kathaba answered, "Blessed Buddha, the state of Neibban is a +state of rest, but that rest cannot be found as long as we live under +the empire of senses and passions. That rest excludes existence, birth, +old age, and death; the great mental attainments alone lead thereto. I +know and see that happy state. I long for it. I am, therefore, +displeased with the making of great and small sacrifices." Having thus +spoken, Kathaba rose up, worshipped Buddha by prostrating himself before +him, and touching with his forehead the extremities of his feet, and +said, "O most excellent Buddha, you are my teacher, and I am your +disciple." All the people, seeing what Kathaba had done, knew that he +was practising virtue under the direction of Gaudama.[2] Phra, who was +acquainted with their innermost thoughts, knew that they were longing to +hear the preaching of the law. As he had always done, he began to preach +to them the virtue of liberality in almsgiving, and then unfolded before +them, with matchless eloquence, the advantages of leaving the world, &c. +The hearers felt an inward delight in all that was said to them. +Observing the favourable impression made upon them, Gaudama continued to +instruct them on the four laws, regarding the miseries of this world, +the passions, the practice of excellent works, and the ways to +perfection. At the conclusion of these instructions, the king and +100,000 of the assembly, like a piece of white cloth which, when plunged +into dye, retains the colour it receives, obtained instantly the state +Thautapan.[3] As to the 10,000 remaining hearers, they believed in the +three precious things in the capacity of Upathakas. + +The ruler of the country of Magataritz, King Pimpathara, having obtained +the state of Thautapan, said to Gaudama, "Illustrious Buddha, some years +ago, when I was but a crown prince of this country, I entertained five +desires, which were all happily accomplished. Here are the five +desires--I wished to become king; I desired that the Phra, worthy of +receiving the homage of all men, should come into my kingdom; that I +might have the privilege of approaching him; that he might preach his +doctrine to me; and, finally, that I might thoroughly understand all his +preaching. These five wishes have been fully realised. Your law, O most +excellent Buddha, is a most perfect law. To what shall I liken it as +regards the happy results it produces? It is like replacing on its +proper basis a vase that was bottom upwards, or setting to light objects +hitherto buried in deep darkness; it is an excellent guide that shows +out the right way; it is like a brilliant light, shining forth and +dispelling darkness. Now I take refuge in you, your law, and the +assembly of the perfect. Henceforth I will be your supporter, and +to-morrow I will supply you and your disciples with all that is +necessary for the support of nature." Buddha, by his silence, testified +his acceptance of the offered favour. Whereupon the king rose up, +prostrated himself before him, and, turning on the right, left the +place, and returned to his palace. + +Early in the morning Pimpathara ordered all sorts of eatables to be +prepared. Meanwhile he sent messengers to Buddha to inform him that his +meal was ready. Buddha, rising up, put on his dress, and, carrying his +patta, set out for Radzagio, followed by his one thousand disciples. At +that time a prince of Thagias, assuming the appearance of a handsome +young man, walked a little distance in front of Buddha, singing to his +praise several stanzas. "Behold the most excellent is advancing towards +Radzagio with his one thousand disciples. In his soul he is full of +meekness and amiability; he is exempt from all passions; his face is +beautiful, and shines forth like the star Thigi; he has escaped out of +the whirlpool of existences, and delivered himself from the miseries of +transmigration. He is on his way to the city of Radzagio attended by a +thousand Rahandas." (The same stanza is thrice repeated.) "He who has +obtained the perfection of Ariahs, who has practised the ten great +virtues, who has a universal knowledge, who knows and preaches the law +of merits, who discovers at once the sublime attainments, the most +perfect being, the most excellent, is entering into the city of Radzagio +attended by a thousand Rahandas." + +The inhabitants of the city, seeing the beautiful appearance of that +young man, and hearing all that he was singing aloud, said to each +other, "Who is that young man whose countenance is so lovely, and whose +mouth proclaims such wonderful things?" The Thagia, hearing what was +said of him, replied, "O children of men! the most excellent Phra whom +you see is gifted with an incomparable wisdom; all perfections are in +him; he is free of all passions; no being can ever be compared to him; +he is worthy to receive the homage and respect of men and Nats; his +unwavering mind is ever fixed in truth; he announces a law extending to +all things. As for me, I am but his humble servant."[4] + +Having reached the king's palace, Buddha was received with every +demonstration of respect, and led to the place prepared for him. +Pimpathara thought within himself of the thing which could prove +acceptable to Phra, in order to offer it to him. He said within himself, +"My garden, which is situated near the city, would doubtless be a very +fit place for Buddha and his followers to live in. As it lies not far +from the city, it would be a place of easy resort to all those who +should feel inclined to visit Buddha and pay him their respects; it is, +moreover, far enough off, so that the noise and cries of the people +could not be heard therein. The place is peculiarly fitted for retreat +and contemplation; it will assuredly prove agreeable to Buddha." +Whereupon he rose up, and, holding in his hand a golden shell like a +cup, he made to Phra a solemn offering of that garden which was called +Weloowon.[5] Gaudama remained silent, in token of his acceptance of the +gift. He preached the law and left the palace. At that time he called +his disciples and said to them, "Beloved Rahans, I give you permission +to receive offerings." + +In the country of Radzagio there was a heterodox Rahan named Thindzi, +who had under him five hundred and fifty disciples. Thariputra and +Maukalan were at that time practising virtue under the guidance of that +master. Here is the way they became Rahans. When they were but laymen, +under the names of Oopathi and Kaulita, on a certain day, surrounded by +two hundred and twenty companions, they went to the top of a lofty +mountain to enjoy the sight of countless multitudes of people sporting +and playing in the surrounding flat country. While they were gazing over +the crowds of human beings they said to each other, "In a hundred years +hence all these living beings shall have fallen a prey to death." +Whereupon they rose up and left the place, but their minds were deeply +preoccupied with the idea of death. While the two friends were walking +silently together, they began at last to communicate to each other the +result of their reflections. "If there be," said they, "a principle of +death, a universal tendency towards destruction, there must be, too, its +opposite principle, that of not dying and escaping destruction." On that +very instant they resolved to search ardently for the excellent law that +teaches the way of not dying, and obtain the state of perfect fixity and +immutability. In those parts there lived six heterodox teachers who were +named Mekkali, Gau, Sala, Thindzi, Jani, and Ganti; among them Thindzi +was the only one who, with his disciples, wore white clothes. They went +to the place where lived the Rahan Thindzi, placed themselves under his +direction, and put on the dress of Rahan. Within three days they +acquired the science, wisdom, and knowledge of their teacher without +having as yet reached the object of their eager pursuit. They said to +Thindzi, "Teacher, is this all that you know? And have you no other +science to teach us?" "I have indeed," replied the teacher, "taught you +all the knowledge I possess." Finding nothing satisfactory in the +answer, the two friends said, "Let us continue seeking for the law that +has reality in itself; the first that shall have discovered it shall, +without delay, communicate it to the other." + +On a certain morning one of Gaudama's disciples named Athadzi, having +put on his religious habit, and carrying his patta on his left arm, went +out to receive his rice. Everything about his person was noble and +graceful; his countenance and behaviour were at once gentle and +dignified, whether he walked or stopped, looked forward to the right or +the left, or sat in a cross-legged position. The false Rahan Oopathi, +who became afterwards Thariputra, perceiving the Rahan Athadzi with such +a meek and dignified deportment, said to himself, "Such a Rahan is +assuredly worthy to receive offerings: he has doubtless attained +perfection. I will go to him and ask him, in case he has had a teacher, +who is that distinguished instructor under whom he practises virtue; and +in case of his being himself a teacher, what is the doctrine that he +teaches. But it is not becoming to put to him any question whilst he is +on his way to beg alms. I will follow at a distance." Athadzi, having +collected alms, left the city and went to a small dzeat, where he sat +down and ate his meal. Oopathi followed him thither. Having entered into +the dzeat, he rendered to him the services that a disciple usually pays +to his teacher. When the meal of Athadzi was over, he poured water over +his hands, and with a heart overflowing with joy, he conversed with him +for a while. He withdrew then to a becoming distance, and addressed him +as follows: "Great Rahan, your exterior is full of meekness and +benevolence; your countenance bespeaks the purity and innocence of your +soul; if you be a disciple, pray under what teacher have you become a +Rahan? Who is your guide in the way to perfection? and what is the +doctrine he is preaching to you?" "Young Rahan," replied Athadzi, "have +you not heard of the illustrious Buddha, the descendant of a long +succession of great monarchs, who has entered the profession of Rahan? I +have become Rahan under him; he is my teacher; to his doctrine I cling +with all the energy of my soul." "What is the doctrine of that great +master?" asked Oopathi. "I am but a novice in the profession," replied +modestly Athadzi, "and am as yet imperfectly acquainted with the +doctrine of my teacher. The little, however, I know, I will freely +communicate to you." Oopathi entreated him to do so. Athadzi replied, +"The law which I have learned at the feet of Buddha explains all that +relates to matter, to the principles that act upon it, to passions, and +to the mind; it makes man despise all that is material, conquer his +passions, and regulate his mind." On hearing this doctrine, Oopathi felt +the ties of passions gradually relaxing and giving way; his soul became, +as it were, disentangled from the influence of the senses. He became +enamoured with such a pure and perfect law, and obtained the condition +of Thautapan. Convinced that he had at last found what he had hitherto +searched after in vain, the law of Neibban, he went without delay to his +friend, to make him share in the beneficial result of his fortunate +discovery. Kaulita, perceiving his friend coming up to him with a +rejoicing countenance, indicative of the happiness his soul was inwardly +enjoying, asked him if he had found what he had hitherto vainly looked +for. Oopathi related to him all the particulars of his conversation with +the Rahan Athadzi. Whereupon Kaulita became instantly a Thautapan. Both +resolved to leave their teacher Thindzi, and go immediately to place +themselves under the guidance of Buddha. Three times they applied for +permission to execute their design, and three times it was denied them. +At last they departed, each with his two hundred and twenty companions. +Thindzi, enraged at being left alone, died, vomiting blood from his +mouth. + +When the two friends and their followers were drawing near to the place +of Weloowon, Phra assembled all his disciples and said to them, "Behold +these two friends coming up to me; they will become my two beloved +disciples; their minds are acute and penetrating; they actually take +delight in the law of Neibban; their thoughts are converging towards +that great centre of truth; they come to me, and they will become my two +most excellent disciples." While he was speaking, the two friends +crossed the threshold of the monastery, and prostrated themselves at the +feet of Buddha, humbly craving the favour of being admitted among his +disciples to practise virtue under his immediate direction. On this +occasion Phra uttered the following words: "O Bickus, come to me; I +preach the most excellent law: apply yourselves to the practice of the +most perfect works, which will put an end to all miseries." A suit of +dress and a patta were handed to each of the two friends, that were +henceforth to be called Thariputra and Maukalan, and they became members +of the assembly. Having put on the new dress, they appeared to the eyes +of all with the decent and dignified deportment of Rahans that had sixty +years of profession. Their followers became Bickus of the second order. +Seven days after, Maukalan became a Rahanda; but it took fifteen days +for Thariputra to obtain the same favour. The two new converts were +elevated to the dignity of disciples of the right and of the left; that +is to say, they obtained precedence over all others. + +The distinction thus granted to Thariputra and Maukalan excited a +feeling of jealousy among the disciples of Buddha. In their +conversations they complained to each other of the preference given to +those who had just been admitted among the members of assembly. They +went so far as to say that Buddha had acted in this case under the +influence of human considerations. These remarks were brought to the +notice of Buddha, who assembled his disciples, and said to them, +"Beloved Bickus, my conduct in this instance has not been guided by +unworthy motives; I have acted as I ought to have done. In the days of +the Phra Anaumadathi, the two friends were leading the life of ascetics. +They paid the greatest respect and veneration to the then existing +Buddha, and entreated him, by repeated supplications, to hold out to +them the solemn promise that they would become the disciples of the +right and of the left of some future Buddha. Anaumadathi replied to them +that the object of their wishes should be granted unto them when the +Buddha Gaudama would appear in the world. This is, beloved Bickus, the +reason that has influenced me in elevating to the first rank the two new +converts." The answer completely satisfied the disciples, and +effectually silenced all murmurs. Further particulars regarding the +promise that these two illustrious friends received in the time of the +Buddha Anaumadathi may be read, with circumstantial details, in the book +called Apadan-tera. + +The inhabitants of the Magatha country, seeing that so many persons, +chiefly belonging to the first families, were embracing the profession +of Rahans, said amongst themselves, "Behold how the Rahan Gaudama, by +his preachings, causes the depopulation of the country, and forces +countless wives to the unwished-for state of widowhood. A thousand +Rathees have embraced the profession of Rahans; all the disciples of +Thindzi have followed their example; many others will soon tread in +their footsteps. What will become of our country?" With these and other +expressions, they gave vent to their hatred of the Rahans, and +endeavoured to pour over them all kinds of ridicule and abuse. They +concluded by saying, "The great Rahan has come to the city of Radzagio, +which is like a cow-pen, surrounded by five hills;[6] he has now with +him the disciples of Thindzi; who will be the next to go to him?" The +Rahans, hearing all that was said against them, went to Buddha and +related to him all that they had heard. To console them, Buddha said, +"Beloved Bickus, the abuses, sarcasms, and ridicule levelled at you +shall not last long; seven days hence all shall be over. Here is the +reply you will make to the revilers: Like all his predecessors, Buddha +is striving to preach a most perfect law; by the means of the truths +which he proclaims for the benefit of all, he brings men over to +himself. What shall it avail any man to feel envious at the success he +obtains by so legitimate a means?" The same torrent of ridicule having +been poured on the Rahans, when they went out, they followed the advice +of their great teacher, replied in the manner they had been taught to +do, and the storm was soon over. The people understood that the great +Rahan was preaching a perfect law, and that he never resorted but to +fair means to attract disciples round his person. Here ends the +narrative of the conversion and vocation of Thariputra and Maukalan. + + +FOOTNOTES + + [1] The philosophical discourse of Buddha on the mountain may be + considered as the summary of his theory of morals. It is + confessedly very obscure and much above the ordinary level of + the human understanding. The hearers whom he addressed were + persons already trained up to his teaching, and therefore + prepared for understanding such doctrines. Had he spoken in that + abstruse style to common people, it is certain he would have + missed his aim and exposed himself to the chance of not being + understood. But he addressed a select audience, whose minds were + fully capable of comprehending his most elevated doctrines. He + calls his disciples Bickus, or mendicants, to remind them of the + state of voluntary poverty they had embraced when they became + his followers, and to impress their minds with contempt for the + riches and pleasures of this world. + + He lays it down as a great and general principle that all that + exists resembles a flame that dazzles the eyes by its brilliancy + and torments by its burning effects. Here appears the favourite + notion of Buddhism that there is nothing substantial and real in + this world, and that the continual changes and vicissitudes we + are exposed to are the cause of painful sensations. Buddha + reviews the six senses (the heart, according to his theory, is + the seat of a sixth sense) in succession, and as they are the + channels through which affections are produced on the soul, he + compares to a burning flame the organs of the senses, the + various objects of the action of the senses, the results painful + or agreeable produced by them. Hence he fulminates a general and + sweeping condemnation against all that exists out of man. The + senses, being the means through which matter influences the + soul, share in the universal doom. Buddha sets forth the causes + productive of that burning flame. They are--first, the three + great and general principles of demerits, viz., concupiscence, + anger, and ignorance. In the book of Ethics these three + principles are explained at great length; they are represented + as the springs from which flow all other passions. In a + lengthened digression the author aims at simplifying the + question, and endeavours to show, by a logical process, that + ignorance is the head source from which concupiscence and + passion take their rise. It is, therefore, according to + Buddhists, into the dark recess of ignorance that metaphysicians + must penetrate in order to discover the first cause of all moral + disorders. Every being has his mind more or less encompassed by + a thick mist that prevents him from seeing truth. He mistakes + good for evil, right for wrong; he erroneously clings to + material objects that have no reality, no substance, no + consistence; his passions are kept alive by his love or hatred + of vain illusions. The flame is, moreover, fed by birth, old + age, death, afflictions, &c., which are as many _foci_ wherefrom + radiate out on all surrounding objects fires which keep up the + general conflagration. But they play only a secondary action, + dependent on the three great causes of all evils just alluded + to. What causes birth, old age, and death? inquires the + Buddhist. The law of merits and demerits is the immediate answer + to the question; it might be added thereto, the necessity of + acquiring merits and gravitating towards perfection. A man is + born to innumerable succeeding existences by virtue of his + imperfections, and that he might acquire fresh merits by the + practice of virtue. By birth, a being is ushered into a new + existence or into a new state, where the burning flame which is + supposed to spread over all that exists exercises its teasing + and tormenting influence over him. Old age and death are two + periods when a radical change operates upon a being, and places + him in a different situation where he experiences the baneful + effects of the conflagration. "Blessed are they," says Buddha, + "who understand this; they are full of wisdom; they become + displeased with all passions and with all the things they act + upon. The causes of existences being done away with, they have + reached the terminus of all possible existences; one step more + and they find themselves placed beyond the influence of the + power of attraction that retains forcibly all beings in the + vortex of existences, and brings them towards the centre of + perfection; they are in fact entering into the state of + Neibban." + + [2] From the purport of Kathaba's reply to Buddha's question, it + may be inferred with certainty that the Rathees were in the + habit of making sacrifices or burnt-offerings. These sacrifices + again were distinguished into two classes; the one, including + the small or daily ones, and the other, the great + burnt-offerings, made on solemn occasions. That these sacrifices + were not performed by the killing and immolating of animals, + there can be no doubt, as such an act would have been contrary + to the tender regard they always had for the life of animals. + The institutes of Menu come to our help to elucidate this point. + The Brahmin is enjoined, according to that compilation of laws, + to make burnt-offerings of clarified butter and other articles + to the manes of his ancestors. Agreeably to this regulation, + Kathaba performed those rites, which, in the opinion of Buddha, + were perfectly useless, since they could not be the means of + elevating the performer to the knowledge and perfection + requisite for obtaining what he always calls _per excellence_ + the deliverance. + + Kathaba is rather obscure in his answer. It seems that he + intended to acknowledge that, notwithstanding the sacrifices and + burnt-offerings he had made, and upon the value of which he had + laid much stress, concupiscence and other vicious propensities + were still deeply rooted in him; that, through the channel of + his senses, exterior objects continued to make impressions on + his soul. He had, therefore, become disgusted with practices + which could not free him from the action and influence of + passions and matter. + + In the opinion of Buddha, the observance of exterior religious + rites can never elevate man to the sublime knowledge of pure + truth, which alone does confer real perfection to him who has + become a true sage, and is deemed worthy of obtaining the + deliverance. A serious application of the mind to the meditation + of the law and the nature of beings, is the only way leading to + the acquirement of true wisdom. As long as Kathaba was contented + with material acts of worship, and his mind's attention was + engrossed with those vain ceremonials, he had not as yet entered + in the way of perfection. He had hitherto missed the true path; + he had wandered in the broad road of error, encompassed by + mental darkness, and deceived by perpetual illusions. His + extensive knowledge had served but to lead him in the wrong + direction. He wanted the guidance of Buddha to enable him to + retrace his steps and find the right way. He had to become + sensible of the truth of the great fundamental maxims of all + real wisdom, viz., that in this world all is subjected to change + and to pain; and that all beings are mere illusions, destitute + of all reality. + + [3] To complete what has already been stated respecting the + Ariahs or venerables in a foregoing note, the following is + added. The reader must bear in mind that the Ariahs are divided + into four classes, named--Thautapan, Thakadagam, Anagam, and + Arahats, and according to the particular position occupied by + the beings of those states, each class is subdivided into two: + Thus, for instance, Thautapatti Megata means he who has entered + and is walking, as it were, in the way of the perfection of + Thautapan; and Thautapatti-pho indicates those who enjoy the + merits and blessings of the state of Thautapan; and so with the + three superior stages of perfection. To obtain the state of + Thautapan, a man must have left the direction followed up by all + creatures and entered into the direction or way that leads to + deliverance. He will have yet to go through 80,000 kaps or + durations of worlds, and must be born seven times more in the + state of man and Nat before he be a perfected being, ripe for + the state of Neibban. Those who have reached the state of + Thakadagam shall have to pass through 60,000 kaps, and be born + once in the state of Nat and once in the state of man, before + they be perfected. Those who have obtained the third step of + Anagam have to travel through 40,000 kaps, and are no more to + undergo the process of birth at the end of that period they are + perfected. The fourth stage of perfection, that of Arahat, is + the highest a being can ever obtain. The fortunate Arahat is + gifted with supernatural powers. At the end of 20,000 kaps he is + perfected, and reaches the state of deliverance. Those four + states are often called the four great roads leading to + deliverance or to Neibban. It may be asked whether the state of + Thautapan is the first step reached by every one that adheres to + Buddha's doctrines or whether it is the one that requires a + certain progress in the way of believing and practising? It + seems, from the narrative of the conversion of King Pimpathara + and his followers, that the state of Thautapan is the reward of + those who have shown a more than common proficiency and fervour + in adhering to Buddha and his doctrines, but not the first step + to enter into the assembly of the faithful and become a member + thereof. One may be a simple hearer, or Upathaka, believing in + the three precious things, without attaining that of Thautapan. + On this occasion, the king and 100,000 of his warriors and + noblemen became Thautapans, whereas the remaining 10,000 became + believers and members of the assembly without reaching any + further. The first entered into the stream or current leading to + perfection. The latter were fervent believers, observed the five + precepts, but in no way aspired to the attainment of the + doctrines of a higher order. + + [4] Is not that young man doing the duty of forerunner of Buddha + on the occasion of his solemn entry into the city of Radzagio? + + The narrative of the donation of the grove or garden of Weloowon + by King Pimpathara to Buddha, discloses the manner in which + Buddhistic monks have become holders, not as individuals, but as + members of society, of landed properties. Buddha and his + disciples at first had no place as a body or a society to live + in; hitherto he had taken up his quarters in any place where + people were willing to receive him. He must have often been put + to great inconvenience, particularly after the accession of new + disciples, who daily crowded about him. The pious king felt the + disadvantage the society was labouring under: he resolved to + give them a place where the assembly might live and remain. The + donation was as solemn as possible. It transferred to Buddha the + property of the garden, without any condition, for ever. The + donation, on the other hand, was fully accepted. This is, I + believe, the first instance of an act of this description. The + grove and monastery of Weloowon is much celebrated in Buddha's + life. + + In Burmese towns a particular spot is allowed for the building + of houses or monasteries for Buddhistic recluses or monks. It is + somewhat isolated from all other buildings, and forms, as it + were, the quarter of the yellow-dressed personages. Here is a + general description of one of these buildings. They are of an + oblong-square shape, raised about eight or ten feet above the + ground, and supported on wooden posts, and sometimes, though + seldom, on brick pillars. The frame of the edifice is of wood, + and planks form the wall. Above the first roof rises a second + one of smaller dimensions, and a third one, yet smaller than the + second. This style of roofing a building is allowed only for + pagodas, Talapoins' houses, and royal palaces. The place between + the soil and the floor is left open and never converted to any + use. A flight of steps, made of wood or bricks, leads to the + entrance of the edifice, the interior whereof is generally + divided as follows:--One vast hall designed for the reception of + visitors, and used also as a schoolroom for the boys who go to + learn the rudiments of reading, writing, and sometimes + ciphering. Except on grand occasions, the Talapoins generally + stay in that hall, doing away with their time in the best way + they can, occasionally reading books, counting their beads, + chewing betel, and very often sleeping. At the extremity of the + hall there is a place raised one or two steps above the level. A + portion of that place is left vacant, and reserved for the + sittings of the Talapoins, when they receive visitors; the other + portion, which extends to the wall, is occupied by idols or + representations of Buddha, raised on pedestals, and sometimes + placed on shelves, with the few implements required for exterior + worship. There, too, are to be seen a few trunks ornamented with + sculptures and gildings, and containing books belonging to the + monastery. The hall and the place as far as the walls occupy + just one-half of the oblong-square. The other half, parallel to + the first, is occupied by rooms intended for the storing of + alms, and as dormitories for the inmates of the house. In some, + monasteries the ceiling is painted and partly gilt. The + cook-room, when there is one, is connected with the extremity of + the square opposite to the one occupied by the idols. It is + generally on the same level with the floor of the building. + Government has nothing to do with the erection, repairs, and + maintenance of these edifices. They are erected and kept up by + private individuals, who deem it very meritorious to build such + places. Those whose piety actuates and prompts them to undertake + such an expensive work assume the title of Kiaong Taga, which + means supporter of a pagoda or Talapoins' residence. They are + proud of such distinction, cause themselves to be called by that + title, and always make it to follow their names in signing any + paper or document. + + The above descriptive sketch of a monastery is rather + incomplete, if applied to those found in the large places of + Burmah proper, and particularly in the capital. Some of them are + laid out on a scale of vastness and magnificence difficult to + realise by those who have not examined them. A large open + gallery runs all round the building; a second one of a + rectangular shape, but protected by the roof, forms, as it were, + on the four sides the _vestibulum_ to the central portion of the + edifice. It is the place where the Phongies spend the greater + part of their time, either in talking with the numerous idlers + that visit them, or in teaching children. Large shutters + separate this from the open verandah; they may be thrown all + open by pushing forward the lower part, the upper one remaining + fixed by hinges, and so may be opened to the height required to + protect the inmates from the rain and the sun. The central hall, + by far the finest and loftiest of the building, is reserved for + the idols and all the implements of worship, and the boxes + containing the books of the monastery, commonly put together in + a very disordered way. The ceiling is gilt and adorned, often + with taste and elegance. A partition divides the hall into two + equal parts. The one towards the east is for some huge statue of + Gaudama, and smaller ones with many articles of worship. The + other, facing the south, is used for several purposes; sometimes + as dormitories for the Talapoins. The posts supporting the + interior part are six or eight in number, and offer the finest + specimens of teak timber I have ever seen, some being fully + sixty and seventy feet high. In some of these monasteries the + best parts of the interior are gilt, and sometimes the exterior + sides; the ornaments of the extremities of the roof and the + space between the roofs are covered with gold leaves. In those + two places too are displayed carvings, which reflect great + credit on the skill of native workmen, and elicit the admiration + of foreigners. One of these monasteries called the + kioung-dau-gye, near the place where the Arracan idol is, and + another close to the place where the supreme head of Talapoins + is living, are the finest and largest specimens of monasteries + the writer has ever seen in Burmah. + + [5] On the occasion of the presentation to Buddha of the + Weloowon monastery, and of the lands attached to it, by King + Pimpathara, there was observed a curious ceremony, often alluded + to in Buddhist writings. He held in his hands a golden pitcher + full of water, which he kept pouring down on the ground, whilst + he pronounced the formula of donation. This is a ceremony of + Indian origin, which, with many others, has been imported into + these parts along with the religious doctrines. It is intended + to be an exterior sign of, or testimony to, the offering that is + made on the occasion. When it is performed, the parties + pronounce a certain formula, calling the Nats, guardians of the + place, to witness the act of donation, and, in particular, the + Nat that is supposed to rule over the earth; and at the same + time the offerer, not satisfied with receiving for his own + benefit the merits of his pious liberality, expresses the + earnest desire that all men, or rather all beings, should share + with him in the blessings he expects to reap from his good deed. + The generous and liberal disposition of the donor, it may be + observed, exhibits the truly pleasing display of an amount of + charity and brotherly love scarcely to be expected from the + followers of an erroneous creed. The ceremony, therefore, has a + twofold object, conferring unreserved and absolute efficiency on + the act of donation, and dividing or apportioning the merits of + the good work among all beings. + + In perusing attentively the contents of this legend, the reader + will easily follow the gradual development of the Buddhist + religious system, and, in particular, the establishment of most + of the disciplinary regulations in full force in our own days in + most of the countries where that form of religion has obtained a + long standing and a predominating footing. At first the + religious that constituted the body of the followers of Buddha + were few, and could easily, in the company of their eminent + teacher, procure, in accordance with the vow of strict poverty + they had made, shelter, food, and raiment. There was no need for + them to accept, in the shape of donation, anything beyond what + was absolutely necessary for the wants of the day. We may + conjecture that their leader watched with a jealous care over + his religious on this point, to establish them in the spirit of + poverty and of a thorough contempt for the things of this world. + But the society or fraternity growing numerous, the dependence + on the daily offerings appeared not to meet in sufficient manner + the real necessities it felt, particularly as regards shelter. + This want was quickly perceived and keenly felt by the pious + King Pimpathara, who came to the resolution of presenting Buddha + and his followers with a proper place to withdraw to at all + times, but particularly during the wet season, when the pouring + of the annual rains puts a check of four months to the religious + peregrinations of the preachers. The same motives that induced + Buddha to accept the proffered royal gift influenced him + likewise to grant to his religious the dangerous, it is true, + but the absolutely necessary permission of receiving offerings + of houses and lands. From that time, the religious communities + have made use of the privilege granted to them in all the places + where they have been established. In Burmah this favour has not + been abused, and the religious body, though never standing in + want of anything required for the daily use, cannot be said to + be wealthy. Having not to cast in the scales of the political + balance the weight of riches, and the preponderance essentially + attending the possession of them, their influence in the + political affairs is not, at least exteriorly, felt. + + [6] In his Archaeological Survey Report, General Cunningham has + supplied us with an accurate description of the position and + ruins of the celebrated city of Radzagio. His own measurements + of the old ramparts, that are still visible, agree to a + surprising degree with those of the two Chinese pilgrims, + Fa-Hian and Hwen-Tsan, who visited the same spot in the fourth + and sixth century of our era. The city was situated in a valley, + surrounded by five hills, which are named Gigakuta, Isigli, + Wibhara, Wipula, and Pandawa. It was five miles in + circumference. This is meant for the circuit of the inner wall. + The exterior one was nearly nine miles. On the southern face of + the Wibhara mountain is the famous cave at the entrance of which + was held the first Buddhist council, not long after the + cremation of Buddha's remains. There is no doubt that the + heights were, in the palmy days of Buddhism, covered with + Buddhistic monuments. As the place was subsequently occupied by + Brahmins and Mussulmans, the Dzedis and monasteries have been + mercilessly pulled down to furnish materials for musjids, tombs, + and temples. The eminences are now covered with Mussulman tombs, + which occupy the places formerly adorned with pagodas. Springs + of hot water were numerous in the vicinity of the city. The + writer has only met once in Buddhistic compositions an allusion + to that natural phenomenon so beneficial to people living in hot + climates. The modern Rajghir, both by name and situation, brings + to our recollection the celebrated capital of Magatha, so famous + in Buddhistic annals. As the extent of Radzagio has been so + accurately determined by ancient and modern visitors, one can + well afford to laugh at the immensely exaggerated number of + houses that are supposed by certain Burmese writers to have + composed the city. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + + _Thoodaudana, desirous to see his son, sends messengers to him + -- They become converts -- Kaludari, a last messenger, prevails + on Buddha to go to Kapilawot -- His reception -- Conversion of + the king and of Yathaudara -- Nanda and Raoula put on the + religious habit -- Conversion of Ananda and of several of his + relatives -- Temptation of Ananda -- Conversion of Eggidatta -- + Story of Tsampooka._ + + +Whilst the most excellent Phra remained in the Weloowon monastery, +enjoying himself in the midst of his disciples and the crowds of hearers +that daily resorted thither to listen to his preachings, his father +Thoodaudana[1] who had ever been anxiously and sedulously gathering +every possible information respecting his son, from the time he withdrew +into solitude, and performed during six years the hardest works of +bodily mortification, was then informed that his son had already begun +to preach the most perfect law, and was actually staying in the city of +Radzagio. He felt then an irresistible desire to see him once more +before his death. He therefore ordered a nobleman of his court into his +presence, and said to him: "Nobleman, take with you a retinue of a +thousand followers, and go forthwith to the city of Radzagio. Tell my +son that I am now much advanced in years, that I long to see him once +more before I die; desire him, therefore, to come over with you to the +country of Kapilawot." The nobleman, having received the royal message, +took leave from the king, and attended by a thousand followers, set out +for Radzagio. When he drew near to the Weloowon monastery, he found it +crowded with an innumerable multitude of people, listening with a +respectful attention to Buddha's instructions. Unwilling to disturb the +audience, the nobleman delayed for a while the delivery of his royal +master's message. Halting at the verge of the crowd, he, with his +followers, eagerly lent the utmost attention to all that Buddha was +saying. They at once obtained the state of Arahat, and applied for +admission into the order of Rahans. The favour was granted. To obtain +pattas and tsiwarans for so great a number of applicants, Buddha +stretched his right arm, when there appeared at once the pattas and +dresses required. The new converts put on the dress of their order, when +they all appeared with the dignified countenance and meek deportment of +Rahans who had had sixty years of profession. Having arrived at the +exalted state of Ariahs, they became indifferent and unconcerned about +all the things of this material world, and the king's mandate was +entirely lost sight of. + +The sovereign of Kapilawot, seeing that his nobleman did not return +from the country of Magatha,[2] and that no news was heard of him, +despatched a second messenger with an equal number of followers on the +same errand. They all were taken up with Buddha's preachings and became +Rahandas. The same thing happened to seven messengers successively sent +to Radzagio for the same purpose. They, with their respective retinues, +became converts of the first class. + +Disappointed at seeing that none of the messengers had returned to bring +him any news regarding his son, King Thoodaudana exclaimed: "Is there no +one in my palace that bears any affection unto me? Shall I not be able +to get a person who could procure for me some information respecting my +son?" He looked among his courtiers and selected one, named Kaludari, as +the fittest person for such a difficult errand. Kaludari had been born +on the same day as Buddha: with him he had spent the age of his infancy, +and lived on terms of the most sincere friendship. The king said to him: +"Noble Kaludari, you know how earnestly I long to see my son. Nine +messengers have already been sent to the city of Radzagio to invite my +son to come over to me, and none of them has as yet come back to me, to +bring information respecting the object of my tenderest affections. I am +old now, and the end of my existence is quite uncertain; could you not +undertake to bring my son over to me? Whether you become Rahan or not, +let me have the happiness of contemplating once more my beloved son ere +I leave this world." The nobleman promised to the king to comply with +his royal order. Attended by a retinue of a thousand followers, he set +out for the city of Radzagio. Having reached the Weloowon monastery, he +listened to Buddha's preachings, and, like the former messengers, he +became at once a Rahanda with all his followers. + +Gaudama, having obtained the Buddhaship, spent the first season (Lent) +in the solitude of Migadawon. Thence he proceeded to the solitude of +Ooroowela, where he remained three months, until he had completed the +work of converting the three Kathabas. It was on the full moon of Piatho +(January) that he entered into the city of Radzagio, accompanied by his +thousand disciples. He had just stayed two months in that place, so that +there were five months since he had left the country of Baranathee. + +Seven days after Kaludari's arrival, the cold season being nearly over, +the new convert addressed Buddha as follows: "Illustrious Phra, the cold +season is over, and the warm season has just begun; this is now the +proper time to travel through the country; nature wears a green aspect; +the trees of the forests are in full blossom; the roads are lined to +right and left with trees loaded with fragrant blossoms and delicious +fruits; the peacock proudly expands its magnificent tail; birds of every +description fill the air with their ravishing and melodious singing. At +this season heat and cold are equally temperate, and nature is +scattering profusely its choicest gifts." By such and similar +allurements Kaludari endeavoured to dispose Buddha to undertake a +journey to Kapilawot. Gaudama hearing all these words said: "What means +this? To what purpose are uttered so many fine expressions?" Kaludari +replied: "Your father, O blessed Buddha, is advanced in years; he has +sent me to invite you to come over to Kapilawot, that he might see you +before his death. He and your royal parents will be rejoiced at hearing +your most excellent law." "Well," said Buddha, "go and tell the Rahans +to hold themselves ready for the journey." It was arranged that ten +thousand Rahandas from Magatha and ten thousand from Kapilawot would +accompany the illustrious traveller. The distance between the two +countries is sixty youdzanas.[3] Sixty days were to be employed in going +over that distance, so they were to travel at the rate of but one +youdzana a day. + +Kaludari was anxious to go and inform the king of the happy issue of his +negotiation. He flew through the air, and in a short time reached the +palace of the lord of Kapilawot. The king, seeing him, was exceedingly +glad; he desired the illustrious Rahan to sit in a becoming place, and +gave orders that his patta should be filled with the choicest dishes +from the royal table. Meanwhile Kaludari related to the king all the +circumstances attending his journey. When he had spoken, Thoodaudana +desired him to take his meal. Kaludari begged to be excused, saying that +he would go and take his meal in the presence of Buddha. "Where is he +now?" replied the king. "Mighty lord," answered Kaludari, "Buddha, +accompanied by twenty thousand Rahandas, is on his way to this country, +to pay a visit to his royal father; on this very day he has left the +city of Radzagio." Thoodaudana was exceedingly pleased; he said again to +Kaludari, "Eat your meal here, and please to take another meal to my +son; I wish to supply him daily with food during his journey." Kaludari +acceded to the king's request. When his meal was over, they cleansed his +patta with the most exquisite perfumes, and afterwards filled it with +the best and choicest eatables. The patta was then respectfully handed +to the aerial messenger, who, in the presence of a large crowd of +people, rose in the air with the patta under his arm, and in an instant +arrived in presence of Gaudama, to whom he offered the vessel containing +the delicious food from his father's table. Buddha received the food +with pleasure, and ate it. The same thing was daily performed during all +the time the journey lasted. Kaludari went every day to the palace +through the air, ate his meal there, and brought that of his +distinguished instructor, who during all the way partook of no other +food but that which was brought over to him from his father's palace. +Every day Kaludari carried news of the progress of Buddha's journey. By +this means he increased in the heart of all an ardent desire of seeing +him, and disposed every one to wait on the great Gaudama with favourable +and good dispositions. The services rendered on this occasion by +Kaludari were much valued by Buddha himself, who said: "Kaludari is +disposing the people to welcome our arrival; he is therefore one of the +most excellent among my disciples." + +The princes and all the members of the royal family, having heard of +Gaudama's arrival, consulted among themselves as to the best means of +paying due respect to the noble and illustrious visitor. They selected +the grove of Nigraudatha[4] as the fittest place to receive him with his +disciples. The place was properly cleared and made ready for the +long-expected company. The inhabitants of the country, attended with +their richest dress, carrying flowers and perfumes, went out to meet +Buddha.[5] Children of both sexes opened the procession; they were +followed by the children of the noblest families; next came all the +persons belonging to the royal family. All went to the grove of +Nigraudatha, where Buddha had just arrived with the twenty thousand +Rahans that accompanied him. + +The princes, secretly influenced by pride, thus thought within +themselves: This Prince Theiddat is younger than we all; he is but our +nephew, let the young people prostrate themselves before him; as to +ourselves, let us remain sitting down behind them. This was quickly +perceived by Buddha, who said to himself: My relatives refuse to +prostrate themselves before me; I will now even compel them to do so. +Whereupon he entered into ecstasy, rose in the air, and standing over +the heads of his relatives, as a person shaking dust over them, he +exhibited to their astonished regards, on a white mango-tree, wonders of +fire and water. Thoodaudana, surprised at such a wonderful display of +supernatural power, exclaimed: "Illustrious Buddha, on the day you were +born they brought you to the presence of the Rathee Kaladewela, to do +homage to him; on that occasion, having seen you placing your two feet +on the Rathee's forehead, I prostrated myself before you for the first +time. On the day of the ploughing solemn rejoicings, you were placed +under the shade of the tree Tsampoothapye. The sun by its daily motion +had caused the shadows of all surrounding trees to change their +direction; that of the tree under which you were placed alone remaining +unmoved. I prostrated myself a second time before you; and now, at the +sight of this new wonder, I again bow down to you." The example of the +king was instantly imitated by all the princes, who humbly bowed down to +Buddha. Satisfied with having humbled his proud relatives, Buddha came +down and sat in the place prepared for him. He then caused a shower of +red rain to pour down over the assembled multitudes. It had the virtue +to wet those who liked it, and not to wet those who disliked it. "This +is not," said Buddha, "the only time when such a wonder has happened; +the same thing took place once during one of my former existences, when +I was Prince Wethandra." He went on, relating the most interesting +circumstances of that former state of existence. The whole assembly now +delighted at hearing his preachings and witnessing the display of his +power. They all withdrew when the preaching was over, and retired to +their respective places, without, however, inviting Buddha to come and +take his meals in their houses. + +On the following morning, Buddha set out with his twenty thousand +followers to get his meal. When he had arrived at the gate of the city, +he stood for a while, deliberating within himself whether he would go to +the palace to receive his meal, or go from street to street to beg for +it. He paused for a while, reflecting on the course of conduct that had +been followed by all the former Buddhas. Having known that they all, +without exception, had been in the habit of going out from house to +house in quest of their food, he resolved at once to follow their +example. Whereupon he entered the city and began to perambulate the +streets in search of his food. The citizens, from the various stories of +their houses, were looking out with amazement at such an unusual sight. +"How is this?" said they; "we see Prince Raoula and his mother +Yathaudara going out attired in the richest dresses, sitting in the most +elegant conveyance, and now Prince Theiddat[6] is appearing in the +streets with his hair and beard shaved, and his body covered with a +yellow dress befitting a mendicant. Such a thing is unbecoming indeed." +Whilst they were holding this language, on a sudden, rays of the purest +light shot forth from the body of Buddha, and illuminated all the +objects around his person. At this unexpected sight, they all joined in +praising and extolling the virtue and glory of Buddha. + +King Thoodaudana was soon informed that his son was perambulating the +streets of the city in the dress of a mendicant. Startled at such a +news, he rose, and seizing the extremity of his outer garment, ran to +the encounter of his son. As soon as he saw him he exclaimed: +"Illustrious Buddha, why do you expose us to such a shame? Is it +necessary to go from door to door to beg your food? Could not a better +and more decent mode be resorted to for supplying your wants?" "My noble +father," said Buddha, "it is meet and convenient that all Rahans should +go out and beg their food." "But," replied the monarch, "are we not the +descendants of the illustrious Prince Thamadat? There is not a single +person in our illustrious race that has ever acted in such an indecorous +manner." Buddha retorted, "My noble father,[7] the descent from the +glorious princes Thamadat is something that belongs both to you and your +royal family: the lineage of a Buddha is quite different from that of +kings and princes; it bears no resemblance to it. Their ways and manners +must essentially differ from those of princes. All former Buddhas have +always been in the habit of thus going out in search of their food." +Then stopping his course and standing in the street, he uttered the +following stanzas, "My noble father, it is not proper that I should ever +neglect the duty of receiving alms; it is an action good in itself, +tallying with truth, deserving of great merits, and productive of +happiness in this and future existences." When he had spoken, his father +obtained the state of Thautapan. He went to the palace with his father, +saying, "Those who go to beg food according to the injunction and +prescription of the law, are doing well, and prepare themselves for a +state of happiness both for the present and future: those who do go +begging, but without any regard to the ordinances of the law, ought to +refrain from doing so." He was speaking in that way when he entered the +palace. His aunt Gaudamee became a Thautapan. His father, after this +second preaching, reached the state Thagadagan. + +Thoodaudana invited Phra and his followers to ascend to the upper part +of the palace and partake of the meal prepared for them. When the meal +was over, all the ladies of the palace came to pay their respects to +Buddha. Some of them urged the Princess Yathaudara to do the same. But +she refused to comply with their request, in the hope that a greater +deference would be shown to her, and Buddha would come and visit her in +her apartments. Perceiving her studied inattendance, Phra said to his +father, "My noble father, I will go and visit the princess, and will, +without saying a single word, make her pay obedience to, and prostrate +herself before me." King Thoodaudana took up the patta, and accompanied +his son to the princess's apartments, together with his two disciples, +Thariputra and Maukalan. Buddha had scarcely been seated on the place +destined to him, when Yathaudara threw herself at Buddha's feet, and +placing her two hands on both ankles, touched repeatedly the upper part +with her forehead. Meanwhile Thoodaudana mentioned to his son the +respectful and affectionate regard she had ever entertained for his +person. "Since she heard," added the king, "that you had put on the +yellow robe, she would wear only clothes of that colour; when she knew +that you took but one meal a day, that you slept on a small and low +couch, and gave up, without regret, the use of perfumes, she instantly +followed your example, ate but one meal a day, slept on a low couch, and +gave up without grief the use of essences." "Illustrious monarch," +replied Buddha, "I do not wonder at the practices of late observed by +the Princess Yathaudara; in former times, when her merits were as yet +only few and imperfect, she was living at the foot of a certain +mountain, and knew, even then, how to behave with becomingness, and +attend with a strict regard to all religious duties." + +This very day, that is to say, the second day after the full moon of +Katson, was fixed as the time for the taking place of five grand +ceremonies. Nanda,[8] the younger brother of Buddha, was to have his +head washed, to put on the thingkiit, or royal head ornament, to be +raised to the dignity of crown prince, to be put in possession of his +own palace, and to be married. When Phra was leaving the palace, he bade +the young prince take his patta and follow him. Nanda instantly complied +with the request, and departed. He was just leaving the palace, when the +young lady he was to marry heard the sound of the steps and of the voice +of her lover. She was then busily engaged in combing her beautiful and +shining black hair. With the left hand drawing aside her hair, and with +the right leaning on the window-frame, she, with a sweet yet tremulous +voice, eagerly recommended him soon to return. She then continued to +follow him with anxious eyes until he could be seen no longer. +Meanwhile, resting against the window-side, she had her heart full of +ominous forebodings. Nanda would have gladly given back the patta to his +owner; but as he felt backward to hand it over to him, he followed +Buddha as far as the monastery. Though he had no intention of becoming +Rahan on his way to that place, yet, despite of his former dispositions, +he entered into the society of the perfect. So that on the second day +after Phra's arrival at Kapilawot, Nanda became a Rahan. Some other +writings mention that this happened only on the third day. + +On the seventh day after Phra had entered into the city of Kapilawot, +the mother of Raoula, Princess Yathaudara, put on her son the choicest +ornaments, and sent him to Phra, saying previously to him: "Dearest son, +he whom you see surrounded by twenty thousand Rahandas, whose face +resembles gold, and whose body is similar to that of the chief of +Brahmas, is indeed your father. He was formerly the owner of the four +gold vases which disappeared on the very day he withdrew into solitude; +go to him now, and say respectfully, that, being at present crown prince +of this kingdom, destined to succeed your grandfather on the throne, you +wish to become possessed of the property that will fall to you in right +of inheritance." The young prince departed. Having come into the +presence of Buddha, he endeavoured, with the simplicity and amiability +becoming a young lad, to ingratiate himself in his father's favour, and +said how happy he was to be with him, adding many other particulars +befitting his age and position. Buddha, having eaten his meal and +performed his usual devotions, rose up and departed. Raoula followed +behind, saying: "Father, give me my inheritance." Buddha appearing +neither displeased nor vexed at such a demand, none of his followers +durst tell the young prince to desist from his apparently rude +behaviour, and go back to the palace. They all soon reached the +monastery. Phra thus thought within himself: Raoula is asking from me +perishable things, but I will give him something more excellent and +lasting. I will make him partaker of those goods I have gathered at the +foot of the Bodi tree, and thereby will provide for him a better +inheritance for the future. Whereupon he called Thariputra, and said to +him: "Beloved disciple, the young Prince Raoula asks from me a worldly +inheritance, which would avail him nothing, but I wish to present him +with something more excellent, an imperishable inheritance; let him +become a Rahan." Maukalan shaved the head of Raoula and attired him with +the tsiwaran. Thariputra gave him the first instructions. When +hereafter he became Patzing, Kathaba trained him up to the duties of his +new profession. + +King Thoodaudana had seen his first son Prince Theiddat leave the palace +and all the attracting allurements of a brilliant court; despite of all +his precautions, he subsequently witnessed his going into a solitude and +becoming a Rahan. Next to him, his younger son Nanda, though assured by +the promises of soothsayers of becoming a great and mighty ruler, had +joined the society of Rahans. These two events had deeply afflicted him. +But, on hearing that his grandson had also become a Rahan, he could no +longer keep his affliction within himself. "I had," said he, "hoped that +my grandson would succeed me on the throne; this thought consoled me for +the loss of my two sons. What will become of my throne? Now the royal +succession is at an end, and the line of direct descendants is for ever +cut and irrevocably broken asunder." + +Thoodaudana obtained the state of Anagam. He said to himself: It is +enough that I should have had so much to suffer and endure on the +occasion of my two sons and my grandson becoming Rahans; I will spare to +other parents a similar affliction. He went to Buddha's place, and +having paid him his respects in a becoming manner, asked him to +establish a regulation forbidding any son to become Rahan, unless he had +the consent of his parents. Buddha assented to his father's wish and +preached to him the law. When the instruction was finished, the king +bowed to him, rose up, turned on the right, and departed. Buddha, +calling immediately the Rahans, said to them: "Beloved Bickus, no one is +to be admitted to the profession of Rahan, ere he has obtained the +consent of his parents: any one that shall trespass this regulation +shall be guilty of a sin." + +On a certain day, Phra having eaten his meal at his father's palace, the +king related to him the circumstance of a Nat, who, whilst he was +undergoing great austerities in the solitude, had come and conveyed the +report of his son having succumbed under the hardships of +mortification; but he would never give credit to such a rumour, as he +was certain that his son could not die ere he had become a Buddha. "My +illustrious father," replied Buddha, "you are much advanced in merits; +there is no wonder at your not believing a false report; but even in +former ages, when your merits were as yet very imperfect, you refused to +believe your son was dead, though in proof of this assertion bones were +exhibited before you in confirmation of the report." And he went on +relating many particulars that are to be found in the history of Maha +Damma Pala. It was at the conclusion of this discourse that the king +became Anagam. Having thus firmly established his father in the three +degrees of perfection, Buddha returned to the country of Radzagio. + +During this voyage, the most excellent Phra arrived at the village of +Anupya, in the country of the Malla Princes. In the neighbourhood of the +village there is a grove of mango-trees. To that place he withdrew with +his twenty thousand disciples, and enjoyed himself in that secluded and +delightful retreat. + +While he dwelt on that spot, the seed of the law that he had planted in +his native city was silently taking deep root in the hearts of many. His +uncle Thekkaudana had two sons, named Mahanan and Anooroudha. On a +certain day Mahanan said to his younger brother: "From among the several +families of the royal race, many persons have left the world and +embraced the religious profession under the guidance of Buddha. Our +family is the only one that has not as yet given any member to the +assembly. I will make you a proposal: either you will become an ascetic, +and leave me your inheritance; or I will myself take that step, and make +over to you all that I possess." Anooroudha at once accepted the +proposal. + +When the intentions of the two brothers became known, five young +princes, their playmates and relatives, named Bagoo, Kimila, Baddya, +Ananda,[9] and Dewadat, desired to join them in their pious design. +Having put on their finest dress, they went into the country, having no +other attendant but Oopali, their barber. They shaped their course in +the direction of Anupya. Being at a small distance from the mango-trees' +grove, the young princes stripped themselves of their rich dresses, and +gave them all to the barber, as an acknowledgment of his services. The +latter at first accepted them, and was preparing to return, when the +following thought occurred to his mind: "If I go back to Kapilawot with +these fine and rich apparels, the king and the people will believe that +I have come by foul means in possession of so many valuables, and I +shall certainly be put to death. I will follow my masters, and never +leave them." Hereupon he returned in all haste and joined them at the +very moment they were disposing themselves to enter into the Anupya +mango-trees' grove. Oopali was admitted into their company, and ushered +along with them into Buddha's presence. Having paid their respects in +the usual manner, they applied for the dignity of members of the +assembly. Their request was granted. But previous to passing through the +prescribed ceremonies, the princes said one to another: "Great indeed +and deeply rooted is the pride of princes: it is extremely difficult to +shake it off, and free oneself of its tyrannical exactions. Let Oopali +be first ordained; we will have an opportunity of humbling ourselves by +prostrating ourselves before him." Their request was granted. After +having paid their respects to the newly ordained convert, they were +likewise admitted among the members of the assembly. Their proficiency +in spiritual progress was not the same. During the second Lent, which +they spent in the Weloowon monastery, Baddya, Bagoo, and Kimila reached +the culminating point of perfection by becoming Rahandas. Ananda became +Thautapatti. Anooroudha greatly advanced in the higher path of +metaphysics. As to Dewadat, he never attained more than the +Laukithamabat. + +A little while after the conversion of the royal princes, Buddha left +Anupya, continued his voyage to Radzagio, and forthwith retired into the +Weloowon monastery to spend his second Lent. The time was chiefly +employed in training up the new converts in the knowledge of the great +truths, and in the practice of virtue. His son Raoula, about eight years +old, evinced the greatest dispositions. His attainments were far above +his age, and often elicited the admiration of the Rahans. On a certain +occasion Buddha overheard them expressing their astonishment at the +surprising progress Raoula was making in his studies. Coming among them +as if perchance, Phra asked them what was the subject of their +conversation. They answered that they were praising and extolling the +wonderful abilities of Raoula, and his matchless good dispositions. +Thereupon Buddha remarked that this was not to be wondered at. Then he +related to them the dzat Miga, by which he showed to them that during +former existences Raoula had distinguished himself in a conspicuous +manner by his excellent and admirable dispositions. As a reward for his +good behaviour and high mental qualifications, he was made Patzin. His +mind continuing to expand in an almost miraculous manner, he became a +Rahanda with myriads of Nats. + +During the same season, Buddha often went to Radzagio to beg his food. +There was in that city a flower-seller, who was wont to bring eight +bouquets every day to the king, and receive in return from the royal +hands eight pieces of silver. On a certain day, as he was coming from +the country into the town with his usual supply of flowers for the king, +he happened to see Buddha in the streets at a moment when, by a +miraculous display of his power, the six glories beamed out of his body. +He then said to himself: "I wish to go and offer these flowers to +Buddha. But the king will doubtless be much angry with me. He may have +me arrested, thrown into prison, and put to death for having failed in +offering him the usual present. Despite the great danger that hangs over +me, I will go to Buddha and offer him my flowers. Great, indeed, and +lasting shall be the merits I will gain; they will follow me during +countless existences." + +With a heart full of joy, Thoomana, for such is his name, went to the +resting-place where Buddha was seated, surrounded by crowds of people, +and laid the flowers at his feet. With a marked satisfaction, Gaudama +accepted the offer. Thoomana went home and related to his wife what had +just happened. The latter, irritated partly by the fear of the king's +wrath, and partly by the loss of the money she daily received, began to +abuse her husband in the coarsest language. She was so much maddened by +passion that she in all haste went to the king, denounced her husband, +and instantly sued for a divorce. Pimpathara revolted at such an act of +unparalleled audacity, ordered her to withdraw from his presence and go +back to her house. Meanwhile he commanded one of his courtiers to order +the flower-seller to come to the palace on the following day. As a +matter of course, the royal request was punctually complied with. In the +presence of the assembled courtiers, the king highly praised the conduct +of Thoomana, and instantly rewarded him with great liberality. As +Thoomana had offered to Buddha eight bunches of flowers, the king, to +acknowledge in a distinct manner such an offering, gave him eight +elephants, eight horses, eight slaves, eight bullocks, eight thousand +pieces of silver, and the revenue of eight villages. Buddha likewise +exceedingly extolled the meritorious behaviour of Thoomana in the +presence of the people, and said that during a whole world he would be +exempt from the four states of punishment, enjoy happiness in the seat +of man and in those of Nats, and finally become a Pitzega-buddha. The +value of the offering, though little in itself, became great by the +imminent risks he voluntarily exposed himself to. He made his offering, +though he was certain of incurring on that account the ruler's +displeasure. + +When the season of retirement was over, Gaudama travelled through +different places. He went to Patzanawonta in the Dzetia country, thence +he passed into the Bisakila forest, and returned to Radzagio, in the +grove of Yin-daik trees, near the burial-place. + +Whilst Buddha was in the splendid Dzetawon monastery, just presented to +him, a strong temptation came upon Ananda to renounce his calling and +return into the world. He went so far as to tell some of his brethren +that he recollected the promise of a prompt return which he made to his +young bride Dzanapada-kaliani, and that now he wished to fulfil it by +immediately going back into his palace, and resuming his former mode of +life. This was soon reported to Gaudama, who resorted to the following +expedient to crush in the bud the rising temptation. He took Ananda by +the arm, rose with him in the air, and led him in the direction of the +Nats' seat of Tawadeintha. On their way, Buddha, by a miraculous +process, exhibited to the eyes of his companion the sight of an immense +forest in conflagration. On the burnt stump of a tree he showed him a +female monkey horribly mutilated, having her tail, ears, and nose cut +off. At such a sight the horrified Ananda turned away his eyes in +disgust. A little while after this, Buddha exhibited before him the +dazzling and heart-captivating sight of a long array of five hundred +matchless beauties. They were daughters of Nats going to pay their +respects to the great Thagia. Ananda was gazing at them with silent but +enraptured feelings. Buddha said to him: "Do you believe those beauties +before you to be equal to Dzanapada?" "She is no more to these perfect +forms," answered he, "than the bleeding female monkey we have left +behind us is to her." "All these celestial damsels," said Buddha, "I +shall give to you, provided you agree to remain in the monastery for +some years longer." "Willingly do I accept the proposal," replied +Ananda; "I will stay cheerfully in the monastery on such favourable +terms." Whereupon both returned to the monastery. + + * * * * * + +The members of the assembly soon became acquainted with what had passed +between the master and the disciple, and keenly taunted Ananda with +their sarcastic remarks upon the daughters of Nats. Ashamed of himself, +Ananda withdrew into solitude. There he devoted himself to reflection +and penitential deeds, and finally annihilated the evil desires of his +unsubdued passion. When the inward struggle was over and peace had been +restored in him, Ananda went to Buddha's presence, and stated his +willingness to dwell for ever in a monastery and lead a religious life. +Meantime he released him from the promise he had made to him respecting +the celestial beauties. Buddha was much pleased at such a happy change. +He said to the assembled religious: "Previous to this occurrence, Ananda +resembled a badly-roofed house, which lets in the rain of passions; but +now it is similar to a well-roofed building, which is so well protected +that it is proof against the oozing of passions." Whereupon he related +the following story concerning a former existence of Ananda. + +A merchant named Kappaka had a donkey which he used to carry goods from +place to place. Having one day come near a place covered with trees, +Kappaka unloaded his animal, to allow him some time to rest and graze. +Meanwhile, a female donkey was likewise grazing in the neighbourhood. +Its presence was quickly detected by Kappaka's animal. When the moment +of departure had come, the latter, attracted by the female, kicked +furiously at his master, and would not allow the load to be replaced on +its back. The merchant, enraged at this unusual freak, began to threaten +the rebellious beast, and then to hit it with the whip as hard as he +could. At last the poor animal, unable to bear any longer the blows, +mentioned to his master the cause of his unusual behaviour. Kappaka told +him that if he would but continue his voyage, he would give him at the +end of the journey several fine females, much superior to the one he was +now coveting. The proposal was accepted. At the end of the journey +Kappaka said to the beast: "I will keep my promise with you: but I must +inform you that your daily provender shall not be increased; you will +have to share it with your companion. Subsequently you will have little +ones to provide for and maintain, but your daily ration shall not be +increased in the least; you shall have to work for me as much as you do +at present, and also to provide for the maintenance and support of your +family." The donkey, after a few moments of reflection, thought it was +better to remain as he was; and from that moment he was entirely cured +of his inordinate inclination. At the conclusion of the narration, +Buddha said: "The male donkey was he who has now become Ananda; the +female donkey, Dzanapa-kaliani; and Kappaka is now the most excellent +Phra, who is the teacher of men, Nats and Brahmas." + +Buddha, whilst at Wethalie, went out through the country, and in all the +places that he visited preached to the crowds of hearers. It was during +one of his benevolent errands that he met with a celebrated Pounha, +named Eggidatta, who with a great many disciples led an ascetic life, +after having been formerly, first, the chief Pounha of King Kothala, and +next of his son. Buddha earnestly desired the conversion of so +distinguished a personage. Maukalan was at first despatched to that +famous hermit, to attempt to bring him over to his master; but he +utterly failed. The reception he at first met with was anything but +pleasant. The work was to be done and perfected only by the irresistible +eloquence of the great preacher. Buddha soon came up to the entrance of +Eggidatta's cell. He began to upbraid the Rathee for teaching his +disciples to worship mountains, trees, rivers, and all that exists in +nature. He then initiated him in the knowledge of the four great truths. +Eggidatta, seeing the truth, at once became a convert with all his +disciples. When this great spiritual conquest was achieved, Buddha +returned to Radzagio, and spent the third season in the Weloowon or +bamboo-grove monastery. It was during the three months of the rainy +season that Buddha imparted, in a more complete manner, to his disciples +the knowledge and science which during his peregrinations he had but +superficially conveyed to them. At the same time, he carefully trained +them up in the practice and observance of those disciplinary regulations +which were intended as a means to subdue passions, to estrange them from +the world and all its attractions, and to lead a spiritual life. + +During his stay in the monastery, among the many instructions that he +gave to his disciples, I will relate the particulars that he mentioned +respecting the former doings and the final conversion of the Rahanda +Tsampooka.[10] + +In the days of the Buddha Kathaba, Tsampooka, or rather the being who in +the present existence is called by that name, put on the religious dress +in the Thawatie country. He lived in a fine monastery, and had for his +supporters the best and richest people of the place. One day, a Rahan, +belonging to another country, came to his monastery and begged the +favour to be allowed to live therein for some time. The heartless +Tsampooka denied him admittance into the interior of the building, but +tolerated his staying in the verandah during the cold season. The +people, however, actuated by better feelings than those of their +teacher, brought regularly food for the head of the house, as well as +for the stranger, for whom they felt great affection. The spiteful +Tsampooka could not bear to see the people showing marks of kindness and +benevolence towards his hated guest. On one occasion he forgot himself +so far as to abuse him, by repeating the following coarse expressions: +Eat dirt, go naked, and sleep on the bare ground. Such an inhuman +behaviour soon met with a condign punishment. The wretched Tsampooka had +at first to endure horrible torments in hell. + +On his return to the seat of man on earth, he was born from respectable +parents, but he was always prone from his infancy to indulge in the +lowest habits. He would secretly steal away, and actually satiate the +cravings of hunger by eating the most disgusting things; he would not +wear clothing, but ran about in a state of nakedness; he would only +sleep on the ground. His parents, after many fruitless attempts to +correct him, resolved to make him over to the heterodox ascetics. These +received him; but he would not eat in the company of his brethren, nor +go to beg with them. He, from the moment they were absent, went to +devour the refuse he could find. His eccentric and disgusting habits +were soon found out, and his new friends said one to the other: "Let +this man be no longer allowed to live with us. Should the disciples of +the Rahan Gaudama hear that one of our company is behaving in such a +manner, our brotherhood would become a laughing-stock to them." He was, +therefore, expelled from this place. Tsampooka went to take his abode on +a rock near the place that served as receptacle to the sewers of +Radzagio. On that rock he remained in the most fatiguing posture; he +leaned on his right hand which rested on the rock, and also on his right +knee; the left leg was stretched and the left arm raised up. He kept his +mouth opened. When the people asked him why he remained with his mouth +wide open, as a man who is incessantly drawing air into his lungs, he +answered that, refraining from the use of coarse food, he was feeding +on air only: when questioned about the singular position of his two +legs, he answered, that, were he to stand on both legs, the earth would +instantly shake. He had been during fifty-five years in that sad +position, when Gaudama, moved with compassion at his pitiable condition, +went in person to convert him. He began to relate to him all that he had +done during former existences, mentioning in particular the sin he had +been guilty of towards a brother hermit. At this unexpected declaration, +Tsampooka humbled himself. Buddha then preached to him his law. The +repenting Tsampooka firmly believed in all that was said to him. He then +rose up, and, with a heart overflowing with joy, instantly left his +place, followed his new master, and soon became a Rahanda. His +proficiency in science and virtue was such that he soon occupied a +distinguished rank among the members of the assembly. + + +FOOTNOTES + + [1] In glancing over the episode of Thoodaudana's deputation to + his son, to invite him to come and visit his native country, the + reader is almost compelled to confess that the motive that + influenced the king was only inspired by the natural feeling of + beholding once more, before he died, him whose fame, spread far + and wide, rendered him an object of universal admiration. Was + the monarch induced by considerations of a higher order to send + for Buddha? There is no distinct proof in support of this + supposition. He was his father, and he but obeyed and followed + the impulse of his paternal heart. He entertained a high sense + of his son's distinguished qualifications. He had faith in the + wonderful signs foretelling his future matchless greatness. He + desired, therefore, to honour him in an extraordinary way, on + the very spot where he had been born. But he appeared to concern + himself very little about the doctrines he was preaching with a + success never before equalled. The king exhibited a great amount + of worldly-mindedness, until his mind had been enlightened by + the oral instructions of the great reformer. + + It is difficult, if not impossible, to form an accurate idea of + the effect produced on the mass of the people by Buddha's + preachings. We see that eminent and zealous reformer surrounded + by thousands of distinguished disciples in the country of + Radzagio. These converts belonged chiefly to the class of + anchorites and philosophers, already alluded to in foregoing + notes as existing at the time Buddha began to enter the career + of preaching. But the great bulk of the populations of the + various places he visited seemed to have received for a long + time little or no impressions from his discourses. The opponents + of Buddha, the Brahmins in particular, exercised a powerful + influence over the public mind. They used it most effectually + for retaining their ancient hold over the masses. It required + the extraordinary display of the greatest wonders to break + through the almost insuperable barriers raised by his enemies. + From that period we see the people following Buddha, crowding + round him, and showing unmistakable signs of belief in him. + + The only explanation to account for this undeniable result is + the philosophical method adopted by Buddha in expounding the + principles of his system. His mode of proceeding in the gradual + development of his ideas retained the abstruseness peculiar to + subjects discussed in schools of philosophy. The technical terms + so familiar to scholars prove enigmatical to the uninitiated + _vulgus_. It takes a long time before maxims elaborated by + scholars are so far popularised as to be understood by the + unlearned, which in every age and country have always + constituted the great mass of the people. If the mind of the + generality of men is unable to comprehend at first a system of + doctrines, based on metaphysics, we cannot wonder at the slow + progress made by the preachings of the great philosopher: but + the working of wonders is a tangible fact operating upon the + senses of the multitude, eliciting their applauses, and + disposing them to yield an implicit faith to all the + instructions imparted by the wonderful being that is gifted with + supernatural powers. Feelings, and not reason, become the + foundation of a belief which grows stronger in proportion to the + mysterious obscurity that encompasses the proposed dogmas, when + supported by wonderful deeds. + + At the time Thoodaudana sent messengers to his son, the great + work of conversion was carried on with a most complete and + hitherto unheard-of success. The hall of the Weloowon monastery + was too small for the thousands that flocked thither to hear + Gaudama. Outside its precincts, crowds stood motionless, + listening with unabated attention to the discourses that fell + from his lips. So crowded was the audience that the messengers + had no chance to make their way to the presence of the preacher. + Struck with the intense attention paid to what was said by their + master's son, they too wished to make themselves acquainted with + the subjects of the instruction. What was listened to from + motives of mere curiosity, soon made a deep impression upon + their mind. The magic power of the irresistible eloquence of + Buddha worked a thorough change almost instantaneously in their + dispositions, and they became converts. So perfect was their + conversion, that they forgot for the sake of truth the very + object of their mission. They became at once members of the + Assembly, and took rank among the Rahans. They attained the + state of Ariahs, and were foremost among the perfect. The great + attainments arrived at by the Ariahs communicate to the material + portion of their being such an extraordinary amount of amazing + virtues or properties, that it becomes so refined as to partake, + to a certain degree, of a spiritual nature. Hence we see the + Rahandas going over immense distances through the air, and + performing deeds of a supernatural order. The power of working + miracles is, therefore, inherent in perfection; and it is + greater or smaller in proportion to the degree of perfection + possessed by individuals. We find that power expanded in Buddha + to an unlimited extent, because his mental attainments were + boundless. + + [2] Magatha is a country in the north of India. It occupied + nearly the same extent of territory as that now called North + Behar in Bengal. The Pali or sacred language of the southern + Buddhists is often called the language of Magatha. Hence we may + infer that it was the common language of that country. It is + probable that the Pali language was extensively spoken in the + days of Gaudama, and it was the channel through which he and his + disciples long after him conveyed their religious instructions + to the multitude of converts. The Pitagat, or the last amended + collection of sacred writings, is written in Pali, which is + looked upon in Ceylon, Nepaul, Burmah, and Siam as the language + of sacred literature. Except in some old manuscripts, where the + old square Pali letters are used, the Burmese employ their + common alphabetic characters for writing Pali words. The words, + having to pass first through a Burmese ear, and next being + expressed by Burmese letters, undergo great changes. To such an + extent does the metamorphosis reach, that very often they are + scarcely recognisable. The Burmans, however, deserve great + credit for having, in very many instances, retained in their + orthography of Pali words letters which, though not at all + sounded, indicate to the eye the nature of the word, its origin, + and its primitive form. + + In the southern parts of Burmah the Pali language is learned but + not studied, used, but not understood by the inmates of + monasteries. They are all obliged to learn certain formulas of + prayers to be daily recited in private, and, on great and solemn + occasions, to be chanted aloud in the presence of a crowd of + pious hearers. The writer, anxious to acquire some knowledge of + the sacred language, often visited those monks, who, among their + brethren, enjoyed a certain fame for learning, with the express + intention of becoming a humble student, under the direction of + one of the best informed of the society. He was thoroughly + disappointed to find those who proffered their services in great + earnest quite ignorant, and utterly incapable of giving him the + least assistance. + + The Burmese have translated in their vernacular tongue most of + the sacred writings. In many instances the translation is not + exactly what we call interlineary, but it approaches to it as + nearly as possible. Two, three, or four Pali words are written + down, and the translation in Burmese follows with a profusion of + words which often confuses and perplexes the reader; then come + again a few other Pali words, accompanied also with the + translation, and so on throughout the whole work. The art of + translating well and correctly from one language into another is + not so common as many persons may imagine. In a good translator + are required many qualifications which are not to be easily met + with, particularly in a Burman, to whom we may give credit for + knowing well his own tongue, but who, without detracting from + his literary attainments, is certainly an indifferent Pali + scholar. These translations may convey, perhaps, the general + meaning of the original, but, as regards the correct meaning of + each term, it is a luxury ever denied to the reader of such + crude and imperfect compositions. + + [3] It is difficult to ascertain exactly the length of the + measure called youdzana, formerly used to indicate land + distances. It varies from five to twelve English miles. In + measuring the distance from Radzagio to the Brahmin village of + Nalanda, the birthplace of Thariputra, which is one youdzana, + General Cunningham has found it to be seven miles. This would + induce us to hold as certain that at the epoch when Fa-Hian + visited the place, the youdzana was equal to seven miles or + forty Chinese _li_. But this would not prove that the more + ancient youdzana was not shorter than the one used in the time + of the Chinese pilgrim. Several authors maintain that such is + the case. It appears, likewise, that the length of that measure + of distance has varied with localities and places to such an + extent that it has been found in some countries to be equal to + more than twelve miles. We believe that when that measure of + distance is mentioned in this work, one would not be far from + the truth in estimating its length six or seven English miles at + the utmost. + + [4] The attentive reader of this work cannot fail to remark the + general tendencies of Buddhism to isolation, retirement, and + solitude. In a retired position, the mind is less distracted or + dissipated by exterior objects; it possesses a greater share of + self-control, and is fitter for the arduous work of attentive + reflection and deep meditation. Whenever Buddha, attended by his + followers, reaches a place where he is to stay for a while, a + grove outside the city is invariably selected. Thither the great + preacher retires, as to a beloved solitude. He enjoys it beyond + all that can be said. Alone with his spiritual family, + unconcerned about the affairs of this world, he breathes at ease + the pure atmosphere of a complete calm; his undisturbed soul + soars freely in the boundless regions of spiritualism. What he + has seen and discovered during his contemplative errands he + imparts with a placid countenance and a mild voice to his + disciples, endeavouring thereby to make them progress in the way + of knowledge and perfection. + + In those solitary abodes of peace Buddha was willing to receive + all those who wished for instruction. They were all, without + distinction of rank or caste, admitted into the presence of him + who came professedly to point to men the way to happiness, + helping them to disentangle themselves from the trammels of + passions. He preached to all the most excellent law. The + tendency to retreat and withdrawal from worldly tumult is, in + our own days, conspicuous in the care taken by Buddhistic monks + to have their houses built in some lonely quarter of a town, + assigned exclusively for that special purpose, or, as is oftener + the case, in fine places at a small distance from the walls. + Some of those groves, in the centre of which rise the peaceful + abodes of Rahans, the writer has often seen and much admired. In + towns or large villages, where the ground is uneven, the small + heights are generally crowned with the dwellings of religious. + + [5] The narrative of Buddha's reception in his father's royal + city suggests two reflections. The first is, that the saying + _Nemo Propheta in sua patria_ was as true in the days of Gaudama + as it has been in subsequent ages. The mountains of Kapilawot + had often re-echoed the praises of Buddha and the recital of his + wonderful doings. The splendid retinue of twenty thousand + distinguished converts that attended his person, the hitherto + unwitnessed display of miraculous powers, &c.,--all these + peculiarly remarkable circumstances seemed more than sufficient + to secure for him a distinguished reception among his kinsmen, + who ought to have been proud of being connected with him by the + ties of relationship. Such, however, was not the case. Actuated + by the lowest feelings of base jealousy, his relatives refused + to pay him the respect he was so well entitled to. Their + wretched obduracy was to be conquered by the awe and fear his + miraculous power inspired. + + The second reflection suggested by the recital of the ceremonies + observed on the occasion of Buddha's reception in his native + country is the truly pleasing fact of seeing the weaker sex + appearing in public divested of the shackles put upon it by + oriental jealousy. In Burmah and Siam the doctrines of Buddhism + have produced a striking, and, to the lover of true + civilisation, a most interesting result, viz., established the + almost complete equality of the condition of women with that of + men. In those countries women are not miserably confined in the + interior of their houses, without the remotest chance of ever + appearing in public. They are seen circulating freely in the + streets; they preside at the _comptoirs_, and hold an almost + exclusive possession of the bazaars. Their social position is + more elevated in every respect than that of the persons of their + sex in the regions where Buddhism is not the predominating + creed. They may be said to be men's companions, and not their + slaves. They are active, industrious, and by their labours and + exertions contribute their full share towards the maintenance of + the family. The marital rights, however, are fully acknowledged + by a respectful behaviour towards their lords. In spite of all + that has been said by superficial observers, I feel convinced + that manners are less corrupted in those countries where women + enjoy liberty, than in those where they are buried alive by a + barbarous and despotic custom in the grave of an opprobrious and + vice-generating slavery. Buddhism disapproves of polygamy, but + it tolerates divorce. In this respect the habits of the people + are of a damnable laxity. Polygamy is very rare in Burmah among + the people. This nefarious and anti-social practice is left to + the magnates of the land, from the king down to a petty myowon, + who make a part of their greatness consist in placing themselves + above public opinion, above moral and religious precepts, for + enjoying the unrestrained gratification of the basest appetite. + Though divorce be a thing of common occurrence, it is looked + upon as an imperfection, merely tolerated for the sake of human + frailty. + + [6] Buddhist monks, out of humility and contempt for all worldly + things, do not allow hairs or beard to grow. They walk + barefooted, wearing a yellow dress of the simplest make. They + are bound to live on the alms that are freely bestowed upon + them. The regulations of the Wini are, in this respect, most + explicit, and leave no room for false interpretation. A Rahan, + having renounced the world, and divested himself of all worldly + property, is bound by his professional vows to rely for his + daily food on what he may obtain by begging. Hence the + appellatio of Bickus, or mendicants, always bestowed on them by + Gaudama, whenever he addresses them in particular on certain + points regarding their profession. In Burmah, as soon as the day + begins to dawn, a swarm of yellow-dressed monks sally forth from + their abode with the patta under the left arm, and perambulate + the streets in quest of food. They never ask for anything; they + accept what is voluntarily tendered to them, without uttering a + single word of thanks, or even looking at their generous + benefactors. This action of bestowing alms on the Rahans is + deemed a most meritorious one. The offerer, therefore, becomes + liberal, not on account of the person he is assisting, but + because of the abundant merits he hopes to derive from the act. + This notion agrees very well with the leading tenets of + Buddhism. + + [7] The answer of Buddha to his royal father is a most + remarkable one, and deserves the attention of the observer. The + great moralist does away with all the prerogatives man may + derive from birth, rank, and riches. Law alone can confer titles + of true greatness and genuine nobility. The fervent and zealous + observers of the law are alone entitled to the respect of their + fellow-men. The begging of alms may be, in the eyes of + worldlings, a low and mean action, but it becomes a most + dignified one, because it is enforced by the law. This lofty + principle boldly establishes the superiority of virtue upon the + strongest basis, and sanctions the moral code he was destined to + publish to men and saddle on their conscience. The criterion of + all that is good, excellent, praiseworthy, and meritorious is no + more to depend on the arbitrary and very often erroneous views + of men, but must rest upon the immutable tenets of the eternal + law, discovered, revived, and published by the omniscient + Buddha. This truth, like a flash of light, illuminated the + king's mind, and, at this first preaching of his son, he + attained the first of the four states of perfection. + + The princes Thamadat and Thoodaudana boast to have descended + from are, according to Buddhistic sacred books, the princes who + were elected to hold supreme power at the very moment the words + _mine_ and _thine_ began to be heard amongst men, after they had + eaten the rice called Tsale, and become subject to passions, + that is to say, at the origin of society, in the beginning of + the world. The kings of Burmah, down to the present occupant of + the throne, who are descended, in their opinion, from the + Kapilawot line of kings, lay claim to the same distinction. The + writer has heard the present King of Burmah very coolly stating + as a matter of fact, which no one could think of contradicting, + that he was descended from the Thamadat's royal line. + + The Princess Yathaudara, mentioned in this narrative, had been + the wife of Buddha, ere he had withdrawn into solitude and + renounced the world. A son had just been born to him when he + left his father's palace. His name was Raoula. The doctrine of + the influence of merits gathered during former existences is + forcibly illustrated in the case of Yathaudara, who, unmindful + of the position she occupied in former years, did not hesitate + to fling herself at Buddha's feet, acknowledging him to be + worthy of all honour and veneration. Her former merits disposed + her to view in him, who had been her husband, the extraordinary + personage who was to lead men through the path of virtue to the + deliverance. + + [8] Nanda was Buddha's younger brother, or rather half-brother. + His mother was Patzapati, the younger sister of Maia. Since + Buddha had renounced the world, Nanda had become the presumptive + heir to the crown of Kapilawot. His conversion grieved the king + much, who, to prevent the recurrence of such an event, exacted + from the great reformer that in after times no one could be + admitted into the society of the perfect, without having + previously obtained the consent of his parents; failing such a + condition, the act of admission should be considered as null and + void. Hence, we read in the book of ordination, or admittance to + the dignity of Rahan, that the person directed by the president + of the assembly to examine the candidate never omits to inquire + of him whether he has obtained the consent of his parents. + + The conversion of Raoula followed that of Nanda. Of this new and + distinguished convert no mention is made afterwards in the + course of this work. He must, in all likelihood, have become a + celebrated member of the assembly, as he was trained up to the + functions and duties of his profession by the greatest and most + renowned disciples, such as Maukalan, Thariputra, and Kathaba. + + In the history of Buddhism, the Dzetawon monastery is not + inferior in celebrity to that of Weloowon. Therein Gaudama + announced during a certain night the thirty-six beatitudes of + the law to a Nat that had come and requested him to make him + acquainted with the most perfect points of his law. In the + division of the scriptures called Thoots, or sermons, we see + that the most important have been delivered in the hall of that + monastery. + + Here is another instance of a donation of landed property to a + religious corporation. In the first case, the gift had been made + to him and to his actual followers. But in this circumstance, + Phra desires the rich and pious benefactor to make the donation, + not only in behalf of self and the present assembly, but also in + that of all future members, who might resort to this place. In a + Buddhistic point of view, we may conclude that the advice given + to the donor was intended as a means of multiplying the sum of + the merits of his liberality, which must be commensurate with + the number of the individuals to whom it is designed to be + extended. + + According to the principle respecting property, which from + immemorial time has prevailed under almost all despotic + governments in Asia, which recognises the head of the state as + the sole, real, and absolute owner of the soil, it is evident + that the act of donation was, legally speaking, a declaration or + a statement of the disposal an individual made of the rights + such as he had them, viz., those of use, in favour of a + religious body. The landed property, thus conferred, acquired a + kind of sacredness which preserved it from the grasp of even the + most rapacious ruler. On the other hand, the religious body had + no right or power whatsoever to sell or dispose of that + property. In a corporation constituted as the assembly of the + disciples of Buddha was, and is in our own days, the society + alone could have the possession and management of immovable + properties given to monasteries. Donations of this kind must + have stood good as long as there were members of the Buddhistic + religious family willing and ready to maintain their rights. + Nothing short of a complete revolution in the political state of + the country, or the prolonged absence of the individuals vested + with the right of occupation, could put an end to the effect of + those deeds of donation. In Burmah, the Buddhist monks possess + nothing beyond the ground upon which stands the monastery. From + certain inscriptions found in the midst of the ruins of the + temples at Pagan, it is evident that in the palmy days of that + city donations of landed properties, such as paddy-fields, + fruit-trees, bullocks, and peasants, were made to monasteries + and temples. But for the last three or four hundred years, no + vestiges of such deeds have ever been found. So far as I have + been able to make inquiries, I am not aware that the order has + ever become possessor of lands. In Ceylon such is not the case, + at least was not when the English occupied the island. Extensive + tracts of valuable lands were in the hands of the Talapoins, who + thereby obtained over the people the twofold influence conferred + by wealth and religion. + + [9] Ananda, whose conversion is here mentioned, was the son of + Amitaudana, a brother of King Thoodaudana, and, therefore, first + cousin to Gaudama. He is one of the best known disciples of the + celebrated philosopher of Kapilawot. He has gained his + well-earned fame, less by the shining attainments of his + intellect than by the amiable qualities of a loving heart. He + bore to Buddha the most affectionate regard and the warmest + attachment from the very beginning of his conversion. The master + repaid the love of the disciple by tokens of a sincere esteem + and tender affection. Though it was a long period afterwards ere + Ananda was officially appointed to minister unto the personal + wants of Buddha, yet the good dispositions of his excellent + heart prompted him to serve Buddha on all occasions, and in + every way that was agreeable to him. He became the medium of + intercourse between his beloved master and all those that + approached him. When he had to communicate orders or give + directions to the religious, or when some visitors desired to + wait on him, Ananda was the person who transmitted all orders, + and ushered visitors into the presence of the great preacher. + + Dewadat was both first cousin to Buddha and his brother-in-law. + His father was Thouppabudha, Maia's brother. He was brother of + the Princess Yathaudara, who had married our Gaudama, when he + was crown prince of Kapilawot. Hereafter, we shall have the + opportunity of seeing that his moral dispositions were very + different from those of the amiable Ananda. + + [10] The story of Eggidatta gives us an insight into one of the + tenets which was held by that ascetic. His interlocutor + reproached him with worshipping mountains, trees, forests, + rivers, and the heavenly bodies. From the expressions made use + of by the Burmese translator, the writer is inclined to believe + that a direct allusion is made to pantheistic opinions. We know + that most of the Indian schools of philosophy have based their + various systems of metaphysics upon that most erroneous + foundation. According to pantheists, this world is not distinct + from the essence of God; all that exists is but a manifestation + or a development of the substance of God. This world is not the + work of God, existing as distinct from its Maker, but it is God + manifesting Himself substantially in all things. Who could, + then, wonder at the conduct of Tsampooka? He worshipped God, or + rather that portion of the supreme Being he saw in the great and + mighty subjects that surrounded him and attracted his notice. + + Spinoza, in the seventeenth century, and his unfortunately too + numerous followers in this century, have recast into a hundred + different moulds the pantheistic ideas of the Hindu + philosophers, and offer to the intelligence of their hearers and + readers, through an almost unintelligible language, the same + deadly food which has finally produced on the Hindu mind the sad + results which we witness. If we were better acquainted with the + variety of doctrines which the Hindu philosophers have exhibited + in the field of metaphysics, we would be soon convinced that the + modern metaphysicians, who have placed themselves out of the + pale of revelation, have not advanced one step in that science, + and that the divergence in their opinions is but a faithful + representation of the confusion which for more than two thousand + years prevailed on the banks of the Ganges among their + predecessors in the same speculative studies. + + It appears that Tsampooka was in his days what the Jogies or + Hindoo penitents are up to our time. He remained on his rock, in + the most difficult position, for the space of fifty-five years, + exhibiting himself to the crowd, and aiming at winning their + admiration by the incredible sufferings that he voluntarily + submitted to. His apparent sanctity was made up of very doubtful + materials. He passed himself off for a man who could remain + without eating, and who was gifted with supernatural powers. + Plain humility, which is nothing but the result of the true + knowledge of self, was not the favourite virtue of our spiritual + quack. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + + _A rich man of Thawattie, named Anatapein, becomes a convert -- + Story of Dzewaha -- He cures Buddha of a painful distemper -- + The people of Wethalie send a deputation to Buddha -- Digression + on the manner Buddha daily spent his time -- Settling of a + quarrel between the inhabitants of Kaulia and those of Kapilawot + -- New converts are strengthened in their faith -- Thoodaudana's + death in the arms of his son -- Queen Patzapati and many noble + ladies are elevated to the rank of Rahaness -- Conversion of + Kema, the first queen of King Pimpathara -- Heretics near + Thawattie are confounded by the display of miraculous powers -- + Buddha goes to the seat of Thawadeintha, to preach the law to + his mother._ + + +When Buddha was in the country of Radzagio, a certain rich merchant, +named Anatapein, came to Radzagio, with five hundred carts loaded with +the most precious goods, and took his lodging in the house of an +intimate friend. Whilst living with his friend, he heard that Gaudama +had become a Buddha. Suddenly, he was seized with an earnest desire of +seeing him and hearing his doctrine. On a certain day, he rose at an +early hour, and perceived, reflected through the lattices of the window, +some rays of an uncommon brightness. He went in the direction of the +light to the place where Buddha was preaching the law. He listened to it +with great attention, and, at the end of the discourse, he obtained the +state of Thautapan. Two days after, he made a great offering to Buddha +and to the assembly, and requested him to come to the country of +Thawattie. The request was granted. The distance to Thawattie is +forty-five youdzanas. Anatapein spent enormous sums that one monastery +should be erected at each youdzana distance. When Buddha was +approaching, the pious merchant arranged as follows for the reception +of the distinguished visitor, and presenting to him a splendid +monastery called Dzetawon, which he had made ready for him. He sent +first his son, richly attired, with five hundred followers, belonging to +the richest families; then followed his two daughters with five hundred +girls, all decked with the most costly ornaments. Every one carried +flags of five different colours. These were followed by five hundred +dames, having the rich man's wife at their head, each carrying a pitcher +of water. Last of all, came Anatapein, with five hundred followers, all +wearing new dresses. Gaudama let the crowd walk in front, and he +followed attended by all the Rahans. When he entered the grove, he +appeared as beautiful as the peacock's tail when completely expanded. +Anatapein asked Gaudama how he wished the donation should be made and +effected? "Let the monastery be offered," said Buddha, "to all the +Rahans that may come in future to this place from what quarter soever." +Thereupon, the rich man, holding a golden vessel of water, poured its +contents on the hands of Buddha, saying: "I present this monastery to +Buddha and to all the Rahans that may come hereafter to reside therein." +Buddha said prayers and thanks in token of his accepting the offering. +Seven days were devoted to making this great offering, and during four +months uninterrupted rejoicings went on in commemoration of this great +and solemn donation. For the purchase of the place, and the expenses of +the ceremony, enormous sums were lavished. During the era of former +Buddhas this very place had always been purchased and offered to them +and their disciples. + +[_N.B._--Here is found narrated in full the history of a celebrated +physician named Dzewaka. As such story has no reference whatever to +Buddha's career, I will give but a very succinct account of it.] + +At a certain time,[1] when Buddha lived in the city of Radzagio, the +country of Wethalie was made rich, gay, and attractive by the presence +of a famous courtesan. A nobleman of Radzagio, who had just returned +from that country, narrated to the king all that he had seen at +Wethalie, and induced the monarch to set up, in his own kingdom, some +famous courtesan, who would be skilful in music and dancing, as well as +attractive by the form and accomplishments of her person. Such a person +having been procured, she was, by the munificence of the king, placed on +a most splendid footing, and one hundred pieces of silver were to be +paid for each evening's visit. The king's son being rather assiduous in +his visits to her place, she became pregnant. Aware of her state, the +courtesan affected to be sick until her confinement. She directed her +servant to throw out the newly-born infant, on a heap of rubbish, in +some lonely and distant place. The next morning the king's son, going +out with some attendants, chanced to pass close to the spot where the +infant had been deposited. His attention having been attracted by the +noise of crows hovering close by, he went to see what it was. To his +great surprise, he saw an infant, yet breathing, half buried in rubbish. +Taken with the beauty of this little creature, the prince ordered the +child to be carried to the palace, where he was brought up with the +greatest care and attention. He was named Dzewaka, which means life, +because the prince, when he found him, inquired if he was alive. The +young lad, having reached the years of discretion, was unwilling to +remain in the palace, not occupied with any business. In order to afford +relief and comfort to his fellow-creatures, he resolved to study +medicine. He repaired to Benares, placed himself under the direction of +a famous physician, and soon became eminent by his extreme proficiency +in the profession. Having left his master, and begun practice in his own +name and for his own account, Dzewaka worked the most wonderful cures, +which soon procured to him unbounded wealth and an extraordinary +reputation. + +Dzewaka was at the height of his fame, when, on a certain day, Buddha +happened to be troubled with bellyache. He called Ananda and said that +he wanted some medicine to relieve him from pain. Ananda went to the +place where lived the celebrated Dzewaka, and informed him of Buddha's +complaint. The doctor ordered first a rubbing of oil, which was to be +repeated three days after. This remedy not having a full effect, Dzewaka +took three lily flowers, whereupon he spread several powders, and came +to Buddha, saying, "Most glorious Phra, here is one lily flower, please +to smell it; this will be followed by ten motions. Here is a second one; +the smelling thereof will produce a similar effect; and this one will +cause the same result." Having handed over the three flowers, the doctor +paid his respects to Buddha, turned to the right, and left the +monastery. + +When he was crossing the gate, he thought within himself, "I have given +a medicine calculated to cause thirty motions, but as the complaint is +rather of a serious and obstinate character, twenty-nine motions only +will take place; a warm bath would be required to produce the +thirtieth;" and with this reflection he departed. Buddha, who saw all +that passed in the doctor's mind, called Ananda and directed him to +prepare a warm bath. A little while after, Dzewaka came back to Buddha, +and explained to him his prescription. Buddha was soon restored to his +former health, and Dzewaka told him that the people were preparing to +make him offerings. Maukalan went to the son of Thauna, a rich man, to +get some rice from a field that had been watered with milk. The owner +gave rice to Maukalan and urged him to partake of it, assuring him that +there was some other in reserve for Buddha; Maukalan assented. After the +meal, his patta was cleaned with perfumed water, and filled with the +choicest food. Maukalan took it to Buddha, who ate it. Afterwards he +preached the law to the king and to an immense crowd; amongst them was +Thauna's son. They all obtained the first degree of perfection, but +Thauna reached at once the state of Arahat. + +Dzewaka came again to Buddha's presence, and requested the favour of +presenting him with two splendid pieces of cloth, which he had received +in present from a king whom he had cured of a most distressing +distemper. Moreover, he wished that the Rahans should be allowed to +receive clothes of a better sort than those they were wont to wear. +Buddha received the two pieces and preached the law to the donor, who +attained the state of Thautapan. Dzewaka, rising from his place, wheeled +to the right and departed. + +A little while after, Gaudama called the Rahans and said to them, +"Beloved Bickus, now I give permission to the faithful to make offerings +of cloth for your dress.[2] Whoever is pleased with his present dress, +let him wear it; whoever is disposed to receive some other from the +people, let him do so. But I must praise you for having hitherto been +satisfied with the ancient dress." The people of the city having heard +of the permission given to the Rahans, offered at once more than one +hundred thousand pieces of cloth. Their example was followed by the +people of the country, who made offerings to the same amount. + +A little while after this, Buddha received a deputation from the +Wethalie people, inviting him to visit their country. Here is the reason +of the invitation. The country was very rich and flourishing. The Malla +princes governed it each in turn for a certain space of time. On a +sudden a terrific pestilence desolated the land, which was in a short +time strewed with dead bodies in every direction. In the midst of so +great a calamity some advised to propitiate the Nats, by making +offerings to them; others said that recourse must be had to the great +teachers; a third party insisted upon calling to their aid the great +Gaudama, who had appeared in this world for the purpose of saving +mankind. The last opinion prevailed. Having ascertained that he lived at +Radzagio, a great number of princes, pounhas, and nobles went to +Radzagio, with great presents for King Pimpathara, to induce him to +allow the great teacher to come to their country. The object of their +mission having become known, Buddha agreed to go. He sallied forth from +the Weloowon monastery, attended by the king as far as the southern bank +of the Ganges. Having reached the northern one, he was received with +every possible mark of the highest respect and veneration. As soon as he +set his feet in the country, a heavy rain fell which almost deluged the +land. The water carried away the dead bodies. The atmosphere was +purified, the pestilence ceased, and all the sick recovered. On the +fifth day after the full moon of Nayon (June), Buddha having conferred +such a favour to the people of Wethalie, left that country and returned +to Radzagio, which he reached on the full moon of Watso (July), just in +time to spend the fourth season in the Weloowon monastery. + +Here is inserted a short sketch of the manner in which Buddha spent his +days during the rainy season, as the translator has found in one of the +manuscripts before him. + +Each day was divided into five parts, and a certain occupation was +reserved to each part. 1. Buddha generally rose at an early hour, a +little after daybreak, washed his face, rinsed his mouth, and dressed. +He then retired into a private apartment. With his all-seeing eyes, he +glanced over all creatures, carefully examined the amount of their +merits and demerits, and the real nature of their dispositions. The +reason for his taking a survey of the state and condition of all beings +was to ascertain the dispositions of the various beings, and discern +those who were prepared to hear the preaching of truth from those who, +on account of their demerits, were as yet unprepared for receiving +beneficially for themselves such a great favour. When this was done, he +put on his full canonical dress, and, with the mendicant's pot under his +arm, he sallied forth in quest of his food. He invariably directed his +steps towards those places where he knew that his preachings would be +heard with beneficial results. Sometimes he went alone; at other times +he was attended with a certain number of his disciples. His countenance +bespoke an unaffected modesty and an inimitable mildness. Occasionally +he allowed a display of wonders to take place. Musical instruments +emitted, of themselves, sweet tunes, which, revealing to the people the +coming of Buddha, rejoiced their heart and disposed them to bestow +abundant alms, and to hear the preaching of the law. Some of the hearers +became Upasakas, others Thautapans, &c., &c., agreeably to every one's +disposition. Then he returned to his monastery. + +2. As soon as he had arrived, he washed his feet, and during the +ablution he had his disciples assembled round him, and said to them, +"Beloved Bickus, be ever watchful and attentive, with a mind ever prone +to reflection. It is exceedingly difficult to obtain the nature of +man,[3] to hear the law, to become perfect, to obtain the state of +Rahanda, and to arrive to the condition of a Buddha." He then pointed +out to them some subjects of meditation. Many of the disciples devoted +themselves to mental labour; some combined together manual and mental +exertions; others withdrew to lonely places at the foot of certain +trees, and into the caves of neighbouring hills. Buddha then took his +meal, and retired for awhile alone into his own private apartment. When +he arose a little after mid-day, he anew contemplated all beings, and +fixed his attention on those that were to come and receive his +instructions. He soon came out, and at once began to impart instructions +to all those that had arrived, from what place soever. When the +instruction was completed, the people withdrew. + +3. After the people's departure, Buddha bathed and took a walk in the +open verandah of the monastery. His mat, cushion, &c., were spread in a +becoming and open place. The Rahans hastened at that hour to come and +communicate freely the result of their mental exertions. When they +wanted any explanation, they were encouraged to put him questions, +which were instantly answered; and they received submissively the +answers which he condescended to give to them. This exercise lasted +until it was dark. The disciples retired from their master's presence. + +4. After their departure, the Nats and other celestial beings were +admitted. Buddha conversed with and instructed them until nearly +midnight. + +5. Buddha then walked awhile to relieve his limbs from extreme +lassitude, and went into his apartment to take some rest. He rose very +early, and began to review the beings who, during the days of former +Buddhas, had distinguished themselves by their exertions in the path of +virtue and in the high mental attainments. + +During one of his usual benevolent errands through the country, Gaudama +converted Ouggasena, his wife and companions. Here is an abridged +narrative of that event. Ouggasena was the son of a rich man. In the +time of his youth a company of comedians came to Radzagio and exhibited +during seven days in the presence of King Pimpathara and his court. Our +young man, along with many of his companions, attended the exhibition. +On a sudden, he became passionately enamoured of a rope dancing-girl, +who performed many feats with accomplished grace and uncommon address. +Despite his parents' remonstrances and entreaties, he sacrificed to his +ungoverned passion all considerations, and he married the damsel. In his +new situation, he had no alternative but to learn the art of +rope-dancing, tumbling feats, and standing in various attitudes on the +extremity of posts or masts, sometimes sixty cubits high. During his +noviciate, he had to bear the laughter and taunts of his wife and of his +new friends. By dint of exertion he became proficient in the art of +performing tumblers' feats with a surprising agility. One day it was +announced at the sound of the drum that Ouggasena was to perform on the +top of a post sixty cubits high. An immense crowd of citizens went out +with great eagerness to see the performance. When the amusements had +just begun, Buddha happened to pass by with a number of disciples. He +desired Maukalan to go ahead, and begin to preach to Ouggasena. Soon he +came up himself in person, and converted the juggler, who forthwith +descended from his mast, prostrated himself before Buddha, and asked to +be admitted as a member of the assembly. After further instructions he +obtained the science of Rahanda. His wife and all the company became +likewise converts.[4] + +Buddha had now fulfilled the promise he had formerly made to the ruler +of Radzagio, to spend three consecutive seasons in his royal city. He +went over to the Wethalie country, and fixed his residence in a fine +place, in the midst of a forest of sala-trees, called Mahawon. Whilst he +enjoyed himself in that place, a quarrel took place between a portion of +the people of Kappila and that of Kaulia, who lived on both banks of the +little river Rauhani. The cause of the dispute was the irrigation of +paddy-fields. The small river had been duly barred, but on account of an +unusual drought there was not water enough to supply the quantity +required for the fields on both banks. One party wanted to have all the +water, the other demurred. Hence a dispute arose which, wildfire-like, +spread from the banks of the stream all over both countries. A general +appeal to arms ensued, and, in a short time, both armies stood facing +each other in battle array. + +At an early hour Buddha, having risen from his couch, cast, as usual, a +glance over all beings. He soon saw the feud that existed between the +country of his birth and that of Kaulia. Moved with compassion over the +miseries which that people, blinded by a furious passion, were bringing +upon themselves, he went through the air, and stood over and above the +stream which separated the two armies. Rays of glory, beaming out of his +person, soon attracted general attention. Both parties laid down their +arms and prostrated themselves, worshipping him. He said to them, +"Princes and warriors, hearken to my words. Which is the most valuable, +a small quantity of water or the lives of countless beings, and, in +particular, the lives of princes?" They answered, "Of course the lives +of princes and warriors are most valuable." "If so," retorted Buddha, +"lay aside your passion, conquer your anger, throw away your weapons of +destruction, love each other, and live in peace." Both parties, by a low +and prolonged tone of voice, expressed their deep regret at what they +had done, and their sincere desire to follow his instructions. He +preached to them the law in such an impressive and convincing manner +that on the spot two hundred and fifty noblemen of Kappila and the same +number of Kaulia asked for admittance among the members of the assembly. + +The instruction they had heard, and which had determined their vocation, +had not had time to cast deep roots in their hearts. They soon regretted +their home, their families, and their former gay life. Buddha, who saw +what was going on in their souls, said to them, "Will you come with me, +and enjoy yourselves on the green banks of the beautiful lake Kontala?" +They joyfully accepted the proposal. By the power inherent in his +nature, Buddha took them through the air, and soon reached the lake. +They alighted on its banks. Delighted with the beautiful scenery that +surrounded them, and ignorant of the new objects which they saw, they +interrogated Buddha about the names of the new plants and fruits which +they perceived. Gaudama condescended to answer all their questions. +While thus engaged they saw the king of the birds of the lake resting on +the branch of a tree. On a sudden five hundred birds of the same kind +came crowding round their chief, and, by their cries and various +attitudes, testified the happiness which they felt at being in his +company. + +The new converts wondered at the admirable instinct of those birds, and +communicated to each other their mutual surprise. As an accomplished +teacher, Buddha availed himself of the opportune moment, and said to +them in a mild manner, "Beloved disciples, what you see now and admire +is the lively and true image of my family." So effectually was the +instruction conveyed that they all at once became Thautapan, and no +longer thought of returning into the world. By the virtue inherent in +their new position, they were enabled to fly through the air, and they +returned with Buddha into the Mahawon residence. + +On their arrival, Buddha began his fifth season in that same place. It +was in the middle of that season, in the month of Wakhaong (August), +that he heard that his father had been seized with a violent distemper, +which left him no rest either day or night. Sensible of his approaching +end, Thoodaudana ardently wished to see his son for the last time. In +the morning, at the hour when Buddha was reviewing all beings, and +examining with a compassionate heart their respective condition, he saw +the sad and painful position of his royal father. He instantly +summoned, by the means of Ananda, a select band of disciples, and +flying through the air, alighted with his company in front of the +palace. Without a moment's delay he ascended to the upper apartments, +and sat on a place prepared for him, near the head of the couch upon +which lay the royal patient. + +Buddha, recollecting himself awhile, and then laying one of his hands on +his father's head, said, "By the virtue of the merits I have acquired +during countless existences, by the power of the fruits gathered during +forty-nine days round the tree Bodi, let this head be forthwith relieved +from all pain." It happened so in the twinkling of an eye. Nan, or +Nanda, the younger brother of Buddha, the son of his aunt Patzapati, +holding the right hand of his father, said with a fervent earnestness, +"By the merits that I have obtained at the feet of Buddha, let this +right hand be freed from all pain." And perfect cure instantly followed. +Ananda, Phra's first cousin, held the left arm. Thariputra laid his hand +on the back, Maukalan grasped the feet. All of them with a similar faith +uttered such like prayers, and the same happy result invariably +followed. Thoodaudana was delivered from all pain. But he continued to +remain very weak. + +Buddha, profiting by that favourable opportunity, preached to his father +the law of mutability, and gave him many and truly seasonable +instructions on that most important subject. With such a persuasive +language did he expound this favourite doctrine that his father became +at once a Rahanda. At the same time he distinctly informed him that +seven days hence the end of his life would inevitably happen. +Thoodaudana, perfectly prepared for the new change, that is to say, for +death, by his son's instructions, and thoroughly resigned, saw before +him the true state of Neibban, and said, "Now I clearly perceive the +instability of all things. I am free from all passions. I am completely +disentangled from the trammels of existence." Rocking himself in the +bosom of these comforting truths, he spent happily the few days he had +yet to live. On the last day, and for the last time, he paid his +respects to Buddha by worshipping him. Sitting then on his couch, the +royal patient humbly asked pardon in the presence of all his attendants +for all offences he had committed by thoughts, words, and deeds. Having +performed this act of sincere humility, he consoled his wife Patzapati, +who sat bathed in tears, as well as the other members of the royal +family, and several times repeated before them the great truth--that all +beings, when they come into existence, have within, inherent in their +nature, a principle of death that hurries them to their end and +dissolution; that the same principle that has brought near and united +beings together is always opposed, and at last overpowered by the +opposite one that tends to separate them. He then placidly lay on his +couch, and gently breathed his last in the day of the full moon of +Wakhaong, on a Saturday, at the rising of the sun, in the year of the +Eetzana, era 107, at the advanced age of ninety-seven years. + +Gaudama, after his father's demise, when all the Rahans were assembled +round the deathbed, said to them: "Beloved Bickus, behold my father's +remains. He is no longer what he was a little while ago. He has +undergone the change. No one can offer an effectual and lasting +resistance to the principle of death, inherent in all beings. Be +diligent in the practice of good works: follow steadily the four roads +leading to perfection." After this lecture, he consoled his aunt +Patzapati and the other ladies of the court, who, with dishevelled hair, +were wailing aloud and striking their breasts. He minutely explained to +them the consequences resulting from the great principle of mutability, +which pervades all beings and infallibly leads them to destruction by +the separation of their constitutive parts. + +When the instruction was finished, Buddha directed Kathaba to go and +prepare the spot on which the funeral and cremation of the corpse were +to take place. Aided by Thariputra, he washed the corpse, which was +subsequently placed in great state, on a magnificent and lofty +catafalco, raised for the purpose. The princes of Thekkara, Thoopawa, +and Weritzara, came to attend the royal funeral and offer presents. The +corpse was carried processionally through the principal streets of the +city at the sound of all musical instruments. Buddha, in person, +received the corpse, and laid it on the funeral pile. To no one else +would he leave the honourable and pious task of setting fire to it. On +that occasion there took place an indescribable outburst of wailings and +lamentings. The impassible Buddha preached the law on that occasion. He +left aside all praises in behalf of the deceased. He was satisfied with +announcing the law; and countless beings, both among men and Nats, +obtained the deliverance. + +After the loss of her royal husband, Queen Patzapati, profoundly +impressed with all that she had seen and heard, desired to renounce the +world and embrace a religious mode of life. For that purpose she came to +the presence of Buddha, and asked three times the permission to follow +her inclination and become Rahaness. Three times the solicited favour +was denied her. Buddha then left his own native country and returned to +Wethalie, fixing his abode in the Gutagaia-thala monastery, in the +Mahawon forest. + +Buddha had not been long in this place when he had to grant the request +which he at first refused to his aunt Patzapati. The wives of the +princes of the Kappila and Kaulia countries, who, to the number of 500, +had recently renounced the world, desired also to follow the example set +before them by their husbands. They went to the queen's apartments and +communicated to her their design, entreating her to help them in +obtaining the object of their wishes. Patzapati not only promised them +her support, but expressed the determination to join their company. As a +token of the sincerity and earnestness of their resolution, all the +ladies, without the least hesitation, cut their beautiful black hair, +put on a dress in accordance with their pious intentions, and resolutely +set out on foot in the direction of the Wethalie country. + +Unused to such bodily exertions, the pious pilgrims suffered much during +their long journey. At last, worn out with fatigue, covered with dust, +they arrived near the Mahawon monastery. They respectfully stopped at +the gate, and requested an interview with Ananda. The latter, having +ascertained from their own mouth the object of their pious and fatiguing +errand, hastened into the presence of Buddha, and entreated him to grant +the earnest and praiseworthy demand of his aunt and of the other ladies, +her companions. On hearing the request, Buddha, for a while, remained +silent, as if deliberating on the answer he had to give. Then he said: +"Ananda, it is not expedient to allow women to embrace the religious +state; otherwise my institutions shall not last long." Ananda, +undismayed by that reply, respectfully reminded Buddha of all the +favours he had received from Patzapati, who had nursed and brought him +up with the utmost care and tenderness, from the day his mother died, +when he was but seven days old, and represented with a fervent +earnestness the good dispositions of the pious postulants. Buddha's +scruples were overcome by the persuasive language of the faithful +Ananda. He asked whether women could observe the eight precepts: and +added, that in case they would consent to bind themselves to a correct +observance of them, they might be admitted as members of the assembly. + +Fully satisfied with the answer he had obtained, the venerable Ananda +saluted Buddha, and hastened to the gate of the monastery, where his +return was impatiently awaited. On hearing the good news, Patzapati, in +the name of her companions, spoke to Ananda: "Venerable Ananda, we all +rejoice that the favour so often asked for has been at last granted unto +us. As a young maid, who has bathed, and washed her hair, is anxiously +desirous to put on her fine ornaments, as she receives with delight the +beautiful and fragrant nosegays that are offered to her, so we are +longing for the eight precepts, and wish for admittance into the +assembly." They all promised to observe the rules of their new +profession to the end of their lives. Yathaudara and Dzanapada-kaliani +were among these converts. They all, owing to their former meritorious +works, became subsequently Rahandas. + +One of the new female converts seemed to have retained as yet a certain +admiration of and fondness for her handsome features, and secretly +prided herself on her beauty. Buddha, who quickly perceived the latent +enemy lurking in the folds of her heart, resorted to the following +expedient to correct her. On a certain day, when the proud and vain +woman was in his presence, he created in an instant a consummate beauty, +who as much exceeded her in perfection of form as the snow-white swan +surpasses the black crow. Whilst she looked on this suddenly appearing +rival with somewhat jealous eyes, Buddha caused the beauty of his +creation to appear on a sudden very old, with a wrinkled face and an +emaciated frame, and to exhibit on her person all the various and +disgusting inroads which the most loathsome diseases make on the human +body. The change acted as an electric shock on the young religious +woman. When Gaudama perceived the change, and that she was so horrified +at such a sight that she was nearly fainting, he said to her: "Behold, +my daughter, the faithful foreshowing of what shall inevitably happen to +that form you are so proud of." He had scarcely spoken those words, when +she was instantly and for ever cured of her vanity. + +Buddha left Wethalie and went on the Makula mountain, where he spent his +sixth season. During his stay in that place thousands of people were +converted and obtained the deliverance. At the end of that season, +Buddha went to Radzagio, and stayed in the Weloowon monastery. + +It was at that time that Kema, the first queen of King Pimpathara, proud +of her rank, youth, and beauty, was at last converted. Up to that time +she had obstinately refused to see Buddha and hear his doctrine. On a +certain day, the queen went to visit a garden which was in the +neighbourhood of the Weloowon grove. By a contrivance of the king, her +husband, she was brought, almost against her will, into the presence of +Buddha, who worked out the spiritual cure of her foolish vanity by a +process similar to the one above mentioned. He caused a beautiful female +of his creation to pass successively, in the queen's presence, through +the various stages of old age, disease, and death. Her mind having been +thus well prepared to hear his instructions, Buddha gave her a +lengthened explanation of the miseries attending the body. It had the +desirable effect to convert her in so perfect a manner that she entered +into the current of perfection, and became Thautapan. After having +obtained the consent of her lord, she was, upon her pressing +solicitations, admitted into the religious order. She became a Rahanda, +and among the female members of the assembly she ranked as the disciple +of the right. Such a glorious charge was owing to her former merits. + +On a certain day, a rich man of the country of Radzagio went to enjoy +himself on the banks of the river Ganges. That man was not a disciple of +Buddha, nor did he hold the doctrines of the opposite party. He steered +a middle course between both doctrines, with a mind disposed, however, +to embrace such opinions as should appear to him based on the best and +strongest evidence. Chance offered him a favourable opportunity to +acknowledge the superiority of Buddha over his opponents. He saw a log +of sandal-wood floating on the stream, took it up, and had a beautiful +patta made of it. When finished, he wrote upon it these words, "He who +can fly in the air let him take it." The patta was raised on the top of +a succession of hampers, tied together, and sixty cubits high. Some +heretics living in the neighbourhood asked on successive occasions the +rich man to get down the patta for them; he answered them that he would +give it only to him who by flight could reach it. The head man of those +heretics feigned to prepare himself to fly; but when he was extending +his arms, and raising one of his feet, his disciples, according to a +preconcerted plan, seized him, saying, "It is not becoming that you +should exert yourself for such a trifle." But the wily rich man could +not be thus deceived; he persisted in his former resolution, and for six +days resisted all their entreaties. On the seventh day Maukalan happened +to go to that place in search of his food. He was informed of all that +had just happened. He was, moreover, told that the rich man and all his +family would become disciples under him who could by flight possess +himself of the sandal-wood patta. Maukalan was ready, for the glory of +Buddha, to raise himself in the air, but his companion refused to allow +him to do it, saying that such an easy work could easily be accomplished +by one less advanced in merits. Maukalan agreed to his proposal. +Whereupon entering into the fourth state of Dzan, his companion rose in +the air, carrying with the toes of one of his feet an enormous rock +three-quarters of a youdzana wide. The whole space between him and the +bystanders appeared darkened. Every one was half dead with fear, lest, +perhaps, it should fall over his head. Maukalan's companion had the rock +split into two parts, and his person then appeared to the view of the +assembled crowd. After having during a whole day exhibited such a mighty +power, he caused the rock to fall on the place he had taken it from. The +rich man bade him come down, fully satisfied with the display of such +power. The sandal-wood patta was taken down, filled with the best rice, +and presented to him. The Rahan received it and went back to his +monastery. Many persons living at a distance from the place where the +wonder had been exhibited, followed him to the monastery, begging him to +show some other signs. + +As they approached the monastery, Buddha hearing the noise, inquired +what it was. He was informed of all the particulars of the event that +had just taken place. He called the Rahan into his presence, took the +patta, had it broken into pieces and reduced to dust.[5] He then forbade +the Rahan ever to make such a display of his power. + +The heretics soon heard of the prohibition issued by Gaudama to his +disciples. They thought that no one would dare to match them in the +display of wonders, and that they could easily ascertain their +superiority over him. The ruler of Radzagio, hearing of this news, went +to Buddha and inquired as to his motive for such a prohibition. Buddha +told him that the prohibition regarded his disciples only, but not +himself. The heretics, informed of this, said, "What will become of us? +Gaudama himself will show signs." They held a council among themselves +as to what was to be done. Gaudama told the king that in four months he +would make a grand display of his miraculous power in the country of +Thawattie, as it was in that place that all former Buddhas had in former +ages showed signs. The heretics from that day never lost sight of Buddha +for a moment; they followed him day and night. They gave orders that a +large and extensive covered place should be prepared for them, where +they might show their power and outshine that of the Rahan Gaudama. +Buddha having said that he would select the spot where a white +mango-tree stood for the scene of his miracles, the heretics caused the +total destruction of all mango-trees in that direction. + +On the full moon of Tabaong (February), Gaudama left Radzagio, attended +by a large retinue of disciples. He went to preach in different parts. +On the seventh of the waxing moon of Watso he entered the country of +Thawattie. A gardener gave him by way of present a large mango fruit. +Ananda prepared the fruit and Buddha ate it. When this was done, the +stone was handed to Ananda with an injunction to plant it in a place +prepared to receive it. When planted, Buddha washed his hands over it, +and on a sudden there sprang up a beautiful white mango-tree, fifty +cubits high, with large branches loaded with blossoms and fruits. To +prevent its being destroyed, a guard was set near it by the king's +order. Dismayed at such a wonderful sign, the heretics fled in every +direction to conceal their shame and confusion. Their head man, named +Pourana, took from a husbandman a large jar with a rope, tied up the +vessel with one extremity of the rope, passed the other round his neck, +and flinging first the jar and next himself into the river, where the +water was very deep, he was drowned, and went to the lowest hell, called +Awidzi. + +Buddha created in the air an immense road, reaching east and west to the +extremities of the world. When the sun began to verge towards the west, +he thought the time had come to ascend to that road in the presence of +an immense crowd, that covered an area of thirty-six youdzanas, and +there make a display of his wonderful powers. He was on the point of +crossing the threshold of the building that had been erected for him by +the care of Nats, when a female convert, named Garamie, who had become +an Anagam, came into his presence, and after the usual prostrations said +to him, "Glorious Buddha, it is not necessary that you should take the +trouble of working wonders; I, your servant, will do it." "What wonder +will you work, my daughter, Garamie?" replied Buddha. "I will," said +Garamie, "fill up the space with water, and plunging into the water in +an eastern direction, I will come back, and reappear in the west like a +water-fowl. On my appearance before the crowd they will ask, What is +this water-fowl? And I will answer to them, that this water-fowl is +Garamie, the daughter of the most excellent Buddha. This is the wonder I +will accomplish. The heretics, on seeing it, will say to themselves, If +such be the power of Garamie, how much greater and more wonderful must +be that of Buddha himself?" "I know," said Buddha, "that you have such a +power, but it is not for your sake that these crowds have been gathered +together;" and he refused the solicited permission. Garamie said to +herself, Buddha would not allow me to work this great wonder, but there +is some one else that can do greater things than I; perhaps Buddha will +not be so inflexible with them as he is with me. She then withdrew to a +becoming place. + +Buddha thought within himself, There are many among my disciples who can +make a display of great wonders; it is meet that the crowds should be +aware of it, and see how, with hearts stout as that of the lion, they +are ready to perform the most wonderful feats. He said aloud, "Who are +they that can do wonders? let them come forward." Many came into his +presence with a lion-like boldness and a thundering voice, craving for +the honour of displaying supernatural powers. Among them was a rich +man, named Anatapein; a female child, called Tsera; a grown-up woman, +and Maukalan. They volunteered their services to perform the most +extraordinary wonders, in order both to frighten the heretics, and make +them understand that, if such a power belonged to the disciples, what +that of Buddha himself must be. But Buddha would not accept their +proffered services, and said to them that the people had not been +assembled there for their sake, but for his; and that to him alone was +reserved the task of enrapturing the crowds by the great wonders he was +preparing to show. Addressing Maukalan, he said to him that, being a +Buddha, he could not leave to others the trouble of performing his own +duty. In a former existence, when he was a bullock, he drew from a muddy +place a heavily-laden cart, to save a Brahmin's property and rejoice his +heart. + +Buddha ascended to the immense road which he had created in the air in +the presence of the crowd, that filled a place of eighteen youdzanas in +breadth and twenty-four in length. These wonders which he was about to +display were the result of his own wisdom, and could not be imitated by +any one. He caused a stream of water to issue from the upper part of his +body and flames of fire from the lower part, and on a sudden the reverse +to take place; again fire issued from his right eye, and streams of +water from his left eye, and so on from his nostrils, ears, right and +left, in front and behind. The same wonder too happened in such a way +that the streams of fire succeeded the streams of water, but without +mingling with each other. Each stream in an upward direction reached the +seats of Brahmas; each stream in a downward direction penetrated as far +as hell; each in a horizontal direction reached the extremities of the +world. From each of his hairs the same wonderful display feasted the +astonished eyes of the assembled people. The six glories gushed, as it +were, from every part of his body, and, made it appear resplendent +beyond description. Having no one to converse with, he created a +personage, who appeared to walk with him. Sometimes he sat down, while +his companion was pacing along; and at other times he himself walked, +whilst his interlocutor was either standing or sitting. All the while +Buddha put to him questions which he readily answered, and in his turn +replied to the interrogations that were made to him. At intervals Phra +preached to the crowd, who were exceedingly rejoiced, and sung praises +to him. According to their good dispositions, he expounded the various +points of the law. The people who heard him and saw the wonderful works +he performed, obtained the understanding of the four great principles. + +Buddha, having completed the twofold work of preaching to the crowds, +and exciting their respect and admiration by the most astonishing +display of the most extraordinary miracles, began to think within +himself as follows: To what place have all former Buddhas resorted after +the display of signs, and spent the season? He saw by a stretch of his +incomparable foresight that all of them had gone to the seat of +Tawadeintha, in the Nats' country, to announce the perfect law to their +mothers. He resolved to go thither too. With one step he reached the +summit of the mountain Ugando, at a distance of 160,000 youdzanas, and +another step carried him to the top of the Mienmo mountain. This was +done without any effort on the part of Buddha. Those mountains lowered +their summits to the very spot where he was standing, and rose up again +to resume their lofty position. Buddha found himself brought almost +instantaneously to the seat of Tawadeintha.[6] He took his position on +the immense rock Pantukambala. When he lay extended there upon his +tsiwaran, the huge mass on a sudden contracted itself to the very narrow +dimensions of his dress. + +The people who had seen Buddha, and who could not now descry him, found +themselves in a state of bereavement, as if the sun and the moon had +disappeared from the sky. They gave full vent to their cries and +lamentations, saying: We are now deprived of the blessed presence of him +who is the most excellent among the three sorts of beings, men, Nats, +and Brahmas. Some said he has gone to this place; some replied, no, he +has gone to that place. Many of the people, who had just arrived from +different parts of the country, were exceedingly grieved, because they +could not see him. They all repaired before Maukalan, to ascertain from +him what place Buddha had gone to. Maukalan knew it, but he wished to +leave to Anourouda the honour of satisfying their curiosity. The latter +said to them that Buddha had gone to the seat of Tawadeintha to preach +the law to his mother, and spend there one season on the rock of +Pantukambala. He added, that he would be back in three months hence, on +the day of the full moon of Thadin-kioot (October). They came to the +spontaneous resolution to remain on that very spot, and not to return +to their homes, until they had seen Buddha a second time. They erected +temporary sheds; and, though the place was small for such a countless +multitude, they managed to accommodate themselves in the best way they +could. Previous to his departure, Buddha had enjoined on Maukalan to +remain with the people and preach to them the law. Maukalan faithfully +complied with the request, and during three consecutive months +instructed the people, and answered all their questions. The rich man +Anatapein fed the Rahans and the assembly abundantly during the whole +time. + + +FOOTNOTES + + [1] It is impossible to assign the motive that induced the + compiler of Buddha's life to insert in his work a long episode + on the celebrated physician Dzewaka. The story is in itself + uninteresting, and throws no light whatever on the history of + the supposed originator or reformer of Buddhism. For this reason + it has been thought quite unnecessary to give a complete + translation of the whole passage. The name of Dzewaka is quite + familiar to the adepts of the medical art in Burmah. Many times + the writer has made inquiries respecting the works of the + Hippocrates of India, but he has never been able to meet with + mention of or allusion to such compositions. Hence he has been + led to suppose that the father of medicine in these countries + has left behind him no writings to embody the results of his + theoretical and practical favourite pursuits. Surgery appears to + have been no novelty with our great doctor, since we see him on + an occasion extracting from the body of a prince, by means of an + incision, a snake that put his life in peril. + + The numerous quacks who in Burmah assume the name of physicians, + and are ever ready to give medicines in all cases, even the most + difficult and complicated, are ignorant of the very elements of + the surgical art. They possess a certain number of remedies, + made up of plants, which, when applied under proper + circumstances and in certain cases, work wonderful cures. But + the native physicians, unable in most instances to discern the + true symptoms of diseases, prescribe remedies at random, and + obtain, in too many cases, results most fatal to the unfortunate + patient. In medicine as well as in religion, ignorance begets + superstition and recourse to magical practices. We may + positively assert that the black art is, with native + practitioners, an essential concomitant to the practice of + medicine. When a physician has exhausted the limited stock of + remedies that he possesses, and he finds, in spite of his + exertions, that the disease bids defiance to his skill, he + gravely tells the relatives of the patient that some evil spirit + is interfering with his remedies, and that he must be expelled + ere there can be any chance of relieving the sufferer and + obtaining his recovery. Whereupon a shed is erected with the + utmost speed on a spot close to the house of the patient. + Offerings of rice, fruits, and other articles are made to the + pretended evil spirit, who is supposed to have got hold of the + sufferer's body. Dances of the most frantic character are + carried on by his relatives. Males will only officiate in + default of females; preference is always given to the latter. + Young girls, say the Burmese, are the fittest persons for the + occasion, as it is supposed that the evil Nat is more + effectually and easily propitiated by the power of their charms. + This exercise lasts until, strength at last failing them, they + drop down in a state of complete exhaustion and prostration. + They appear as if they had entirely lost their senses. In that + state they are supposed to be inspired by the evil spirit. + Interrogated by the physician on the nature of the disease, and + the proper remedies to be applied for eradicating it, they give + answers, or rather they become channels through which the + spirit, satisfied with the offerings made in his honour, + condescends to declare that he has now left the patient, and + that by placing him under a certain treatment, which he fails + not to indicate, he will soon recover his health. Occurrences of + this nature are exceedingly common. They are called by the + natives festivals of the _Nat-pan_, or of the possessing spirit. + + [2] The first followers of Buddha, observing a mode of life much + resembling that of the Rathees, had hitherto made use of the + dress they had purchased previous to their leaving the world. + But when they became professed members of the new society, they + were subjected to the observance of the vow of strict poverty, + and had to depend entirely on public charity for the obtaining + of the required food and raiment. The old clothes brought at the + time of their entering the society were worn out and unfit to be + put on. Others were to be provided for by some means that would + not wound the delicate feeling of absolute poverty. The only one + that occurred was the willing and liberal dispositions of the + lay members of the Buddhist community. This new source of + abundant alms was opened by our Buddha himself, on the occasion + of the offering made by Dzewaka. Desiring likewise to do away + with the scruples many religious might entertain respecting the + lawfulness or unlawfulness of receiving articles of dress, + Gaudama laid it down as a regulation that all the religious + could lawfully accept all that might be willingly offered them + by the faithful. In the foregoing pages we have seen the founder + of Buddhism granting to his followers permission to receive + houses and landed properties presented to communities. Now the + same legislator, adhering to the same principle, gives a fuller + development thereto, and extends to articles necessary for dress + the leave to receive offerings of this description, proffered by + the faithful to the religious. In the book of Buddhist + ordinations, or promotion to the degree of Patzin, mention is + made of these two sorts of permissions given to the Rahans. + + [3] It was at that moment that Gaudama delighted to reveal to + his disciples the most startling points of his doctrine, and + made them familiar with certain tenets upon which he laid much + stress. He wished that what he looked upon as subjects of the + greatest importance, should be come familiar to them. No doubt + he intended that those favourite topics should become the + spiritual food upon which his disciples' minds should feed + during the hours devoted to meditation. Those who are + uninitiated in the doctrines of Buddhism will not understand the + meaning of such an expression. It is difficult to obtain the + nature of man. Such language is, however, in perfect accordance + with the principles of that system. A being, who is in one of + the four states of punishment, that of an animal, for instance, + shall have, in many instances, to pass through an immense number + of various existences, ere he can escape from the circle of + animal existences, and at last emerge into that of man. To give + us an idea of the excessive difficulties a being has to + encounter, they make use of the following comparison. Let us + suppose that a needle be dropped from one of the seats of + Brahmas, and at the same time a man on earth be keeping another + needle with the point upwards. It will be more easy for the two + needles' extremities to come in contact one with the other, than + it will be to a being in the condition of animal to reach the + state of man. On the same principle one can easily imagine what + mighty efforts must be made during countless existences ere a + simple man can obtain all the qualifications necessary for + enabling him to become a Buddha. The theory of Gaudama, on this + point, resembles much that of some modern thinkers who preach + the perfectibility of man to an almost infinite degree. + + [4] The conversion of Ouggasena and of his companions, procured + by the direct intervention of Buddha himself, is another + instance of the truly liberal spirit which animated the great + preacher. His law was intended for all without exception. The + profession of these individuals whom he so peculiarly selected + was far from being a respectable one. The proud Brahmin would + not have condescended to take notice of people who, in his + opinion, had degraded themselves so low. But the new teacher, + though born from parents belonging to a high caste, entirely + free from the prejudices inculcated by the narrow spirit of + caste, rose himself to such a high position as to look upon man, + whatever his condition or position might be, as a fellow-being + fully entitled to the benefit of his instructions. This is one + of the most striking features of his preachings, its + universality as regards persons and places. It enables us to + account for the rapid and astonishing diffusion of his doctrines + through so many countries. It constitutes the essential and + capital difference between the two great systems which, in days + long passed by, have contested for the religious supremacy over + the Indian peninsula. + + In the subsequent story of Thoodaudana's illness, we see Buddha + first, then Ananda, Thariputra, and Maukalan relieving the + illustrious patient from his bodily distemper, by invoking, not + the interference of a supreme Being, whom they ignore, but a + certain power or influence connected with former good deeds. A + great, nay, a miraculous, effect is produced by the agency of a + cause which no one but a Buddhist can understand. He has + recourse to _kan_, or the influence resulting from meritorious + actions, as to a mighty agent who has the power to work any + desired result whatever. But how a man can by his own will + control the influence of his good actions, so as to produce a + grand effect in no way short of a miracle, is a thing which can + in no rational way be explained or accounted for. + + [5] The rebuke given by Buddha to the disciple who had, without + permission, made such a display of miraculous power, intended + though it was for the promotion of his glory, was designed to + operate as a salutary check on the pride that might find its way + into the heart of even the most privileged beings. Such a lesson + was deemed of the greatest importance, since we find in the book + of Buddhistic ordinations the sin of boasting of or pretending + to the power of working wonders, &c., ranked among the four + capital sins, excluding a Rahan for ever from the society of the + perfect, and depriving him of his rank and dignity. Buddha, it + seems, wished to reserve to himself alone the honour of working + miracles, or to give the permission, when circumstances should + require it, to some of his disciples to do the same in his name + and for the exaltation of his religion. + + The following story of Purana and his five associates holds a + prominent rank among the events that have rendered Buddha so + celebrated. Gaudama, as it has been already mentioned in some + foregoing notes, was an ascetic who had studied philosophy under + eminent masters who belonged to the Brahminical school. In many + of his opinions, as well as in his mode of life, there was no + perceptible difference between him and the followers of the + Brahmins. The writings of the latter, as well as those of the + earliest Buddhists, exhibit to us the sight of a great number of + schools; where opinions on ontology, morals, and dogmas, &c., at + once various, multifarious, and opposite, were publicly taught. + Then the human mind, left to its own resources, launching forth + into the boundless field of speculative philosophy, ran in every + direction, searching after truth. The mania for arguing, + defining, drawing conclusions, &c., in those days, prevailed to + an extent scarcely to be credited. Many centuries before + Aristotle wrote the rules of dialectics, the Indian philosophers + had carried the art of reasoning to a great degree of nicety and + shrewdness. Witness the disputes and discussions between the + Brahmins and the immediate disciples of Buddha. When our Phra + began to attract about his person crowds of hearers and + disciples; when his opinions on the end of man were understood + and appreciated; when the system of castes received the first + shock from the new but rapidly progressing doctrine; when the + eyes and hearts of the people were slowly at first, and rapidly + afterwards, centred on the new preacher and his disciples; when + at last alms, that had hitherto flowed into the abodes of the + Brahmins, began to enter into new channels and carry their + substantial produce to the door of the followers of the new + sect, then jealousy and other passions began to agitate the + hearts of those who had hitherto retained an undisputed sway + over the credulity of the people. They tried, if credit be given + to the works of Buddhists, every effort and devised every means + in order to oppose the progress of the new doctrine. + + In this instance, Purana and his friends, assisted, as the + Buddhists pretend, by the agency of the evil one, wished to + enter into discussion with Buddha and to surpass him in the + display of miraculous power. The contest was to take place in + the country of Thawattie, in the presence of the king and of a + countless multitude assembled for the purpose. Purana, as usual + with Buddhists in regard to those who held opinions different + from their own, is styled a heretic. Of the opinions of the + enemies of Buddha nothing is said in the present work, but the + writer has had the opportunity of perusing another work where a + slight allusion is made to those six holders of heterodox + doctrines. Their opinions were at variance on the beginning of + this world, the eternity of matter, the existence of the soul, + and a first principle, creator of all that exists. We may infer + therefrom that they were heads or chiefs of various schools, + who, though not agreeing among themselves upon purely + speculative doctrines, united and combined against the common + enemy. A detailed account of the doctrines held by these six + heretics would prove highly interesting, as it would throw some + light on the very obscure and imperfectly known history of + Indian philosophy, in the days when Buddhism assumed the shape + of a religious system. To those who are unacquainted with Indian + literature, the great progress made by Hindus in philosophical + sciences at such an early period may appear somewhat doubtful: + but modern discoveries made all over the Indian peninsula leave + not the least doubt respecting this startling assertion. At a + period when Greece and the other regions of Europe were sunk in + a state of complete ignorance, most of the branches of + literature were successfully cultivated on the banks of the + Ganges. The study of philosophy always supposes a great + intellectual advancement. There would, therefore, be no rashness + whatever in asserting that the present state and condition of + India, as regards literary progress, are much below the mark + that was attained at such a remote period. The epoch of literary + decadence began with the devastating expeditions of the + fanatical Moslem in the tenth century. It is probable, too, that + the religious and sanguinary conflicts between the Buddhists and + Brahminists have had their share in bringing about a similar + result. The latter, having obtained the ascendancy over their + adversaries, became more bigoted. They would no longer tolerate, + to the same extent as before, the liberty of elaborating new + systems, lest some successful philosopher might hereafter + propagate opinions at variance with their own, undermine the + mighty fabric of their creed, and endanger the holding of that + absolute sway and paramount influence they had recovered, after + centuries of a deadly contest with the disciples of the + philosopher of Kapilawot. + + [6] The preachings of Buddha were not to be confined to the + narrow limits of man's abode; they were designed to reach much + further. All beings living in the six seats of Nats were to + share with men the blessings of the publication of the perfect + law. It has been already stated at length, in a foregoing note, + that the condition of Nats is merely a state of pleasure and + enjoyment allotted to those who in former existences had done + some meritorious work. The fortunate inhabitants of these + celestial regions remain in those seats until the sum of their + respective merits being, as it were, exhausted, they return to + the abode of man, the true place of probation for all beings + living therein. The condition of Nat, therefore, is not a + permanent one; the Nat, after his time of reward is over, has to + migrate to our terrestrial abode, begin a new existence, and + endeavour to advance himself in the way of perfection by the + practice of virtue. He is as yet very far from the state of + Neibban. Like man, he has to learn the sublime law, and to + become acquainted with the roads leading to the four high + perfections. Buddha, who came to announce the law of salvation + to all beings, could not but go to the seats of Nats, and teach + them the way to free themselves from the turmoil of never-ending + existence. The preachings of Buddha for three consecutive months + were attended with a success that must have exceeded his most + sanguine expectations. Millions of Nats were converted, and + forthwith obtained the deliverance. Others less advanced in + merits obtained the first, or second, or third state of + perfection. + + During his stay in the other seats of Nats, Buddha gave a + decision on the merits of almsgiving, which is certainly to the + advantage of the yellow-dressed Bickus, but appears somewhat + opposed to all principles of justice and reason. In his opinion + the inward dispositions of him who gives alms has nothing to do + with the merits resulting from such a good work. Those merits + are strictly proportionate to the degree of sanctity or + perfection of him who receives alms. Such doctrine, destructive + of the purest and noblest motives that can actuate man to do + good, is openly upheld now both in theory and practice by the + Buddhist monks. When they receive alms from the admirers of + their saintly mode of life, they never think of returning thanks + to those who so liberally administer to all their material + wants; they content themselves with saying, Thadoo, thadoo; that + is to say, Well, well; and the pious offerer withdraws perfectly + satisfied and happy, relying on the merits he has gained on this + occasion, and longing for another opportunity of doing the like. + The liberality of the laity towards the religious is carried to + an excess scarcely to be credited. Government do not interfere + in the maintenance of the perfect, and yet they are abundantly + supplied with all the necessaries, nay, the luxuries, of life. + They live on the fat of the land. + + That the crowds of people might be better prepared for hearing + the sacred law and obtaining a correct understanding of it, + Buddha charges Maukalan to a regular fast, or at least + abstinence, carried to a considerable degree. A free and copious + use of nourishing substances unfits man for mental exertions, + occasions in him heaviness and supineness, enervates and weakens + the vigour of the intellect, and gives to matter a + preponderating influence over the soul. The advice will hold + good everywhere, but it becomes particularly pressing and + stringent when addressed to an audience of Buddhists, who + require the full force of their mind to be able to understand + the various bearings of a doctrine resting on the most abstruse + principles, the end of which too is to disentangle the soul from + the influence of materiality. Up to this day in Burmah there are + some remnants of the observance of fast during the three months + of Lent, when the law is oftener expounded to and better + observed by religious people. The obligation of fasting during + the days of the quarters of the moon is generally admitted, and + some few observe it, if not always, at least from time to time. + The generality of the Burmese people entirely disregard fasting. + + Curious but interesting is the reply Buddha gave to Thariputra, + who rejoiced exceedingly because men and Nats vied with each + other in paying great honours to him. He unhesitatingly states: + Blessed are all those who rejoice on his account. By this joy we + ought not to understand the transient and momentary affection of + the heart, elicited by some pleasing and agreeable occurrence; + but the kind of joy alluded to is a rational, philosophical, and + religious one, having its origin, first, in a full and perfect + knowledge of Buddha's transcendent excellence, rendering his + person an object of the highest admiration; and, second, in a + lively confidence in his benevolence and goodness towards all + beings, which urge him to labour for their deliverance from all + miseries and their guidance to a state of peace and rest. Such a + joy, diffused over the heart, creates an ardent love for Buddha + and his doctrine; that affection rests, not on Buddha, as a mere + individual, but on him who is the personification of a saviour + of all beings. It implies faith in him and his preachings, as + well as a strong confidence in his power and willingness to + confer the greatest possible benefits. Hence there is no wonder + to hear Buddha declaring all those blessed who on that solemn + occasion rejoiced in him. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + + _Buddha's proceedings in the seat of Tawadeintha -- His + triumphant return to the seat of men, in the city of Thin-ka-tha + -- He is calumniated by the heretics of Thawattie -- Eighth + season spent in the forest of Tesakala -- Subsequent preachings + -- He meets with a bad reception in the Kothambi country -- + Dissension among the disciples -- Reconciliation -- Travels of + Buddha -- Preaching to a Pounha who tilled a field._ + + +While Buddha was in the seat of Tawadeintha all the Nats came from more +than ten thousand worlds to his presence; but the glory that always +encompasses their bodies disappeared, or was completely outshone by that +of Buddha's person. His mother, a daughter of Nats, came from the seat +of Toothita to see her son and hear his instructions. She sat on his +right. Two sons of Nats stood by the right and left of his mother. The +crowd was so great that it covered a surface of eighteen youdzanas. In +that immense assembly two Nats were conspicuous by their particular +demeanour and position. One of them stood so close to Buddha as to touch +almost one of his knees, the other was standing in a respectful position +afar off. Buddha asked the latter what he had done to deserve the place +he occupied. He answered that, during former existences, he had made +abundant alms indeed, but his merits had been comparatively small, +because he had not done those good works to persons eminent for their +sanctity. The same question was put to the other Nat, who said that he +was, in a former existence, living in very narrow circumstances, but +that he had had the good fortune of giving alms, according to his +limited means, to persons who were much advanced in merits. With a voice +that was heard by the crowds on the seat of men, Buddha proclaimed the +immense advantage of giving alms to and supporting the Rahans and those +advanced in perfection. They were, said he, like good seed sown on a +good field, that yields an abundance of good fruits. But alms given to +those who are as yet under the tyrannical yoke of passions are like a +seed deposited in a bad soil; the passions of the receiver of alms +choke, as it were, the growth of merits. At the conclusion, the two Nats +obtained the reward of Thautapan. The crowds on earth had also the +benefit of hearing his instructions. + +Whilst Buddha was in the middle of the Nats, he announced the law of +Abidama to his mother. Having to go about to get his food, Buddha +created a likeness of another Buddha, whom he commissioned to continue +the preaching of the Abidama. As to himself, he went to the mountain of +Himawonta, ate the tender branches of a certain tree, washed his face in +the lake Anawadat, and partook of the food he received from the Northern +Island. Thariputra went thither to render him all necessary services. +When he had eaten his meal, he called Thariputra, and desired him to go +and preach the law of Abidama to five hundred Rahans, who were present +when the display of wonders took place, and were much pleased with it. +In the time of the Buddha Kathaba those five hundred Rahans were bats, +living in a cave much resorted to by Rahans, who were wont to repeat the +Abidama. Those bats contrived to retain a certain number of words, the +meaning whereof they could not understand. When they died, they were +transferred into one of the seats of Nats; and when they became men +anew, they had the good fortune to be born from illustrious parents, in +the country of Thawattie, and when Phra showed his powers, they were +much pleased. They became Rahans under Thariputra, and were the first to +understand perfectly the sublime law of Abidama. + +As to Buddha, he returned to the seat of Tawadeintha and continued the +instructions, where the Buddha of his creation had left them. At the +end of three months' preaching, an innumerable number of Nats knew and +understood the four great principles. As to his mother, she obtained the +perfection of Thautapan. + +The time when Buddha was to return to the seat of men was near at hand. +The crowds, eager to know the precise time when Buddha was to come back +among them, went to Maukalan to ascertain from him the precise day on +which they would be blessed with his presence. "Well," said Maukalan to +the people, "in a very short time I will give you an answer on the +subject of your inquiry." That very instant he plunged to the bottom of +the earth and reappeared, but when he was at the foot of the Mienmo +mountain, he ascended, in the view of the crowd whom he had left, and +soon arrived in the presence of Buddha, to whom he explained the object +of his errand. "My son," answered Buddha, "in what country does your +brother Thariputra spend his season?" "In the city of Thin-ka-tha," +replied Maukalan. "Well," said Buddha, "seven days hence, at the full +moon of Thadin-kioot (October), I will descend near the gate of +Thin-ka-tha city; go and tell the people that those who desire to see me +must go to that country, distant thirty youdzanas from Thawattie. Let no +one take any provision; but by a rigorous abstinence let them dispose +themselves to hear the law that I will preach." Maukalan, having paid +his respects to Buddha, returned to the place where the assembled +multitude anxiously waited for him. He related to them all the +particulars regarding his interview with Buddha, and conveyed to them +the much-wished-for intelligence of his speedy return on earth. + +On the day of the full moon of Thadin-kioot (October), Buddha disposed +himself to go down to the seat of men. He called a prince of Thagias and +directed him to prepare everything for his descent. Complying with his +request, the Thagia prepared three ladders or stairs, one made of +precious stones, occupying the middle; one on the right made of gold; +and a third, made of silver, on the left. The foot of each ladder rested +on the earth, near to the gate of Thin-ka-tha city, and their summits +leaned on the top of the Mienmo mountain. The middle ladder was for +Buddha, the golden one for the Nats, and that of silver for the Brahmas. +Having reached the summit of the steps, Buddha stopped awhile, and +resolved to make a fresh display of his power. He looked upwards, and +all the superior seats of Brahmas were distinctly descried; on his +looking downwards, his eyes could see and plunge into the bottom of the +earth to the lowest hell. The Nats of more than a thousand systems could +see each other. Men could perceive Nats in their fortunate seats, and +Nats saw men in their terrestrial abode. The six glories streamed forth +with an incomparable splendour from Buddha's person, which became +visible to all the crowds. There was not one who did not praise Buddha. +Having the Nats on his right, and the Brahmas on his left, the most +glorious Phra began his triumphant coming down. He was preceded by a +Nat, holding a harp in his hands and playing the most melodious tunes; +another Nat fanned him; a chief of Brahmas held over him a golden +umbrella. Surrounded with that brilliant _cortege_, Buddha descended +near the gate of Thin-ka-tha city, and stopped there for awhile. +Thariputra came forthwith into the presence of Buddha, paid him his +respects at a becoming distance, and said, with a heart overflowing with +joy: "On this day, O most glorious Buddha, all the Nats and men are +showing their love to you." Buddha replied: "Blessed is Thariputra, and +blessed are all those who rejoice on my account. Men and Nats love him +who is acquainted with the sublime law, who has put an end to his +passions, and who has attained to the highest state of contemplation." +At the end of his discourse, innumerable beings understood the four +great principles, and the five hundred Rahans whom Thariputra was +commissioned to instruct reached the state of Arahat. On the spot where +all Buddhas set their feet, when coming from the seat of Tawadeintha, a +dzedi[1] has always been erected. + +Buddha, on leaving Thin-ka-tha, shaped his course towards Wethalie, and +took his abode in the Dzetawon monastery. The fame of the wonders he had +performed increased his reputation, and elicited from the people fresh +tokens of respect and veneration. Alms poured from all quarters into the +monastery; the liberality of the people towards his person and that of +his disciples expanded in a wonderful manner. The heretics, who swarmed +in Wethalie and its neighbourhood, became exceedingly jealous of +Buddha's successes. The loss which they sustained in the donations of +the people added fuel to the inward discontent. They resolved to devise +some means to lower the character of Buddha in the opinion of the +people. After a long deliberation, they fixed on the following plan:--A +certain woman of great beauty, but of a rather doubtful character, was +induced to join them in accusing Gaudama of having violated her. She +contrived to assume the appearance of a person in a state of pregnancy, +and, covering herself with a piece of red cloth, she went about the town +spreading evil reports respecting Buddha's character. She had the +impudence even to go into the Dzetawon monastery, and ask Buddha to +provide a place for her approaching confinement, and likewise +maintenance for herself and the child she was by him pregnant with. Such +an infamous calumny did not, however, move him in the least. Conscious +of his innocence, he lost nothing of his usual composure and serenity. +But by the interference of the Thagia the slander was made manifest. Two +mice bit the strings that kept tied up on the abdomen the apparatus +designed to prop up the deceit, and, on a sudden, the whole fell on the +ground, proclaiming at once the innocence of the sage and smiting his +enemies with confusion. + +Every one present on the occasion gave vent to his just indignation at +such a base attempt on the part of the heretics. But Buddha meekly +replied that what had just happened was a righteous retribution for a +misbehaviour of his own during a former existence. At that time, he was +on a certain day under the influence of liquor, when he chanced to meet +on his way a Pitzegabuddha. Without any reason or provocation, he abused +the holy man with the lowest and coarsest expressions, and went so far +as to tell him that his whole life was but a series of hypocritical +actions. Turning then towards his disciples, he added, with a grave +countenance, that what they had now witnessed was the just punishment +inflicted on him under the influence of the demerit created and +generated by his former evil doing. + +The eighth season was spent in the grove or forest of Tesakala, and when +the rains were over, the most excellent Phra travelled throughout the +country, preaching and teaching the right way to many. Countless +converts entered one of the four ways, and many obtained at once the +deliverance. + +In the town of Santoo-maragiri, he was preaching to the benefactors who +had fed him and his disciples. Among the hearers were two persons, +Nakoulapita and Nakoulamata, husband and wife, belonging to the pounha +race. During a great many successive former existences they had had the +good fortune to be father, mother, uncle, aunt, &c., to Buddha. During +the present existence the feeling of affection towards him with whom +they had been so long and so intimately connected was powerfully +awakened and glowed in their hearts. Under the influence of that +natural, kindly, and tender feeling, they came forward, and prostrating +themselves before Gaudama, said to him: "Dear son, how is it that you +have been away from us for so long a while? We are so happy to see you +after so long an absence." Buddha, remaining indifferent to such a scene +and language, knew at once what were the real wants of that good couple, +and in what manner he could acknowledge the great favours he had during +former existences received at their hands. He preached to them the most +excellent law. They were thoroughly converted. The next morning they had +the happiness to supply their great teacher and his company with the +choicest food. Meanwhile they addressed to him the following request: +"During many existences we both have always been happily united: not a +word of complaint or quarrel has ever passed between us. We pray that in +our coming existences the same love and affection may ever unite us +together." Their request was affectionately granted, and Buddha, in the +presence of a large assembly, pronounced them blessed and happy amongst +all men and women. + +The son of the ruler of the country where these things happened was, to +his great affliction, childless. He invited Buddha to come and partake +of his hospitality in his house. The offer was accepted. Great +preparations were made for the reception of the illustrious visitor. The +prince had some of his own clothes laid on the way that Buddha was to +follow, in the hope that by treading over them he might communicate a +certain virtue, whereby he would have the object of his earnest desire +realised. On his arrival near the entrance of the house, Buddha stopped +and refused to proceed farther. Meanwhile, he beckoned Ananda to remove +the clothes. This was done accordingly, to the prince's deep +disappointment. After the meal, Gaudama explained to him that he and his +wife during a former existence had lived on eggs and had killed many +birds. Their present barrenness was the just punishment of their former +trespassing; but their actual good dispositions having atoned for the +past transgressions, they would be blessed with children. Both were +overjoyed at this news. They believed in Buddha, obtained the state of +Thautapan, and thereby entered into the current of perfection. Their +faith in Buddha's word procured for them so happy a result. + +During all the time that elapsed after the rain, Buddha travelled +through the country, engaged on his usual benevolent errand, and +converting many among men and Nats. In the country of Garurit, in a +village of pounhas called Magoulia, the head man, one of the richest in +the place, had a daughter whose beauty equalled that of a daughter of +Nats. She had been in vain asked in marriage by princes, nobles, and +pounhas. The proud damsel had rejected every offer. On the day that her +father saw Gaudama, he was struck with his manly beauty and meek +deportment. He said within himself: "This man shall be a proper match +for my daughter." On his return home he communicated his views to his +wife. On the following day, the daughter having put on her choicest +dress and richest apparels, they all three went with a large retinue to +the Dzetawon monastery. Admitted to the presence of Buddha, the father +asked for his daughter the favour of being allowed to attend on him. +Without returning a word of reply, or giving the least sign of +acceptance or refusal, Buddha rose up and withdrew to a small distance, +leaving behind him on the floor the print of one of his feet. The +pounha's wife, well skilled in the science of interpreting wonderful +signs, saw at a glance that the marks on the print indicated a man no +longer under the control of passions, but a sage emancipated from the +thraldom of concupiscence. She communicated her views to her husband, +who had the impudence to go to Buddha's presence and renew the same +offer. Buddha meekly replied: "Pounha, I neither accept nor decline your +offer; in your turn, listen to what I have to say." He then went on to +relate how he had left the world, resisted Manh's temptation, lived in +solitude for six years, and freed himself from the net of passions. He +concluded by stating that, having become a Buddha, he had for ever +conquered all passions. At the conclusion of the instruction, both +father and mother became established in the state of Thautapan. The +damsel was highly offended at the refusal she experienced, and retained +a strong feeling of hatred towards him who had declined her proffered +favours. Her father took her into the Kothambi country, where she was +offered to the ruler, who, smitten with her charms, elevated her to the +rank of first queen. + +In the country of Kothambi, there lived three rich men. These three men +fed during the rainy season every year five hundred hermits, who came +from the Himalaya range for the purpose of obtaining their maintenance. +These charitable laymen went over to Wethalie for the purpose of trade. +There they met Buddha, and earnestly pressed him to come to their +country and preach the law. The invitation was accepted. They returned +home, and built for the accommodation of the illustrious visitor each of +them one monastery. When all was ready, Buddha went to Kothambi, +attended by five hundred disciples. He spent there the ninth season. +During his stay he dwelt by turns in each of the three monasteries, and +was abundantly supported by the rich man in whose monastery he took his +abode. + +In the country of Kothambi there were as yet few disciples or believers +in Buddha; but the number of holders of false doctrines was exceedingly +great. Secretly supported by the first queen, and actuated by jealousy +against the new-comer, they reviled him and his disciples in every +possible way, and did their utmost to destroy in public opinion his +rising fame. Whenever they met Buddha's disciples, they abused them with +the coarsest language. Unable to bear any longer so many insults, +Ananda, in the name of his brethren, went to Buddha, and asked him to +remove to some other place, where they would receive a becoming +treatment. "But," said Buddha, "if we be ill-treated in the new place we +go to, what is to be done?" "We shall proceed to some other place," +replied Ananda. "But," retorted Buddha, "if in that new place we be +likewise reviled, what then?" "We shall," replied Ananda, "remove to +some other place." Buddha remained silent for awhile, and, casting a +gentle glance on Ananda, said to him: "A little patience will save us +the trouble of so many travels, and certainly procure for us here what +we may perhaps vainly look for anywhere else. By patience and endurance +the wise man conquers all his enemies. Behold the war-elephant; he +plunges into the thickest of the raging conflict, regardless of the +darts and arrows flying in every direction, and carries all before him. +I, too, the most excellent Buddha, shall certainly stay here, diligently +preach the most excellent law, and perseveringly labour to disentangle +men from the net of passions. In no way shall I care for the abuses they +may pour on me and my disciples." + +Not long after this a trifling accident kindled the fire of dissension +among the members of the assembly. The subject was, as usual, of a +trifling nature. It was concerning a point of discipline of scarcely any +importance, infringed unintentionally by a Rahan. He was accused by one +of his brethren of having committed a sin. But he replied that, having +done an act in which his will had not participated, he did not consider +himself guilty. Each disputant attracted to his party some religious who +supported his view of the case. The Kothambi Rahans seem to have been +the cause of the disunion which prevailed in the community, and soon, +like a devouring flame, extended to the female portion of the assembly. +In vain Gaudama interfered, and exhorted the two parties to patience, +union, and charity. In his presence the parties were silent, but in his +absence the quarrel grew worse. At last his entreaties were unheeded, +and discord continued to rend asunder the bond of unity. Disgusted with +such a state of things, Buddha preached to the most distinguished +members of the assembly the blessings of peace and concord. Such men as +Baddia, Kimila, and Anourouddha, treasured up in their heart the +instructions of their great master. But others continued the dispute. +Meanwhile he resolved to separate himself for a time from all company, +and to go to a lonely spot to enjoy the happiness of peace and +meditation. He shaped his course towards the village of Palelayaka, +where he received his food, and went into a grove of sala-trees, to fix +his residence at the foot of one of those trees. The villagers, hearing +of his intention, hastened to the spot, and built a hermit's hut for his +use, and promised to supply him daily with his food. + +It was in this place that, delighting in the contemplation of unclouded +truth, Gaudama spent the tenth season alone. The rich men of the +Kothambi country, hearing that Buddha had departed because of the +dissension that took place among the Rahans, became indignant. They +openly declared their fixed intent of refusing to give anything for the +maintenance of the Rahans, until they agreed among themselves, and +became reconciled with their teacher. The timely threat had the desired +effect. The disputants felt the unpleasant seriousness of their uneasy +position. They could hold on no longer. The Rahans came to an agreement +among themselves, and promised that after the season they would go to +Buddha and solicit his pardon. In the forest of Paleliaka there lived a +certain elephant, much advanced in merits, which went to Buddha, and, +during three months, ministered to all his wants, as a most affectionate +and devoted disciple would do towards a beloved master. + +The three months of Lent being completed, the rich man Anatapein made +earnest inquiries with Ananda, respecting the place Buddha had withdrawn +to, and charged him to invite the great preacher to come back to +Thawattie, and live as usual in the Dzetawon monastery. Complying with +the pious wishes of the rich man, Ananda took with himself five hundred +Rahans, and went to the solitude of Paleliaka. He was likewise followed +by the five hundred refractory Rahans of Kothambi, who had come to +Wethalie. The ruler of the country and Anatapein had refused at first to +receive them. But the prohibition had been removed on account of their +repentance. He approached alone the place where Buddha was living. After +the usual prostrations, Gaudama inquired whether he had come alone. He +replied that there were with him many of his faithful disciples and the +Kothambi Rahans. The latter came with the express purpose of asking his +pardon, and a firm resolution to yield henceforward a perfect obedience +to all his commands. Buddha desired them to appear in his presence. They +came, were there well received, and their misbehaviour was forgiven. +Gaudama explained to them the great advantage of shunning bad company +and of living in retirement. The hearers were fully converted and +established in the state of Thautapan. Buddha, on his return to +Wethalie, continued preaching in every direction, and led to the +deliverance a great number of men, Nats, and Brahmas. The stay in the +Dzetawon monastery was not very long. Buddha went into the Magatha +country, to a pounha village, named Nala. Not far from that village +there is the Deckinagiri, or southern mountain, with a monastery. In +that place Buddha spent the eleventh season.[2] His supporters were the +pounhas of the village. The chief occupation of those men was the +tillage of the fields. Gaudama took a particular pleasure during his +daily walks in conversing with them, when he met them engaged in their +daily labours. + +One day Buddha went into the fields, where he met a pounha, with whom he +began to converse, in the intention of ultimately preaching to him the +holy law. He spoke at first on the subject of his daily labour, his +bullocks, his plough, the seed, and the harvest, which supplied the +pounha and his family with their daily food during the year. He added: +"I, too, am a labourer, provided with the seed and all the implements +necessary for carrying on tillage." The pounha, surprised at what he +heard, asked Buddha in what place he had left his bullocks, the seed, +the plough, &c. The latter coolly replied: "All these things are with me +at present. Hearken, O pounha, to what I am about to state. The seed is +that fervent desire, that benevolent disposition, which prompted me at +the foot of the Buddha Deipinkara to ask for the Buddhaship: it is the +science which I have gathered under the tree Bodi. The rain water is +that uninterrupted series of good works performed by me, until I have +become a Buddha. They have been as the means of watering the good seed +which was in me. The knowledge, or science, and wisdom are as the yoke, +as well as the plough-shaft. The heart, or the knowing principle which +is in me, represents the reins that serve to guide the bullocks. The +teeth of the plough represent the diligence that must be used in +attending to the eradicating of the principle of demerits and of bad +works. The plough-handle represents the guiding principle of the law, +which enables me to remove all that is bad, and promote what is good. +The food which you, O pounha, derive from your exertions, represents the +pure relish which is tasted by him who is bent on avoiding evil and +doing good. When you make use of the plough, you cut or uproot all bad +weeds. So it is with him who is penetrated with the full meaning of the +four great truths; he cuts and uproots from himself the wicked +inclinations and low propensities that are in him. When the labour of +the field is over, you unyoke your bullocks and leave them to go +whithersoever they please; so it is with the wise man. By application to +invigorating the principle of good that leads to perfection, he lets go +the opposite principle which gives rise to all imperfections. The +bullocks have to work hard to complete the work of tillage. So the sage +has to struggle hard, to till perfectly and cultivate thoroughly the +soil of his own being, and reach the happy state of Neibban. The +husbandman who labours so much for bringing his field into a position to +receive the seed, and in every way to favour its growth, is imitated by +the true sage who endeavours to free himself from the miseries attending +existence, to advance in the way of merits by the practice of good +works, and who thirsts after the happy condition of the perfect. He who +works in the field is sometimes disappointed, and feels occasionally the +pangs of hunger. He who works in the field of wisdom is exempt from all +miseries and afflictions. He eats the fruit of his labour. He is fully +satiated when he beholds Neibban. It is in this manner, O pounha, that I +am a true husbandman, and am always provided with all the implements +necessary for the tillage of man's soul." The pounha, delighted with +such doctrine, became a convert, and professed his belief in Buddha, the +law, and the assembly. Subsequently he applied for admittance into the +assembly, and by energetic efforts in the arduous work of meditation, he +became at last a Rahanda. + +When the rains were over, Buddha travelled through the country, +preaching the most excellent law, with the happiest results. He went to +the town of Satiabia, in the Kosala country. There he received from a +pounha of Waritzaba an invitation to go to that place. The invitation +was graciously accepted. In that town he spent the twelfth season. A +great many pounhas were enlightened and converted by professing their +firm adherence to the three precious things. The vile Manh Nat did his +utmost to thwart the beneficial results of Buddha's preachings. A great +dearth prevailing in the country, he did all that he could to starve the +most excellent Buddha and all his followers. But he was frustrated in +his iniquitous design by the charity of five hundred horse merchants, +who had come from Outharapata, and were then staying in Waritzaba. + +Buddha, leaving this country, shaped his course through the great +Mantala country; he travelled by the shortest route, a distance of 500 +youdzanas. He started on the day after the full moon of Tabodway, and +spent nearly five months in this voyage. He reached the banks of the +Ganges at Gayagati, where he crossed the mighty stream and went to +Benares. He had not been long in that city, when he recrossed the Ganges +and went to Wethalie, dwelling in the Gootagarathala monastery. Thence +he went into Thawattie, preaching through all the places he visited. +When he was in the Dzetawon monastery, he delivered the Maha Rahula +instruction for the benefit of his son Rahula, who then was eighteen +years old. + + +FOOTNOTES + + [1] The religious edifices that are to be met with in all parts + of Burmah deserve a particular notice. They are called dzedis in + all the Buddhist writings of the Burmese, but the people + generally speak of them under the appellation of Payas or Phras, + which, in this instance, is merely a title of honour of a + religious character. + + Dzedis, in the earliest days of Buddhism, were sacred tumuli + raised upon a shrine, wherein relics of Buddha had been + deposited. These structures were as so many lofty witnesses, + bearing evidence to the presence of sacred and precious objects, + intended to revive in the memory of the faithful the remembrance + of Buddha, and foster in their hearts tender feelings of + devotion and a glowing fervour for his religion. + + From the perusal of this legend, it will appear that dzedis were + likewise erected on the tombs of individuals who, during their + lifetime, had obtained great distinction by their virtues and + spiritual attainments among the members of the assembly. Buddha + himself ordered that a monument should be built over the shrine + containing the relics of the two great disciples, Thariputra and + Maukalan. In Burmah, no dzedis of great dimensions and + proportions have ever been erected on the ashes of distinguished + Phongyies. In some parts, however, particularly in the upper + country, there may be seen here and there some small dzedis, a + few feet high, erected on the spot where have been deposited the + remains of some saintly personages. These monuments are little + noticed by the people, though, on certain occasions, a few + offerings of flowers, tapers, &c., are made around and in front + of them. + + Similar kinds of religious edifices have been built sometimes + also to become a receptacle of the Pitagat, or collection of the + holy scriptures. One of the finest temples of Ceylon was devoted + to that purpose. There was also one in the ancient city of Ava, + but I am not aware that there is any of this kind at Amarapoora. + + Finally, dzedis have been erected for the sole purpose of + harbouring statues of Gaudama; but there is every reason to + believe that this practice gained ground in subsequent ages. + When a fervent Buddhist, impelled by the desire of satisfying + the cravings of his piety and devotion, wished to build a + religious monument, and could not procure relics, he then + remained contented by supplying the deficiency with images of + Buddha representing that eminent personage, in attitudes of body + that were to remind Buddhists of some of the most striking + actions of his life. In many instances, dzedis have been built + up, not even for the sake of sheltering statues, but for the + pious purpose of reminding the people of the holy relics of + Buddha, and, as they used to say, for kindling in the soul a + tender feeling of affectionate reverence for the person of + Buddha and his religion. If what is put forward as a plea for + building pagodas be founded on conviction and truth, we must + conclude that the inhabitants of the valley of the Irrawaddy are + most devotedly religious, as the mania for building dzedis has + been, and even now is, carried to such a pitch as to render + almost fabulous the number of religious buildings to be seen on + an extent of above seven hundred miles as far as Bhamo. + + As Buddhism was imported from India into Eastern Asia there is + no doubt that the style of architecture adopted in the erection + of religious edifices came from the same quarter. To the native + genius of the Burmese we may allow the merit of ornamental + architecture for the great monasteries, and a few details of the + exterior decorations of the religious monuments; but no one will + take offence at refusing to the tribes that occupy the basin of + the Irrawaddy the merit of originating the plan of such + monuments as those to be seen in some parts of the country. It + is much to their credit that they have been able to raise such + mighty fabrics with the imperfect knowledge they possess and the + very limited means at their disposal. The resemblance that + exists between the much-defaced Buddhist monuments yet to be met + with in some parts of India and at Java, and those now studding + the banks of the Irrawaddy, leaves no doubt respecting the + origin of the shape and form of such monuments. + + At first sight, the traveller in Burmah believes that there is a + great variety in the shape and architecture of pagodas. He is + easily led astray by many fantastical ornaments that have been + added by inexperienced natives to religious monuments. After, + however, a close examination of those edifices, it seems that + they can be arranged into three distinct classes, to which those + presenting minor differences may be referred. The first class + comprises those which have a cone-like appearance, though much + enlarged in the direction of the base. These are without niches, + or rather ought to be without niches, as the small ones to be + seen added to those monuments indicate that they are no + essential appendage of the building, but rather the fanciful and + tasteless work of some devotees. The pagodas of Rangoon, Pegu + and Prome offer the finest specimens of this order of edifices. + The second class includes those of a dome-like shape. They are + not common in Burmah. The finest and grandest specimen is that + of the Kaong-hmoo-dau, or great meritorious work, situated west + of the ancient city of Tsagain. In the third class we may place + all the pagodas that approximate to the temple form; that is to + say, all those that offer the shape of a more or less + considerable rectangle, with a large hall in the centre and + several galleries running throughout. Upon this rectangle a + conical structure is raised, ending as usual with the tee or + umbrella. The most remarkable and perfect specimens of this kind + are to be seen at Pagan, which may be aptly styled the City of + Pagodas. + + The cone-shaped pagoda invariably rests on a quadrangular basis + a few feet high. The body of the cone in its lower part is an + hexagon or octagon, broad at first, then gradually and regularly + decreasing to two-thirds of its height. Upon it rises the + regular cone, which ends in a point covered with the gilt + umbrella. + + The architectural ornaments of such structures are circular, + bold and round lines or mouldings; above this, to the place + where the cone begins, are sculptures, representing leaves + shooting from the middle part, one half upwards and the other + half downwards. That part is often divested of such ornaments, + as is the case with the Shoaydagon. On the sides of the cone are + horizontal lines grouped together; each group is separated by a + considerable distance, then comes a sculptured foliage, + different from the one already mentioned, but disposed in a like + manner. In the middle of the four sides of the base, + particularly in the one facing the East, the Burmese have + introduced the practice of making small niches for receiving the + statues representing Buddha in a cross-legged position. A + portico leads to them. On the four angles of the base they + likewise place griffins or sometimes fantastic figures of + monsters. Small dzedis are often disposed on the lower parts of + the hexagon or octagon. This kind of pagoda being naturally + destitute of all ornaments, and standing over a tomb or a + shrine, as a pillar that has gradually assumed the shape above + described, is a very ancient one, and probably coeval with the + earliest Buddhist religious monuments. + + The second class of religious edifices is that of those that + exhibit a dome-like appearance. They are rather uncommon in + Burmah. They rest on a square basis. The lower part is adorned + with a few mouldings, but the greatest part offers a perfectly + even superficies. The umbrella that is placed on them partakes + somewhat of the appearance of the monument it is destined to + crown. It considerably expands in the horizontal direction, and + has a very ungraceful appearance. The Kaong-hmoo-dau in the + neighbourhood of Tsagain rests on a basis about 18 or 20 feet + high; the dome, according to an inscription, is 153 feet high, + the diameter, at the lowest part, is nearly 200 feet. The whole + was formerly gilt. The four sides of the square are lined with + small niches, each tenanted by a small statue of Gaudama. + Separated from the square by an open and well-paved gallery that + runs all round the edifice, are disposed in a row eight hundred + and two small pillars of sandstone, about 6 feet high, with + their upper part perforated, so as to afford room sufficient to + receive a lamp on festival days. Splendid must be the effect + produced during a dark night by so many lamps, pouring a flood + of light that illuminates on all sides the massive edifice. + Whether the monument was built about three hundred years ago, as + stated to the writer by one of the guardians, or, as it is most + probable, only repaired and adorned at that time, certain it is + that this kind of religious edifice is very ancient, and very + likely not inferior in antiquity to those above referred to. + Another of a similar form, but of much smaller dimensions, is to + be seen at Bhamo, not far from the eastern gate. + + The third class of pagodas comprises all those that are + generally of a square form, not made of a solid masonry, but + with openings or doors, a room, galleries, &c., for receiving + statues of Gaudama. They are all surmounted with the usual + conical structure, which is, it seems, the essential appendage + to all dzedis. These edifices, in my opinion, are not to be + considered as tumuli or topes, but rather as places of worship, + and sanctuaries for the reception of the statues of Gaudama. The + monuments are, I suspect, of a comparative modern origin; they + have not the plainness and simplicity of the tumuli which agree + so well with the simplicity of the religious form of worship of + primitive Buddhism. They are not made to answer the purpose for + which dzedis were primitively raised. They must have been + erected at times when Buddhist worship, emerging from its + primeval sternness of form, assumed proportions and developments + congenial to the taste and wants of large religious communities. + This class of temples offers a great variety of forms as to the + size, dimensions, and details of architecture. But they may be + all brought to this general outline. From the square body of the + temple diverge, in the direction of the four points of the + compass, porticoes; the one facing the east is always the + largest and best adorned; sometimes there is but one portico, + that of the east, and there are only doors in the middle of the + three other sides. From these porticoes the galleries converge + towards the centre of the temple, where are statues. In the + large and magnificent pagodas of Pagan, galleries with vaults in + the pointed style run all round the building. Some of those + stupendous structures have two stories, and it is only on the + second that the conical part rests, which is the essential + complement of every religious building. On one of the + middle-sized pagodas rises, instead of a cone, an obelisk, with + ornaments that appear to resemble hieroglyphic figures. Some of + those obelisks swell considerably towards the middle of their + height. Great was the surprise and astonishment of the writer, + when he observed in the same place, among the prodigious number + of pagodas, in a more or less advanced state of decay, one, not + considerable by its dimensions, nor in a much-ruined condition, + that exhibited the solitary instance of a regular pyramid. + + [2] The few particulars that have been gathered respecting the + mode that Buddha followed in disseminating his doctrines, + exhibit him in the light of a zealous and indefatigable + preacher. We see him passing from one place to another with the + sole purpose of instructing the ignorant and pointing out to + them the way leading to the deliverance. Bebar and Oude appear + to have been the seat of his labours, and the scene on which he + acted in behalf of all, without any distinction of condition, + caste, or sex. Individuals in the humblest walks of life, men + engaged in wicked practices, women of an abandoned character, + were all, to an equal degree, the object of his tender + solicitude. They were all summoned to come to his feet and + partake in the blessings that he had in store for them. Gaudama + was to an eminent degree an earnest and fervent propagandist. + This is a striking feature in his character, which distinguishes + him not only from all his contemporaries, but also from all the + philosophers that have appeared throughout the Indian peninsula. + All these sages aimed at becoming the heads of schools, but none + of them thought of promulgating a code of morals intended for + the whole human race. Gaudama has the honour of being the first + who, with enlarged views, looked upon his fellow-men as equally + entitled to the benefit of his instructions. His love of all men + prompted him to undergo all sorts of fatigue, to procure for + them what he imagined to be a great boon. In making this + statement we have no intention to pass an opinion on the + doctrines of the founder of Buddhism; we merely bring forward to + the notice of the reader a peculiar characteristic of that sage, + which, in our humble opinion, helps to account for the + extraordinary spread of Buddhism from the banks of the Oxus to + the Japanese archipelago. The tenets of that creed have become + popular, because they were intended for all. False though they + be, particularly in what has a reference to dogmas, they were + accepted by the masses, because there were no other proffered to + them. The disciples of Gaudama must have been well received in + the various places they went to, for they showed a disposition + of mind quite unknown in those days, viz., a lively interest in + the welfare of all. This zeal, which appeared so conspicuously + in Gaudama and during the first ages of Buddhism, has become all + but totally extinct. There is no desire on the part of those who + in our days follow that creed to propagate its tenets among + other nations or tribes. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + + _Voyage to Tsalia -- Instructions to Meggia -- Raoula is made a + professed religious -- Manahan's questions to Buddha -- + Misbehaviour of Thouppabuda -- Questions proposed by Nats in the + Dzetawon monastery -- Conversion of a Biloo -- Episode of + Thirima at Radzagio -- Attention paid to a poor pounha and to a + weaver's daughter on account of their faith -- In the twentieth + season, appointment of Ananda to the stewardship -- Conversion + of a famous robber._ + + +After a rather short stay in Thawattie, Buddha went to the town of +Tsalia. The inhabitants built for him a monastery on a hill not far from +the town, and liberally supplied him with all that he wanted. Pleased +with the good reception the people gave him, Gaudama spent on that spot +the thirteenth season. He went to receive his food in the village of +Dzantoo. Thence travelling through the country, he reached the banks of +the river Kimikila and enjoyed himself in a beautiful grove of +mango-trees. The disciple Meggia, being too much taken up with the +beauty of the place, eagerly wished to remain here for some time. As a +punishment for such an inordinate attachment to a particular spot, he +who had renounced the world and the gratification of passions, felt on a +sudden a strange change pass over him. A flood of concupiscence +inundated his soul. Buddha, who saw what was taking place in Meggia, +gave him an instruction on contempt for the things of this world, and +entirely cured him of his great spiritual distemper. + +Thence he proceeded to Thawattie into the Dzetawon monastery, where he +spent the fourteenth season. The great disciple Thariputra, with five +hundred religious, was spending the season in a neighbouring village. +The people were so much pleased with him and his company, that they +offered to each of them a piece of yellow silk. Some religious, jealous +of the great disciple, came to Buddha and accused him of covetousness. +Buddha fully justified his great companion and commended the liberality +of the donors, who had thus an opportunity of gratifying their +liberality and gaining merits. + +The Thamane Raoula was then twenty years old. Having reached the +canonical age, he was elevated to the dignity of Patzin. The young +religious could scarcely defend himself from a certain feeling of vanity +on account of his father's dignity and his own personal mien and +bearing, which he was very fond of admiring. Buddha was intimately +acquainted with what was going on in Raoula's soul. He preached to him +the contempt of self and of all varieties of form. The instruction was +so impressive that it led the young hearer to the state of Rahanda. On a +certain night when Raoula was sleeping near the door of Gaudama's +private apartment, Manh Nat, wishing to frighten the young Rahanda, +created the likeness of an elephant, which, keeping his trunk over his +head, suddenly made a frightful noise. Buddha, who was inside, saw +clearly that this was only a temptation of the vile Manh. He said to +him, "O wretched one, are you not aware that fear is no longer to be +found in him who has become a Rahanda?" Manh, being discovered, vanished +away, covered with shame and confusion at the abortiveness of his +malicious attempt. + +In the same year, Buddha went to Kapilawot, which is in the Thekka +country, and took up his residence in the Nigranda monastery, situated +close to the banks of the river Rohani. At that place he spent the +fifteenth season. On a certain day, his cousin Mahanan, the son of +Thoodaudana, came to the monastery, and having paid his respects to his +illustrious relative, took the liberty to propose to him the four +following questions:--1. In what consists the fulfilment of the +religious duties? 2. What is meant by the religious disposition? 3. What +is the real renouncing? 4. What is the true knowledge? + +Buddha replied in the following manner: "The fulfilment of the religious +duties consists in observing carefully the five precepts obligatory on +all men. The religious disposition is but a loving inclination and +affection for all that refers to Buddha and the law that he has +published. He who possesses it experiences a continual longing for the +acquisition of merits. The renouncing is that disposition a man is +habitually in when he finds his pleasure in parting with his riches for +the purpose of relieving the needy and bestowing alms on the members of +the assembly. Finally, wisdom consists in making one's self perfectly +acquainted with what can procure merits for the present and the future; +under its influence man acts up to that knowledge, and also attends with +the utmost diligence to what may put an end to the law of miseries." + +Even among his nearest relatives, Buddha was doomed to meet with the +bitterest enemies. Thouppabuda, who was at once his uncle and his +father-in-law, bore to him a deadly hatred, and secretly harboured in +his heart a sentiment of revenge, for two principal reasons, because his +daughter Yathaudara had been abandoned by Gaudama, when he left his +palace and began the life of an ascetic; and also for having admitted +his own son Dewadat among the members of the assembly. Having been +informed that on the following day Buddha would direct his steps towards +a certain quarter of the town to beg his food, Thouppabuda partook +largely of intoxicating liquor, to nerve himself for the execution of +the design he had in his mind, and went out in the direction in which +Gaudama was expected to come. As soon as he saw him drawing near, he +planted himself in the middle of the road, barring the passage, and +loading his great relative with abuses. Buddha stopped awhile without +showing the least sign of emotion. Then turning to Ananda, he said, +"Great is the crime of my uncle; seven days hence he shall be swallowed +up alive by the earth at the foot of the great staircase of his palace." +On this fearful prediction being reported to Thouppabuda, he laughed and +stated that he would stay during eight days in the upper story of his +palace, and belie his nephew's prediction. Despite the precautions that +he took, the fatal prediction was literally fulfilled. The unfortunate +unrepenting prince saw the earth burst open under his feet, and he was +precipitated to the very bottom of the Awidzi hell. Buddha took +advantage of the awful punishment that had befallen a prince of his +family to exhort Mahanan to seek a firm asylum in the three precious +things, to bear a sincere love and an affectionate fondness to all that +related to the law and its practices. + +Up to the present period of his life, Buddha had reserved to himself the +right of preaching the law to and extolling the merits of those who had +brought him his food, after having partaken of their liberal donation. +This instruction may be properly called the sermon of thanksgiving. It +is called Anou-mau-dana. Now he allowed his disciples to do the like, +and repay the generosity of their benefactors by distributing unto them +the knowledge of truth. + +At that time Buddha preached the four laws of A-sa-wan, or the four +bands that retain a being in the vortex of existences. From Kapilawot +Buddha returned to Thawattie in the Dzetawon monastery. At that time a +Nat had proposed four questions to his companions which they had not +been able to answer. They were subsequently communicated to all the +denizens of the six seats of Nats, but no one had been able to solve the +difficulty. Not knowing what to do, they agreed to refer the particulars +to the most excellent Buddha, then in the Dzetawon monastery. A +deputation was forthwith sent to him with the view of proposing to him +the puzzle, and entreating him to condescend to give the much-desired +solution. The members of the deputation having duly paid their +respects, said to him, "O most excellent Phra, which is the best thing +to be bestowed in alms? Which is the most savoury and relishing of all +things? Which is the most pleasurable? Which is the best and the fittest +thing to put an end to passions?" To these four questions Buddha +answered by one word--"The law." Addressing himself both to the Nats and +to his assembled disciples, he added, "The giving of alms, though good +in itself, cannot introduce a being into the path that leads to the +deliverance. The law alone can afford such a benefit. The preaching of +the law, and the exertions in communicating its knowledge to others, are +therefore the most excellent alms. All that in this world confers +pleasure to the senses is but a means to plunge man into the vortex of +existences, and thereby into all miseries. On the contrary, the hearing +of the law rejoices the heart to such an extent as often to open a +spring of joyful tears; it destroys concupiscence, and leads gradually +out of the whirlpool of existences. It establishes man in the state of +Arahat, which is the end of all passions. The law, therefore, is the +most savoury, the most pleasing thing, leading beings to the cessation +of all miseries. You, my beloved disciples, exert yourselves in making +known by your preaching the said law to all beings. This is the most +excellent alms that you can bestow on the beings that inhabit the three +different states of men, Nats, and Brahmas." + +Buddha soon left Thawattie and went to Alawee. A Biloo was in the habit +of eating every day some children of that place. Owing to the ravenous +and horrible appetite of the monster, all the children had been eaten +up; there remained only the child of the king, who was on the following +day to be given over to him. Buddha reviewed, as usual, on a certain +morning the condition of all beings. He saw the sad position of the king +of Alawee and of his son. He resolved to proffer assistance to both, and +also to convert the Biloo. He arrived in the country of Alawee, where he +was received with every mark of respect. He forthwith went into the +forest where the monster lived. At first he met with a most determined +and violent opposition. But, opposing to his enraged antagonist +meekness, patience, and kindness, Buddha gradually softened that +terrible nature. Concealing affectedly the change which was taking place +in him, almost against his perverse inclination, the Biloo said to +Buddha, "I have put certain questions to many famous ascetics, but they +have not been able to answer them. On seeing their utter incapacity, I +have seized them, torn their bodies in pieces, and flung their quivering +limbs into the Ganges. Such shall be your fate, O Gaudama, if your +science fails you on this occasion. By what means can a man get out of +the stream or current of passions? How can he cross over the sea of +existences? How can he free himself from the evil influence? How shall +he be able to purify himself from the smallest stain of concupiscence?" +Buddha replied: "Listen, O Biloo, to my words; my answer shall fully +satisfy you. By faith in and affection for the three precious things, +man escapes from the current of passions. He who applies himself with a +diligent earnestness to the study of the law of merits passes over the +sea of existences. He who strives to practise the works that procure +merits frees himself from evil influence, and from the attending +miseries. Finally, the knowledge of the four meggas or ways to +perfection procures perfect exemption from the least remnant of +concupiscence." The Biloo, delighted with what he had heard, believed in +Buddha, and soon was firmly established in the state of Thautapan. On +that spot, where so glorious and unexpected a conversion had taken +place, a monastery was erected. Buddha spent herein the sixteenth +season. As usual, myriads of Nats and men who had heard his preachings +obtained the deliverance. + +From Alawee Buddha went to Radzagio, and spent the seventeenth season in +the Weloowon monastery. During that season a famous courtesan, named +Thirima, sister of the celebrated physician Dzewaka, renowned all over +the country for her wit and the incomparable charms of her person, +wished to show her liberality to the disciples of Buddha. Every day a +certain number of them went to her dwelling to receive, along with their +food, abundant alms. One of the pious mendicants, in an unguarded +moment, moved by an unholy curiosity, looked at her, and was instantly +smitten by her charms. The mortal wound was widened and deepened by a +fortuitous occurrence. On a certain day Thirima fell sick. But she did +not relax in her daily work of charity. Weak though she was, and in her +_negligee_, she insisted on the mendicants being introduced into her +room, that she might pay her respects to them. The unfortunate lover was +among the company. Her incomparable charms were heightened by her plain +dress and drooping attitude. The poor lover went back with his brethren +to the monastery. The arrow had penetrated to the core of the heart. He +refused to take any food, and during some days completely estranged +himself from the society of his brethren. While the intestine war raged +in his bosom, Thirima died. Buddha, desirous to cure the moral distemper +of the poor religious, invited King Pimpasara to be present when he +should go with his disciples to see the remains of Thirima. On the +fourth day after Thirima's death he went to her house with his +disciples. There her body was laid before them, with a livid appearance, +and all swollen. Countless worms already issuing out through the +apertures, rendered the sight loathsome, whilst a horrible stench almost +forbade a standing close to it. Buddha coolly asked the king, "What is +that object which is stretched before us?" "Thirima's body," replied the +king. "When she was alive," retorted Buddha, "people paid a thousand +pieces of silver to enjoy her for a day. Would any one take her now for +half that sum?" "No," replied the king; "in all my kingdom there is not +one man who would offer the smallest sum to have her remains; nay, no +one could be found who would be willing to carry her to any distance +unless compelled to do so." Buddha, addressing the assembly, said, +"Behold all that remains of Thirima, who was so famous for her personal +attractions! What has become of that form which deceived and enslaved so +many? All is subjected to mutability; there is nothing real in this +world." On hearing the instruction, eighty-two thousand persons obtained +the knowledge of the four truths. The Rahan who, because of his passion, +would not eat his food, was entirely cured of his moral distemper, and +firmly established in the state of Thautapan. All this happened whilst +Buddha spent his seventeenth season in the bamboo-grove monastery. + +When the season was over, he went, as usual, to preach in every +direction, and returned to Thawattie, to the Dzetawon monastery. His +stay in that place was not long. He undertook another voyage to Alawee. +He was received with the greatest demonstrations of joy by the people, +who gladly ministered to all his wants. On a certain day, when he was to +receive large offerings from the people and preach to them, it happened +on that occasion that a poor pounha, who was very desirous to hear his +instructions, was informed at an early hour of that very day that one of +his cows had gone astray from the herd and could not be found. Hereupon +he felt greatly aggrieved. He was afraid to let go the golden +opportunity to hear the instruction. However, he trusted that by making +the utmost diligence he would be back in time. He ran in all haste until +he found the strayed animal and brought it back. It was nearly midday +when he returned to the town. Though pressed with the pangs of hunger +and overwhelmed with fatigue, he went straight forward to the place +where the congregation was assembled. The offerings had been brought a +long while ago; the people out of respect stood motionless, with their +hands joined, in the presence of Buddha, who, contrary to the general +expectation, remained perfectly silent. With his supernatural vision he +had seen the perfect dispositions of the poor pounha. He would have him +to share in the blessing of his instruction. As soon as the pounha had +taken his place among the hearers, Buddha, casting a benevolent glance +towards him, beckoned him to come near his person. Meantime, he ordered +some of his disciples to bring the poor man some food, because he was +very hungry; and he would not condescend to begin the instruction till +the man had been relieved from the pangs of hunger by a good meal. When +the preaching was over, several Rahans ridiculed the attention paid by +their master to a common man. Buddha, knowing their innermost thoughts, +spoke to them by way of an instructive rebuke: "Beloved sons, you seem +to be surprised at my behaviour towards that poor pounha. But I had +perceived at once the super-excellent dispositions of that man, his +craving for the holy law, and his lively and strong faith in me, which +prompted him to lay no stress on hunger, nor on fatigue, and to make no +account of his personal discomforts, in order to satisfy his earnest +longings for the law." On that occasion an immense number of hearers +were converted. + +Buddha went to a monastery built on a hill, near the town of Tsalia, +where he spent the eighteenth season. In that town there was a weaver, +who had one daughter, who followed the same profession as her father. +The damsel was very desirous to hear Buddha's preachings; but on the day +when Buddha was to come into the town to deliver instructions to the +people, it happened she had to finish the weaving of a piece of cloth +that was urgently required by the owner. She then said to herself: I +will exert myself with so much diligence that I will be enabled both to +finish my work and listen to my teacher's preaching. She set instantly +to work, wound up the thread on the quill, and took it with her, to +carry it to the shed where her father's loom was. On her way to the +shed, she had to pass near the place where a motionless congregation +stood before Buddha, eagerly waiting for the words that were to fall +from his mouth. She laid aside her quill, loaded with thread, and +squatted timidly behind the last rank of the congregation. Buddha had +seen at a glance the perfect dispositions of the young girl. It was +chiefly for her benefit that he had undertaken a long journey and come +over to that place. As soon as he saw her, he made her draw nearer to +him. The injunction was joyfully complied with. With an encouraging tone +of voice, Buddha asked her whence she came and whither she was going. +The damsel modestly answered that she knew whence she came, and also +whither she was going; at the same time, she added that she was ignorant +of the place she came from, and of the place she was going to. On +hearing this apparently contradictory answer, many of the hearers could +scarcely refrain from giving vent to indignant feelings. But Buddha, who +had fathomed the girl's wisdom, prayed them to be silent. Then, turning +towards his young interlocutor, he desired her to explain the meaning of +her answer. She said: "I know that I come from my father's house, and +that I go to our loom-shed; but what existence I have come from to this +present one, this I am entirely ignorant of. I am likewise uncertain +about the existence that shall follow this one. About these two points I +am completely ignorant; my mind can discover neither the one nor the +other." Buddha extolled the wisdom of the damsel, and forthwith began +his instruction. At the conclusion, she was firmly grounded in the state +of Thautapan. She withdrew immediately, took up her quill, and went to +the shed. It happened that her father was asleep, with his hand on the +loom's handle. She approached the loom, and began to arrange the thread. +Her father, awaking suddenly, pushed inadvertently the part of the loom +his hand was laid upon, and struck his daughter in the chest. She fell +down and instantly expired. Overwhelmed with grief, the unfortunate +father poured a flood of tears over the lifeless corpse of his daughter. +Unable to console himself, he rose up and went to Buddha, in the hope of +receiving some comfort at his feet. Buddha affectionately received him, +and, by his good instructions, relieved him from the load that pressed +on his heart, and gradually enlightening his mind by the preaching of +the four great truths, he gently infused into his heart and his soul +that sweet joy which wisdom alone can impart. The weaver resolved to +abandon the world, asked for admittance into the assembly, and not long +after became a Rahanda. This conversion was followed by that of a great +many others. + +Buddha returned to Radzagio, and spent the nineteenth season in the +Weloowon monastery. The season being over, Buddha went into the +districts of Magatha, preaching in all places. Previous to that time, +there lived at Radzagio a rich man who had an only daughter, who was +brought up with the greatest care and the utmost fondness. She lived in +the upper apartments of a splendid dwelling. On a certain day, at an +early hour in the morning, she was looking on the people that flocked +from the country into the town. She saw among many a young hunter +driving a cart loaded with venison. She much admired his fine, energetic +appearance. She was instantly enamoured of him, and made all the +necessary arrangements to elope with him. She succeeded, married the +hunter, and had by him a large family. Passing on one day through a +forest, the most excellent Buddha chanced to meet with a deer which was +caught in the net of a hunter. Moved with feelings of commiseration, he +helped the poor beast to get out of the meshes. After this benevolent +action, he went to rest under a tree. The hunter soon made his +appearance, and to his great dismay at once discovered that some one had +deprived him of his prey. Whilst he was looking about, he saw Buddha, in +his yellow dress, calmly resting under the shade of a large tree. +"This," said the hunter to himself, "is the man who has done the +mischief; I will make him pay dear for his undue interference." Hereupon +he hastily took up an arrow and placed it on the bow, with the intention +of shooting dead the evildoer. But despite his exertions, heightened by +the thirst for revenge, he could not succeed; both his hands were seized +with a sudden quivering, and his feet appeared as if nailed to the +ground. He stood motionless in that attitude. Absorbed in meditation, +Buddha was not aware what was going on so close to him. + +The sons of the hunter as well as their wives grew very much troubled +that their father did not return at the usual hour from visiting his +nets. They feared that some untoward accident had overtaken him. They +armed themselves and went in search of him. They soon came to the spot +where they saw the sad position of their father. At the same moment, +perceiving a yellow-dressed individual, they hastily concluded, that, by +the power of some charms, he had brought their father into this +miserable condition. They made up their mind to kill him. But whilst +they were preparing to put their cruel design into execution, their +hands, suddenly benumbed, could not grasp the weapons, and they all +stood motionless and speechless. Awaking at last from contemplation, +Buddha saw the hunter and all his family standing before him. Taking +compassion on them, he restored them to their ordinary condition, and +preached to them. They all fell at his knees, craved his pardon, +believed in him, and became fervent Upasakas. + +Buddha returned to Thawattie to spend the twentieth season in the +Dzetawon monastery. It was at that period that there happened a +remarkable change in the management of the domestic affairs of Gaudama. +Up to the present time, no one among the religious had been specially +appointed to attend on Buddha and administer to his wants. But some of +them, as circumstances occurred, undertook the agreeable and honourable +duty of serving him. However human nature will occasionally let appear, +even in the best of men, some marks of its innate imperfections. On two +occasions, the Rahans who followed Buddha and carried his mendicant's +pot and a portion of his dress wished to go in one direction, whilst +Buddha desired them to follow in another. They had the imprudence to +part company with him. Both paid dearly for their disobedience. They +fell into the hands of robbers, who took away all that they had, and +beat them severely on the head. This twofold act of insubordination +painfully affected Buddha. He summoned all the religious into his +presence, and declared that, being old, he wished to appoint one of them +to the permanent office of personal attendant on himself. Thariputra and +Maukalan immediately tendered their services with a pious and loving +earnestness. But Buddha declined to accept their offer, as well as that +of the eighty principal disciples. The reason was, that their services +were required for preaching to the people, and labouring with him for +the dissemination of the true science among men. Some of the disciples +urged Ananda to volunteer his services; but out of modesty he remained +silent. Then he added that, should Buddha be willing to accept his +humble services, he knew his heart's dispositions and his willingness to +attend on him on all occasions; he had but to signify his good pleasure. +As to him, he would be too happy to accept the office. Buddha expressed +his readiness to confer on him the honourable employment. He was +formally appointed and nominated Phra's attendant, and, during the +twenty-five remaining seasons, he acted as the beloved and devoted +attendant on Buddha's person. Through him alone visitors were ushered +into Buddha's presence, and orders were communicated to the members of +the assembly. Gaudama was then fifty-five years old. + +On a certain day he went to the village of Dzantoo for the purpose of +collecting alms. Manh Nat, his inveterate foe, entered into the heart of +all the villagers to prevent them from giving alms to the mendicant. He +succeeded so well in his wicked design that no one noticed Gaudama's +passage through the street, nor gave him alms. When he drew near to the +gate, Manh stood by the side of the street, and asked him, with a +sarcastic tone, how he felt under the pangs of hunger. Buddha replied to +him, that he could, by entering into the state of perfect trance, +remain, like the great Brahma, without using material food, feeding +only, as it were, on the inward happiness created by the immediate sight +of unclouded truth. Five hundred young virgins, who happened to return +from the country into the place, prostrated themselves before Buddha, +listened to his instructions, and reached the state of Thautapan. + +On leaving the place, Buddha happened to travel through a forest, which +had become an object of terror to all the people of Kothala, as being +the favourite haunt of Ougalimala, a notorious robber and murderer. The +ruler of the country, Pasenadi, had heard from the windows of his palace +the cries of his alarmed subjects. Despite the many remonstrances that +were made concerning the dangers of such an attempt, Buddha went +straight forward to the den of the formidable man, who, enraged at such +presumptuous boldness, was preparing to make him pay dear for his +intrusion. But he had to deal with an opponent that could not easily be +frightened. To his threats and attempts to inflict harm Gaudama opposed +the meekest composure, the mildest expressions, and an invincible +patience. Softened by the kindness of his opponent, Ougalimala altered +the tone of his voice, and showed signs of respect to Buddha. The +latter, quickly perceiving the change that had taken place in the +robber's soul, preached to him the law, and made of him a sincere +convert. Coming out from the forest which had been the scene of so many +crimes, he followed Buddha, with the behaviour of an humble disciple. +The people of Kosala could scarcely give credit to the change that had +taken place in Ougalimala. In a short time he became a Rahanda, and died +not long after he had become perfect. The members of the assembly were, +on a certain day, talking among themselves about the place he had +probably migrated to. Buddha, who had overheard their conversation on +this subject, said to them: "Beloved Bickus, the Rahan Ougalimala, who +died a little while after his conversion, has reached the deliverance. +His conversion was at once prompt and perfect. He was very wicked +previous to his conversion, because he never cohabited except with +wicked and perverse associates, the company of whom led him into all +sorts of disorders. But he no sooner had the good fortune to meet me, +hear my instructions, and converse with you, than he at once believed in +my doctrine, adhered to me with all his might, and entered into the way +leading to perfection. He laboured strenuously to destroy in himself the +law of demerits, and thus rapidly reached the summit of perfection." + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + + _Buddha is slandered in Thawattie -- Questions put to him by + a pounha -- Story of Anatapein's daughter -- Conversion of a + pounha whose navel emitted rays of light -- Blank in a great + part of Buddha's life -- Story of Dewadat -- His jealousy + towards Buddha -- His friendship with Prince Adzatathat -- His + ambition -- His attempt to kill Buddha -- His miserable end._ + + +While the most excellent Buddha was in the Dzetawon monastery, the +heretics of Thawattie made another attempt to lower, nay, to destroy his +reputation. They prevailed upon Thondarie, a woman entirely devoted to +their interests, to spread the rumour that she had spent a night in the +apartments of Buddha. When the calumny had been noised abroad, they +suborned a gang of drunkards, to whom they promised a large sum of +money, if they would do away with the instrument of the slander. They +accordingly selected a favourable opportunity, killed Thondarie, and +threw her body into a cluster of bushes close to the monastery. When the +crime had been perpetrated, the heretics raised a cry all over the +country inquiring about Thondarie. She could nowhere be found. Search +was made in every direction, until at last, by the secret directions of +their emissaries, the body was found on the spot where it had been +apparently concealed. The party hostile to Buddha laid the crime at his +door. The king of the country, urged on by them, ordered a strict +inquiry to be made. The infamous trick was at last discovered in the +following manner. The perpetrators of the deed happened to go into a +drinking-place. Heated by the liquor they had taken, they began to +accuse each other of having killed Thondarie. Their conversation was +overheard by one of the king's servants, who had them arrested and led +to the palace. The king said to them, "Wicked men, is it true that you +have killed the woman Thondarie?" They answered, "It is true we have +killed her." "Who advised you to commit the murder?" "The Deitty +teachers, who have paid us one thousand pieces of silver." Indignant at +such a horrible deed, the king ordered the murderers and their advisers +to be put to death. Their punishment consisted in their being buried in +the earth up to their waist. They were subsequently covered with a heap +of straw, which being set fire to, they were burnt to death. Buddha told +his disciples that what had happened on this melancholy occasion was but +a just retribution for his having in a former existence been drunk, and +in that state abused and slandered a holy personage. + +In one of his preaching excursions, Gaudama converted a distinguished +pounha, who asked him, "Illustrious Buddha, what has the great Brahma +done to merit the extraordinary glory that encompasses his person and +the unsurpassed felicity that he enjoys?" To whom he answered, "The +great Brahma, during several existences, has bestowed abundant alms on +the needy, delivered many people from great perils, and delighted in +giving instruction to the ignorant. Such meritorious deeds have procured +for him the transcendent rank that he occupies, and secured to him for +an immense period of time the matchless happiness that he possesses." + +Two rich men, one of Thawattie, and the other a denizen of the Ougga +city, had in their youth, when engaged in their studies, promised each +other that he who should have a daughter would give her in marriage to +the son of the other. When they had grown up, the rich man of Thawattie +became a disciple of Buddha, but his friend followed the teachings of +the heretics. In due time Anatapein, for such was the name of the +former, had a beautiful daughter. His friend Ougga had also a fine +grown-up son. It came to pass that Ougga on a certain day arrived from +his place with five hundred carts of goods to Thawattie, for the +purpose of trading. He lodged, as a matter of course, in his friend's +house. During the conversation Ougga reminded his host of their former +promise, and declared that he would be too happy to have it fulfilled +without delay. Anatapein, having consulted his wife and daughter, and +secured their consent, agreed to the proposal that was made to him. The +pious rich man, however, was somewhat concerned respecting the dangers +of his daughter's position in the midst of upholders of false doctrines. +He gave her a retinue of female attendants, who could, by their advice +and conversation, maintain intact in her the faith in Buddha. When the +bride arrived, after a long journey, to Ougga's city, she was desired by +her father-in-law to go in the company of his wife to pay her respects +to his teachers, who were sitting quite naked, with dishevelled hairs, +in the midst of the most disgusting uncleanness, under a shed prepared +for them. Unused to such an unsightly and revolting display, the modest +girl recoiled back with a becoming horror, refusing even to cast a look +at them. Enraged at the contempt shown to his teachers, the unnatural +father-in-law threatened to send her away from his house, as being an +unsuitable match for his son. Firm in her faith, she withstood all the +efforts that were made to induce her to alter her resolution and pay +attention to such individuals. She went back into her apartments. Having +somewhat recovered her spirits, and regained her usual calm and serene +composure, the pious young lady began, in the presence of her +mother-in-law and other ladies of the town, to praise and extol the +glory, modesty, meekness, and all the other qualifications which adorned +her great teacher and his disciples. The hearers were delighted at all +that they heard, and expressed an eager desire to see them and hear +their instructions. + +On that very day the compassionate Buddha was at an early hour, as +usual, reviewing the beings dwelling on the island of Dzampoudipa, +endeavouring to discover those that were well disposed to hear the +truth. His searching glance soon discovered what was going on in the +house of the rich man Ougga, and the good dispositions of many of its +inmates. "Thither," said he, "I shall hasten to preach the law, for many +shall be converted." Hereupon he summoned five hundred disciples to +attend him. They all took their pattas and other articles. With his +company he flew through the air, and soon alighted in the courtyard of +the rich man's house. All were rejoiced to see Buddha and his disciples. +They lent a most attentive ear to his instructions. The rich man, his +household, and a great number of the people of the town were converted. +Anouroudha was left at Ougga to complete, perfect, and extend the good +work so happily begun. Buddha in all haste returned to Thawattie. + +At that time a great noise was made throughout the country on account of +a certain pounha whose navel emitted a sort of light in the shape of a +moon. He belonged to the party of unbelievers. He was led by them into +every village and town, as a living proof of the power they possessed. +At last his friends introduced him into the Dzetawon monastery. He was +no sooner introduced into Buddha's presence, when the prodigy suddenly +ceased. He went away somewhat annoyed at his misfortune; but he had +scarcely crossed the threshold of the monastery when the light +reappeared. Three times he came before the great preacher, and three +times the light was completely eclipsed. No doubt could be entertained +that there was in Buddha some secret power superior to the one he +possessed. The pounha was at once disconcerted and bewildered. In his +ignorance he attributed the accident to some superior magical formula +possessed by Buddha, and asked him to teach him the said formula. Buddha +said to him, "O pounha! I possess no charm; I ignore all magical +formulas. There is in me but one virtue; it is that which I have +gathered at the foot of the Bodi tree during the forty-nine days that I +have spent there in the deepest meditation. As to what attracts now the +attention of the people in your person, you are indebted for it to the +offering of a gold coronet, in the shape of a moon, you made to a Buddha +during a former existence. The reward bestowed on you for such a good +work is but a transient one. It can afford you no real, substantial, and +lasting happiness. Hearken to my doctrine; it will confer on you a +never-ending recompense." He went on explaining to him many points of +the law. The pounha believed in Buddha; nay, he applied for the dignity +of Rahan, and finally became a Rahanda. + +_N.B_.--The history of Buddha offers an almost complete blank as to what +regards his doings and preachings during a period of nearly twenty-three +years,[1] beginning with the twenty-first season, when he was fifty-six +years old, and ending with the forty-fourth season, having reached the +patriarchal age of seventy-nine years. So entirely are we kept in +ignorance of the important transactions that took place during so long a +portion of Buddha's life, that the writer, after having vainly +consulted several manuscripts, is reluctantly obliged to come to the +same conclusion as that which the Burmese authors have arrived at, viz., +that there is a complete disagreement as to even the names of the places +where Buddha spent the twenty-three remaining seasons. Out of regard for +the rich man Anatapein, who for so many years had been one of his most +liberal supporters, Buddha spent the greatest part of the remaining +seasons in the Dzetawon monastery. During the few others he seems to +have stayed at or near Radzagio, chiefly in the Weloowon monastery. The +amount of seasons spent by our Phra from the time he obtained the +Buddhaship till his death is forty-five. + +I find related, as a fact worthy of notice, the donation by a rich widow +of Wethalie, named Wisaka, of the celebrated Pouppayon monastery. It was +situated not far from the Dzetawon, in an eastern direction from that +famous place. It is mentioned that when Phra sallied from the Dzetawon +monastery by the eastern gate, the people of the country knew that he +was going to dwell for awhile in the Pouppayon monastery; when, on the +other hand, he was observed to leave it by the northern gate, all the +people understood that he was undertaking a journey through the country +for the purpose of preaching. The epoch of this donation is not certain. +It appears from some particulars indirectly alluded to that it must have +taken place when Buddha was sixty years old. + +In following our manuscript, we find inserted in this place the detailed +accounts respecting Dewadat, related by Buddha himself in the Dzetawon +monastery, in the presence of a large party of his disciples. The fact +of Buddha mentioning the name of Adzatathat as king of Radzagio, leaves +no doubt respecting the time when the awful punishment is supposed to +have been meted out to Dewadat, on account of the many heinous sins laid +to his charge. Adzatathat, having murdered his father Pimpathara, by +starving him to death in a prison, became king of Radzagio, and +succeeded him when Buddha was nearly seventy-two years old. He was +already king, as the sequel will show, when Dewadat was as yet his +spiritual adviser. It is probable that the following narrative was made +not more than two years after the above date. + +When the most excellent Buddha was in the Dzetawon monastery, alluding +to the sad fate that had fallen Dewadat, he related the causes that had +brought on this dreadful occurrence. + +At a certain time, when Buddha was spending a season in the Kosamby +country, the people came in great numbers every day to the monastery to +bring abundant alms, and pay their respects to him and the assembly. On +certain occasions they made inquiries about the most distinguished +members of the assembly, such as Thariputra, Maukalan, Anouroudda, +Ananda, Bagoo, Kimila, and others, giving utterance to the feelings of +admiration and love they entertained towards them. But they never took +the least notice of Dewadat. The latter keenly resented the studied +slight; the more so, because he thought that in his capacity of member +of the assembly and of his royal descent, he was entitled to as much +consideration as many others, who in this twofold respect were greatly +his inferiors. He resolved to leave the company of Buddha and go to some +other place. He went to Radzagio and ingratiated himself in the favours +of the young Prince Adzatathat, son of King Pimpathara, The young +prince, taken up with the grave manners of the new-comer, acknowledged +him as his teacher, and built for him a monastery on the Yauthitha hill, +close to the city. + +Some years afterwards Buddha came to Radzagio to spend a season in the +Weloowon monastery. Dewadat went to his monastery. Having paid his +respects in the usual manner and occupied a becoming place, he three +times requested the permission of having an assembly or thinga of his +own, quite distinct from the other, which was under the immediate +management of Buddha. On this point he three times received a direct +refusal to his demand. From that day the jealousy he entertained towards +Buddha waxed to a base envy, which soon generated in his soul a deadly +hatred against him. He made up his mind to break with Buddha all ties of +spiritual relationship, and to become the chief of a new religious body. +To succeed in his impious design he required the support of the secular +arm. The king of Magatha was in favour of Buddha, but his son had warmly +espoused the cause of Dewadat. In such a position, the evil-disposed +Dewadat advised Prince Adzatathat to compass the destruction of his +father, in order to become king. The ambitious son followed the +detestable advice, and put an end to his father's life by starving him +to death in a prison, in spite of his own mother's exertions to save her +royal husband's life. + +It was in the thirty-seventh season of Buddha's public mission that +Adzatathat ascended the throne of Magatha. Under the new king's +auspices, Dewadat carried everything before him with a high hand. +Assured of the new king's support, he hired thirty bowmen and promised +them an ample reward if they killed Buddha. The ruffians gladly agreed +to the proposal. But when they were on the point of committing the +crime, they felt themselves overawed by the presence of Buddha. Instead +of executing the order they had received, they fell at his feet, craved +his pardon, listened to his preaching, and were converted one after the +other. Disappointed on this point, Dewadat designed another plan to rid +himself of the great preacher. He watched the moment when Buddha was +walking at the foot of a hill, named Weitsa-gout. From the summit he +rolled a large stone that was to crush his enemy. Fortunately on its way +down the hill's side it met with a small obstacle, on which it split +into several parts. One splinter alone hurt the toe of one of Buddha's +feet, and severely bruised it. On hearing of such a nefarious and +cowardly attempt, the disciples hastened to the spot and conveyed their +beloved master to his monastery. They offered to keep guard round his +person, to prevent the repetition of other attempts on his life. But +Buddha said to them that no mortal had the power to hurt him so far as +to cause his death. He thanked them for this new token of their +affectionate regard towards him, and bade them return to their +respective places. The celebrated physician Dzewaka, having been sent +for, applied a bandage, which, being removed on the following morning, +it was found, to the surprise and joy of all present, that the injured +toe was perfectly cured. On another occasion Dewadat made a last attempt +on Buddha's life, in the suburbs of Radzagio, by the means of an +elephant, infuriated and maddened by strong liquor forced into his +throat. The animal was let loose in one of the streets which Gaudama was +perambulating gathering alms in his mendicant's pot. But far from doing +any injury to Buddha, the elephant, having come into his presence, stood +for awhile, and then knelt before him in token of respect. In this +manner Dewadat signally failed in this last wicked attempt. + +Dewadat differed from his cousin on some points of discipline; and this +difference occasioned the schism that he meditated to establish.[2] He +had proposed to Buddha to make it obligatory on all Rahans to live in +forests at the foot of certain trees; not to receive food from the +people in their own places, but to use only as articles of food such +things as they could procure by their exertions; to use robes made up of +rags collected in the dust of public thoroughfares, and not such as +might be offered by pious laymen; to abstain from fish and meat; and to +dwell in unroofed places. Gaudama positively refused to accede to his +demands. Meanwhile he meekly warned him against the sin of schism, +telling him that the commission of such an offence would throw the +perpetrator into the hell Awidzi for a whole revolution of nature. Deaf +to such a salutary warning, Dewadat precipitated himself into schism. He +gained over to his party five hundred inexperienced Rahans of the Witzi +country, and with them dwelt in the monastery of Gayathitha. He signally +failed in his attempt to draw Ananda to his side. Thariputra, by the +advice of Buddha, went to Dewadat's place. Profiting from the time he +was asleep at a distance, he prevailed upon the five hundred Rahans to +abandon schism and return to Buddha, the centre of unity, who was then +in the Dzetawon monastery in Wethalie. Rising from his sleep, Dewadat +fell into a paroxysm of rage at the trick played on him. He instantly +resolved to start for the Dzetawon monastery, to have his revenge on +Buddha for the injury done unto him. He was carried in a litter. +Messenger after messenger informed Buddha of the approach of his +antagonist. But he calmly said to his disciples: "Beloved sons, do not +trouble yourselves. Dewadat shall not see my face nor enter the +precincts of this place." Information was, in haste, conveyed that +Dewadat had actually reached the tank close to the monastery, and was +resting a while under the shade of a tree. Gaudama calmly gave the same +assurance to his trembling disciples. But the moment of a terrible +punishment was at hand. Dewadat, quitting his couch, stood up for a +while, to refresh his wearied limbs. But he was seen by his astonished +and bewildered companions gradually sinking into the earth, first up to +his knees, then to his navel, and finally to his shoulders. At that +moment he humbled himself, confessed his fault, acknowledged and +proclaimed the glory of Buddha. He then disappeared, wrapt in flame, and +fell to the bottom of the hell Awidzi. His punishment consists in having +his feet sunk ankle-deep in a burning ground; his head is covered with a +red-hot pan, that caps his head down to the lobe of the ears; two huge +red-hot iron bars transfixt him horizontally from right to left, two +from back to front, and one impales him from top to bottom. He shall +have to suffer in that frightful position during a revolution of nature. +But, for his tardy and sincere repentance, he shall be delivered, and, +by his exertions in practising virtue, he shall become a Pitzegabuddha, +under the name of Atisara. + +Adzatathat ruled over the two countries of Enga and Magatha. His mother +was Waydahi, the sister of King Pathenadi, who ruled over the two +countries of Kaci and Kosala. Adzatathat, who was of a bellicose temper, +quarrelled with his uncle on account of some districts in Kaci, which he +seized by force of arms. Unable to resist the army of his nephew, +Pathenadi offered to the invader the hand of his daughter Watzera-komma. +The offer was accepted, and a reconciliation followed. Three years +afterwards, Pathenadi lost his throne, which was seized by Meittadoubba, +a son he had had by a concubine. Pathenadi went to Radzagio to ask +assistance against the usurper from his son-in-law. But he died on his +way to that place. + +It was under the rule of Meittadoubba, in the forty-fourth season, that +occurred the total destruction of the Thagiwi princes of Kosala and +Kapilawot by the ambitious Adzatathat. + +Buddha spent the forty-fourth season in the Dzetawon monastery. When the +season was over, he went to dwell in the Weitzagout monastery, near +Radzagio. While he was in that place, there was spread a rumour that +Adzatathat entertained hostile feelings towards Wethalie. Buddha then +foretold that as long as the princes of Wethalie would be united and +avoid internal strife and contention, they would be more than a match +for their enemy; but should quarrel take place among them, they and +their country would fall an easy prey to the invader. These words, which +fell from Buddha's mouth, were not forgotten by a pounha who was one of +Adzatathat's ministers. He planned, with his royal mother's consent and +secret encouragement, the destruction of the rulers of Wethalie, and the +conquest of that country, by contriving to sow the seed of dissension +among the Letziwi princes. His plan met with complete success some years +later, about three years after Gaudama's Neibban, as we shall have the +opportunity of relating. + + +FOOTNOTES + + [1] This short summary of Buddha's life, indicating but little + more than the names of the places where he had spent twenty + seasons, and leaving us in the dark as to all the particulars + regarding the twenty-three other seasons, is another + illustration of the assertion, made in some foregoing passages, + that the present compilation is very concise and imperfect, + supplying us with but an outline of Buddha's proceedings during + the course of his preachings. He reached the age of eighty. + According to the authority of this legend, Buddha lived + forty-five years after he had obtained the Buddhaship. He was + therefore thirty-five when he began his public life and entered + the career of preaching the law. It is not in my power to say + anything positive respecting the antiquity of this work, but the + statement of the main facts is borne out by the united testimony + of the Buddhistic works existing in various parts and in + different languages of Eastern Asia. If it be true that our + Buddha lived so long, we must believe that his time during the + last twenty-five years was employed in the same benevolent + undertaking, viz., to preach the sacred law and point out to + beings the way that shall lead them to the deliverance. Many + volumes are full of the disputes on religious subjects between + Buddha and the heretics, that is to say, his opponents. We may + conclude that those controversies took place during the latter + part of Buddha's life, as it cannot be doubted that they + increased in proportion to the progress the new doctrines made + among the people. If, however, we are in great part kept in the + dark respecting the doings of the great reformer during a long + period of his public life, we are amply compensated by the + account of many interesting circumstances that occurred chiefly + during the last year of his earthly career. + + [2] Dewadat, in insisting upon the adoption of regulations of a + more rigid character, intended to imitate, to a certain extent, + the conduct of the mendicants of the opposite party. He aimed at + rivalling them in the practice of austere observances. It does + not appear that he innovated in the dogmas that he had learned + at the school of his great teacher. As his royal pupil, + Adzatathat, had hitherto supported the party of the pounhas, it + is not improbable that Dewadat wished to lessen the differences + between the practices and observances of the two parties, to + render them less perceptible, and by doing so, to prepare the + way, by gradual approximation, for a complete fusion. He + exhibited himself in the character of a rigid reformer, who was + displeased with the too lenient tenor of the disciplinary + regulations instituted by Buddha. Be that as it may, it is + certain that jealousy in the beginning inspired him with the + idea of separating from the assembly. This first step led him + farther than he at first contemplated. He wished to set up an + assembly, or thinga of his own, and thereby to place himself on + a footing of equality and rivalry with his cousin. Meeting with + greater resistance than he expected, and being convinced that he + could not succeed so long as Buddha should be alive, he did not + shrink from making several attempts on his life. It is a fact + worthy of notice that the disturbances which took place + subsequently in the Buddhist society had their origin, in most + instances, in points of discipline of a trivial importance, + which were altered or rejected by a fraction of the assembly, + whilst they were upheld with the utmost tenacity by the greater + portion of the Rahans, as having been established by Gaudama. + This observation will be fully corroborated by the particulars + that we shall relate on the subject of the councils or meetings + held after Gaudama's death. + + + END OF VOL. I. + + + Printed by BALLANTYNE, HANSON & CO. + Edinburgh & London + + + + + Truebner's Oriental Series. + + [Illustration] + + KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUeBNER & CO. LTD + DRYDEN HOUSE, GERRARD STREET, LONDON, W. + + +"A knowledge of the commonplace, at least, of Oriental literature, +philosophy, and religion is as necessary to the general reader of the +present day as an acquaintance with the Latin and Greek classics was a +generation or so ago. Immense strides have been made within the present +century in these branches of learning; Sanskrit has been brought within +the range of accurate philology, and its invaluable ancient literature +thoroughly investigated; the language and sacred books of the +Zoroastrians have been laid bare; Egyptian, Assyrian, and other records +of the remote past have been deciphered, and a group of scholars speak +of still more recondite Accadian and Hittite monuments; but the results +of all the scholarship that has been devoted to these subjects have been +almost inaccessible to the public because they were contained for the +most part in learned or expensive works, or scattered throughout the +numbers of scientific periodicals. Messrs. Truebner & Co., in a spirit of +enterprise which does them infinite credit, have determined to supply +the constantly-increasing want, and to give in a popular, or, at least, +a comprehensive form, all this mass of knowledge to the +world."--_Times._ + + The late Oriental scholar, Mr. Romesh C. Dutt, C.I.E., says:-- + +"I wish to say a word about this series, because I am in a special +degree indebted to it. Professor Max Mueller, who has, by his lifelong +labours, done more than any living scholar to elucidate ancient Hindu +literature and history, has now conceived the noble idea of enabling +English readers to go to the fountain source, and consult Oriental works +in a series of faithful translations. More than thirty volumes, +translated from the Sanscrit, Chinese, Zend, Pahlair, Pali, Arabic, &c., +have already been published, and more volumes are expected. I take this +opportunity to own my great indebtedness to the volumes of this series +which relate to Indian History. I have freely quoted from them--allowing +myself the liberty of a verbal alteration here and there; and I have +seldom thought it necessary to consult these original Sanscrit works +which have been translated in this faithful and valuable series." + + * * * * * + + In Two Volumes, post 8vo, cloth, pp. 426 and 460, price 25s. + net. + + ALBERUNI'S INDIA. + + AN ACCOUNT OF THE RELIGION, PHILOSOPHY, LITERATURE, GEOGRAPHY, + CHRONOLOGY, ASTRONOMY, CUSTOMS, LAWS, AND ASTROLOGY OF INDIA + ABOUT A.D. 1030. + + An English Edition, with Notes and Indices. + + By DR. EDWARD C. SACHAU, + Professor in the Royal University of Berlin, and Principal of + the Seminary for Oriental Languages; Member of the Royal Academy + of Berlin, and Corresponding Member of the Imperial Academy of + Vienna Honorary Member of the Asiatic Society of Great Britain + and Ireland, London, and of the American Oriental Society, + Cambridge, U.S.A. + +EXTRACT FROM PREFACE. + +Alberuni, or, as his compatriots called him, Abu Raihan, was born A.D. +973, in the territory of modern Khiva, then called Khwarizm, or +Chorasmia in antiquity. Early distinguishing himself in science and +literature, he played a political part as councillor of the ruling +prince of his native country of the Ma'muni family. + +In the opening of his book Alberuni gives an account of the +circumstances which suggested to him the idea of writing the [Greek: +Indika]. Once the conversation with a friend of his, else unknown, ran +on the then existing literature on the history of religion and +philosophy, its merits and demerits. When, in particular, the literature +on the belief of the Hindus came to be criticised, Alberuni maintained +that all of it was second-hand and thoroughly uncritical. To verify the +matter, his friend once more examines the books in question, which +results in his agreeing with our author, and his asking him to fill up +this gap in the Arabic literature of the time. The book he has produced +is not a polemical one. He will not convert the Hindus, nor lend a +direct help to missionary zealots. He will simply describe Hinduism, +without identifying himself with it. He takes care to inform the reader +that he is not responsible for whatsoever repugnant detail he has to +relate, but the Hindus themselves. He gives a repertory of information +on Indian subjects, destined for the use of those who lived in peaceable +intercourse with them, and wished to have an insight into their mode and +world of thought. + +The author has nothing in common with the Muhammadan Ghazi who wanted +to convert the Hindus or to kill them, and his book scarcely reminds the +reader of the incessant war between Islam and India, during which it had +been prepared, and by which the possibility of writing such a book had +first been given. It is like a magic island of quiet, impartial research +in the midst of a world of clashing swords, burning towns, and plundered +temples. The object which the author had in view, and never for a moment +lost sight of, was to afford the necessary information and training to +"_any one_ (in Islam) _who wants to converse with the Hindus, and to +discuss with them questions of religion, science, or literature, on the +very basis of their own civilisation_." + +In general, it is the method of our author not to speak himself, but to +let the Hindus speak, giving extensive quotations from their classical +authors. He presents a picture of Indian civilisation as painted by the +Hindus themselves. Many chapters, not all, open with a short +characteristic introduction of a general nature. The body of most +chapters consists of three parts. The first is a _precis_ of the +question, as the author understands it. + +The second part brings forward the doctrines of the Hindus, quotations +from Sanskrit books in the chapters on religion, philosophy, astronomy, +and astrology, and other kinds of information which had been +communicated to him by word of mouth, or things which he had himself +observed in the chapters on literature, historic chronology, geography, +law, manners, and customs. In the third part he does the same as +Megasthenes had already done; he tries to bring the sometimes very +exotic subject nearer to the understanding of his readers by comparing +it with the theories of ancient Greece, and by other comparisons. In the +disposition of every single chapter, as well as in the sequence of the +chapters, a perspicuous, well-considered plan is apparent. There is no +patchwork nor anything superfluous, and the words fit to the subject as +close as possible. + +He does not blindly accept the traditions of former ages; he wants to +understand and to criticise them. He wants to sift the wheat from the +chaff, and he will discard everything that militates against the laws of +nature and of reason. + +He criticises manuscript tradition like a modern philologist. He +sometimes supposes the text to be corrupt, and inquires into the cause +of the corruption; he discusses various readings, and proposes +emendations. He guesses at _lacunae_, criticises different translations, +and complains of the carelessness and ignorance of the copyists. + + This valuable and interesting work has been out of print for + many years, and second-hand copies have been very difficult to + obtain even at a high premium. At the urgent request of many + scholars and students both in England and India, the publishers + have decided to issue the present reprint at a cheaper price + than the original edition. + + * * * * * + + Post 8vo, pp. viii. and 270, cloth, price 6s. + + INDIAN POETRY: + + CONTAINING "THE INDIAN SONG OF SONGS." + + From the Sanskrit of the "Gita Govinda" of Jayadeva; Two Books + from "The Iliad of India" (Mah[.a]bharata), "Proverbial Wisdom" + from the Shlokas of the Hitopadesa, and other Oriental Poems. + + By SIR EDWIN ARNOLD, M.A., K.C.I.E., C.S.I., &c., &c. + + CONTENTS. + + The Indian Song of Songs-- + Introduction. + Hymn to Vishnu. + Sarga the First--The Sports of Krishna. + Sarga the Second--The Penitence of Krishna. + Sarga the Third--Krishna Troubled. + Sarga the Fourth--Krishna Cheered. + Sarga the Fifth--The Longings of Krishna. + Sarga the Sixth--Krishna made Bolder. + Sarga the Seventh--Krishna supposed False. + Sarga the Eighth--The Rebuking of Krishna. + Sarga the Ninth--The End of Krishna's Trial. + Sarga the Tenth--Krishna in Paradise. + Sarga the Eleventh--The Union of Radha and Krishna. + + Miscellaneous Oriental Poems-- + The Rajpoot Wife. + King Saladin. + The Caliph's Draught. + Hindoo Funeral Song. + Song of the Serpent Charmers. + Song of the Flour-Mill. + Taza ba Taza. + The Mussulman Paradise. + Dedication of a Poem from the Sanskrit. + The Rajah's Ride. + + Two Books from "The Iliad of India." + The Great Journey. + The Entry into Heaven. + + The Night of Slaughter. + + The Morning Prayer. + + Proverbial Wisdom from the Shlokas of the Hitopadesa. + +OPINIONS OF THE PRESS. + +"In this new volume Sir Edwin Arnold does good service by illustrating, +through the medium of his musical English melodies, the power of Indian +poetry to stir European emotions. 'The Indian Song of Songs' is not +unknown to scholars. Sir Edwin Arnold will have introduced it among +popular English poems."--_Times._ + +"Complete mastery of the English language, combined with genuine poetic +fervour, has enabled the translator of 'The Indian Song of Songs' to +spread before his readers a feast of dulcet sounds and lyrical language. +Music seems to flow from his pen as naturally as rain from the cloud or +song from the throat of the thrush."--_Morning Post._ + +"The poem abounds with imagery of Eastern luxuriousness and +sensuousness; the air seems laden with the spicy odours of the tropics, +and the verse has a richness and a melody sufficient to captivate the +senses of the dullest."--_Standard._ + + * * * * * + + Third Edition. Post 8vo, pp. viii.-464, cloth, price 16s. + + THE S[=A]NKHYA APHORISMS OF KAPILA, + With Illustrative Extracts from the Commentaries. + + Translated by J. R. BALLANTYNE, LL.D., late Principal of the + Benares College. + + Edited by FITZEDWARD HALL. + +"The work displays a vast expenditure of labour and scholarship, for +which students of Hindoo philosophy have every reason to be grateful to +Dr. Hall and the publishers."--_Calcutta Review._ + + * * * * * + + Fourth Edition. Post 8vo, cloth, pp. xxiv.-310, price 16s. + + THE RELIGIONS OF INDIA. + + BY A. BARTH, + Member of the Societe Asiatique of Paris. + + Authorised translation by Rev. J. Wood, Edin. + +India has not only preserved for us in her Vedas the most ancient and +complete documents for the study of the old religious beliefs founded on +nature-worship, which, in an extremely remote past, were common to all +the branches of the Indo-European family; she is also the only country +where these beliefs, in spite of many changes both in form and fortune, +continue to subsist up to the present time. Whilst everywhere else they +have been either as good as extinguished by monotheistic religions of +foreign origin, in some instances without leaving behind them a single +direct and authentic trace of their presence, or abruptly cut short in +their evolution and forced to survive within the barriers, henceforth +immovable, of a petty Church, as in the case of Parseeism,--in India +alone they present up to this time, as a rich and varied literature +attests, a continuous, self-determined development, in the course of +which, instead of contracting, they have continued to enlarge their +borders. It is owing in a great measure to this extraordinary longevity +that such an interest attaches to the separate and independent study of +the Hindu religions, irrespective altogether of the estimate we may form +of their dogmatic or practical worth. Nowhere else do we meet with +circumstances, on the whole, so favourable for the study of the +successive transformations and destiny, so to speak, of a polytheistic +idea of the universe. + + * * * * * + + Post 8vo, cloth. pp. cviii.-242 and viii.-370. Two volumes, + price 24s. + + SI-YU-KI. + + BUDDHIST RECORDS OF THE WESTERN WORLD. + + Translated from the Chinese of HUIEN TSIANG (A.D. 629). By + SAMUEL BEAL, B.A. (Trin. Col., Camb.), R.N. (Retired Chaplain + and N.I.), Professor of Chinese, University College, London; + Rector of Wark, Northumberland, &c. + +The progress which has been made in our knowledge of Northern Buddhism +during the last few years is due very considerably to the discovery of +the Buddhist literature of China. This literature (now well known to us +through the catalogues already published) contains, amongst other +valuable works, the records of the travels of various Chinese Buddhist +pilgrims who visited India during the early centuries of our era. These +records embody the testimony of independent eyewitnesses as to the facts +related in them, and having been faithfully preserved and allotted a +place in the collection of the sacred book of the country, their +evidence is entirely trustworthy. + +It would be impossible to mention _seriatim_ the various points of +interest in these works, as they refer to the geography, history, +manners, and religion of the people of India. The reader who looks into +the pages of this book will find ample material for study on all these +questions. But there is one particular that gives a more than usual +interest to the records under notice, and that is the evident sincerity +and enthusiasm of the travellers themselves. Never did more devoted +pilgrims leave their native country to encounter the perils of travel in +foreign and distant lands; never did disciples more ardently desire to +gaze on the sacred vestiges of their religion; never did men endure +greater sufferings by desert, mountain, and sea than these +simple-minded, earnest Buddhist priests. And that such courage, +religious devotion, and power of endurance should be exhibited by men so +sluggish, as we think, in their very nature as the Chinese, this is very +surprising, and may perhaps arouse some consideration. + + * * * * * + + In Two Volumes, post 8vo, pp. xii.-336 and x.-352, cloth, price + 21s. + + MEDIAEVAL RESEARCHES FROM EASTERN ASIATIC SOURCES. + + FRAGMENTS TOWARDS THE KNOWLEDGE OF THE GEOGRAPHY AND HISTORY OF + CENTRAL AND WESTERN ASIA FROM THE THIRTEENTH TO THE SEVENTEENTH + CENTURY. + + BY E. BRETSCHNEIDER, M.D., + Formerly Physician of the Russian Legation at Pekin. + +EXTRACT FROM PREFACE + +The subjects dealt with in the two volumes form a carefully revised and +improved edition of three essays gathered into one collection, viz.:-- + 1. Notes on Chinese Mediaeval Travellers to the West, 1875. + 2. Notices of the Mediaeval Geography and History of Central and + Western Asia, 1876. + 3. Chinese Intercourse with the Countries of Central and Western + Asia during the Fifteenth Century, 1877. + +Since the first publication of these papers, large additions have been +made to the stock of our knowledge regarding the regions of Central +Asia which, previously to the Russian occupation of these tracts, had +been inaccessible to scientific exploration. Thus new light has been +thrown upon many interesting geographical questions suggested by +the narratives of mediaeval travellers, or hitherto based only upon +more modern but vague and dubious Chinese accounts. + +To bring the new edition of those former researches up to the +present advanced state of knowledge on the subject, I had to study +a vast amount of literature, written for the greater part in Russian, +which has come to light, on Central Asia, and was obliged to read +through a great number of works and papers, some of them published +in Russian Turkestan, and, therefore, difficult to obtain. In general, +all reading accessible to me bearing on the subject has been made use +of for the elucidation of mediaeval geographical questions arising out +of my researches. + + * * * * * + + Post 8vo, pp. xii.-164, cloth, price 10s. 6d. + + THE HISTORY OF ESARHADDON + (Son of Sennacherib), + + KING OF ASSYRIA, B.C. 681-668. + + Translated from the Cuneiform Inscriptions upon Cylinders and + Tablets in the British Museum Collection; together with a + Grammatical Analysis of each Word, Explanations of the + Ideographs by Extracts from the Bi-Lingual Syllabaries, and List + of Eponyms, &c. + + BY E. A. WALLIS BUDGE, M.A., Litt.D., D.Lit., + Keeper of the Egyptian and Assyrian Antiquities in the British + Museum. + +"Students of scriptural archaeology will also appreciate the 'History of +Esarhaddon.'"--_Times._ + +"There is much to attract the scholar in this volume. It does not +pretend to popularise studies which are yet in their infancy. Its +primary object is to translate, but it does not assume to be more than +tentative, and it offers both to the professed Assyriologist and to the +ordinary non-Assyriological Semitic scholar the means of controlling its +results."--_Academy._ + +"Mr. Budge's book is, of course, mainly addressed to Assyrian scholars +and students. They are not, it is to be feared, a very numerous class. +But the more thanks are due to him on that account for the way in which +he has acquitted himself in his laborious task."--_Tablet._ + + * * * * * + + Post 8vo, pp. xlviii.-398, cloth, price 12s. + + THE ORDINANCES OF MANU. + + Translated from the Sanskrit, with an Introduction. + + By the late A. C. BURNELL, Ph.D., C.I.E. + + Completed and Edited by E. W. HOPKINS, Ph.D., of Columbia + College, N.Y. + +"This work is full of interest; while for the student of sociology and +the science of religion it is full of importance. It is a great boon to +get so notable a work in so accessible a form, admirably edited, and +completely translated."--_Scotsman._ + +"Few men were more competent than Burnell to give us a really good +translation of this well-known law book, first rendered into English by +Sir William Jones. Burnell was not only an independent Sanskrit scholar, +but an experienced lawyer, and he joined to these two important +qualifications the rare faculty of being able to express his thoughts in +clear and trenchant English.... We ought to feel very grateful to Dr. +Hopkins for having given us all that could be published of the +translation left by Burnell."--F. MAX MUeLLER in the _Academy_. + + * * * * * + + Third Edition. Post 8vo, cloth, pp. vi.-216, price 6s. + + THE BHAGAVAD G[=I]T[=A]; or, THE SACRED LAY. + A SANSKRIT PHILOSOPHICAL POEM. + + Translated, with Notes, + + BY JOHN DAVIES, M.A. (Cantab.) + Member of the Royal Asiatic Society, of the Cambridge + Philological Society, &c., and (sometime) Rector of Walsoken, + Norfolk. + + I. Introduction. + II. Translation. + III. Appendix. + (i) On the date at which the Bhagavad G[=i]t[=a] was probably + written, and on the theory that it was written under an + influence derived from a knowledge of Christian doctrines. + (ii) The traditional line of descent of the Lunar Dynasty. + (iii) Collation of two MSS. with the Bonn edition of the + Bhagavad G[=i]t[=a], and the readings of other editions + and MSS. + +In preparing this translation of the Bhagavad G[=i]t[=a], the author had +before him the Greek translation of Galanos, and the Italian version of +Stanislao Gatti, both supplied by Dr. Reinhold Rost. The author also +consulted the French version of Burnouf, the Latin version of Lassen, +and the English versions of Mr. Thomson and K. T. Telang. The notes of +Lassen have given valuable aid, as well as a paper on the Bhagavad +G[=i]t[=a], read before the "Akademie der Weissenschaften" of Berlin in +1826 by W. van Humboldt, which contained a scholarly review of the +doctrines contained in the poem. The author has also consulted a MS. +copy of the Commentary on the Bhagavad G[=i]t[=a], written by +['S]r[=i]dhara, and, by the kindness of Dr. Rost, another commentary, +attributed to ['S]ankara, but written by ['S]ankara Ananda Saraswati +(quot. at Ananda), and called T[=a]tparya Bodhin[=i]. + + * * * * * + + Second Edition. Post 8vo, cloth, pp. viii.-152, price 6s. + + HINDU PHILOSOPHY. + + THE S[=A]NKHYA K[=A]RIK[=A] OF [=I]['S]WARA KRISHNA. + + An Exposition of the System of Kapila, with an Appendix on the + Ny[=a]ya and Vai['s]eshika Systems. + + BY JOHN DAVIES, M.A. (Cantab.) + Member of the Royal Asiatic Society, of the Cambridge + Philological Society, &c., and (sometime) Rector of Walsoken, + Norfolk. + +EXTRACT FROM PREFACE. + +I wish to present to my readers the philosophy of Kapila as it has been +set forth by his Indian exponent, [=I]['s]wara Krishna. The system of +Kapila, called the S[=a]nkhya or Rationalistic, in its original form, +and in its theistic development by Patarijali, contains nearly all that +India has produced in the department of pure philosophy. Other systems, +though classed as philosophic, are mainly devoted to logic and physical +science, or to an exposition of the Vedas. + +The system of Kapila may be said to have only an historical value, but +on this account alone it is interesting as a chapter in the history of +the human mind. It is the earliest attempt on record to give an answer, +from reason alone, to the mysterious questions which arise in every +thoughtful mind about the origin of the world, the nature and relations +of man, and his future destiny. It is interesting also and instructive +to note how often the human mind moves in a circle. The latest German +philosophy, the system of Schopenhauer and Von Hartmann, is mainly a +reproduction of the philosophic system of Kapila in its materialistic +part, presented in a more elaborate form, but on the same fundamental +lines. In this respect the human intellect has gone over the same ground +that it occupied more than two thousand years ago, but on a more +important question it has taken a step in retreat. Kapila recognised +fully the existence of a soul in man, forming indeed his proper +nature--the absolute ego of Fichte--distinct from matter and immortal; +but our latest philosophy, both here and in Germany, can see in man only +a highly developed physical organisation. "All external things," says +Kapila, "were formed that the soul might know itself and be free." "The +study of psychology is vain," says Schopenhauer, "for there is no +Psyche." + + * * * * * + + Post 8vo, pp. 432, cloth, price 16s. + + A CLASSICAL DICTIONARY OF HINDU MYTHOLOGY AND RELIGION, + GEOGRAPHY, HISTORY, AND LITERATURE. + + BY JOHN DOWSON, M.R.A.S., + Late Professor of Hindustani, Staff College. + +"This not only forms an indispensable book of reference to students of +Indian literature, but is also of great general interest, as it gives in +a concise and easily accessible form all that need be known about the +personages of Hindu mythology whose names are so familiar, but of whom +so little is known outside the limited circle of _savants_."--_Times._ + +"It is no slight gain when such subjects are treated fairly and fully in +a moderate space; and we need only add that the few wants which we may +hope to see supplied in new editions detract but little from the general +excellence of Mr. Dowson's work."--_Saturday Review._ + + * * * * * + + Revised Edition in Two Volumes, post 8vo, pp. xxx.-390; + xiv.-364, cloth, price 21s. + + A HISTORY OF CIVILISATION IN ANCIENT INDIA. + BASED ON SANSKRIT LITERATURE, + + BY ROMESH CHUNDER DUTT, C.I.E. + + Of the Indian Civil Service, and of the Middle Temple, + Barrister-at-Law, Member of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great + Britain and Ireland, and of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. + + VOL. I.--B.C. 2000 TO 320; VOL. II.--B.C. 320--A.D. 1000. + +EXTRACT FROM PREFACE. + +The method on which this work has been written is very simple. My +principal object has been to furnish the general reader with a practical +and handy work on the Ancient History of India--not to compose an +elaborate work of discussions on Indian Antiquities. To study clearness +and conciseness on a subject like this was not, however, an easy task. +Every chapter in the present work deals with matters about which long +researches have been made, and various opinions have been recorded. It +would have afforded some satisfaction to me to have given the reader the +history of every controversy, the account of every antiquarian +discovery, and the pros and cons of every opinion advanced. But I could +not yield to this temptation without increasing the work to three or +four times its present humble size, and thus sacrificing the very object +with which it is written. To carry out my primary object I have avoided +every needless discussion, and I have tried to explain as clearly, +concisely, and distinctly as I was able each succeeding phase of Hindu +civilisation and Hindu life in ancient times. + +But, while conciseness has been the main object of the present work, I +have also endeavoured to tell my story so that it may leave some +distinct memories on my readers after they have closed the work. For +this reason, I have avoided details as far as possible, and tried to +develop, fully and clearly, the leading facts and features of each +succeeding age. Repetition has not been avoided where such repetition +seemed necessary to impress on my readers the cardinal facts--the +salient features of the story of Hindu civilisation. + + "Mr. Dutt has attempted to popularise learned researches, and + has undertaken a patriotic work, and in many respects none could + he better prepared for the task than he.... As far as possible + he allows the original texts to speak for themselves; his book + is thus filled with extracts selected and translated with care; + and the extracts are connected together by analyses and resumes + in which we always find what is necessary, and seldom what is + superfluous. He has written with enthusiasm, in a language clear + and correct, and without that needless display of erudition + which tires more than it instructs. On the whole I know of + no work which enables one better to enter into the spirit + of ancient Indian thought, or which is more fascinating + reading."--M. BARTH, _in Revue Critique, Paris_. (Translated.) + + * * * * * + + In One Volume, post 8vo, cloth, pp. xvi.-224, price 7s. 6d. + + LAYS OF ANCIENT INDIA. + Selections from Indian Poetry rendered into English Verse. + + BY ROMESH CHUNDER DUTT, C.I.E. + + Barrister-at-Law, and of the Indian Civil Service; Member of the + Royal Asiatic Society, and of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. + + Author of "A History of Civilisation in Ancient India," &c. + +EXTRACT FROM PREFACE. + +The time has come for placing before English readers a carefully +prepared book of selections from the entire range of Ancient Indian +Poetry. Such a book of selections should convey something not only of +the beauty of Indian poetry in general, but also of the distinctive +features of the poetry of each special period--something of the +freshness and simplicity of the Vedic Hymns, the sublime and lofty +thought of the Upanishads, the unsurpassed beauty of Buddhist precepts, +and the incomparable richness and imagery of the later or classical +Sanscrit poetry. And it seems to me that such a book, comprising +specimens from the literature of successive periods, is likely to give +the English reader a general bird's-eye view of Indian poetry, Indian +thought, and Indian religion. + + * * * * * + + Revised Edition. Post 8vo, pp. 276, cloth, price 7s. 6d. + + RELIGION IN CHINA. + + BY JOSEPH EDKINS, D.D., PEKING. + + Containing a Brief Account of the Three Religions of the + Chinese, with Observations on the Prospects of Christian + Conversion amongst that People. + +"Dr. Edkins has been most careful in noting the varied and often complex +phases of opinion, so as to give an account of considerable value of the +subject."--_Scotsman._ + +"As a missionary, it has been part of Dr. Edkins' duty to study the +existing religions in China, and his long residence in the country has +enabled him to acquire an intimate knowledge of them as they at present +exist."--_Saturday Review._ + +"Dr. Edkins' valuable work, of which this is a second and revised +edition, has, from the time that it was published, been the standard +authority upon the subject of which it treats."--_Nonconformist._ + +"Dr. Edkins ... may now be fairly regarded as among the first +authorities on Chinese religion and language."--_British Quarterly +Review._ + + * * * * * + + New and Revised Edition. Post 8vo, pp. xxiv.-420, cloth, price + 18s. + + CHINESE BUDDHISM. + A VOLUME OF SKETCHES, HISTORICAL AND CRITICAL. + + BY J. EDKINS, D.D. + Author of "China's Place in Philology," "Religion in China," + &c., &c. + +"It contains a vast deal of important information on the subject, +such as is only to be gained by long-continued study on the +spot."--_Athenaeum._ + +"Upon the whole, we know of no work comparable to it for the extent of +its original research, and the simplicity with which this complicated +system of philosophy, religion, literature, and ritual is set +forth."--_British Quarterly Review._ + +"The whole volume is replete with learning.... It deserves most careful +study from all interested in the history of the religions of the world, +and expressly of those who are concerned in the propagation of +Christianity. Dr. Edkins notices in terms of just condemnation the +exaggerated praise bestowed upon Buddhism by recent English +writers."--_Record._ + + * * * * * + + Third Edition. Post 8vo, cloth, pp. xxiv.-268, price 9s. + + THE PHILOSOPHY OF THE UPANISHADS AND ANCIENT INDIAN METAPHYSICS. + + As exhibited in a series of Articles contributed to the + _Calcutta Review_. + + BY ARCHIBALD EDWARD GOUGH, M.A., Lincoln College, Oxford; + Principal of the Calcutta Madrasa. + +EXTRACT FROM PREFACE. + +Those interested in the general history of philosophy will find in it an +account of a very early attempt, on the part of thinkers of a rude age +and race, to form a cosmological theory. The real movement of +philosophic thought begins, it is true, not in India, but in Ionia; but +some degree of interest may still be expected to attach to the procedure +of the ancient Indian cosmologists. The Upanishads are so many 'songs +before sunrise'--spontaneous effusions of awakening reflection, half +poetical, half metaphysical--that precede the conscious and methodical +labour of the long succession of thinkers to construct a thoroughly +intelligible conception of the sum of things. For the general reader, +then, these pages may supply in detail, and in the terms of the Sanskrit +texts themselves, a treatment of the topics slightly sketched in the +third chapter of Archer Butler's first series of 'Lectures on the +History of Ancient Philosophy.' The Upanishads exhibit the prehistoric +view of things in a na[=i]vely poetical expression, and, at the same +time, in its coarsest form. Any translations will be found to include +the whole of the Mu[n.][d.]aka, Ka[t.]ha, ['S]vet[=a]['s]vatara, and +M[=a][n.][d.][=u]kya Upanishads, the greater part of the Taittir[=i]ya +and B[r.]ihad[=a]ro[n.]yaka, and portions of the Chh[=a]ndogya and Kena, +together with extracts from the works of the Indian schoolmen. + + * * * * * + + Third Edition. Post 8vo, cloth, pp. xvi.-428, price 16s. + + ESSAYS ON THE SACRED LANGUAGE, WRITINGS, AND RELIGION OF THE + PARSIS. + + By MARTIN HAUG, Ph.D., + Late of the Universities of Tuebingen, Goettingen, and Bonn; + Superintendent of Sanskrit Studies, and Professor of Sanskrit + in the Poona College. + + EDITED AND ENLARGED BY DR. E. W. WEST. + + To which is added a Biographical Memoir of the late Dr. HAUG by + Prof. E. P. EVANS. + + I. History of the Researches into the Sacred Writings and Religion + of the Parsis, from the Earliest Times down to the Present. + II. Languages of the Parsi Scriptures. + III. The Zend-Avesta, or the Scripture of the Parsis. + IV. The Zoroastrian Religion, as to its Origin and Development. + +"'Essays on the Sacred Language, Writings, and Religion of the Parsis,' +by the late Dr. Martin Haug, edited by Dr. E. W. West. The author +intended, on his return from India, to expand the materials contained in +this work into a comprehensive account of the Zoroastrian religion, but +the design was frustrated by his untimely death. We have, however, in a +concise and readable form, a history of the researches into the sacred +writings and religion of the Parsis from the earliest times down to the +present--a dissertation on the languages of the Parsi Scriptures, a +translation of the Zend-Avesta, or the Scripture of the Parsis, and a +dissertation on the Zoroastrian religion, with especial reference to its +origin and development."--_Times._ + + * * * * * + + Post 8vo, pp. viii. and 346, cloth, price 10s. 6d. + + MANAVA-DHARMA-CASTRA: + THE CODE OF MANU. + + ORIGINAL SANSKRIT TEXT, WITH CRITICAL NOTES. + + BY J. JOLLY, PH.D., + Professor of Sanskrit in the University of Wurzburg; late Tagore + Professor of Law in the University of Calcutta. + +The date assigned by Sir William Jones to this Code--the well-known +Great Law Book of the Hindus--is 1250-500 B.C., although the rules and +precepts contained in it had probably existed as tradition for countless +ages before. There has been no reliable edition of the Text for Students +for many years past, and it is believed, therefore, that Prof. Jolly's +work will supply a want long felt. + + * * * * * + + Second Edition. Post 8vo, pp. xii.-512, cloth, price 16s. + + FOLK-TALES OF KASHMIR. + + BY THE REV. J. HINTON KNOWLES, F.R.G.S., M.R.A.S., &c. + (C.M.S.) Missionary to the Kashmirs. + +EXTRACT FROM PREFACE. + +Kashmir as a field of folk-lore literature is, perhaps, not surpassed in +fertility by any other country in the world; and yet, while every year +witnesses the publication of books on the subject from Bengal, Bombay, +Madras, Porjab, and other parts, this field, ripe for the harvest, has +remained almost ungleaned. No doubt its isolated position and the +difficulty of its language have had something to do with this apparent +neglect. + +No apology will be needed for the presentation of this book to the +public. The great interest and importance attaching to the folk-tales of +any people is manifest from the great attention devoted to them by many +learned writers and others. Concerning the style and manner of the book, +however, I would ask my readers to be lenient with me. I have sought not +so much to present these tales in a purely literary form as to give them +in a fair translation, and most of the work was done by lamp-light after +an ordinary amount of missionary work during the day. However, such as +it is, I sincerely hope it will prove a real contribution towards that +increasing stock of folk-lore which is doing so much to clear away the +clouds that envelop much of the practices, ideas, and beliefs which make +up the daily life of the natives of our great dependencies, control +their feelings, and underlie many of their actions. + + * * * * * + + Post 8vo, pp. ix.-281, cloth, price 10s. 6d. + + THE SARVA-DARSANA-SAMGRAHA; + OR, REVIEW OF THE DIFFERENT SYSTEMS OF HINDU PHILOSOPHY. + + BY MADHAVA ACHARYA. + + Translated by E. B. COWELL, M.A., Professor of Sanskrit in the + University of Cambridge, and A. E. GOUGH, M.A., Professor of + Philosophy in the Presidency College, Calcutta. + + This work is an interesting specimen of Hindu critical ability. + The author successively passes in review the sixteen + philosophical systems current in the fourteenth century in the + South of India; and he gives what appears to him to be their + most important tenets. + +"The translation is trustworthy throughout. A protracted sojourn in +India, where there is a living tradition, has familiarised the +translators with Indian thought."--_Athenaeum._ + + * * * * * + + Five Volumes, post 8vo, cloth, price 21s. each. + + ORIGINAL SANSKRIT TEXTS + + _On the Origin and History of the People of India: Their + Religion and Institutions._ + + Collected, Translated, and Illustrated. + BY J. MUIR, C.I.E., D.C.L., LL.D., PH.D. + + Third Edition, Re-written, and greatly Enlarged. + +Vol. I.--Mythical and Legendary Accounts of the Origin of Caste, with +an Inquiry into its Existence in the Vedic Age. + +Vol. II.--Inquiry whether the Hindus are of Trans-Himalayan Origin, +and akin to the Western Branches of the Indo-European Race. + +Vol. III.--The Vedas: Opinions of their Authors and of later Indian +Writers on their Origin, Inspiration, and Authority. (Out of print.) + +Vol. IV.--Comparison of the Vedic with the later representations of the +principal Indian Deities. + +Vol. V.--Contributions to a knowledge of the Cosmogony, Mythology, +Religious Ideas, Life, and Manners of the Indians in the Vedic Age. + + * * * * * + + Post 8vo, pp. xliv.-376, cloth, price 14s. + + METRICAL TRANSLATIONS FROM SANSKRIT WRITERS. + + With an Introduction, many Prose Versions, and Parallel Passages + from Classical Authors. + + BY J. MUIR, C.I.E., D.C.L., LL.D., PH.D. + +"... An agreeable introduction to Hindu poetry."--_Times._ + +"... A volume which maybe taken as a fair illustration alike of the +religious and moral sentiments and of the legendary lore of the best +Sanskrit writers."--_Edinburgh Daily Review._ + + * * * * * + + Post 8vo, pp. lxv.-368, cloth, price 14s. + + TIBETAN TALES DERIVED FROM INDIAN SOURCES. + + Translated from the Tibetan of the KAH-GYUR. + BY F. ANTON VON SCHIEFNER. + + Done into English from the German, with an Introduction, + BY W. R. S. RALSTON, M.A. + +"Mr. Ralston, whose name is so familiar to all lovers of Russian +folk-lore, has supplied some interesting Western analogies and +parallels, drawn, for the most part, from Slavonic sources, to the +Eastern folk-tales, culled from the Kahgyur, one of the divisions +of the Tibetan sacred books."--_Academy._ + +"The translation ... could scarcely have fallen into better hands. An +Introduction ... gives the leading facts in the lives of those scholars +who have given their attention to gaining a knowledge of the Tibetan +literature and language."--_Calcutta Review._ + +"Ought to interest all who care for the East, for amusing stories, or +for comparative folk-lore."--_Pall Mall Gazette._ + + * * * * * + + Post 8vo, pp. xvi.-224, cloth, price 9s. + + UDANAVARGA. + + A COLLECTION OF VERSES FROM THE BUDDHIST CANON. + Compiled by DHARMATRATA. + + BEING THE NORTHERN BUDDHIST VERSION OF DHAMMAPADA. + + Translated from the Tibetan of Bkah-hgyur, with Notes, and + Extracts from the Commentary of Pradjnavarman, + + BY W. WOODVILLE ROCKHILL. + +"Mr. Rockhill's present work is the first from which assistance will be +gained for a more accurate understanding of the Pali text; it is, in +fact, as yet the only term of comparison available to us. The +'Udauavarga,' the Thibetan version, was originally discovered by the +late M. Schiefner, who published the Tibetan text, and had intended +adding a translation, an intention frustrated by his death, but which +has been carried out by Mr. Rockhill.... Mr. Rockhill may be +congratulated for having well accomplished a difficult task."--_Saturday +Review._ + + + * * * * * + + Fifth Edition. Post 8vo, pp. xv.-250, cloth, price 7s. 6d. + + OUTLINES OF THE HISTORY OF RELIGION TO THE SPREAD OF THE + UNIVERSAL RELIGIONS. + + BY C. P. TIELE, + + Doctor of Theology, Professor of the History of Religions in the + University of Leyden. + + Translated from the Dutch by J. ESTLIN CARPENTER, M.A. + +"Few books of its size contain the result of so much wide thinking, able +and laborious study, or enable the reader to gain a better bird's-eye +view of the latest results of investigations into the religious history +of nations. As Professor Tiele modestly says, 'In this little book are +outlines--pencil sketches, I might say--nothing more.' But there are +some men whose sketches from a thumb-nail are of far more worth than an +enormous canvas covered with the crude painting of others, and it is +easy to see that these pages, full of information, these sentences, cut +and perhaps also dry, short and clear, condense the fruits of long and +thorough research."--_Scotsman._ + + * * * * * + + Four Volumes Ready. Volume V. in the Press. Post 8vo, cloth, + price 10s. 6d. each. + + THE SHAHNAMA OF FIRDAUSI. + + Done into English by + ARTHUR GEORGE WARNER, M.A., AND EDMOND WARNER, B.A. + +February 25th of the present year (1910) is the nine hundredth +anniversary of the completion of the Shahnama. Its author, the Persian +poet Firdausi, spent over thirty laborious years in its composition, +only to experience, when the task had been achieved, a heart-breaking +disappointment well worthy of inclusion in any record of the calamities +of authors. His work has survived the test of time, and by general +consent is accounted to be one of the few great epics of the world. +Geographically and in some other respects it may be said to stand +half-way between the Epics of Europe and those of India. In its own land +it has no peer, while in construction and subject-matter it is unique. +Other Epics centre round some heroic character or incident to which all +else is subservient. In the Shahnama there is no lack either of heroes +or of incidents, but its real hero is the ancient Persian people, and +its theme their whole surviving legendary history from the days of the +First Man to the death of the last Shah in the middle of the seventeenth +century of our Era. It is the glory of the Persian race that they alone +among all nations possess such a record, based as it is on their own +traditions and set forth in the words of their greatest poet. In another +sense, too, the Shahnama is unique. The author of the other great Epics +tell us little or nothing of their own personalities or of their sources +of information. Their works are fairy palaces suspended in mid air; we +see the result, but know not how it was achieved. The author of the +Shahnama takes us into his confidence from the first, so that in reading +it we are let into the secret of epic-making, and can apply the +knowledge thus gained to solve the problem of the construction of its +great congeners. To the student of comparative mythology and folk-lore, +to the lover of historic romance or romantic history, and to all that +are fond of tales of high achievements and the gests of heroes, the +Shahnama is a storehouse of rich and abundant material. To set forth a +complete presentment of it with the needful notes and elucidations is +the object of the present translation, made from two of the best printed +texts of the original--that of Vullers and Landauer, and that of Turner +Macan. + + * * * * * + + Third Edition. Post 8vo, cloth, pp. xxiv.-360, price 10s. 6d. + + THE HISTORY OF INDIAN LITERATURE. + + BY ALBRECHT WEBER. + + Translated from the Second German Edition by JOHN MANN, M.A., + and THEODOR ZACHARIAE, Ph.D., with the sanction of the Author. + +Dr. BUHLER, Inspector of Schools in India, writes:--"When I was +Professor of Oriental Languages in Elphinstone College, I frequently +felt the want of such a work to which I could refer the students." + +Professor COWELL, of Cambridge, writes:--"It will be especially useful +to the students in our Indian colleges and universities. I used to long +for such a book when I was teaching in Calcutta. Hindu students are +intensely interested in the history of Sanskrit literature, and this +volume will supply them with all they want on the subject." + +Professor WHITNEY, Yale College, Newhaven, Conn., U.S.A., writes:--"I +was one of the class to whom the work was originally given in the form +of academic lectures. At their first appearance they were by far the +most learned and able treatment of their subject; and with their recent +additions they still maintain decidedly the same rank." + +"Is perhaps the most comprehensive and lucid survey of Sanskrit +literature extant. The essays contained in the volume were originally +delivered as academic lectures, and at the time of their first +publication were acknowledged to be by far the most learned and +able treatment of the subject. They have now been brought up to +date by the addition of all the most important results of recent +research."--_Times._ + + * * * * * + + Second Edition. Post 8vo, pp. xxxii. and 330, cloth, price 7s. + 6d. + + MASNAVI I MA'NAVI: + + THE SPIRITUAL COUPLETS OF MAULANA JALALU-'D-DIN MUHAMMAD I + RU'MI. + + Translated and Abridged by E. H. WHINFIELD, M.A., + Late of H.M. Bengal Civil Service. + +EXTRACT FROM AUTHOR'S PREFACE. + +This is the book of the Masnavi. It contains the roots of the roots of +the roots of the Faith, and treats of the mysteries of "Union" and +"Certitude." Thus saith the feeble slave, in need of the mercy of God, +whose name be praised, Muhammad, son of Muhammad, son of Husain, of +Balkh, of whom may God accept it,--"I have exerted myself to enlarge +this book of poetry in rhymed couplets, which contains strange and rare +narratives, beautiful sayings and recondite indications; a path for the +devout, and a garden for the pious; short in its expressions, but having +numerous applications." The author goes on to state that he wrote his +book at the instance of Shaikh Hasan, son of Muhammad, "a Chief of the +Gnostics (_'Arif[=i]n_) and a leader of right direction and of sure +knowledge;" and concludes with a prayer that it may prove "a blessing to +those who are possessed of insight, the godly, the spiritual, and the +heavenly-minded, the men of light who keep silence and observe, who are +absent in spirit though present in the body, very kings though clothed +in rags, true nobles among the people, endued with virtues, the lights +of guidance." + + * * * * * + + Post 8vo, cloth, pp. xxxii.-336, price 10s. 6d. + + THE QUATRAINS OF OMAR KHAYYAM. + + The Persian Text with an English Verse Translation. + + BY E. H. WHINFIELD, M.A., + Late of the Bengal Civil Service. + +EXTRACT FROM THE INTRODUCTION. + +Ghias uddin Abul Fath Omar bin Ibrahim al Khayyam was a native of +Nishapur, one of the principal cities of Khorasan. According to the +Preface of the Calcutta MS., he died in 517 A.D., during the reign of +Sultan Sarjar. The date of his birth is nowhere mentioned, but he was +contemporary with Nizam ul Mulk, the celebrated Wazir of the Seljuk +kings, Alp Arslan and Malik Shah. + + This edition contains the Persian test of 500 quatrains based on + a collation of eight authorities, together with English verse + translations. + + * * * * * + + Second Edition, Revised. Post 8vo, cloth, pp. viii.-124, price + 5s. + + THE QUATRAINS OF OMAR KHAYYAM. + + Translated into English verse, + + BY E. H. WHINFIELD, M.A., + Late of the Bengal Civil Service. + + This edition contains 267 of the best quatrains in the larger + edition, carefully revised. + + * * * * * + + Post 8vo, pp. vi.-368, cloth, price 14s. + + MODERN INDIA AND THE INDIANS. + + BEING A SERIES OF IMPRESSIONS, NOTES, AND ESSAYS. + + BY SIR MONIER WILLIAMS, D.C.L., + + Hon. LL.D. of the University of Calcutta, Hon. Member of the + Bombay Asiatic Society, Boden Professor of Sanskrit in the + University of Oxford. + + Fifth Edition, revised and augmented by considerable Additions, + with Illustrations and a Map. + +"In this volume we have the thoughtful impressions of a thoughtful man +on some of the most important questions connected with our Indian +Empire.... An enlightened observant man, travelling among an enlightened +observant people, Professor Monier Williams has brought before the +public in a pleasant form more of the manners and customs of the Queen's +Indian subjects than we ever remember to have seen in any one work. He +not only deserves the thanks of every Englishman for this able +contribution to the study of Modern India--a subject with which we +should be specially familiar--but he deserves the thanks of every +Indian, Parsee or Hindu, Buddhist and Moslem, for his clear exposition +of their manners, their creeds, and their necessities."--_Times._ + + * * * * * + + Post 8vo, pp. xii.-72, cloth, price 5s. + + THE SATAKAS OF BHARTRIHARI. + + Translated from the Sanskrit + + BY THE REV. B. HALE WORTHAM, M.R.A.S., + Rector of Eggesford, North Devon. + +"A very interesting addition to Truebner's Oriental Series."--_Saturday +Review._ + +"Many of the Maxims in the book have a Biblical ring and beauty of +expression."--_St. James' Gazette._ + + * * * * * + + + + +TRANSCRIBER'S NOTES + + +1. Passages in italics are surrounded by _underscores_. + +2. Footnotes have been moved from the middle of a paragraph to the +end of the chapter. + +3. Obvious punctuation errors have been silently corrected. + +4. The original text includes Greek characters. For this text version +these letters have been replaced with transliterations. + +5. The words coup-d'oeil and Oedipus use an oe ligature in the original. + +6. The letters with diacritical marks are enclosed within square braces. + +7. Numbers of the form "9-1/2" represent fractional numbers where whole +number 9 is followed by hyphen and the fraction 1/2. + +8. The following misprints have been corrected: + "similiar" corrected to "similar" (page x) + "savans" corrected to "savants" (page xiv) + "Rasula" corrected to "Raoula" (page xx) + "ntellectual" corrected to "intellectual" (Ch. I, ftn. 1) + "siting" corrected to "sitting" (page 69) + "amuesment" corrected to "amusement" (page 69) + "Guadama" corrected to "Gaudama" (page 75) + "ocurrence" corrected to "occurrence" (Ch. V, ftn. 1) + "substantinl" corrected to "substantial" (page 81) + "undescribable" corrected to "indescribable" (page 100) + "Pathanadi" corrected to "Pathenadi" (page 107) + "Ooodaka" corrected to "Oodaka" (page 113) + "Rathans" corrected to "Rahans" (Ch. VI, ftn. 2) + "succesively" corrected to "successively" (page 121) + "possesssed" corrected to "possessed" (page 132) + "drunkennness" corrected to "drunkenness" (page 136) + "Tsadoumaritz" corrected to "Tsadoomarit" (page 139) + "Rathan" corrected to "Rahan" (page 142) + "Adzatatha" corrected to "Adzatathat" (Ch. VI, ftn. 13) + "perfect on" corrected to "perfection" (Ch. VII, ftn. 3) + "morever" corrected to "moreover" (page 157) + "eft" corrected to "left" (page 162) + "Buddah" corrected to "Buddha" (Ch. VIII, ftn. 9) + "pracittioners" corrected to "practitioners" (Ch. IX, ftn. 1) + "stockof" corrected to "stock of" (Ch. IX, ftn. 1) + "Patzati" corrected to "Patzapati" (page 208) + +9. Other than the corrections listed above, printer's inconsistencies +in spelling, punctuation, hyphenation, and ligature usage have been +retained. + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Life or Legend of Gaudama, by +Right Reverend Paul Ambroise Bigandet + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE LIFE OR LEGEND OF GAUDAMA *** + +***** This file should be named 34578.txt or 34578.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/4/5/7/34578/ + +Produced by Louise Davies, The Universal Digital Library +(http://www.ulib.org) and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |